369 Motor Management Relay
g
GE Industrial Systems
369 Motor Management Relay
Instruction Manual
369 Revision: 2.5x
Manual P/N: 1601-0077-BK (GEK-106288G)
Copyright © 2006 GE Multilin
E83849
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
RE
D
T
GIS ERE
ISO9001:2000
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario, Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222, 1-800-547-8629 (North America)
Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEmultilin.com
I
N
EM
G
GE Multilin
U LT I L
GE Multilin's Quality Management
System is registered to
ISO9001:2000
QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 ORDERING
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.1.6
1.1.7
1.1.8
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
GENERAL OVERVIEW...................................................................................... 1-1
ORDERING........................................................................................................ 1-1
CONTACT INFORMATION................................................................................ 1-2
ACCESSORIES ................................................................................................. 1-2
FIRMWARE HISTORY....................................................................................... 1-2
PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY .......................................................... 1-3
369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY .......................................................................... 1-4
RELAY LABEL DEFINITION.............................................................................. 1-6
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................... 2-1
METERED QUANTITIES ................................................................................... 2-1
PROTECTION FEATURES ............................................................................... 2-2
ADDITIONAL FEATURES ................................................................................. 2-3
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
3. INSTALLATION
INPUTS .............................................................................................................. 2-4
OUTPUTS .......................................................................................................... 2-5
METERING ........................................................................................................ 2-6
COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 2-6
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-7
MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-9
CONTROL ELEMENTS ..................................................................................... 2-9
ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-9
APPROVALS/CERTIFICATION ......................................................................... 2-9
TYPE TEST STANDARDS .............................................................................. 2-10
PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-10
3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
3.1.1
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 3-1
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
369 TERMINAL LIST ......................................................................................... 3-2
269 TO 369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ................................................... 3-3
MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ....................................................... 3-4
MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST....................................................... 3-4
TERMINAL LAYOUT.......................................................................................... 3-5
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11
3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................................ 3-6
TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-7
CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-7
PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS ...................................................................... 3-7
GROUND CURRENT INPUTS .......................................................................... 3-8
ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT .............................................. 3-8
PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS ................................................................. 3-9
BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS ......................................................................... 3-9
RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................... 3-10
DIGITAL INPUTS ............................................................................................. 3-10
ANALOG OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 3-11
REMOTE DISPLAY.......................................................................................... 3-11
OUTPUT RELAYS ........................................................................................... 3-12
RS485 COMMUNICATIONS............................................................................ 3-13
3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)
3.4.1
3.4.2
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ....................................................................... 3-14
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 3-15
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
GE Multilin
PHASE CT INSTALLATION............................................................................. 3-16
5 AMP GROUND CT INSTALLATION ............................................................. 3-17
HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION ............................................... 3-18
369 Motor Management Relay
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. USER INTERFACES
4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-1
LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-1
RS232 PROGRAM PORT ..................................................................................4-1
KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-2
SETPOINT ENTRY.............................................................................................4-2
4.2 ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE
4.2.1
4.2.2
HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ...........................................4-3
INSTALLING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP .............................................................4-3
4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.4
CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS ..................................................4-5
USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE .......................................................4-6
CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS ...........................................4-6
CONNECTING TO THE RELAY.........................................................................4-7
4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
ENGAGING A DEVICE.......................................................................................4-9
ENTERING SETPOINTS ....................................................................................4-9
FILE SUPPORT ................................................................................................4-10
USING SETPOINTS FILES ..............................................................................4-10
4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................4-15
SAVING SETPOINTS TO A FILE .....................................................................4-15
LOADING NEW FIRMWARE............................................................................4-15
4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
TRIGGERED EVENTS .....................................................................................4-17
TRENDING .......................................................................................................4-17
WAVEFORM CAPTURE (TRACE MEMORY)..................................................4-18
PHASORS ........................................................................................................4-20
EVENT RECORDER ........................................................................................4-21
MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................4-22
VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES ............................................................................4-22
4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369
4.7.1
5. SETPOINTS
PLUG AND PLAY EXAMPLE ...........................................................................4-23
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1
SETPOINTS MAIN MENU ..................................................................................5-1
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
SETPOINT ACCESS ..........................................................................................5-4
DISPLAY PREFERENCES.................................................................................5-4
369 COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................................5-5
REAL TIME CLOCK ...........................................................................................5-7
WAVEFORM CAPTURE ....................................................................................5-7
EVENT RECORDS .............................................................................................5-8
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ................................................................................5-8
DEFAULT MESSAGES ......................................................................................5-8
CLEAR/PRESET DATA ......................................................................................5-9
MODIFY OPTIONS...........................................................................................5-10
FACTORY SERVICE ........................................................................................5-10
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................5-11
CT/VT SETUP ..................................................................................................5-11
MONITORING SETUP .....................................................................................5-12
BLOCK FUNCTIONS........................................................................................5-16
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP .................................................................................5-17
CONTROL FUNCTIONS ..................................................................................5-18
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
iv
DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................5-24
THERMAL MODEL ...........................................................................................5-25
OVERLOAD CURVES ......................................................................................5-26
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.4
OVERLOAD ALARM........................................................................................ 5-34
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-35
SHORT CIRCUIT ............................................................................................. 5-35
MECHANICAL JAM ......................................................................................... 5-36
UNDERCURRENT ........................................................................................... 5-37
CURRENT UNBALANCE................................................................................. 5-38
GROUND FAULT............................................................................................. 5-39
5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-41
ACCELERATION TRIP .................................................................................... 5-41
START INHIBITS ............................................................................................. 5-41
BACKSPIN DETECTION ................................................................................. 5-43
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-44
LOCAL RTD PROTECTION ............................................................................ 5-44
REMOTE RTD PROTECTION......................................................................... 5-45
OPEN RTD ALARM ......................................................................................... 5-48
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM................................................................... 5-48
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM .................................................................. 5-48
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.8.6
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-49
UNDERVOLTAGE ........................................................................................... 5-49
OVERVOLTAGE .............................................................................................. 5-50
PHASE REVERSAL......................................................................................... 5-50
UNDERFREQUENCY...................................................................................... 5-51
OVERFREQUENCY ........................................................................................ 5-52
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.9.5
5.9.6
5.9.7
DESCRIPTION................................................................................................. 5-53
LEAD POWER FACTOR ................................................................................. 5-54
LAG POWER FACTOR.................................................................................... 5-54
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ....................................................................... 5-55
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ..................................................................... 5-56
UNDERPOWER ............................................................................................... 5-56
REVERSE POWER ......................................................................................... 5-57
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.10.3
5.10.4
5.10.5
5.10.6
DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 5-58
SPARE SWITCH.............................................................................................. 5-60
EMERGENCY RESTART ................................................................................ 5-60
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH ................................................................................ 5-61
SPEED SWITCH.............................................................................................. 5-61
REMOTE RESET............................................................................................. 5-61
5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
5.11.1
ANALOG OUTPUTS ........................................................................................ 5-62
5.12 S11 369 TESTING
5.12.1
5.12.2
6. ACTUAL VALUES
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS ................................................................................. 5-63
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS .............................................................................. 5-63
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1
ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1
6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
GE Multilin
MOTOR STATUS............................................................................................... 6-3
LAST TRIP DATA .............................................................................................. 6-3
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES................................................................................ 6-4
START BLOCK STATUS ................................................................................... 6-4
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS .................................................................................. 6-5
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS ................................................................................ 6-5
REAL TIME CLOCK........................................................................................... 6-5
FIELDBUS SPECIFICATION STATUS .............................................................. 6-6
369 Motor Management Relay
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
6.3.8
6.3.9
CURRENT METERING ......................................................................................6-7
VOLTAGE METERING .......................................................................................6-7
POWER METERING ..........................................................................................6-8
BACKSPIN METERING......................................................................................6-8
LOCAL RTD........................................................................................................6-9
REMOTE RTD ....................................................................................................6-9
OVERALL STATOR RTD ...................................................................................6-9
DEMAND METERING ......................................................................................6-10
PHASORS ........................................................................................................6-10
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................6-12
MOTOR DATA ..................................................................................................6-12
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS .................................................................................6-13
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS .............................................................................6-13
6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA
6.5.1
6.5.2
TRIP COUNTERS ............................................................................................6-14
MOTOR STATISTICS.......................................................................................6-15
6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD
6.6.1
EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-16
6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION
6.7.1
6.7.2
7. APPLICATIONS
MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-17
FIRMWARE VERSION .....................................................................................6-17
7.1 269-369 COMPARISON
7.1.1
369 AND 269PLUS COMPARISON ...................................................................7-1
7.2 369 FAQS
7.2.1
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQS) ...................................................7-2
7.3 369 DOS AND DONT’S
7.3.1
DOS AND DONT’S .............................................................................................7-5
7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION
7.4.1
7.4.2
CT SPECIFICATION ..........................................................................................7-7
CT SELECTION..................................................................................................7-7
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7.5.1
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ..............................................................................7-9
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.5
7.6.6
7.6.7
7.6.8
7.6.9
7.6.10
7.6.11
7.6.12
8. TESTING
MOTOR STATUS DETECTION........................................................................7-13
SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS....................................................7-14
THERMAL MODEL ...........................................................................................7-15
RTD BIAS FEATURE .......................................................................................7-16
THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION.................................................7-17
START INHIBIT ................................................................................................7-18
TWO-PHASE CT CONFIGURATION ...............................................................7-20
GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS ....................7-21
RTD CIRCUITRY ..............................................................................................7-22
REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION ............................................7-23
TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ......................................................7-24
AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING ...................................................7-24
8.1 TEST SETUP
8.1.1
8.1.2
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................8-1
SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP ..........................................................8-1
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
vi
PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST..............................................................8-2
VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST................................................................8-2
GROUND (1 A / 5 A) ACCURACY TEST ...........................................................8-3
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.2.4
8.2.5
8.2.6
8.2.7
8.2.8
50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST............................................................. 8-3
RTD ACCURACY TEST .................................................................................... 8-4
DIGITAL INPUTS ............................................................................................... 8-5
ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ................................................................... 8-5
OUTPUT RELAYS ............................................................................................. 8-6
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.3.1
8.3.2
8.3.3
8.3.4
9. COMMUNICATIONS
OVERLOAD CURVE TEST ............................................................................... 8-7
POWER MEASUREMENT TEST ...................................................................... 8-7
VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST............................................................... 8-8
SHORT CIRCUIT TEST..................................................................................... 8-8
9.1 OVERVIEW
9.1.1
9.1.2
9.1.3
9.1.4
9.1.5
ELECTRICAL INTERFACE................................................................................ 9-1
PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS ...................................................................... 9-1
DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................... 9-1
MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS ......................................................................... 9-2
MODBUS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS................................................................. 9-2
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
PROFIBUS COMMUNICATION OPTIONS ....................................................... 9-4
369 PROFIBUS-DP PARAMETERIZATION ...................................................... 9-4
369 PROFIBUS-DP CONFIGURATION ............................................................ 9-4
369 PROFIBUS-DP DIAGNOSTICS .................................................................. 9-8
9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3.1
9.3.2
9.3.3
9.3.4
9.3.5
9.3.6
369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 PARAMETERIZATION................................................ 9-11
369 PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION................................................................. 9-11
369 PROFIBUS INPUT DATA ......................................................................... 9-12
369 PROFIBUS OUTPUT DATA ..................................................................... 9-13
369 PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS ...................................................................... 9-13
369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLICAL COMMUNICATION ................................ 9-14
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
9.4.7
9.4.8
9.4.9
9.4.10
9.4.11
DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS .................................................................. 9-15
IDENTITY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 01H) ....................................................... 9-15
MESSAGE ROUTER (CLASS CODE 02H) ..................................................... 9-15
DEVICENET OBJECT (CLASS CODE 03H) ................................................... 9-16
ASSEMBLY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 04H) .................................................... 9-16
DEVICENET CONNECTION OBJECT (CLASS CODE 05H) .......................... 9-18
ACKNOWLEDGE HANDLER OBJECT (CLASS CODE 2BH) ......................... 9-19
I/O DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A0H)........................... 9-19
I/O DATA OUTPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A1H)....................... 9-20
PARAMETER DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE B0H) ......... 9-21
DEVICENET DATA FORMATS ....................................................................... 9-27
9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
9.5.1
9.5.2
9.5.3
9.5.4
9.5.5
9.5.6
9.5.7
9.5.8
DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE .................................................... 9-30
DATA PACKET FORMAT ................................................................................ 9-30
ERROR CHECKING ........................................................................................ 9-30
CRC-16 ALGORITHM...................................................................................... 9-31
TIMING............................................................................................................. 9-31
SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ............................................................ 9-31
ERROR RESPONSES ..................................................................................... 9-32
MODBUS COMMANDS ................................................................................... 9-33
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9.6.1
9.6.2
9.6.3
9.6.4
9.6.5
9.6.6
A. REVISIONS
GE Multilin
MEMORY MAP INFORMATION ...................................................................... 9-34
USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ..................................................... 9-34
EVENT RECORDER........................................................................................ 9-34
WAVEFORM CAPTURE .................................................................................. 9-34
MODBUS MEMORY MAP ............................................................................... 9-35
FORMAT CODES ............................................................................................ 9-87
A.1 CHANGE NOTES
369 Motor Management Relay
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
A.1.1
A.1.2
A.1.3
A.1.4
A.1.5
A.1.6
A.1.7
A.1.8
A.1.9
A.1.10
A.1.11
A.1.12
A.1.13
REVISION HISTORY......................................................................................... A-1
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BK....................................................................... A-1
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BJ ....................................................................... A-1
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BH ...................................................................... A-2
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BG ...................................................................... A-2
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BF ....................................................................... A-2
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BE....................................................................... A-2
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BD ...................................................................... A-2
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BC ...................................................................... A-2
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BB....................................................................... A-3
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BA....................................................................... A-3
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B9 ....................................................................... A-3
MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B8 ....................................................................... A-3
A.2 WARRANTY
A.2.1
WARRANTY INFORMATION ............................................................................ A-4
INDEX
viii
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 ORDERING
1 INTRODUCTION 1.1ORDERING
1.1.1 GENERAL OVERVIEW
The 369 Motor Management Relay is a digital relay that provides protection and monitoring for three phase motors and
their associated mechanical systems. A unique feature of the 369 is its ability to ‘learn’ individual motor parameters and to
adapt itself to each application. Values such as motor inrush current, cooling rates and acceleration time may be used to
improve the 369’s protective capabilities.
The 369 offers optimum motor protection where other relays cannot, by using the FlexCurve™ custom overload curve, or
one of the fifteen standard curves.
The 369 has one RS232 front panel port and three RS485 rear ports. The Modbus RTU protocol is standard to all ports.
Setpoints can be entered via the front keypad or by using the EnerVista 369 Setup software and a computer. Status, actual
values and troubleshooting information are also available via the front panel display or via communications.
As an option, the 369 can individually monitor up to 12 RTDs. These can be from the stator, bearings, ambient or driven
equipment. The type of RTD used is software selectable. Optionally available as an accessory is the remote RTD module
which can be linked to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection.
The optional metering package provides VT inputs for voltage and power elements. It also provides metering of V, kW, kvar,
kVA, PF, Hz, and MWhrs. Three additional user configurable analog outputs are included with this option along with one
analog output included as part of the base unit.
The Back-Spin Detection (B) option enables the 369 to detect the flow reversal of a pump motor and enable timely and safe
motor restarting. 369 options are available when ordering the relay or as upgrades to the relay in the field. Field upgrades
are via an option enabling passcode available from GE Multilin, which is unique to each relay and option.
1.1.2 ORDERING
Select the basic model and the desired features from the selection guide below:
369
6
6
6
6
6
369
|
|
|
|
|
|
Base unit (no RTD)
HI
|
|
|
|
|
50-300 VDC / 40-265 VAC control power
LO
|
|
|
|
|
20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC control power
R
|
|
|
|
Optional 12 RTD inputs (built-in)
0
|
|
|
|
No optional RTD inputs
M
|
|
|
Optional metering package
B
|
|
|
Optional backspin detection (incl. metering)
0
|
|
|
No optional metering or backspin detection
F
|
|
Optional Fiber Optic Port
0
|
|
No optional Fiber Optic Port
E
|
Optional Modbus/TCP protocol interface
P
|
Optional Profibus-DP protocol interface
P1
|
Optional Profibus-DPV1 protocol interface
D
|
Optional DeviceNet protocol interface
0
|
No optional protocol interfaces
H
Harsh environment option
0
No harsh environment option
6
Notes:
One Analog Output is available with the 369 base model. The other three Analog Outputs can be
obtained by purchasing the metering or backspin options.
The control power (HI or LO) must be specified with all orders. If a feature is not required, a 0 must be
placed in the order code. All order codes have 10 digits. The 369 is available in a non-drawout version only.
Examples:
369-HI-R-0-0-0-0
369-LO-0-M-0-0-0
GE Multilin
369 with HI voltage control power and 12 RTD inputs
369 relay with LO voltage control power and metering option
369 Motor Management Relay
1-1
1
1.1 ORDERING
1
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.3 CONTACT INFORMATION
GE Multilin contact information and call center for product support is shown below:
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Telephone: 905-294-6222 or 1-800-547-8629 (North America), +34 94 485 88 00 (Europe)
Fax: 905-201-2098 (North America), +34 94 485 88 45 (Europe)
E-mail: gemultilin@ge.com
Home Page: http://www.GEmultilin.com
1.1.4 ACCESSORIES
EnerVista 369 Setup software: Setup and monitoring software provided free with each relay.
RRTD:
Remote RTD Module. Connects to the 369 via a fibre optic or RS485 connection. Allows remote metering and programming for up to 12 RTDs.
F485:
Communications converter between RS232 and RS485 / fibre optic. Interfaces a PC to the relay.
CT:
50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 750, 1000 (1 A or 5 A secondaries)
HGF:
Ground CTs (50:0.025) used for sensitive earth fault detection on high resistance grounded systems.
515:
Blocking and test module. Provides effective trip blocking and relay isolation.
DEMO:
Metal carry case in which 369 is mounted.
FPC15:
Remote faceplate cable, 15'.
1.1.5 FIRMWARE HISTORY
Table 1–1: FIRMWARE HISTORY (SHEET 1 OF 2)
FIRMWARE REVISION
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
RELEASE DATE
53CMB110.000
Production Release
June 14, 1999
53CMB111.000
Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm
June 24, 1999
53CMB112.000
Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm
July 2, 1999
53CMB120.000
Capability to work with the Remote RTD module
October 15, 1999
53CMB130.000
Improvements to the Remote RTD communications
January 3, 2000
53CMB140.000
Changes to Backspin Detection algorithm and improved RS232 communications
March 27, 2000
53CMB145.000
Minor firmware changes
June 9, 2000
53CMB160.000
Profibus protocol, waveform capture, phasor display, single analog output,
demand power and current, power consumption
October 12, 2000
53CMB161.000
Minor firmware changes
October 19, 2000
53CMB162.000
Minor firmware changes
November 30, 2000
53CMB170.000
Autorestart feature added
February 9, 2001
53CMB180.000
Modbus/TCP feature added
June 15, 2001
53CMB190.000
Number of Event Recorders increased to 250; Hottest Overall RTD value added
November 23, 2001
53CMB201.000
Added Starter Failure, MWhrs as analog output parameter, and Motor Load
Averaging feature.
April 16, 2004
53CMB210.000
Added support for variable frequency drives; minor changes to Modbus TCP.
November 5, 2004
53CMB220.000
Implementation of DeviceNet protocol and starter operation monitor.
April 11, 2005
53CMB230.000
Implemented Profibus DPV1, Force Outputs and Protection Blocking.
September 19, 2005
53CMB240.000
Custom Curve enhancement, increase range from 0 to 32767 to 0 to 65534.
November 21, 2005
1-2
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 ORDERING
Table 1–1: FIRMWARE HISTORY (SHEET 2 OF 2)
FIRMWARE REVISION
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE
RELEASE DATE
53CMB250.000
Implementation of start control relay timer setting for reduced voltage starting,
additional Modbus address added for starts/hour lockout time remaining,
correction to date and time Broadcast command Modbus addresses, fix for
latched resets with multiple local/remote assigned relays, fix for repeated “Motor
Stopped” and “Motor Running” events.
April 28, 2006
1
1.1.6 PC PROGRAM (SOFTWARE) HISTORY
Table 1–2: SOFTWARE HISTORY
PC PROGRAM
REVISION
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
RELEASE DATE
1.10
Production Release
June 14, 1999
1.20
Capability to work with the Remote RTD module
October 15, 1999
1.30
Capability to communicate effectively with version 1.30 firmware
January 3, 2000
1.40
Changes made for new firmware release
March 27, 2000
1.45
Changes made for new firmware release
June 9, 2000
1.60
Profibus protocol, waveform capture, phasor display, single analog output,
demand power and current, power consumption
October 23, 2000
1.70
Changes made for new firmware release
February 9, 2001
1.80
Changes made for new firmware release
June 7, 2001
1.90
Changes made for new firmware release
November 23, 2001
2.00
Changes made for new firmware release
September 9, 2003
3.01
New features and enhancements
August 16, 2004
3.11
Added support for firmware revision 2.1x
November 16, 2004
3.20
Changes made for firmware revision 2.2x
April 13, 2005
3.30
Changes made for firmware revision 2.3x
September 19, 2005
3.40
Changes made for firmware revision 2.4x
November 25, 2005
3.50
Changes made for firmware revision 2.5x
May 15, 2006
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
1-3
1.1 ORDERING
1
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.7 369 FUNCTIONAL SUMMARY
The front view for all 369 models is shown below, along with the rear view showing the Modbus/TCP port and the Profibus
port. The rear view for models with the DeviceNet port is shown in the subsequent figure.
DISPLAY
40 Character alpha-numeric
LCD display for viewing
actual values, causes
of alarms and trips, and
programming setpoints
STATUS INDICATORS
4 LEDs indicate when an
output is activated. When
an LED is lit, the cause of
the output relay operation
will be shown on the display.
SERVICE LED indicates that a
self-diagnostic test failed.
STATUS INDICATORS
LEDs indicate if motor is
backspinning, RRTD is
connected, metering is
enabled and com. status
Rugged, corrosion and
flame retardent case.
HELP KEY
Help key can be pressed at
any time to provide additional
information
KEYPAD
Used to select the display
of actual values, causes of
alarms, causes of trips, fault
diagnosis, and to program
setpoints
COMPUTER INTERFACE
RS232 comm port for connecting to a PC. Use for
downloading setpoints,
monitoring, data collection &
printing reports.
CONTROL POWER
HI: 50-300 VDC/40-265 VAC
LO: 20-60 VDC / 20-48 VAC
4 OUTPUT RELAYS
Programmable alarm and trip
conditions activated by
programmable setpoints,
switch input, remote
communication control
Customer Accessible
Fuse
DIGITAL INPUTS
12 RTD INPUTS ( R )
Field selectable type
PROFIBUS-DP ( P )
PROFIBUS-DPV1 ( P1 )
MODBUS/TCP ( E )
3 x RS485 Ports
3 Independent modbus
channels
1 ANALOG OUTPUT ( BASE UNIT )
3 ANALOG OUTPUTS (M,B)
FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK ( F )
For harsh enviroments and or
hook up to RRTD
BACKSPIN DETECTION ( B )
20mV to 480V RMS
CURRENT INPUTS
3 Phase CT inputs
5A, 1A, taps
VOLTAGE INPUTS ( M )
0-240V wye or delta VT
connections.
GROUND CT INPUTS
5A, 1A and 50:0.25 taps
840702BK.CDR
Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW
1-4
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 ORDERING
1
DeviceNet
Option (D)
840839A1.CDR
Figure 1–2: REAR VIEW (DEVICENET MODEL)
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
1-5
1.1 ORDERING
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1.8 RELAY LABEL DEFINITION
1
1
2
g
3
4
MAXIMUM CONTACT RATING
250 VAC
8A
RESISTIVE
1/4 HP 125 VAC 1/2 HP 250 VAC
OPTIONS
SERIAL No: M53B05000001
12 RTDs:
FIRMWARE: 53CMB220.000
BACKSPIN
INPUT POWER:
FIBER OPTIC PORT
50-300 VDC
40-265 VAC
485mA MAX.
50/60Hz or DC
POLLUTION DEGREE: 2 IP CODE: 50X
PROFIBUS
MOD:
INSULATIVE VOLTAGE: 2
NONE
OVERVOLTAGE CATAGORY: II
8
6
CE
UL
MODEL: 369-HI-R-B-F-P-0
7
5
9
10
11
12
840350A8.CDR
1.
The 369 order code at the time of leaving the factory.
2.
The serial number of the 369.
3.
The firmware installed at the factory. Note that this may no longer be the currently installed firmware as it may have
been upgraded in the field. The current firmware revision can be checked in the actual values section of the 369.
4.
Specifications for the output relay contacts.
5.
Certifications the 369 conforms with or has been approved to.
6.
Factory installed options. These are based on the order code. Note that the 369 may have had options upgraded in the
field. The actual values section of the 369 can be checked to verify this.
7.
Control power ratings for the 369 as ordered. Based on the HI/LO rating from the order code.
8.
Pollution degree.
9.
Overvoltage category.
10. IP code.
11. Modification number for any factory-ordered mods.
12. Insulative voltage rating.
1-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 OVERVIEW
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1OVERVIEW
2.1.1 GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS
Motor protection and management shall be provided by a digital relay. Protective functions shall include:
•
phase overload standard curves (51)
•
starts per hour and time between starts
•
overload by custom programmable curve (51)
•
short circuit (50)
•
I2t modeling (49)
•
ground fault (50G/50N 51G/51N)
•
current unbalance / single phase detection (46)
•
mechanical jam / stall
2
Optional functions shall include:
•
under / overvoltage (27/59)
•
power factor (55)
•
phase reversal (47)
•
•
underpower (37)
stator / bearing overtemperature with twelve (12) independent RTD inputs (49/38)
•
backspin detection
Management functions shall include:
•
statistical data
•
a keypad with 40 character display
•
pre-trip data (last 40 events)
•
flash memory
•
ability to learn, display and integrate critical parameters to maximize motor protection
The relay shall be capable of displaying important metering functions, including phase voltages, kilowatts, kvars, power factor, frequency and MWhr. In addition, undervoltage and low power factor alarm and trip levels shall be field programmable.
The communications interface shall include one front RS232 port and three independent rear RS485 ports with supporting
PC software, thus allowing easy setpoint programming, local retrieval of information and flexibility in communication with
SCADA and engineering workstations.
2.1.2 METERED QUANTITIES
METERED QUANTITY
UNITS
Phase Currents and Current Demand
Amps
Motor Load
× FLA
Unbalance Current
Ground Current
%
Amps
Input Switch Status
Open / Closed
Relay Output Status
(De) Energized
RTD Temperature
OPTION
°C or °F
R
Backspin Frequency
Hz
B
Phase/Line Voltages
Volts
M
Frequency
Power Factor
Hz
M
lead / lag
M
Real Power and Real Power Demand
Watts
M
Reactive Power and Reactive Power Demand
Vars
M
VA
M
Apparent Power and Apparent Power Demand
Real Power Consumption
Reactive Power Consumption/Generation
GE Multilin
MWhrs
M
±Mvarhrs
M
369 Motor Management Relay
2-1
2.1 OVERVIEW
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1.3 PROTECTION FEATURES
ANSI/IEEE
DEVICE
2
PROTECTION FEATURES
OPTION
14
Speed Switch
27
Undervoltage
M
37
Undercurrent / Underpower
/M
38
Bearing RTD
46
Current Unbalance
47
Voltage Phase Reversal
49
Stator RTD
50
Short Circuit & Backup
50G/51G
R or RRTD
M
R or RRTD
Ground Fault & Ground Fault Backup
51
Overload
55
Power Factor
M
59
Overvoltage
M
66
Starts per Hour/Time Between Starts
74
Alarm
81
Over/Under Frequency
86
Lockout
87
Differential Switch
TRIP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ALARM
BLOCK
START
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
M
•
•
•
•
General Switch
Reactive Power
M
•
•
•
Thermal Capacity
•
•
•
•
•
Start Inhibit (thermal capacity available)
Restart Block (Backspin Timer)
Mechanical Jam
Acceleration Timer
Ambient RTD
R or RRTD
Short/Low temp RTD
R or RRTD
Broken/Open RTD
R or RRTD
Loss of RRTD Communications
RRTD
Trip Counter
Self Test/Service
Backspin Detection
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
B
Current Demand
kW Demand
M
kvar Demand
M
kVA Demand
M
Starter Failure
Reverse Power
2-2
•
M
369 Motor Management Relay
•
•
•
•
•
•
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 OVERVIEW
2.1.4 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FEATURE
OPTION
Modbus/TCP protocol Ethernet interface
E
Profibus-DP rear communication port
P
Profibus-DPV1 rear communication port
P1
DeviceNet protocol interface
D
2
User Definable Baud Rate (1200-19200)
Flash Memory for easy firmware updates
Front RS232 communication port
Rear RS485 communication port
Rear fiber optic port
F
RTD type is user definable
R or RRTD
4 User Definable Analog Outputs
(0 to 1 mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA)
M
Windows based PC program for setting up
and monitoring
BACKUP
52
50 50G
OPTIONAL METERING (M)
BUS
V
METERING
V, W, Var, VA, PF, Hz
V
27
47
55
4 ISOLATED
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
59
BREAKER
OR FUSED
CONTACTOR
74
50
3
51
37
66
METERING
A, Celsius
46
START
AMBIENT AIR
51G 50G
14
SPEED DEVICE
INPUTS
14
86
RTDs
87
DIFFERENTIAL
RELAY CONTACTS
RS232
87
RS485
RS485
RS485
BEARING
STATOR
49
38
AMBIENT
STATOR
BEARING
AMBIENT
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
840701B1.CDR
2-3
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONSSpecifications are subject to change without notice.
2.2.1 INPUTS
2
CONTROL POWER
GROUND CURRENT INPUT (GF CT)
LO range:
DC: 20 to 60 V DC
AC: 20 to 48 V AC at 50/60 Hz
CT Input (rated):
1 A/5 A secondary and 50:0.025
CT Primary:
1 to 5000 A (1 A/5 A)
DC: 50 to 300 V DC
AC: 40 to 265 V AC at 50/60 Hz
Range:
0.1 to 1.0 × CT primary (1 A/5 A)
0.05 to 16.0 A (50:0.025)
Power:
nominal: 20 VA; maximum: 65 VA
Full Scale:
Holdup:
non-failsafe trip: 200 ms; failsafe trip: 100 ms
1.0 × CT primary (1 A/5 A)
25 A (50:0.025)
HI range:
Frequency:
20 to 100 Hz
T 3.15 A H 250 V (5 × 20 mm)
Conversion:
True RMS 1.04ms/sample
Timelag high breaking capacity
Accuracy at 50/60 Hz:
for 1 A/5 A:
±1.0% of full scale (1 A/5 A)
for 50:0.025
±0.07 A at <1 A
±0.20 A at <16 A
FUSE
PHASE CURRENT INPUTS (CT)
CT input (rated):
1 A and 5 A secondary
CT primary:
1 to 5000 A
Range:
for 50/60 Hz nominal frequency: 0.05 to 20 × CT primary amps
for variable frequency: 0.1 to 20 × CT primary amps
Full Scale:
20 × CT primary amps or 65535 A maximum
Frequency:
20 to 100 Hz
Conversion:
True RMS, 1.04 ms/sample
Accuracy:
at ≤ 2 × CT:
at > 2 × CT:
GROUND CT BURDEN
±0.5% of 2 × CT for 50/60 Hz nominal freq.
±1.0% of 2 × CT for variable frequency (for
sinusoidal waveforms)
±1.0% of 20 × CT for 50/60 Hz nominal freq.
±3.0% of 12 × CT or less for variable frequency (for sinusoidal waveforms)
GROUND CT
INPUT (A)
INPUT (A)
1A
BURDEN
1
5
0.04
0.036
0.78
0.031
20
6.79
0.017
5
0.07
0.003
25
1.72
0.003
25
0.003
0.24
384
0.03
0.1
2.61
261
0.5
37.5
150
0.03
0.64
1
5
100
(Ω)
0.03
50:0.025
20
11.7
0.03
5
0.07
0.003
GROUND CT CURRENT WITHSTAND
25
1.71
0.003
GROUND CT
100
31
0.003
5A
PHASE CT CURRENT WITHSTAND
PHASE CT
WITHSTAND TIME
1s
2s
continuous
1A
100 × CT
40 × CT
3 × CT
5A
100 × CT
40 × CT
3 × CT
DIGITAL / SWITCH INPUTS
(Ω)
0.025
VA
1A
BURDEN
VA
5A
PHASE CT BURDEN
PHASE CT
Accuracy at variable frequency:
for 1 A tap:
±1.5% for 40 to 100 Hz
±2.5% for 20 to 39 Hz
for 5 A tap:
±2% for 40 to 100 Hz
±3% for 20 to 39 Hz
for 50:0.025:
±0.2 A at <1 A
±0.6 A at <16 A
WITHSTAND TIME
1s
2s
continuous
1A
100 × CT
40 × CT
3 × CT
5A
100 × CT
40 × CT
3 × CT
10 A
5A
150 mA
50:0.025
PHASE/LINE VOLTAGE INPUT (VT) (Option M)
VT ratio:
1.00 to 240.00:1 in steps of 0.01
VT secondary:
240 V AC (full scale)
6 optically isolated
Range:
0.05 to 1.00 × full scale
Input type:
Dry Contact (< 800 Ω)
Frequency:
20 to 100 Hz
Function:
Programmable
Conversion:
True RMS 1.04 ms/sample
Accuracy:
±2.5% of full scale for ≤ 200 V at 20 to 39 Hz
±1% of full scale for 12 to 240 V at > 40 Hz
Inputs:
2-4
Burden:
>200 kΩ
Max. continuous:
280 V AC
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BSD INPUTS (Option B)
RTD INPUTS (Option R)
Frequency:
Wire Type:
3 wire
Sensor Type:
100 Ω platinum (DIN 43760), 100 Ω nickel,
120 Ω nickel, 10 Ω copper
1 to 120 Hz
Dynamic BSD range: 20 mV to 480 V RMS
Accuracy:
±0.02 Hz
Burden:
>200 kΩ
RTD sensing current: 3 mA
Range:
–40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
Accuracy:
±2°C or ±4°F
Lead resistance:
25 Ω max. per lead for Pt and Ni type;
3 Ω max. per lead for Cu type
Isolation:
36 Vpk
2
2.2.2 OUTPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
ANALOG OUTPUTS (Option M)
PROGRAMMABLE
OUTPUT
0 to 1 mA
0 to 20 mA
4 to 20 mA
MAX LOAD
2400 Ω
600 Ω
600 Ω
MAX OUTPUT
1.01 mA
20.2 mA
20.2 mA
Accuracy:
±1% of full scale
Isolation:
fully isolated active source
RESISTIVE LOAD INDUCTIVE LOAD
(pf = 1)
(pf = 0.4)(L/R – 7ms)
RATED LOAD
8 A at 250 V AC
8 A at 30 V DC
CARRY CURRENT
MAX SWITCHING
CAPACITY
MAX SWITCHING V
MAX SWITCHING I
OPERATE TIME
CONTACT MATERIAL
3.5 A at 250 V AC
3.5 A at 30 V DC
8A
2000 VA
240 W
875 VA
170 W
380 V AC; 125 V DC
8A
3.5 A
<10 ms (5 ms typical)
silver alloy
NOTE
This equipment is suitable for use in Class 1, Div 2,
Groups A, B, C, D or Non-Hazardous Locations only if
MOD502 is ordered.
NOTE
Hazardous Location – Class 1, Div 2 output rating
applies if MOD502 is ordered: 240 V, 3 A max, as per
UL1604.
Explosion Hazard – Substitution of components may
impair suitability for Class 1, Div 2.
WARNING
WARNING
GE Multilin
Explosion Hazard – Do not disconnect equipment
unless power has been switched off or the area is
known to be Non-Hazardous.
369 Motor Management Relay
2-5
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2.3 METERING
POWER METERING (OPTION M)
PARAMETER
2
ACCURACY RESOLUTION
(FULL SCALE)
EVENT RECORD
RANGE
kW
±2%
1 kW
±32000
kvar
±2%
1 kvar
±32000
kVA
±2%
1 kVA
0 to 65000
kWh
±2%
1 kWh
0 to 999
MWh
±2%
1 MWh
0 to 65535
±kvarh
±2%
1 kvarh
0 to 999
±Mvarh
±2%
1 Mvarh
0 to 65535
Power Factor
±1%
0.01
–0.99 to 1.00
20.00 to 100.00
±0.02 Hz
0.01 Hz
kW Demand
±2%
1 kW
0 to 32000
kvar Demand
±2%
1 kvar
0 to 32000
kVA Demand
±2%
1 kVA
0 to 65000
Amp Demand
±2%
1A
0 to 65535
Frequency
Capacity:
last 250 events
Triggers:
trip, inhibit, power fail, alarms, self test,
waveform capture
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
Length:
3 buffers containing 16 cycles of all current
and voltage channels
Trigger position:
1 to 100% pre-trip to post-trip
Trigger:
trip, manually via communications or digital
input
2.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS
FRONT PORT
FIBER OPTIC PORT (Option F)
Type:
RS232, non-isolated
Optional use:
Baud rate:
4800 to 19200
Baud rate:
1200 to 19200
Protocol:
Modbus® RTU
Protocol:
Modbus® RTU
BACK PORTS (3)
Type:
RS485
Baud rate:
1200 to 19200
Protocol:
RTD remote module hookup
Fiber sizes:
50/125, 62.5/125, 100/140, and 200 μm
Emitter fiber type:
820 nm LED, multimode
Link power budget:
Transmit power: –20 dBm
Received sensitivity: –30 dBm
Power budget:
10 dB
®
Modbus RTU
36V isolation (together)
PROFIBUS (Options P and P1)
Maximum optical input power: –7.6 dBm
Type:
RS485
Typical link distance: 1.65 km
Baud rate:
1200 baud to 12 Mbaud
Protocol:
Profibus-DP
Profibus-DPV1
NOTE
Connector loss: 2 dB
Fiber loss: 3 dB/km
Splice loss: One splice every 2 km at 0.05 dB loss/splice
System margin: 3 dB additional loss added to calculations
to compensate for all other losses
MODBUS/TCP ETHERNET (Option E)
Connector type:
RJ45 adaptor
Protocol:
Modbus/TCP
Typical link distance is based upon the following assumptions for system loss. As actual losses vary between
installations, the distance covered will vary.
DEVICENET (Option D)
DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™
Connector type:
5-pin linear DeviceNet plug (phoenix type)
Baud rate:
125, 250, and 500 kbps
Protocol:
DeviceNet
2-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.5 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
51 OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL
50G/51G 50N/51N GROUND FAULT
Curve Shape:
1 to 15 standard, custom
Pickup Level:
Curve Biasing:
unbalance, temperature, hot/cold ratio,
cool time constants
Pickup Accuracy:
as per ground current inputs
Pickup Level:
1.01 to 1.25 × FLA
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Pickup Accuracy:
as per phase current inputs
Time Delay:
0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Backup Delay:
0.01 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Timing Accuracy:
±100 ms or ±2% of total trip time
Timing Accuracy:
+50 ms for delays <50 ms
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM
0.10 to 1.00 × CT for 1 A/5 A CT
0.25 to 25.00 A for 50:0.025 CT
Pickup Level:
1 to 100% TC in steps of 1
ACCELERATION TRIP
Pickup Accuracy:
±2%
Pickup Level:
motor start condition
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Dropout Level:
motor run, trip or stop condition
Timing Accuracy:
±100 ms
Time Delay:
1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1
Timing Accuracy:
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total time
OVERLOAD ALARM
Pickup Level:
1.01 to 1.50 × FLA in steps of 0.01
38/49 RTD and RRTD PROTECTION
Pickup Accuracy:
as per phase current inputs
Pickup Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Pickup Accuracy:
±2°C or ±4°F
Time Delay:
0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup above 80°C
Timing Accuracy:
±100 ms or ±2% of total trip time
Time Delay:
<5 s
Dropout Level:
1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F
OPEN RTD ALARM
50 SHORT CIRCUIT
Pickup Level:
2.0 to 20.0 × CT in steps of 0.1
Pickup Level:
detection of an open RTD
Pickup Accuracy:
as per phase current inputs
Pickup Accuracy:
>1000 Ω
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Time Delay:
0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Time Delay:
<5 s
Backup Delay:
0.10 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
Timing Accuracy:
+50 ms for delays <50 ms
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Pickup Level:
<–40°C or –40°F
Pickup Accuracy:
±2°C or ±4°F
MECHANICAL JAM
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Pickup Level:
1.01 to 6.00 × FLA in steps of 0.01
Time Delay:
<5 s
Pickup Accuracy:
as per phase current inputs
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
Time Delay:
0.5 to 125.0 s in steps of 0.5
Timing Accuracy:
±250 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
37 UNDERCURRENT
Pickup Level:
no communication
Time Delay:
2 to 5 s
27 UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup Level:
0.50 to 0.99 × rated in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:
0.10 to 0.99 × FLA in steps of 0.01
Pickup Accuracy:
as per phase voltage inputs
Pickup Accuracy:
as per phase current inputs
Dropout Level:
102 to 104% of pickup
Dropout Level:
102 to 104% of pickup
Time Delay:
0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Time Delay:
1 to 255 s in steps of 1
Start Delay:
separate level for start conditions
Start Delay:
0 to 15000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
Timing Accuracy:
±500 ms or ±0.5% of total time
+75 ms for delays <50 ms
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
46 UNBALANCE
59 OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup Level:
4 to 30% in steps of 1
Pickup Level:
Pickup Accuracy:
±2%
Pickup Accuracy:
as per phase voltage inputs
Dropout Level:
1 to 2% below pickup
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Time Delay:
1 to 255 s in steps of 1
Time Delay:
0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Start Delay:
0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Timing Accuracy:
±500 ms or ±0.5% of total time
47 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL
GE Multilin
2
1.01 to 1.25 × rated in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:
phase reversal detected
Time Delay:
500 to 700 ms
369 Motor Management Relay
2-7
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
81 UNDERFREQUENCY
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
Pickup Level:
20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:
1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
Pickup Accuracy:
±0.02 Hz
Pickup Accuracy:
±2%
Dropout Level:
0.05 Hz
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Time Delay:
0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Time Delay:
0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Start Delay:
0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Start Delay:
0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Timing Accuracy:
±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
81 OVERFREQUENCY
37 UNDERPOWER
Pickup Level:
20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:
1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
Pickup Accuracy:
±0.02 Hz
Pickup Accuracy:
±2%
Dropout Level:
0.05 Hz
Dropout Level:
102 to 104% of pickup
Time Delay:
0.0-255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Time Delay:
0.5 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.5
Start Delay:
0-5000 s in steps of 1
Start Delay:
0 to 15000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
±100 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Timing Accuracy:
±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
55 LEAD POWER FACTOR
REVERSE POWER
Pickup Level:
0.99 to 0.05 in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:
1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
Pickup Accuracy:
±0.02
Pickup Accuracy:
±2%
Dropout Level:
0.01 of pickup
Dropout Level:
102 to 104% of pickup
Time Delay:
0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Time Delay:
0.5 to 30.0 s in steps of 0.5
Start Delay:
0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Start Delay:
0 to 50000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Timing Accuracy:
±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
55 LAG POWER FACTOR
87 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
Pickup Level:
0.99 to 0.05 in steps of 0.01
Time Delay:
Pickup Accuracy:
±0.02
Dropout Level:
0.01 of pickup
14 SPEED SWITCH
Time Delay:
0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Start Delay:
0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
<200 ms
Time Delay:
0.5 to 100.0 s in steps of 0.5
Timing Accuracy:
±200 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
GENERAL SWITCH
Time Delay:
0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
Start Delay:
0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Pickup Level:
1 to 25000 in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
±200 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
Pickup Accuracy:
±2%
Dropout Level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Time Delay:
0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Start Delay:
0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Timing Accuracy:
±300 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
2-8
DIGITAL COUNTER
Pickup:
on count equaling level
Time Delay:
<200 ms
BACKSPIN DETECTION
Dynamic BSD:
20 mV to 480 V RMS
Pickup Level:
3 to 300 Hz in steps of 1
Dropout Level:
2 to 30 Hz in steps or 1
Level Accuracy:
±0.02 Hz
Timing Accuracy:
±500 ms or ±0.5% of total trip time
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.6 MONITORING ELEMENTS
STARTER FAILURE
kvar DEMAND ALARM
Pickup level:
motor run condition when tripped
Demand period:
5 to 90 min. in steps of 1
Dropout level:
motor stopped condition
Pickup level:
1 to 50000 kvar in steps of 1
Time delay:
10 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
Pickup accuracy:
±2%
Timing accuracy:
±100 ms
Dropout level:
96 to 98% of pickup
CURRENT DEMAND ALARM
Time delay:
<2 min.
Demand period:
5 to 90 min. in steps of 1
kVA DEMAND ALARM
Pickup level:
0 to 65000 A in steps of 1
Demand period:
Pickup accuracy:
as per phase current inputs
Pickup level:
1 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1
Dropout level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Pickup accuracy:
±2%
Time delay:
<2 min.
Dropout level:
96 to 98% of pickup
kW DEMAND ALARM
Time delay:
<2 min.
Demand period:
5 to 90 min. in steps of 1
TRIP COUNTER
Pickup level:
1 to 50000 kW in steps of 1
Pickup:
on count equaling level
Pickup accuracy:
±2%
Time delay:
<200 ms
Dropout level:
96 to 98% of pickup
Time delay:
<2 min.
2
5 to 90 min in steps of 1
2.2.7 CONTROL ELEMENTS
REDUCED VOLTAGE START
Transition Level:
25 to 300% FLA in steps of 1
Transition Time:
1 to 250 sec. in steps of 1
Transition Control: Current, Timer, Current and Timer
2.2.8 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
DUST/MOISTURE
Operating Range:
–40°C to +60°C
IP50
Storage Range:
–40°C to +80°C
VENTILATION
NOTE: For 369 units with the Profibus, Modbus/TCP, or DeviceNet
option the operating and storage ranges are as follows:
Operating Range:
+5°C to +60°C
No special ventilation required as long as ambient temperature
remains within specifications. Ventilation may be required in enclosures exposed to direct sunlight.
Storage Range:
+5°C to +80°C
OVERVOLTAGE CATEGORY II
HUMIDITY
CLEANING
Up to 95% non condensing
May be cleaned with a damp cloth.
The 369 must be powered up at least once per year to prevent deterioration of electrolytic capacitors.
NOTE
2.2.9 APPROVALS/CERTIFICATION
ISO:
Designed and manufactured to an ISO9001
registered process.
UL:
E83849 UL listed for the USA and Canada
CE:
Conforms to EN 55011/CISPR 11, EN500822, IEC 947-1, 1010-1
DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
2-9
2.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2.10 TYPE TEST STANDARDS
2
SURGE WITHSTAND CAPABILITY
RFI
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Oscillatory (2.5 kV/1 MHz)
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2, 35 V/m
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 Fast Rise (5 kV/10 ns)
EN 61000-4-3 10V/m
IEC / EN 61000-4-4, Level 4
CONDUCTED IMMUNITY:
INSULATION RESISTANCE
IEC 1000-4-6
IEC / EN 60255-5
IEC 60255-22-6
IMPULSE TEST
CONDUCTED/RADIATED EMISSIONS
IEC / EN 60255-5
EN 55011 (IEC CISPR 11)
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH:
TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY WITH ACCURACY
ANSI/IEEE C37.90
ANSI/IEEE C37.90
IEC / EN 60255-5
IEC 60255-6
CSA C22.2 No.14
IEC 60068-2-38 Part 2
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
VIBRATION
EN 61000-4-2, Level 2
IEC 60255-21-1 Class 1
IEC 60255-22-2 Level 2
IEC 60255-21-2 Class 1
SURGE IMMUNITY
VOLTAGE DEVIATION
IEC 1000-4-5, EN 61000-4-5
IEC 1000-4-11 / EN 61000-4-11
IEC 60255-22-5
MAGNETIC FIELD IMMUNITY
CURRENT WITHSTAND
IEC 1000-4-8 / EN61000-4-8
ANSI/IEEE C37.90
IEC 60255-6
2.2.11 PRODUCTION TESTS
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
CALIBRATION AND FUNCTIONALITY
All high voltage inputs at 2 kV AC for 1 minute
100% hardware functionality tested
BURN IN
100% calibration of all metered quantities
8 hours at 60°C sampling plan
2-10
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION 3.1MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
3.1.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The 369 is contained in a compact plastic housing with the keypad, display, communication port, and indicators/targets on
the front panel. The unit should be positioned so the display and keypad are accessible. To mount the relay, make cutout
and drill mounting holes as shown below. Mounting hardware (bolts and washers) is provided with the relay. Although the
relay is internally shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from high current conductors or sources of strong magnetic fields.
3
Figure 3–1: PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS
Figure 3–2: SPLIT MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-1
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.2TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3
TERMINAL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
3-2
3.2.1 369 TERMINAL LIST
WIRING CONNECTION
RTD1 +
RTD1 –
RTD1 COMPENSATION
RTD1 SHIELD
RTD2 +
RTD2 –
RTD2 COMPENSATION
RTD2 SHIELD
RTD3 +
RTD3 –
RTD3 COMPENSATION
RTD3 SHIELD
RTD4 +
RTD4 –
RTD4 COMPENSATION
RTD4 SHIELD
RTD5 +
RTD5 –
RTD5 COMPENSATION
RTD5 SHIELD
RTD6 +
RTD6 –
RTD6 COMPENSATION
RTD6 SHIELD
RTD7 +
RTD7 –
RTD7 COMPENSATION
RTD7 SHIELD
RTD8 +
RTD8 –
RTD8 COMPENSATION
RTD8 SHIELD
RTD9 +
RTD9 –
RTD9 COMPENSATION
RTD9 SHIELD
RTD10 +
RTD10 –
RTD10 COMPENSATION
RTD10 SHIELD
RTD11 +
RTD11 –
RTD11 COMPENSATION
RTD11 SHIELD
RTD12 +
RTD12 –
RTD12 COMPENSATION
RTD12 SHIELD
SPARE SW
SPARE SW COMMON
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COMMON
SPEED SW
SPEED SW COMMON
ACCESS SW
ACCESS SW COMMON
TERMINAL
59
60
61
62
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
369 Motor Management Relay
WIRING CONNECTION
EMERGENCY RESTART SW
EMERGENCY RESTART SW COMMON
EXTERNAL RESET SW
EXTERNAL RESET SW COMMON
COMM1 RS485 +
COMM1 RS485 –
COMM1 SHIELD
COMM2 RS485 +
COMM2 RS485 –
COMM2 SHIELD
COMM3 RS485 +
COMM3 RS485 –
COMM3 SHIELD
ANALOG OUT 1
ANALOG OUT 2
ANALOG OUT 3
ANALOG OUT 4
ANALOG COM
ANALOG SHIELD
BACKSPIN VOLTAGE
BACKSPIN NEUTRAL
PHASE A CURRENT 5A
PHASE A CURRENT 1A
PHASE A COMMON
PHASE B CURRENT 5A
PHASE B CURRENT 1A
PHASE B COMMON
PHASE C CURRENT 5A
PHASE C CURRENT 1A
PHASE C COMMON
NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A
NEUT/GND CURRENT 1A
NEUT/GND CURRENT 5A
NEUT/GND COMMON
PHASE A VOLTAGE
PHASE A NEUTRAL
PHASE B VOLTAGE
PHASE B NEUTRAL
PHASE C VOLTAGE
PHASE C NEUTRAL
TRIP NC
TRIP COMMON
TRIP NO
ALARM NC
ALARM COMMON
ALARM NO
AUX1 NC
AUX1 COMMON
AUX1 NO
AUX2 NC
AUX2 COMMON
AUX2 NO
POWER FILTER GROUND
POWER LINE
POWER NEUTRAL
POWER SAFETY
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3.2.2 269 TO 369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
269
369
269
WIRING CONNECTION
1
WIRING CONNECTION
RTD1 +
1
50
SPEED SW
55
2
RTD1 COMPENSATION
3
51
SPEED SW COMMON
56
3
RTD1 –
2
52
ACCESS SW
57
4
RTD1 SHIELD
4
53
ACCESS SW COMMON
58
5
RTD2 +
5
54
EMERGENCY RESTART SW
59
6
RTD2 COMPENSATION
7
55
EMERGENCY RESTART SW COM
60
7
RTD2 –
6
56
EXTERNAL RESET SW
61
8
RTD2 SHIELD
8
57
EXTERNAL RESET SW COMMON
62
9
RTD3 +
9
47
COMM1 RS485 +
71
10
RTD3 COMPENSATION
11
46
COMM1 RS485 –
72
73
369
11
RTD3 –
10
88
COMM1 SHIELD
12
RTD3 SHIELD
12
59
ANALOG OUT 1
80
71
RTD4 +
13
58
ANALOG COMMON
84
70
RTD4 COMPENSATION
15
83
PHASE A CURRENT 1A
93
69
RTD4 –
14
82
PHASE A COMMON
94
68
RTD4 SHIELD
16
81
PHASE A CURRENT 5A
92
67
RTD5 +
17
80
PHASE B CURRENT 1A
96
66
RTD5 COMPENSATION
19
79
PHASE B COMMON
97
65
RTD5 –
18
78
PHASE B CURRENT 5A
95
64
RTD5 SHIELD
20
77
PHASE C CURRENT 1A
99
63
RTD6 +
21
76
PHASE C COMMON
100
62
RTD6 COMPENSATION
23
75
PHASE C CURRENT 5A
98
61
RTD6 –
22
73
NEUTRAL/GROUND COMMON
104
60
RTD6 SHIELD
24
72
NEUTRAL/GROUND CURRENT 5A
103
13
RTD7 +
25
74
NEUT/GND CURRENT 50:0.025A
101
14
RTD7 COMPENSATION
27
29
TRIP NC
111
15
RTD7 –
26
30
TRIP COMMON
112
16
RTD7 SHIELD
28
31
TRIP NO
113
17
RTD8 +
29
32
ALARM NC
114
18
RTD8 COMPENSATION
31
33
ALARM COMMON
115
19
RTD8 –
30
34
ALARM NO
116
20
RTD8 SHIELD
32
35
AUX1 NC
117
21
RTD9 +
33
36
AUX1 COMMON
118
22
RTD9 COMPENSATION
35
37
AUX1 NO
119
23
RTD9 –
34
38
AUX2 NC
120
24
RTD9 SHIELD
36
39
AUX2 COMMON
121
25
RTD10 +
37
40
AUX2 NO
122
26
RTD10 COMPENSATION
39
42
POWER FILTER GROUND
123
27
RTD10 –
38
41
POWER LINE
124
28
RTD10 SHIELD
40
43
POWER NEUTRAL
125
44
SPARE SW
51
Terminals not available on the 369
45
SPARE SW COMMON
52
84
MTM B+
N/A
48
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW
53
85
MTM A–
N/A
49
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT SW COMMON
54
GE Multilin
3
369 Motor Management Relay
3-3
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.2.3 MTM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
WIRING CONNECTION
369
MTM
1
POWER FILTER GROUND
123
19
ANALOG OUT1 COM
84
2
PHASE A VOLTAGE
105
20
ANALOG OUT 2
81
3
PHASE B VOLTAGE
107
21
ANALOG OUT 2 COM
84
4
PHASE B VOLTAGE
107
22
ANALOG OUT 3
82
5
PHASE C VOLTAGE
109
23
ANALOG OUT 3 COM
84
6
PHASE A COM
94
24
ANALOG OUT 4
83
7
PHASE A CURRENT 5A
92
25
ANALOG OUT 4 COM
84
8
PHASE A CURRENT 1A
93
26
ANALOG SHIELD
85
9
PHASE B COM
97
27
ALARM NC
114
10
PHASE B CURRENT 5A
95
28
ALARM COM
115
11
PHASE B CURRENT 1A
96
29
ALARM NO
116
12
PHASE C COM
100
31
SPARE SW
51
13
PHASE C CURRENT 5A
98
32
SPARE SW COM
52
14
PHASE C CURRENT 1A
99
34
POWER LINE
124
15
COMM1 RS485 +
71
35
POWER NEUTRAL
125
16
COMM1 RS485 –
72
17
COMM1 SHIELD
73
30
PULSE OUTPUT (P/O)
N/A
18
ANALOG OUT 1
80
33
SW.B
N/A
MTM
3
WIRING CONNECTION
369
Terminals not available on the 369:
3.2.4 MPM-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST
MPM
WIRING CONNECTION
369
MPM
WIRING CONNECTION
369
PHASE A VOLTAGE
105
17
PHASE C COM
100
2
PHASE B VOLTAGE
107
28
ANALOG OUT 1
80
3
PHASE C VOLTAGE
109
27
ANALOG OUT 2
81
4
PHASE NEUTRAL
108
26
ANALOG OUT 3
82
5
POWER FILTER GROUND
123
25
ANALOG OUT 4
83
6
POWER SAFETY
126
24
ANALOG COM
84
7
POWER NEUTRAL
125
21
ANALOG SHIELD
85
8
POWER LINE
124
43
ALARM NC
114
9
PHASE A CURRENT 5A
92
44
ALARM COM
115
10
PHASE A CURRENT 1A
93
45
ALARM NO
116
11
PHASE A COM
94
46
COMM1 SHIELD
73
12
PHASE B CURRENT 5A
95
47
COMM1 RS485 –
72
13
PHASE B CURRENT 1A
96
48
COMM1 RS485 +
71
14
PHASE B COM
97
15
PHASE C CURRENT 5A
98
31
SWITCH INPUT 1
N/A
16
PHASE C CURRENT 1A
99
32
SWITCH INPUT 2
N/A
33
SWITCH COM
N/A
1
3-4
Terminals not available on the 369
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.2 TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION
3.2.5 TERMINAL LAYOUT
3
111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126
35
48
36
46
34
33
31
29
44
32
42
30
51
52
45
54
43
58
39
38
26
25
60
37
7
22
10
3
23
21
20
8
18
6
5
59
61
Digital Inputs
24
12
9
55
57
62
RTD
11
53
56
41
40
28
27
47
19
17
16
4
15
14
2
1
13
91
93
95
97
99
90
92
94
96
98
100
101
103
105
106
108
110
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
Comm
Analog
Output
Spare
RTD
102
104
107
109
840720B3.CDR
Figure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-5
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.3ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.1 TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
HGF-CT
(5 Amp CT)
A
C(B)
A
B(C)
B
MOTOR
C
Twisted
Pair
92
93
94
VA VN VB VN VC VN
5A
1A COM 5A
Phase A
VOLTAGE INPUTS
95
PUMP
BEARING 1
PUMP
BEARING 2
PUMP
CASE
AMBIENT
369
1
TXD 2
RXD 3
4
SGND 5
6
7
8
9
9 PIN
CONNECTOR
CONTROL
POWER
OUTPUT RELAYS
RTD5
SPARE
shld.
Com
RTD6
shld.
Com
RTD7
DIFFERENTIAL
RELAY
SPEED
SWITCH
ACCESS
SWITCH
EMERGENCY
RESTART
EXTERNAL
RESET
shld.
Com
RTD8
1
shld.
Com
RTD9
2
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
MOTOR
BEARING 2
AUX. 1
AUX. 2
DIGITAL INPUTS
MOTOR
BEARING 1
RTD4
ALARM
OPTION
(M,B)
STATOR
WINDING 6
RTD3
shld.
Com
GROUND
BUS
L
3
4
Com-
shld.
shld.
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
80
81
82
83
84
85
CR
ALARM
NOTE
RELAY CONTACTS SHOWN
WITH
CONTROL POWER REMOVED
RTD
ALARM
SELF TEST
ALARM
DIFFERENTIAL
RELAY
87
14 SPEED SWITCH
KEYSWITCH
OR JUMPER
load
RS485
PF
Watts
+
-
METER
cpm-
Shield
Shield
PLC
Com
RTD10
Profibus (option P or P1)
Modbus/TCP (option E)
shld.
Com
ST CONNECTION
RTD11
shld.
Com
DeviceNet
Option (D)
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
RS485
RS485
DB-9
(front)
SHLD
RTD12
71
72
73
75
OPTION (F)
RS485
76
FIBER
SHLD Tx
SHLD
74
SCADA
CHANNEL 3
77
78
shld.
79
Rx
50/125 uM FIBER
62.5/125 uM FIBER
100/140 uM FIBER
RTD1
COMPUTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CONTROL
POWER
N
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
TRIP
Motor Management
Relay R
V+
STATOR
WINDING 5
V
380VAC/125VDC
shld.
Com
N
OPTIONAL
FILTER GROUND 123
LINE +
124
NEUTRAL 125
SAFETY GROUND 126
369
SHIELD
STATOR
WINDING 4
Com
90
Option (B)
CURRENT INPUTS
GE Multilin
RTD2
91
Back Spin
Neut/Gnd
RTD1
shld.
50:
0.025A
1A COM 1A COM 5A
Phase C
shld.
Com
99 100 102 104 103 101
CAN_H
STATOR
WINDING 3
1A COM 5A
V-
STATOR
WINDING 2
Com
98
OPTION ( R )
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
97
Phase B
WITH METERING OPTION (M)
STATOR
WINDING 1
96
CAN_L
3
105 106 107 108 109 110
8
3 RXD
2 TXD
20
7 SGND
6
4
5
22
5
4
9
3
8
2
7
1
6
REMOTE
RTD
MODULE
RTD12
369 PC
PROGRAM
PC
840700BF.CDR
25 PIN
CONNECTOR
Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING
3-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.2 TYPICAL WIRING
The 369 can be connected to cover a broad range of applications and wiring will vary depending upon the user’s protection
scheme. This section will cover most of the typical 369 interconnections.
In this section, the terminals have been logically grouped together for explanatory purposes. A typical wiring diagram for
the 369 is shown above in Figure 3–4: Typical Wiring on page 3–6 and the terminal arrangement has been detailed in Figure 3–3: TERMINAL LAYOUT on page 3–5. For further information on applications not covered here, refer to Chapter 7:
Applications or contact the factory for further information.
Hazard may result if the product is not used for intended purposes. This equipment can only be serviced
by trained personnel.
WARNING
3.3.3 CONTROL POWER
VERIFY THAT THE CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY IS WITHIN THE RANGE COVERED BY
THE ORDERED 369 RELAY’S CONTROL POWER.
CAUTION
Table 3–1: 369 POWER SUPPLY RANGES
369 POWER SUPPLY
AC RANGE
DC RANGE
HI
40 to 265 V
50 to 300 V
LO
20 to 48 V
20 to 60 V
The 369 has a built-in switchmode supply. It can operate with either AC or DC voltage applied to it.
Extensive filtering and transient protection has been incorporated into the 369 to ensure reliable operation in harsh industrial environments. Transient energy is removed from the relay and conducted to ground via the ground terminal. This terminal must be connected to the cubicle ground bus using a 10 AWG wire or a ground braid. Do not daisy-chain grounds with
other relays or devices. Each should have its own connection to the ground bus.
The internal supply is protected via a 3.15 A slo-blo fuse that is accessible for replacement. If it must be replaced ensure
that it is replaced with a fuse of equal size (see FUSE on page 2–4).
3.3.4 PHASE CURRENT (CT) INPUTS
The 369 requires one CT for each of the three motor phase currents to be input into the relay. There are no internal ground
connections for the CT inputs. Refer to Chapter 7: Applications for information on two CT connections.
The phase CTs should be chosen such that the FLA of the motor being protected is no less than 50% of the rated CT primary. Ideally, to ensure maximum accuracy and resolution, the CTs should be chosen such that the FLA is 100% of CT primary or slightly less. The maximum CT primary is 5000 A.
The 369 will measure 0.05 to 20 × CT primary rated current. The CTs chosen must be capable of driving the 369 burden
(see specifications) during normal and fault conditions to ensure correct operation. See Section 7.4: CT Specification and
Selection on page 7–7 for information on calculating total burden and CT rating.
For the correct operation of many protective elements, the phase sequence and CT polarity is critical. Ensure that the convention illustrated in Figure 3–4: Typical Wiring on page 3–6 is followed.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-7
3
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.3.5 GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
The 369 has an isolating transformer with separate 1 A, 5 A, and sensitive HGF (50:0.025) ground terminals. Only one
ground terminal type can be used at a time. There are no internal ground connections on the ground current inputs.
The maximum ground CT primary for the 1 A and 5 A taps is 5000 A. Alternatively the sensitive ground input, 50:0.025, can
be used to detect ground current on high resistance grounded systems.
The ground CT connection can either be a zero sequence (core balance) installation or a residual connection. Note that
only 1 A and 5 A secondary CTs may be used for the residual connection. A typical residual connection is illustrated in
below. The zero-sequence connection is shown in the typical wiring diagram. The zero-sequence connection is recommended. Unequal saturation of CTs, CT mismatch, size and location of motor, resistance of the power system, motor core
saturation density, etc. may cause false readings in the residually connected ground fault circuit.
3
RESIDUAL CURRENT
CONNECTION
A
B
C
93
94 92
96 97
95
99 100 98 102 104 103 101
1A COM 5A
1A COM 5A
1A COM 5A
1A COM 5A
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
Neut/Gnd
50:
0.025A
CURRENT INPUTS
840710B1.CDR
Figure 3–5: TYPICAL RESIDUAL CONNECTION
3.3.6 ZERO SEQUENCE GROUND CT PLACEMENT
The exact placement of a zero sequence CT to properly detect ground fault current is shown below. If the CT is placed over
a shielded cable, capacitive coupling of phase current into the cable shield during motor starts may be detected as ground
current unless the shield wire is also passed through the CT window. Twisted pair cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended.
Figure 3–6: ZERO SEQUENCE CT
3-8
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.7 PHASE VOLTAGE (VT/PT) INPUTS
The 369 has three channels for AC voltage inputs each with an internal isolating transformer. There are no internal fuses or
ground connections on these inputs. The maximum VT ratio is 240:1. These inputs are only enabled when the metering
option (M) is ordered.
The 369 accepts either open delta or wye connected VTs (see the figure below). The voltage channels are connected wye
internally, which means that the jumper shown on the delta connection between the phase B input and the VT neutral terminals must be installed.
Polarity and phase sequence for the VTs is critical for correct power and rotation measurement and should be verified
before starting the motor. As long as the polarity markings on the primary and secondary windings of the VT are aligned,
there is no phase shift. The markings can be aligned on either side of the VT. VTs are typically mounted upstream of the
motor breaker or contactor. Typically, a 1 A fuse is used to protect the voltage inputs.
WYE VT CONNECTION
DELTA VT CONNECTION
A
A
B
B
C
C
105 106 107 108 109 110
105 106 107 108 109 110
VA VN VB VN VC VN
VA VN VB VN VC VN
VOLTAGE INPUTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS
WITH METERING OPTION (M)
WITH METERING OPTION (M)
840713A4.CDR
Figure 3–7: WYE/DELTA CONNECTION
3.3.8 BACKSPIN VOLTAGE INPUTS
The Backspin voltage input is only operational if the optional backspin detection (B) feature has been purchased for the
relay. This input allows the 369 to sense whether the motor is spinning after the primary power has been removed (breaker
or contactor opened).
These inputs must be supplied by a separate VT mounted downstream (motor side) of the breaker or contactor. The correct
wiring is illustrated below.
A
B
C
Tx
M
VOLTAGE ON MOTOR SIDE
OF BREAKER MAY BE
-
OR
-N
91 90
N V
BACKSPIN
840731A2.CDR
Figure 3–8: BACKSPIN VOLTAGE WIRING
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-9
3
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.3.9 RTD INPUTS
The 369 can monitor up to 12 RTD inputs for Stator, Bearing, Ambient, or Other temperature applications. The type of each
RTD is field programmable as: 100 ohm Platinum (DIN 43760), 100 ohm Nickel, 120 ohm Nickel, or 10 ohm Copper. RTDs
must be the three wire type. There are no provisions for the connection of thermistors.
The 369 RTD circuitry compensates for lead resistance, provided that each of the three leads is the same length. Lead
resistance should not exceed 25 ohms per lead for platinum and nickel type RTDs or 3 ohms per lead for Copper type
RTDs.
Shielded cable should be used to prevent noise pickup in industrial environments. RTD cables should be kept close to
grounded metal casings and avoid areas of high electromagnetic or radio interference. RTD leads should not be run adjacent to or in the same conduit as high current carrying wires.
The shield connection terminal of the RTD is grounded in the 369 and should not be connected to ground at the motor or
anywhere else to prevent noise pickup from circulating currents.
If 10 ohm Copper RTDs are used special care should be taken to keep the lead resistance as low as possible to maintain
accurate readings.
MOTOR
STARTER
369 RELAY
SAFETY GROUND
Shield
RTD #1
RTD SENSING
3
Shield
Route cable in separate conduit from
current carrying conductors
RTD TERMINALS
AT MOTOR
12
4
Hot
1
Return
2
Compensation Com
MOTOR
3 WIRE SHIELDED CABLE
RTD IN
MOTOR
STATOR
OR
BEARING
3
RTD
TERMINALS
IN MOTOR
STARTER
Maximum total lead resistance
25 ohms (Platinum & Nickel RTDs)
3 ohms (Copper RTDs)
840717A2.CDR
Figure 3–9: RTD INPUTS
3.3.10 DIGITAL INPUTS
DO NOT CONNECT LIVE CIRCUITS TO THE 369 DIGITAL INPUTS. THEY ARE DESIGNED FOR DRY CONTACT CONNECTIONS ONLY.
CAUTION
Other than the ACCESS switch input the other 5 digital inputs are programmable. These programmable digital inputs have
default settings to match the functions of the 269Plus switch inputs (differential, speed, emergency restart, remote reset
and spare). However in addition to their default settings they can also be programmed for use as generic inputs to set up
trips and alarms or for monitoring purposes based on external contact inputs.
A twisted pair of wires should be used for digital input connections.
3-10
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.11 ANALOG OUTPUTS
The 369 provides 1 analog current output channel as part of the base unit and 3 additional analog outputs with the metering
option (M). These outputs are field programmable to a full-scale range of either 0 to 1 mA (into a maximum 2.4 kΩ impedance) and 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA (into a maximum 600 Ω impedance).
As shown in the typical wiring diagram (Figure 3–4: Typical Wiring on page 3–6), these outputs share one common return.
Polarity of these outputs must be observed for proper operation.
Shielded cable should be used for connections, with only one end of the shield grounded, to minimize noise effects. The
analog output circuitry is isolated. Transorbs limit this isolation to ±36 V with respect to the 369 safety ground.
If an analog voltage output is required, a burden resistor must be connected across the input of the SCADA or measuring
device (see the figure below). Ignoring the input impedance of the input,
V FULL SCALE
R LOAD = --------------------------------I MAX
(EQ 3.1)
For 0-1 mA, for example, if 5 V full scale is required to correspond to 1 mA
V FULL SCALE
5 V - = 5000 Ω
R LOAD = --------------------------------- = -------------------I MAX
0.001 A
(EQ 3.2)
For 4-20 mA, this resistor would be
Analog Outputs
V FULL SCALE
5 V - = 250 Ω
- = -------------------R LOAD = --------------------------------I MAX
0.020 A
1
80
2
81
3
82
4
83
Com-
84
V+
R
V-
(EQ 3.3)
SCADA
OR
PLC
OR
METERING
DEVICE
840714A3.CDR
Shield 85
Figure 3–10: ANALOG OUTPUT VOLTAGE CONNECTION
3.3.12 REMOTE DISPLAY
The 369 display can be separated and mounted remotely up to 15 feet away from the main relay. No separate source of
control power is required for the display module. A 15 feet standard shielded network cable is used to make the connection
between the display module and the main relay. A recommended and tested cable is available from GE Multilin. The cable
should be wired as far away as possible from high current or voltage carrying cables or other sources of electrical noise.
In addition the display module must be grounded if mounted remotely. A ground screw is provided on the back of the display module to facilitate this. A 12 AWG wire is recommended and should be connected to the same ground bus as the
main relay unit.
The 369 relay will still function and protect the motor without the display connected.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-11
3
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.3.13 OUTPUT RELAYS
The 369 provides four (4) form C output relays. They are labeled Trip, Aux 1, Aux 2, and Alarm. Each relay has normally
open (NO) and normally closed (NC) contacts and can switch up to 8 A at either 250 V AC or 30 V DC with a resistive load.
The NO or NC state is determined by the ‘no power’ state of the relay outputs.
All four output relays may be programmed for fail-safe or non-fail-safe operation. When in fail-safe mode, output relay activation or a loss of control power will cause the contacts to go to their power down state.
For example:
3
•
A fail-safe NO contact closes when the 369 is powered up (if no prior unreset trip conditions) and will open when activated (tripped) or when the 369 loses control power.
•
A non-fail-safe NO contact remains open when the 369 is powered up (unless a prior unreset trip condition) and will
close only when activated (tripped). If control power is lost while the output relay is activated (NO contacts closed) the
NO contacts will open.
Thus, in order to cause a trip on loss of control power to the 369, the Trip relay should be programmed as fail-safe. See the
figure below for typical wiring of contactors and breakers for fail-safe and non-fail-safe operation. Output relays remain
latched after activation if the fault condition persists or the protection element has been programmed as latched. This
means that once this relay has been activated it remains in the active state until the 369 is manually reset.
The Trip relay cannot be reset if a timed lockout is in effect. Lockout time will be adhered to regardless of whether control
power is present or not. The relay contacts may be reset if motor conditions allow, by pressing the RESET key, using the
REMOTE RESET switch or via communications. The Emergency Restart feature overrides all features to reset the 369.
The rear of the 369 relay shows output relay contacts in their power down state.
WARNING
In locations where system voltage disturbances cause voltage levels to dip below the control power range
listed in specifications, any relay contact programmed as fail-safe may change state. Therefore, in any
application where the ‘process’ is more critical than the motor, it is recommended that the trip relay contacts be programmed as non-fail-safe. If, however, the motor is more critical than the ‘process’ then program the trip contacts as fail-safe.
840716A4.CDR
Figure 3–11: HOOKUP / FAIL AND NON-FAILSAFE MODES
3-12
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
3.3.14 RS485 COMMUNICATIONS
Three independent two-wire RS485 ports are provided. If option (F), the fiber optic port, is installed and used, the COMM 3
RS485 port may not be used. The RS485 ports are isolated as a group.
Up to 32 369s (or other devices) can be daisy-chained together on a single serial communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeaters
may also be used to increase the number of relays on a single channel to a maximum of 254. Note that there may only be
one master device per serial communication link.
Connections should be made using shielded twisted pair cables (typically 24 AWG). Suitable cables should have a characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (e.g. Belden #9841) and total wire length should not exceed 4000 ft. Commercially available repeaters can be used to extend transmission distances.
Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon. For this reason, surge protection
devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals. Internally, an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data
interface is used to prevent noise coupling. The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices installed, either internally or externally, to ensure maximum reliability.
CAUTION
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded in one location only, at the master. Failure to
do so may result in intermittent or failed communications.
Correct polarity is also essential. 369 relays must be wired with all ‘+’ terminals connected together, and all ‘–’
terminals connected together. Each relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configurations. The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm ¼ watt resistor in series with a
1 nF capacitor across the ‘+’ and ‘–’ terminals. Observing these guidelines will result in a reliable communication system
that is immune to system transients.
Figure 3–12: RS485 WIRING
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-13
3
3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)
3 INSTALLATION
3.4REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)
3.4.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The optional remote RTD module is designed to be mounted near the motor. This eliminates the need for multiple RTD
cables to run back from the motor which may be in a remote location to the switchgear. Although the module is internally
shielded to minimize noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from high current conductors or sources of
strong magnetic fields.
The remote RTD module physical dimensions and mounting (drill diagram) are shown below. Mounting hardware (bolts and
washers) and instructions are provided with the module.
3
Figure 3–13: REMOTE RTD DIMENSIONS
CONTROL POWER
HI: 50-300VDC/40-265VAC
LO: 20-60VDC/20-48VAC
4 OUTPUT RELAYS (IO)
Programmable alarm and
trip conditions activated
by programmable setpoints,
digital inputs and remote
communication control.
Customer Accessible
fuse
12 RTD INPUTS
field selectable type
DIGITAL INPUTS
(IO)
FIBER OPTIC DATA LINK (F)
For harsh environments
Communications
(3)-RS485 Com Ports
ANALOG OUTPUT
(IO)
813701A4.CDR
Figure 3–14: REMOTE RTD REAR VIEW
3-14
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.4 REMOTE RTD MODULE (RRTD)
3.4.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
STATOR
WINDING 5
STATOR
WINDING 6
MOTOR
BEARING 1
MOTOR
BEARING 2
PUMP
BEARING 1
PUMP
BEARING 2
PUMP
CASE
AMBIENT
RTD2
GE Multilin
GROUND
BUS
RRTD
Remote RTD Module
CONTROL
POWER
Com
g
shld.
Com
RTD3
RTD4
shld.
Com
RTD5
shld.
Com
RTD7
shld.
Com
L
CONTROL
POWER
N
RTD8
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
TRIP
ALARM
AUX. 1
AUX. 2
RTD6
shld.
Com
123
124
125
126
3
380VAC / 125VDC
shld.
Com
FILTER GROUND
LINE +
NEUTRAL SAFETY GROUND
RTD trip
ALARM
RTD HI
ALARM
SELF TEST
ALARM
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
INPUT 6
INPUT 5
INPUT 4
INPUT 3
INPUT 2
INPUT 1
Flow
Value
Pressure
Value
shld.
1
Com
RTD9
shld.
2
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
STATOR
WINDING 4
RTD1
OUTPUT RELAYS OPTION(IO)
STATOR
WINDING 3
Com
shld.
DIGITAL INPUTS OPTION (IO)
STATOR
WINDING 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
OPTION (IO)
STATOR
WINDING 1
3
4
Com-
shld.
Com
Hottest
Stator
RTD1
RTD2
80
81
82
83
84
85
RS485
+
-
cpmMETER
Shield
Shield
PLC
RTD10
shld.
Com
g
RTD11
shld.
Com
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
RS485
RS485
SHLD
RTD12
71
shld.
72
73
74
75
76
FIBER
SHLD Tx
77
78
SCADA
WITH OPTION (F)
RS485
SHLD
GE Multilin
369
Motor Management Relay
CHANNEL 3
Rx
79
FIBER
Tx
Rx
813703A5.CDR
Figure 3–15: REMOTE RTD MODULE
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-15
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.5CT INSTALLATION
3.5.1 PHASE CT INSTALLATION
3
Figure 3–16: PHASE CT INSTALLATION
3-16
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 INSTALLATION
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3.5.2 5 AMP GROUND CT INSTALLATION
3
Figure 3–17: 5 A GROUND CT INSTALLATION
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
3-17
3.5 CT INSTALLATION
3 INSTALLATION
3.5.3 HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION
3
Figure 3–18: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION, 3" AND 5" WINDOW
GE Power Management
Figure 3–19: HGF (50:0.025) GROUND CT INSTALLATION, 8" WINDOW
3-18
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES 4.1FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.1.1 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 40-character LCD display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions and from
various viewing angles. Messages are displayed in plain English and do not require the aid of an instruction manual for
deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will default to user defined status messages. Any trip, alarm, or start inhibit will automatically override the default messages and appear on the display.
Contrast Adjustment and Lamp Test: Press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds to initiate lamp test. The contrast can also be
adjusted now as required. Use the [VALUE] up and down keys to adjust the contrast. Press the [ENTER] key to save the
adjustment when completed.
4.1.2 LED INDICATORS
There are ten LED indicators, as follows:
•
TRIP
Trip relay has operated (energized)
•
ALARM
Alarm relay has operated (energized)
•
AUX 1
Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)
•
AUX 2
Auxiliary relay has operated (energized)
•
SERVICE
Relay in need of technical service.
•
BSD
Relay has detected a backspin condition on a stopped motor
•
RRTD
RRTD module communication indication
•
METERING
369 has option M or B installed
•
COM 1
Channel 1 RS485 communication indication
•
COM 2
Channel 2 RS485 communication indication
TRIP
BSD
ALARM
RRTD
AUX 1
METERING
AUX 2
COM 1
SERVICE
COM 2
4
Figure 4–1: LED INDICATORS
4.1.3 RS232 PROGRAM PORT
This port is intended for connection to a portable PC. Setpoint files may be created at any location and downloaded through
this port using the EnerVista 369 Setup software. Local interrogation of Setpoints and Actual Values is also possible. New
firmware may be downloaded to the 369 flash memory through this port. Upgrading of the relay firmware does not require a
hardware EPROM change.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-1
4.1 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES
4.1.4 KEYPAD
The 369 messages are organized into pages under the main headings, Setpoints and Actual Values. The [SETPOINTS]
key is used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. The [ACTUAL VALUES] key is used to
navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters.
Each page is broken down further into logical subgroups of messages. The [PAGE] up and down keys may be used to navigate through the subgroups.
4
•
[SETPOINTS]: This key may be used to navigate through the page headers of the programmable parameters. Alternately, one can press this key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.
•
[ACTUAL VALUES]: This key is used to navigate through the page headers of the measured parameters. Alternately,
one can scroll through the pages by pressing the Actual Values key followed by using the Page Up / Page Down keys.
•
[PAGE]: The Page Up/ Page Down keys may be used to scroll through page headers for both Setpoints and Actual
Values.
•
[LINE]: Once the required page is found, the Line Up/ Line Down keys may be used to scroll through the sub-headings.
•
[VALUE]: The Value Up and Value Down keys are used to scroll through variables in the Setpoint programming mode.
It will increment and decrement numerical Setpoint values, or alter yes/no options.
•
[RESET]: The reset key may be used to reset a trip or latched alarm, provided it has been activated by selecting the
local reset.
•
[ENTER] The key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the subgroups or store altered setpoint values.
•
[CLEAR] The key is also dual purpose. It may be used to exit the subgroups or to return an altered setpoint to its original value before it has been stored.
•
[HELP]: The help key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages; such as the Setpoint range,
etc.
To enter setpoints, select the desired page header. Then press the [LINE UP] / [LINE DOWN] keys to scroll through the
page and find the desired subgroup. Once the desired subgroup is found, press the [VALUE UP] / [VALUE DOWN] keys to
adjust the setpoints. Press the [ENTER] key to save the setpoint or the [CLEAR] key to revert back to the old setpoint.
4.1.5 SETPOINT ENTRY
In order to store any setpoints, Terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) must be shorted (a key switch may be used for
security). There is also a Setpoint Passcode feature that may be enabled to restrict access to setpoints. The passcode
must be entered to allow the changing of setpoint values. A passcode of 0 effectively turns off the passcode feature and
only the access jumper is required for changing setpoints.
If no key is pressed for 30 minutes, access to setpoint values will be restricted until the passcode is entered again. To prevent setpoint access before the 30 minutes expires, the unit may be turned off and back on, the access jumper may be
removed, or the SETPOINT ACCESS setpoint may be changed to Restricted. The passcode cannot be entered until terminals 57 and 58 (access terminals) are shorted.
Setpoint changes take effect immediately, even when motor is running. It is not recommended, however, to change setpoints while the motor is running as any mistake could cause a nuisance trip.
Refer to Section 5.2.1: Setpoint Access on page 5–4 for a detailed description of the setpoint access procedure.
4-2
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.2 ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE
4.2ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE
4.2.1 HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista 369 Setup software to operate on your computer.
•
Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or better recommended)
•
Microsoft Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (SP4 or higher), 2000, XP
•
64 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)
•
Minimum of 50 MB hard disk space (200 MB recommended)
If EnerVista 369 Setup is currently installed, note the path and directory name. It may be required during upgrading.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software is included on the GE enerVista CD that accompanied the 369. The software may also
be downloaded from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
4.2.2 INSTALLING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP
After ensuring these minimum requirements, use the following procedure to install the EnerVista 369 Setup software from
the enclosed GE enerVista CD.
1.
Insert the GE enerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge enerVista software on the
local PC.
3.
When installation is complete, start the enerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
5.
In the enerVista LaunchPad window, click the Add Product button and select the “369 Motor Management Relay” as
shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software release, or select “CD” if you do not have a
web connection, then click the Add Now button to list software items for the 369.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-3
4
4.2 ENERVISTA 369 SETUP INTERFACE
4 USER INTERFACES
6.
enerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, doubleclick the installation program to install the EnerVista 369 Setup software.
7.
The program will request the user to create a backup 3.5" floppy-disk set. If this is desired, click on the Start Copying
button; otherwise, click on the CONTINUE WITH 369 INSTALLATION button.
8.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista 369 Setup software will be installed.
9.
Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add EnerVista 369 Setup software to the Windows start menu.
10. Click Finish to end the installation. The 369 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the enerVista Launchpad window, as shown below.
4
4-4
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY
4.3CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY
4.3.1 CONFIGURING SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
Before starting, verify that the serial cable is properly connected to either the RS232 port on the front panel of the device
(for RS232 communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back of the device (for RS485 communications).
This example demonstrates an RS232 connection. For RS485 communications, the GE Multilin F485 converter will be
required. Refer to the F485 manual for additional details. To configure the relay for Ethernet communications, see Configuring Ethernet Communications on page 4–6.
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 369 Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD). See the
previous section for the installation procedure.
2.
Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with
the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site name. Click the
OK button when complete.
4.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista 369 Setup window.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6.
Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
7.
Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper RS232 functionality.
•
Enter the slave address and COM port values (from the S1 369 SETUP ÖØ 369 COMMUNICATIONS menu) in the
Slave Address and COM Port fields.
•
Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.
8.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 369 device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the 369 serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting
values.
9.
Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista 369 Setup window.
The 369 Site Device has now been configured for serial communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay on page 4–7
to begin communications.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-5
4
4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY
4 USER INTERFACES
4.3.2 USING THE QUICK CONNECT FEATURE
The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front panel RS232 port of a 369 relay.
The following window will appear when the Quick Connect button is pressed:
As indicated by the window, the Quick Connect feature quickly connects the EnerVista 369 Setup software to a 369 front
port with the following settings: 9600 baud, no parity, 8 bits, 1 stop bit. Select the PC communications port connected to the
relay and press the Connect button.
4
The EnerVista 369 Setup software will display a window indicating the status of communications with the relay. When connected, a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window. The properties of this new site cannot be
changed.
The 369 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for serial communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay on page 4–7 to begin communications.
4.3.3 CONFIGURING ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the MultiNET device, and that the MultiNET has been
configured and properly connected to the relay. Refer to the MultiNET manual for additional details on configuring the MultiNET to work with the 369.
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista 369 Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD). See the
previous section for the installation procedure.
2.
Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with
the display order of devices defined for the site. In this example, we will use “Substation 2” as the site name. Click the
OK button when complete.
4.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista 369 Setup window.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
4-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY
6.
Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
7.
Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
4
•
Enter the IP address assigned to the MultiNET adapter.
•
Enter the slave address and Modbus port values (from the S1 369 SETUP ÖØ 369 COMMUNICATIONS menu) in the
Slave Address and Modbus Port fields.
8.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 369 device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that the 369 Ethernet communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay and
MultiNET setting values.
9.
Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista 369 Setup window.
The 369 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to the following section to begin communications.
4.3.4 CONNECTING TO THE RELAY
Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can easily connect to the relay.
1.
Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to list the available devices for the
given site (for example, in the “Substation 1” site shown below).
2.
Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of headers is shown for each device:
•
Device Definitions
•
Settings
•
Actual Values
•
Commands
•
Communications
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-7
4.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA 369 SETUP TO THE RELAY
3.
4 USER INTERFACES
Expand the Settings > Relay Setup list item and double click on Front Panel to open the Front Panel settings window
as shown below:
Expand the Site List by doubleclicking or by selecting the [+] box
4
Communications Status Indicator
Green = OK, Red = No Comms
Figure 4–2: MAIN WINDOW AFTER CONNECTION
4.
The Front Panel settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista 369
Setup window.
5.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial or Ethernet cable is properly connected to the relay, and that the relay
has been properly configured for communications (steps described earlier).
The Front Panel settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications. Other setpoint and commands windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. Actual values windows are also available for display.
These windows can be locked, arranged, and resized at will.
Refer to the EnerVista 369 Setup Help File for additional information about the using the software.
NOTE
4-8
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
4.4WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
4.4.1 ENGAGING A DEVICE
The EnerVista 369 Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a 369 relay.
Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the SR or UR product series.
4.4.2 ENTERING SETPOINTS
The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints. In this example, we will be changing the current sensing setpoints.
1.
Establish communications with the relay.
2.
Select the Setpoint > S2 System Setup > CT/VT Setup menu item. This can be selected from the device setpoint
tree or the main window menu bar.
3.
Select the PHASE CT PRIMARY setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This will display three arrows: two
to increment/decrement the value and another to launch the numerical calculator.
4
4.
Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that allows the user to enter a value
within the setpoint range displayed near the top of the keypad:
Click Accept to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on Cancel to exit from the keypad and retain the
old value.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-9
4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
4 USER INTERFACES
5.
For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. GROUND CT TYPE above), clicking anywhere within the setpoint value box displays a drop-down selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this list.
6.
For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. message scratchpad messages), the value may be entered
directly within the setpoint value box.
7.
Click on Save to save the values into the 369, then click OK to accept any changes and exit the window. Otherwise,
click Restore to retain previous values and exit.
4
4.4.3 FILE SUPPORT
Opening any EnerVista 369 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘369’ extension) which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be
added back to the Settings List tree.
New files will be automatically added to the tree, which is sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names.
4.4.4 USING SETPOINTS FILES
a) OVERVIEW
The EnerVista 369 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
•
In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
•
Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then saving the settings when complete.
•
Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving them to the relay when complete.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following categories of relay settings:
•
Device Definition
•
Product Setup
•
System Setup
•
Grouped Elements
•
Control Elements
•
Inputs/Outputs
•
Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front panel display. For specific
details on setpoints, refer to Chapter 5.
b) DOWNLOADING AND SAVING SETPOINTS FILES
Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware upgrades. Saving setpoints is also highly
recommended before making any setpoint changes or creating new setpoint files.
4-10
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
The EnerVista 369 Setup window, setpoint files are accessed in the Settings List control bar window or the Files Window.
Use the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1.
Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and configured as shown in Connecting
EnerVista 369 Setup to the Relay on page 4–5.
2.
Select the desired device from the site list.
3.
Select the File > Read Settings from Device menu item to obtain settings information from the device.
4.
After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and destination path of the setpoint file. The
corresponding file extension will be automatically assigned. Press Save to complete the process. A new entry will be
added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.
c) ADDING SETPOINTS FILES TO THE ENVIRONMENT
The EnerVista 369 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large group of setpoint files. Use the following procedure to add a new or existing file to the list.
1.
In the files pane, right-click on ‘Files’ and select the Add Existing Setting File item as shown:
4
2.
The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved setpoint file. As for any other
Microsoft Windows® application, browse for the file to be added then click Open. The new file and complete path will
be added to the file list.
d) CREATING A NEW SETPOINT FILE
The EnerVista 369 Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files independent of a connected device. These
can be uploaded to a relay at a later date. The following procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.
3.
In the File pane, right click on ‘File’ and select the New Settings File item. The EnerVista 369 Setup software displays
the following box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct firmware version. It is
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-11
4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
4 USER INTERFACES
important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that setpoints not available in a particular version are not
downloaded into the relay.
4
4.
Select the firmware version.
5.
For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate the identification of the device
and the purpose of the file.
6.
Enter any installed options (metering/backspin and Profibus), as well as the slave addresses of any remote RTDs.
7.
To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the Enter File Name box.
8.
Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to update an existing file. All 369 setpoint files should have the extension ‘369’ (for example, ‘motor1.369’).
9.
Click Save and OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a complete path, will be
added to the EnerVista 369 Setup software environment.
e) UPGRADING SETPOINT FILES TO A NEW REVISION
It is often necessary to upgrade the revision code for a previously saved setpoint file after the 369 firmware has been
upgraded (for example, this is required for firmware upgrades). This is illustrated in the following procedure.
1.
Establish communications with the 369 relay.
2.
Select the Actual > A5 Product Info menu item and record the Software Revision identifier of the relay firmware.
3.
Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista 369 Setup environment as described in Adding Setpoints Files
to the Environment on page 4–11.
4.
In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.
5.
From the main window menu bar, select the File > Properties menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file.
If this version (e.g. 5.00 shown below) is different than the Software Revision code noted in step 2, select a New File
Version that matches the Software Revision code from the pull-down menu.
For example, if the firmware revision is 27I600A4.000 (software revision 6.00) and the current setpoint file revision is
5.00, change the setpoint file revision to “6.0X”.
4-12
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
Enter any special comments
about the setpoint file here.
6.
4
Select the desired setpoint version
from this menu. The 6.0x indicates
versions 6.00, 6.01, 6.02, etc.
When complete, click Convert to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. A dialog box will request confirmation.
See Loading Setpoints from a File on page 4–14 for instructions on loading this setpoint file into the 369.
f) PRINTING SETPOINTS AND ACTUAL VALUES
The EnerVista 369 Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of setpoints and actual values. Use the
following procedure to print a list of setpoints:
1.
Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications with a 369 device.
2.
From the main window, select the File > Print Settings menu item.
3.
The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Settings in the upper section and select either Include All
Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently
used) in the filtering section and click OK.
4.
The process for File > Print Preview Settings is identical to the steps above.
Setpoints lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in the file list) or device (in the device
list) and selecting the Print Device Information or Print Settings File options.
A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the following procedure:
1.
Establish communications with the desired 369 device.
2.
From the main window, select the File > Print Settings menu item.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-13
4.4 WORKING WITH SETPOINTS AND SETPOINT FILES
3.
4 USER INTERFACES
The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper section and select either Include
All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering section and click OK.
Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option.
g) LOADING SETPOINTS FROM A FILE
WARNING
An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a revision number that does not
match the relay firmware. If the firmware has been upgraded since saving the setpoint file, see Upgrading Setpoint
Files to a New Revision on page 4–12 for instructions on changing the revision number of a setpoint file.
The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a setpoints file, it must first be added to
the EnerVista 369 Setup environment as described in Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment on page 4–11.
4
1.
Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista 369 Setup software main window.
2.
Select the File > Properties menu item and verify that the corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and
firmware version of the target relay. If the versions are not identical, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision on
page 4–12 for details on changing the setpoints file version.
3.
Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings to Device item.
4.
Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an incompatibility, an error will occur: If
there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data will be transferred to the relay. An
indication of the percentage completed will be shown in the bottom of the main window.
4-14
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE
4.5UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE
4.5.1 DESCRIPTION
To upgrade the 369 firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful completion of this procedure, the
369 will have new firmware installed with the original setpoints.
The latest firmware files are available from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
4.5.2 SAVING SETPOINTS TO A FILE
Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current 369 settings to a file on your PC. After the firmware has
been upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back into the 369.
Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files on page 4–10 for details on saving relay setpoints to a file.
4.5.3 LOADING NEW FIRMWARE
Loading new firmware into the 369 flash memory is accomplished as follows:
1.
Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files
on page 4–10.
2.
Select the Communications > Update Firmware menu item.
3.
The following warning message will appear. Select Yes to proceed or No the cancel the process. Do not proceed
unless you have saved the current setpoints.
4.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software will request the new firmware file. Locate the firmware file to load into the 369. The
firmware filename has the following format:
53 CMB 250 . 000
Modification Number (000 = none)
Firmware Version (250 = 2.50)
Internal Identifier
Product code (53 = 369)
5.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software automatically lists all filenames beginning with ‘53’. Select the appropriate file and
click OK to continue.
6.
The software will prompt with another Upload Firmware Warning window. This will be the final chance to cancel the
firmware upgrade before the flash memory is erased. Click Yes to continue or No to cancel the upgrade.
7.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software now prepares the 369 to receive the new firmware file. The 369 will display a message indicating that it is in Upload Mode. While the file is being loaded into the 369, a status box appears indicating
how much of the new firmware file has been transferred and how much is remaining, as well as the upgrade status.
The entire transfer process takes approximately five minutes.
8.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software will notify the user when the 369 has finished loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the main screen.
Cycling power to the relay is highly recommended after a firmware upgrade.
NOTE
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-15
4
4.5 UPGRADING RELAY FIRMWARE
4 USER INTERFACES
After successfully updating the 369 firmware, the relay will not be in service and will require setpoint programming. To communicate with the relay, the following settings will have to me manually programmed.
SLAVE ADDRESS
BAUD RATE
PARITY (if applicable)
When communications is established, the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into the relay. See Loading Setpoints
from a File on page 4–14 for details.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default values,
min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware.
The addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The EEPROM
DATA ERROR message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test message intended to
inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This message does not signal any
problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
4
4-16
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
4.6ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
4.6.1 TRIGGERED EVENTS
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, data generated by triggered specified parameters can be viewed and
analyzed via one of the following features:
•
Event Recorder: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 250 events, listed in chronological order from most recent to the oldest.
•
Oscillography: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states provide a visual display of power system and
relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
4.6.2 TRENDING
Trending from the 369 is accomplished via EnerVista 369 Setup. Many different parameters can be trended and graphed at
sampling periods from 1 second up to 1 hour. The parameters which can be trended by EnerVista 369 Setup are:
•
Currents/Voltages: phase currents A/B/C; average phase current; motor load; current unbalance; ground current; and
voltages Vab, Vbc, Vca Van, Vbn and Vcn
•
Power: power factor; real power (kW); reactive power (kvar); Apparent Power (kVA); positive watthours; positive varhours; and negative varhours
•
Temperature: Hottest Stator RTD; RTDs 1 through 12; and RRTDs 1 through 12
•
Other: thermal capacity used and system frequency
1.
To use the Trending function, run the EnerVista 369 Setup software and establish communications with a connected
369 unit. Select the Actual > Trending menu item to open the Trending window.
BUTTONS
MODE SELECT
Select one of these buttons to view
Cursor Line 1, Cursor Line 2, or
Delta (difference) values for the graph
TRENDING SELECTION
Select the desired graphs
to view.
Print, Setup (to edit Graph Attributes)
Zoom In, Zoom Out
4
WAVEFORM
The trended data
from the 369 relay
CURSOR LINES
To move lines, move mouse pointer
over the cursor line. Click and hold the
left mouse button and drag the cursor
line to the new location
Figure 4–3: TRENDING VIEW
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-17
4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
4 USER INTERFACES
2.
Program the parameters to display by selecting them from the pull down menus.
3.
Select the Sample Rate and select RUN to begin the trending sampling.
4.
The trended values can be printed using Print Trending Graph button.
5.
The Trending File Setup button can be used to write the graph data to a file in a standard spreadsheet format. Ensure
that the Write Trended Data to File box is checked, and that the Sample Rate is at a minimum of 5 seconds. Set the
file capacity limit to the amount of memory available for trended data.
4.6.3 WAVEFORM CAPTURE (TRACE MEMORY)
The EnerVista 369 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace memory) from the 369 relay at the
instance of a trip. A maximum of 16 cycles can be captured and the trigger point can be adjusted to anywhere within the set
cycles. The last three waveform events are viewable.
The following waveforms can be captured:
4
•
Phase A, B, and C currents (Ia, Ib, and Ic)
•
Ground and current (Ig)
•
Phase A-N, B-N, and C-N voltages (Van, Vbn, and Vcn) if wye-connected
Phase A-B and C-B (Vab and Vcb) if open-delta connected
•
Digital data for output relays and contact input states.
1.
With the EnerVista 369 Setup software running and communications established, select the Actual > Waveform Capture menu item to open the waveform capture setup window:
Number of available files
Files to be saved or viewed
Save waveform to a file
Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture.
The waveform file numbering starts with the number zero in the 369; therefore, the maximum trigger number will
always be one less then the total number triggers available.
2.
Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new window will appear requesting
for file name and path.
The file is saved as a COMTRADE File, with the extension ‘CFG’. In addition to the COMTRADE file, two other files are
saved. One is a CSV (comma delimited values) file, which can be viewed and manipulated with compatible third-party
software. The other file is a DAT File, required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.
To view a previously saved COMTRADE File, click the Open button and select the corresponding COMTRADE File.
4-18
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
3.
4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
To view the captured waveforms, click the Launch Viewer button. A detailed Waveform Capture window will appear as
shown below:
TRIGGER TIME & DATE
Display the time & date of the
Trigger
CURSOR LINE POSITION
Indicate the cursor line position
in time
DELTA
Indicates time difference
between the two cursor lines
4
Display graph values
at the corresponding
cursor line. Cursor
lines are identified by
their colors.
TRIGGER LINE
Indicates the
point in time for
the trigger
CURSOR
LINES
To move lines locate the mouse pointer
over the cursor line then click and drag
the cursor to the new location.
Figure 4–4: WAVEFORM CAPTURE WINDOW ATTRIBUTES
4.
The red vertical line indicates the trigger point of the relay.
5.
The date and time of the trip is displayed at the top left corner of the window. To match the captured waveform with the
event that triggered it, make note of the time and date shown in the graph. Then, find the event that matches the same
time and date in the event recorder. The event record will provide additional information on the cause and the system
conditions at the time of the event. Additional information on how to download and save events is shown in Event
Recorder on page 4–21.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-19
4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
4 USER INTERFACES
4.6.4 PHASORS
The EnerVista 369 Setup software can be used to view the phasor diagram of three-phase currents and voltages. The phasors are for: Phase Voltages Va, Vb, and Vc; Phase Currents Ia, Ib, and Ic.
1.
With the EnerVista 369 Setup software running and communications established, open the Actual Values > Metering
Data window, then click on the Phasors tab.
2.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software will display the following window:
3.
Press the “View” button to display the following window:
4
VOLTAGE LEVEL
Displays the value
and the angle of
the voltage phasors
VOLTAGE VECTORS
Assigned to Phasor
Set 1, Graph 1
4.
CURRENT LEVEL
Displays the value
and angle of the
current phasor
CURRENT VECTORS
Assigned to Phasor
Set 2, Graph 2
The 369 Motor Management Relay was designed to display lagging angles. Therefore, if a system condition would
cause the current to lead the voltage by 45°, the 369 relay will display such angle as 315° Lag instead of 45° Lead.
When the currents and voltages measured by the relay are zero, the angles displayed by the relay and
those shown by the EnerVista 369 Setup software are not fixed values.
WARNING
4-20
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
4.6.5 EVENT RECORDER
The 369 event recorder can be viewed through the EnerVista 369 Setup software. The event recorder stores generator and
system information each time an event occurs (e.g. breaker failure). Although the 369 currently supports 250 event records,
the EnerVista 369 Setup software will only allow retrieval of the latest 200 events. Event 200 is the most recent event and
Event 001 is the oldest event. Event 001 is overwritten whenever a new event occurs. Refer to Event Records on page 6–
16 for additional information on the event recorder.
Use the following procedure to view the event recorder with EnerVista 369 Setup:
1.
With EnerVista 369 Setup running and communications established, select the Actual > A5 Event Recorder item from
the main menu. This displays the Event Recorder window indicating the list of recorded events, with the most current
event displayed first.
EVENT NUMBER
The event data information
is related to the event number
shown here.
EVENT LISTING
Lists the last 128 events
with the most recent
displayed at top of list.
CLEAR EVENTS
Click the Clear
Events button to
clear the event list
from memory.
4
EVENT DATA
System information as
measured by the relay
at the instant of the
event occurrence.
2.
SAVE EVENTS
Click the Save Events
button to save the event
record to the PC as a
CSV file.
To view detailed information for a given event and the system information at the moment of the event occurrence,
change the event number on the Select Event box.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-21
4.6 ADVANCED ENERVISTA 369 SETUP FEATURES
4 USER INTERFACES
4.6.6 MODBUS USER MAP
The EnerVista 369 Setup software provides a means to program the 369 User Map (Modbus addresses 0180h to 01FCh).
Refer to User Definable Memory Map Area on page 9–34 for additional information on the User Map.
1.
Select a connected device in EnerVista 369 Setup.
2.
Select the Setpoint > User Map menu item to open the following window.
3.
The above window allows the desired addresses to be written to User Map locations. The User Map values that correspond to these addresses are then displayed.
4
4.6.7 VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES
You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters. From the main window menu bar,
selecting Actual Values opens a window with tabs, each tab containing data in accordance to the following list:
•
Motor Status: Motor, Last Trip, Alarm Status, Start Inhibit, Local DI Status, Local Relay Outputs, and Real Time Clock
•
Metering Data: Currents, Voltages, Power, Backspin, Local RTDs, Demand, Phasor, and RRTDs 1 to 4
•
Learned Data: Motor Learned Data, Local RTD Maximums, RRTD 1 to 4 Maximums
•
Statistical Data: Trip Counters and Motor Statistics
•
Product Information: Revision Codes and Calibration Dates
Selecting an actual values window also opens the actual values tree from the corresponding device in the site list and highlights the current location in the hierarchy.
For complete details on actual values, refer to Chapter 6.
To view a separate window for each group of actual values, select the desired item from the tree, and double click with the
left mouse button. Each group will be opened on a separate tab. The windows can be re-arranged to maximize data viewing as shown in the following figure (showing actual current, voltage, and power values tiled in the same window):
4-22
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369
4.7USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369
4.7.1 PLUG AND PLAY EXAMPLE
EnerVista Viewpoint is an optional software package that puts critical 369 information onto any PC with plug-and-play simplicity. EnerVista Viewpoint connects instantly to the 369 via serial, ethernet or modem and automatically generates
detailed overview, metering, power, demand, energy and analysis screens. Installing EnerVista Launchpad (see previous
section) allows the user to install a fifteen-day trial version of enerVista Viewpoint. After the fifteen day trial period you will
need to purchase a license to continue using enerVista Viewpoint. Information on license pricing can be found at http://
www.enerVista.com.
1.
Install the EnerVista Viewpoint software from the GE enerVista CD.
2.
Ensure that the 369 device has been properly configured for either serial or Ethernet communications (see previous
sections for details).
3.
Click the Viewpoint window in EnerVista to log into EnerVista Viewpoint. At this point, you will be required to provide a
login and password if you have not already done so.
4
Figure 4–5: ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT MAIN WINDOW
4.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
5.
Enter the desired site name in the Site Name field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along with
the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete. The new site will appear in the
upper-left list in the EnerVista 369 Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the Device Name field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select the appropriate communications interface (Ethernet or Serial) and fill in the required information for the 369.
See Connecting EnerVista 369 Setup to the Relay on page 4–5 for details.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-23
4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369
4 USER INTERFACES
4
Figure 4–6: DEVICE SETUP SCREEN (EXAMPLE)
9.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 369 device and upload the order code. If an communications error
occurs, ensure that communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when complete.
11. From the EnerVista main window, select the IED Dashboard item to open the Plug and Play IED dashboard. An icon
for the 369 will be shown.
Figure 4–7: ‘PLUG AND PLAY’ DASHBOARD
4-24
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 USER INTERFACES
4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369
12. Click the Dashboard button below the 369 icon to view the device information. We have now successfully accessed
our 369 through EnerVista Viewpoint.
4
Figure 4–8: ENERVISTA PLUG AND PLAY SCREENS (EXAMPLE)
For additional information on EnerVista viewpoint, please visit the EnerVista website at http://www.EnerVista.com.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
4-25
4.7 USING ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369
4 USER INTERFACES
4
4-26
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETPOINTS 5.1OVERVIEW
S1 SETPOINTS
369 SETUP
5.1.1 SETPOINTS MAIN MENU
SETPOINT ACCESS
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
369 COMMUNICATIONS
REAL TIME CLOCK
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
EVENT RECORDS
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
DEFAULT MESSAGES
CLEAR/PRESET DATA
MODIFY OPTIONS
FACTORY SERVICE
S2 SETPOINTS
SYSTEM SETUP
CT/VT SETUP
MONITORING SETUP
BLOCK FUNCTIONS
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
S3 SETPOINTS
OVERLOAD PROTECTION
THERMAL MODEL
OVERLOAD CURVES
OVERLOAD ALARM
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
See page 5–4.
See page 5–4.
See page 5–5.
See page 5–7.
See page 5–7.
See page 5–8.
See page 5–8.
See page 5–8.
See page 5–9.
5
See page 5–10.
See page 5–10.
See page 5–11.
See page 5–12.
See page 5–16.
See page 5–17.
See page 5–18.
See page 5–25.
See page 5–26.
See page 5–34.
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW
S4 SETPOINTS
CURRENT ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
SHORT CIRCUIT
MECHANICAL JAM
UNDERCURRENT
CURRENT UNBALANCE
GROUND FAULT
S5 SETPOINTS
MOTOR START/INHIBITS
ACCELERATION TRIP
START INHIBIT
BACKSPIN DETECTION
See page 5–35.
See page 5–36.
See page 5–37.
See page 5–38.
See page 5–39.
See page 5–41.
See page 5–41.
See page 5–43.
5
S6 SETPOINTS
RTD TEMPERATURE
LOCAL RTD PROTECTION
REMOTE RTD PROTECTN
OPEN RTD ALARM
SHORT/LOW RTD ALARM
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS
S7 SETPOINTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
UNDERVOLTAGE
OVERVOLTAGE
PHASE REVERSAL
UNDERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQUENCY
5-2
369 Motor Management Relay
See page 5–44.
See page 5–45.
See page 5–48.
See page 5–48.
See page 5–48.
See page 5–49.
See page 5–50.
See page 5–50.
See page 5–51.
See page 5–52.
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
S8 SETPOINTS
POWER ELEMENTS
5.1 OVERVIEW
LEAD POWER FACTOR
LAG POWER FACTOR
See page 5–55.
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
POWER (kvar)
See page 5–56.
REVERSE POWER
SPARE SWITCH
EMERGENCY RESTART
DIFFERENTIAL
SPEED SWITCH
REMOTE RESET
S10 SETPOINTS
ANALOG OUTPUTS
See page 5–54.
POSITIVE REACTIVE
POWER (kvar)
UNDERPOWER
S9 SETPOINTS
DIGITAL INPUTS
See page 5–54.
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
See page 5–56.
See page 5–57.
See page 5–60.
See page 5–60.
See page 5–61.
5
See page 5–61.
See page 5–61.
See page 5–62.
ANALOG OUTPUT 2
ANALOG OUTPUT 3
ANALOG OUTPUT 4
S11 SETPOINTS
369 TESTING
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
See page 5–63.
See page 5–63.
5-3
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
5.2S1 369 SETUP
5.2.1 SETPOINT ACCESS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP Ø SETPOINT ACCESS
SETPOINT ACCESS
FRONT PANEL ACCESS:
Read & Write
Range: Read Only, Read & Write
COMM ACCESS
Read & Write
Range: Read Only, Read & Write
ENCRYPTED COMM
PASSCODE: AIKFBAIK
Range: 8 alphabetic characters
There are two levels of access security: “Read Only” and “Read & Write”. The access terminals (57 and 58) must be
shorted to gain read/write access via the front panel. The FRONT PANEL ACCESS setpoint indicates the access level based
on the condition of the access switch. If set to “Read Only”, setpoints and actual values may be viewed but, not changed. If
set to “Read & Write”, actual values may be viewed and setpoints changed and stored.
Communication access can be changed with EnerVista 369 Setup via the Setpoint > S1 Setup menu. An access tab is
shown only when communicating with the relay. To set a password, click the Change Password button, then enter and verify the new passcode. After a passcode is entered, setpoint access changes to “Read Only”. When setpoints are changed
through EnerVista 369 Setup during read-only access, the passcode must be entered to store the new setpoint. To allow
extended write access, click Allow Write Access and enter the passcode. To return the access level to read-only, click
Restrict Write Access. Access automatically reverts to read-only after 30 minutes of inactivity or if control power is cycled.
If the access level is Read/Write, write access to setpoints is automatic and a 0 password need not be entered. If the password is not known, consult the factory service department with the ENCRYPTED COMM PASSCODE value to be decoded.
5
5.2.2 DISPLAY PREFERENCES
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØ DISPLAY PREFERENCES
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
DEFAULT MESSAGE
CYCLE TIME: 20 s
Range: 5 to 100 s in steps of 1
DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT:
145
Range: 1 to 254
Display darkens as number is increased.
FLASH MESSAGE
DURATION: 2s
Range: 1 to 10 s in steps of 1
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY:
Celsius
Range: Celsius, Fahrenheit
Shown if option R installed or RRTD added
ENERGY UNIT DISPLAY:
Mega
Range: Mega, Kilo
Shown only if option M or B installed
If no keys are pressed for the time defined by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT, the 369 automatically displays a series of
default messages. This time can be modified to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough during programming
or reading of actual values. Each default message remains on the screen for the default message cycle time.
The contrast of the LCD display can be changed for different lighting conditions. If the display is unreadable (dark or light)
press the [HELP] key for 2 seconds. This will put the relay in manual contrast adjustment mode. Use the value up or down
keys to adjust the contrast level. Press the [ENTER] key when complete.
Flash messages are status, warning, error or information messages displayed for several seconds in response to certain
key presses during setpoint programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
Temperatures may be displayed in either Celsius or Fahrenheit degrees. RTD setpoints are programmed in Celsius only.
The energy units for watthours and varhours can be viewed in either “Mega” (MWh or Mvarh) or “Kilo” (kWh or kvarh) units.
Both registers accumulate energy regardless of the preference set.
5-4
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5.2.3 369 COMMUNICATIONS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØ 369 COMMUNICATIONS
369 COMMUNICATIONS
GE Multilin
SLAVE ADDRESS:
254
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
COMPUTER RS232
BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud
Range: 4800, 9600, 19200
COMPUTER RS232
PARITY: None
Range: None, Odd, Even
CHANNEL 1 RS485
BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
CHANNEL 1 RS485
PARITY: None
Range: None, Odd, Even
CHANNEL 2: RS485
BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
CHANNEL 2: RS485
PARITY: None
Range: None, Odd, Even
CHANNEL 3
APPLICATION: Modbus
Range: Modbus, RRTD
CHANNEL 3
CONNECTION: RS485
Range: RS485, Fiber.
Only shown if option F is installed.
CHANNEL 3 RS485
BAUD RATE: 19200 Baud
Range: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
CHANNEL 3 RS485
PARITY: None
Range: None, Odd, Even
RRTD #1 ADDRESS:
RRTD not available
Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1 or RRTD not available
RRTD #2 ADDRESS:
RRTD not available
Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1 or RRTD not available
RRTD #3 ADDRESS:
RRTD not available
Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1 or RRTD not available
RRTD #4 ADDRESS:
RRTD not available
Range: 0 to 254 in steps of 1 or RRTD not available
PROFIBUS ADDRESS:
125
Range: 1 to 126 in steps of 1
Only in models with Profibus (Option P or P1)
PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN
DATA: Default Map
Range: 0 (use Default Input Data Map) to 110 registers
Only in models with Profibus-DPV1 (option P1)
RESET PROFIBUS COMMS
INTERFACE: No
Range: No, Yes
Only in models with Profibus (Option P or P1)
IP ADDRESS OCTET 1:
127
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
IP ADDRESS OCTET 2:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
369 Motor Management Relay
5
5-5
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5
5 SETPOINTS
IP ADDRESS OCTET 3:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
IP ADDRESS OCTET 4:
1
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
SUBNET MASK OCTET 1:
255
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
SUBNET MASK OCTET 2:
255
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
SUBNET MASK OCTET 3:
255
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
SUBNET MASK OCTET 4:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
GATEWAY ADD. OCTET 1:
127
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
GATEWAY ADD. OCTET 2:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
GATEWAY ADD. OCTET 3:
0
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
GATEWAY ADD. OCTET 4:
1
Range: 0 to 255 in steps of 1
Shown only with Modbus/TCP (Option E)
DEVICENET MAC ID:
63
Range: 0 to 63 in steps of 1
Shown only with DeviceNet (Option D)
DEVICENET BAUD RATE:
125 kbps
Range: 125, 250, 500 kbps
Shown only with DeviceNet (Option D)
The 369 is equipped with four independent serial ports. The RS232 port is for local use and responds regardless of the programmed slave address; the rear RS485 communication ports are addressed. If an RRTD module is used in conjunction
with the 369, channel 3 must be used for communication between the two devices and the CHANNEL 3 APPLICATION setpoint must be set to “RRTD” (note that the corresponding RRTD setting must be set to “Modbus”). A fiber optic port (option
F) may be ordered for channel 3. If the channel 3 fiber optic port is used, the channel 3 RS485 connection is disabled.
The RS232 port may be connected to a personal computer running EnerVista 369 Setup. This may be used for downloading and uploading setpoints files, viewing actual values, and upgrading the 369 firmware. See Section 4.2: EnerVista 369
Setup Interface on page 4–3 for details on using EnerVista 369 Setup.
The RS485 ports support a subset of the Modbus RTU protocol. Each port must have a unique address between 1 and
254. Address 0 is the broadcast address listened to by all relays. Addresses need not be sequential; however, no two
devices can have the same address. Generally, each addition to the link uses the next higher address, starting at 1. A maximum of 32 devices can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 ports. A repeater may be
used to allow more than 32 relays on a single link.
Either Profibus-DP or Profibus-DPV1 communications are supported with the optional Profibus protocol interface (option P
or P1). The bus address of the Profibus-DP/V1 node is set with the PROFIBUS ADDRESS setpoint, with an address range
from 1 to 126. Address 126 is used only for commissioning purposes and should not be used to exchange user data. The
RESET PROFIBUS COMMS INTERFACE setpoint command resets the Profibus module. This allows the Profibus module to
be reset if the Profibus module stops communicating with the Profibus master, without having to shut down the motor and
cycle power to the relay.
The Modbus/TCP protocol is also supported with the optional Modbus/TCP protocol interface (option E). For more information, refer to Section 9.1.4: Modbus Communications on page 9–2.
5-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
The DeviceNet protocol is supported with the optional DeviceNet communication interface (option D), and is certified as
ODVA DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™. The DEVICENET MAC ID sets the MAC ID with a range from 0 to 63. The
DEVICENET BAUD RATE selects a baud rate of 125, 250, or 500 kbps. DeviceNet communications must be stopped before
changing DeviceNet setpoints. There will be a delay of 5 to 6 seconds for the new DeviceNet settings to take effect.
5.2.4 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØ REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK
SET MONTH [1...12]:
09
Range: 1 to 12 in steps of 1
SET DAY [1...31]:
01
Range: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
SET YEAR[1998...2097]:
2005
Range: 1998 to 2097 in steps of 1
SET HOUR [0...23]:
00
Range: 0 to 23 in steps of 1
SET MINUTE [0...59]:
00
Range: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
SET SECOND [0...59]:
00
Range: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
The time/date stamp is used to track events for diagnostic purposes. The date and time are preset but may be changed
manually. A battery backed internal clock runs continuously even when power is off. It has the same accuracy as an electronic watch approximately ±1 minute per month. It may be periodically corrected either manually through the keypad or via
the clock update command over the serial link using EnerVista 369 Setup.
Enter the current date using two digits for the month and day, and four digits for the year. For example, enter September 1,
2005 as “09 01 2005". If entered from the keypad, the new date takes effect the moment [ENTER] is pressed. Set the time
by using two digits for the hour (in 24 hour time), minutes, and seconds. If entered from the keypad, the new time takes
effect the moment the [ENTER] key is pressed.
If the serial communication link is used, then all the relays can keep time in synchronization with each other. A new clock
time is pre-loaded into the memory map via the communications port by a remote computer to each relay connected on the
communications channel. The computer broadcasts (address 0) a “set clock” command to all relays. Then all relays in the
system begin timing at the exact same instant. There can be up to 100 ms of delay in receiving serial commands so the
clock time in each relay is ±100 ms, ± the absolute clock accuracy, in the PLC or PC (see Chapter 9: Communications for
information on programming the time and synchronizing commands.)
5.2.5 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØØ WAVEFORM CAPTURE
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
TRIGGER POSITION:
50 %
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
Waveform capture records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as contextual information at the point
of trigger. These records are triggered by trip functions, digital input set to capture or via the EnerVista 369 Setup software.
Multiple waveforms are captured simultaneously for each record: Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Va, Vb, and Vc.
The trigger position is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, etc.). The trigger position determines the number of pre- and post-fault cycles to divide the record. The relay sampling rate is 16 samples per cycle.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-7
5
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
5.2.6 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØØØ EVENT RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
MOTOR RUNNING
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
MOTOR STOPPED
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
See 6.6.1 Event Records on page 6–16 for details on viewing the event recorder.
5.2.7 MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØØØØ MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
5
Text 1
Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters
Text 2
Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters
Text 3
Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters
Text 4
Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters
Text 5
Range: 2 x 20 alphanumeric characters
Five 40-character message screens can be programmed. These messages may be notes that pertain to the 369 installation. This can be useful for reminding operators of certain tasks.
5.2.8 DEFAULT MESSAGES
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØØØØØ DEFAULT MESSAGES
DEFAULT MESSAGES
5-8
DEFAULT TO CURRENT
METERING: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO MOTOR
LOAD: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO DELTA
VOLTAGE METERING: No
Range: Yes, No
Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO POWER
FACTOR: No
Range: Yes, No
Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO POSITIVE
WATTHOURS: No
Range: Yes, No
Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO REAL
POWER: No
Range: Yes, No
Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO REACTIVE
POWER: No
Range: Yes, No
Only shown if option M installed
DEFAULT TO HOTTEST
STATOR RTD: No
Range: Yes, No. Only shown if option R or RRTD is
installed. Indicates stator no. local to 369 only.
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
DEFAULT TO TEXT
MESSAGE 1: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO TEXT
MESSAGE 2: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO TEXT
MESSAGE 3: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO TEXT
MESSAGE 4: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO TEXT
MESSAGE 5: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO HOTTEST
STATOR RTD TEMP: No
Range: Yes, No
DEFAULT TO UNBALANCE
BIASED MTR LOAD: No
Range: Yes, No. Shown only if unbalance biasing is
enabled in the Thermal Model.
The 369 displays a series of default messages. These default messages appear after the value for the DEFAULT MESSAGE
CYCLE TIME expires and there are no active trips, alarms or start inhibits. See Section 5.2.2: Display Preferences on page
5–4 for details on setting time delays and message durations. The default messages can be selected from the list above
including the five user definable messages from the message scratchpad.
5.2.9 CLEAR/PRESET DATA
5
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØØØØØØ CLEAR/PRESET DATA
CLEAR/PRESET DATA
CLEAR ALL DATA:
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR LAST TRIP
DATA: No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR TRIP
COUNTERS: No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR EVENT
RECORD: No
Range: No, Yes
Clears all 250 events
CLEAR RTD
MAXIMUMS: No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR PEAK DEMAND
DATA: No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR MOTOR
DATA: No
Range: No, Yes. Clears learned motor data, last starting
current, last starting thermal capacity, last
acceleration time, and motor statistics.
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR ENERGY DATA:
NO
GE Multilin
PRESET MWh:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 MWh in steps of 1
Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
PRESET POSITIVE
Mvarh: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh in steps of 1
Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
PRESET NEGATIVE
Mvarh: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh in steps of 1
Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
369 Motor Management Relay
5-9
5.2 S1 369 SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
PRESET DIGITAL
COUNTER: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Can be preset or cleared by storing 0
These commands may be used to clear various historical data. This is useful on new installations or to preset information
on existing installations where new equipment has been installed. The PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER setpoint appears only if
one of the digital inputs has been configured as a digital input counter.
Presetting the energy data is only available for “Mega” units. When these are preset, the corresponding “Kilo” data will be
preset to zero.
5.2.10 MODIFY OPTIONS
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØØØØØØØ MODIFY OPTIONS
MODIFY OPTIONS
5
ENABLE LOCAL RTD?
Yes
Range: No, Yes
METERING/BACKSPIN:
Metering
Range: No, Metering, Backspin
ENABLE FIBER OPTIC?
No
Range: No, Yes
ENABLE ETHERNET?
No
Range: No, Yes
ENABLE PROFIBUS-DP?
No
Range: No, Yes
ENABLE PROFIBUS-DPV1?
No
Range: No, Yes
ENABLE DEVICENET?
No
Range: No, Yes
ENABLE HARSH ENV.?
No
Range: No, Yes
ENTER PASSCODE:
Range: Press the [ENTER] key to begin text editing
MODIFY OPTIONS?
No
Range: No, Yes
This page allows the user to modify relay options directly from the front keypad.
5.2.11 FACTORY SERVICE
PATH: S1 369 SETUP ØØØØØØØØØØØ FACTORY SERVICE
FACTORY SERVICE
FACTORY SERVICE
PASSCODE: 0
Range: 0 to 65535
This page is for use by GE Multilin personnel for testing and calibration purposes
5-10
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The system setup setpoints are critical to the operation of the 369 protective and metering features and elements. Most
protective elements are based on the information input for the CT/VT Setup and Output Relay Setup. Additional monitoring
alarms and control functions of the relay are also set here.
5.3.2 CT/VT SETUP
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP
CT/VT SETUP
PHASE CT PRIMARY:
500
Range: 1 to 5000 in steps of 1
MOTOR FLA:
10
Range: 1 to 5000 in steps of 1
GROUND CT TYPE:
5
Range: None, 5A secondary, 1A secondary, 50:0.025
GROUND CT PRIMARY:
100
Range: 1 to 5000 in steps of 1
Only shown for 5A and 1A secondary CT
VT CONNECTION TYPE:
None
Range: None, Open Delta, Wye
Only shown if option M or B installed
VT RATIO:
35:1
Range: 1.00:1 to 240.00:1
Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None
MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE:
4160
Range: 100 to 20000 in steps of 1
Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
60 Hz
Range: 50 Hz, 60 Hz, Variable
SYSTEM PHASE
SEQUENCE: ABC
Range: ABC, ACB
Not shown if VT Connection Type set to None
•
PHASE CT PRIMARY: Enter the phase CT primary here. The phase CT secondary (1 A or 5A) is determined by terminal connection to the 369. The phase CT should be chosen such that the motor FLA is between 50% and 100% of the
phase CT primary. Ideally the motor FLA should be as close to 100% of phase CT primary as possible, never more.
The phase CT class or type should also be chosen such that the CT can handle the maximum potential fault current
with the attached burden without having its output saturate. Information on how to determine this if required is available
in Section 7.4: CT Specification and Selection on page 7–7.
•
MOTOR FLA: The motor FLA (full load amps or full load current) must be entered. This value may be taken from the
motor nameplate or motor data sheets.
•
GROUND CT TYPE and GROUND CT PRIMARY: The GROUND CT TYPE and GROUND CT PRIMARY (if 5 A or 1 A
secondary) must be entered here. For high resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with
the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly or low resistance grounded systems where fault current can be quite high, a 1 A or 5 A CT
should be used for either zero-sequence (core balance) or residual ground sensing. If a residual connection is used
with the phase CTs, the phase CT primary must also be entered for the ground CT primary. As with the phase CTs the
type of ground CT should be chosen to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.
•
VT CONNECTION TYPE, VT RATIO, and MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE: These voltage related setpoints are visible
only if the 369 has metering installed.
The manner in which the voltage transformers are connected must be entered here or none if VTs are not used. The
VT turns ratio must be chosen such that the secondary voltage of the VTs is between 1 and 240 V when the primary is
at motor nameplate voltage. All voltage protection features are programmed as a percent of motor nameplate or rated
voltage which represents the rated motor design voltage line to line.
For example: If the motor nameplate voltage is 4160 V and the VTs are 4160/120 open-delta, program VT CONNECTION TYPE to “Open Delta”, VT RATIO to “34.67:1”, and MOTOR RATED VOLTAGE to “4160 V”.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-11
5
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
•
5 SETPOINTS
NOMINAL FREQUENCY: Enter the nominal system frequency here.
The 369 has variable frequency functionality when the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is set to “Variable”. All of the elements
function in the same manner with the exception of the voltage and power elements, which work properly if the voltage
waveform is approximately sinusoidal. When using a pulse width modulate drive, and an unfiltered voltage waveform is
present, the unit will not be able to accurately measure voltage, but an approximately sinusoidal current waveform can
be measured accurately. If the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is set to “Variable”, the filtering algorithm could increase the trip
and alarm times for the undervoltage and underfrequency elements by up to 270 ms. If the level exceeds the threshold
by a significant amount, trip and alarm times will decrease until they match the programmed delay. The exceptions to
this increased time are the short circuit and ground fault elements, which will trip as per specification.
Note that when the NOMINAL FREQUENCY setting is “Variable”, the element pickup levels and timing are based on the
measured values of the 369.
Frequency is normally determined from the Va voltage input. If however this voltage drops below the minimum voltage
threshold the Ia current input will be used.
•
SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE: If the phase sequence for a given system is ACB rather than the standard ABC the
phase sequence may be changed. This setpoint allows the 369 to properly calculate phase reversal and power quantities and is only visible if the 369 has metering installed.
5.3.3 MONITORING SETUP
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØ MONITORING SETUP
MONITORING SETUP
5
TRIP COUNTER
STARTER FAILURE
CURRENT DEMAND
kW DEMAND
kvar DEMAND
kVA DEMAND
SELF TEST MODE
5-12
See below.
See page 5–13.
See page 5–14.
See page 5–14.
See page 5–14.
See page 5–14.
See page 5–15.
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
b) TRIP COUNTER
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØ MONITORING SETUP Ø TRIP COUNTER
TRIP COUNTER
TRIP COUNTER
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM
RELAYS: Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
ALARM PICKUP LEVEL:
25 Trips
Range: 1 to 50000 in steps of 1
TRIP COUNTER ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
When the Trip Counter is enabled and the alarm pickup level is reached, an alarm will occur. To reset the alarm the trip
counter must be cleared (see Section 5.2.9: Clear/Preset Data on page 5–9 for details) or the pickup level increased and
the reset key pressed (if a latched alarm).
The trip counter alarm can be used to monitor and alarm when a predefined number of trips occur. This would then prompt
the operator or supervisor to investigate the causes of the trips that have occurred. Details of individual trip counters can be
found in the Motor Statistics section of Actual Values page 4 (see Section 6.5.2: Motor Statistics on page 6–15).
c) STARTER FAILURE
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØ MONITORING SETUP ØØ STARTER FAILURE
STARTER FAILURE
STARTER FAILURE
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
STARTER TYPE:
Breaker
Range: Breaker, Contactor
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
STARTER FAILURE
DELAY: 100 ms
Range: 10 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
STARTER FAILURE
ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
5
If the Starter Failure alarm feature is enabled, any time the 369 initiates a trip, the 369 will monitor the Starter Status input (if
assigned to “Spare Switch” in S9 DIGITAL INPUTS) and the motor current. If the starter status contacts do not change state
or motor current does not drop to zero after the programmed time delay, an alarm will occur. The time delay should be
slightly longer than the breaker or contactor operating time. In the event that an alarm does occur, and Breaker was chosen
as the starter type, the alarm will be Breaker Failure. If on the other hand, Contactor was chosen for starter type, the alarm
will be Welded Contactor.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-13
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
d) DEMAND
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØ MONITORING SETUP ØØØ CURRENT DEMAND
CURRENT DEMAND
kW DEMAND
5
kvar DEMAND
kVA DEMAND
5-14
CURRENT DEMAND
PERIOD: 15 min
Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1
CURRENT DEMAND
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
CURRENT DEMAND ALARM
LIMIT: 100 A
Range: 0 to 65000 A in steps of 1
CURRENT DEMAND ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
kW DEMAND
PERIOD: 15 min
Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1
kW DEMAND
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
kW DEMAND ALARM
LIMIT: 100 kW
Range: 1 to 50000 kW in steps of 1
kW DEMAND ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
kvar DEMAND
PERIOD: 15 min
Range: 5 to 90 min. in steps of 1
kvar DEMAND
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
kvar DEMAND ALARM
LIMIT: 100 kvar
Range: 1 to 50000 kvar in steps of 1
kvar DEMAND ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
kVA DEMAND
PERIOD: 15 min
Range: 5 to 90 min in steps of 1
kVA DEMAND
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
kVA DEMAND ALARM
LIMIT: 100 kVA
Range: 1 to 50000 kVA in steps of 1
kVA DEMAND ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
The 369 can measure the demand of the motor for several parameters (current, kW, kvar, kVA). The demand values may
be of interest for energy management programs where processes may be altered or scheduled to reduce overall demand
on a feeder. An alarm will occur if the limit of any of the enabled demand elements is reached.
Demand is calculated in the following manner. Every minute, an average magnitude is calculated for current, +kW, +kvar,
and kVA based on samples taken every 5 seconds. These values are stored in a FIFO (First In, First Out buffer). The size
of the buffer is determined by the period selected for the setpoint. The average value of the buffer contents is calculated
and stored as the new demand value every minute. Demand for real and reactive power is only positive quantities (+kW
and +kvar).
1
DEMAND = ---N
N
∑
Average ( n )
(EQ 5.1)
n=1
where: N = programmed demand period in minutes and n = time in minutes.
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
5
0
t=0
t+10
t+20
t+30
t+40
t+50
t+60
t+70
t+80
t+90
t+100
TIME
Figure 5–1: ROLLING DEMAND (15 MINUTE WINDOW)
e) SELF-TEST RELAY ASSIGNMENT
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØ MONITORING SETUP ØØØØØØØ SELF TEST MODE
SELF TEST MODE
ASSIGN SERVICE RELAY:
None
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
these
The 369 performs self-diagnostics of the hardware circuitry. The relay programmed as the Self-Test relay activates upon a
failure of any self-diagnostic tests.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-15
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
5.3.4 BLOCK FUNCTIONS
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØØ BLOCK FUNCTIONS
BLOCK FUNCTIONS
5
LOG BLOCKING EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
BLOCK UC/UPWR (37)
Not Blocked
Block Undercurrent and Underpower
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
BLOCK CURR UNBAL (46)
Not Blocked
Block Current Unbalance
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
BLOCK INC SEQ (48)
Not Blocked
Block Incomplete Sequence
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
BLOCK THERM MOD (49)
Not Blocked
Block Thermal Model
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
BLOCK SHORT CCT (50)
Not Blocked
Block Short Circuit and Backup
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
BLOCK O/L ALARM (51)
Not Blocked
Block Overload Alarm
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
BLOCK GND FLT (51G)
Not Blocked
Block Ground Fault
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
BLOCK STARTS/HR (66)
Not Blocked
Block Starts Per Hour and Time Between Starts
Range: Blocked, Not Blocked
The block functions feature allows the user to block any of the protection functions through the following methods:
1.
Modbus command 20.
2.
Profibus-DPV1 acyclical communication (refer to Chapter 9 for additional details).
3.
Modbus setpoints.
4.
The front panel interface.
The protection functions that can be blocked are indicated by ANSI/IEEE device number in the table below.
DEVICE
DESCRIPTION
37
Undercurrent/underpower
46
Current unbalance
48
Incomplete sequence
49
Thermal model
50
Short circuit and backup
51
Overload alarm
51G
Ground fault
66
Starts per hour / time between starts
Blocking a protection function is essentially the same as disabling it. If the protection function is blocked and a situation
occurs where it would have been activated (if enabled), no indication will be given and no events are recorded. If the protection function has picked up and/or is timing out, the internal timers will be reset to zero.
If the LOG BLOCKING EVENTS setpoint is enabled, an event will be stored indicating when a function changes from being
blocked to unblocked, or vice versa.
5-16
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.5 OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØØØ OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
TRIP RELAY RESET
MODE: All Resets
Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
TRIP RELAY
OPERATION: FS
Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)
AUX1 RELAY RESET
MODE: All Resets
Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
AUX1 RELAY
OPERATION: NFS
Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)
AUX2 RELAY RESET
MODE: All Resets
Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
AUX2 RELAY
OPERATION: NFS
Range: FS (=failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)
ALARM RELAY RESET
MODE: All Resets
Range: All Resets, Remote Only, Local Only
ALARM RELAY
OPERATION: NFS
Range: FS (failsafe), NFS (=non-failsafe)
A latched relay (caused by a protective elements alarm or trip) may be reset at any time, providing that the condition that
caused the relay operation is no longer present. Unlatched elements will automatically reset when the condition that
caused them has cleared. Reset location is defined in the following table.
RESET MODE
RESET PERFORMED VIA
All Resets
keypad, digital input, communications
Remote Only
digital input, communications
Local Only
keypad
The TRIP OPERATION, AUX1 OPERATION, AUX2 OPERATION, and ALARM OPERATION setpoints allow the choice of relay
output operation to fail-safe or non-failsafe. Relay latchcode however, is defined individually for each protective element.
Failsafe operation causes the output relay to be energized in its normal state and de-energized when activated by a protection element. A failsafe relay will also change state (if not already activated by a protection element) when control power is
removed from the 369. Conversely a non-failsafe relay is de-energized in its normal non-activated state and will not change
state when control power is removed from the 369 (if not already activated by a protection element).
The choice of failsafe or non-failsafe operation is usually determined by the motor’s application. In situations where the process is more critical than the motor, non-failsafe operation is typically programmed. In situations where the motor is more
critical than the process, failsafe operation is programmed.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-17
5
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
5.3.6 CONTROL FUNCTIONS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØØØØ CONTROL FUNCTIONS
CONTROL FUNCTIONS
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
CONTROL
REDUCED VOLTAGE
AUTORESTART
FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
See below.
See page 5–18.
See page 5–20.
See page 5–23.
b) SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØØØØ CONTROL FUNCTIONS Ø SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL
SERIAL COMMUNICATION
CONTROL
5
SERIAL COM CONTROL
CONTROL - Off
Range: On, Off
ASSIGN START
CONTROL RELAYS: Aux1
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations of
them
If enabled, the motor can be remotely started and stopped via Modbus® communications. Refer to the Modbus Protocol
Reference Guide (available from the Modbus website at http://www.modbus.org) for details on sending commands (Function Code 5). When a Stop command is sent the Trip relay will activate for 1 second to complete the trip coil circuit for a
breaker application or break the coil circuit for a contactor application. When a Start command is issued the relay assigned
for starting control will activate for 1 second to complete the close coil circuit for a breaker application or complete the coil
circuit for a contactor application.
The Serial Communication Control functions can also be used to reset the relay and activate a waveform capture. Refer to
the Modbus Protocol Reference Guide (available from the Modbus website at http://www.modbus.org) for more information.
c) REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØØØØ CONTROL FUNCTIONS ØØ REDUCED VOLTAGE
REDUCED VOLTAGE
5-18
REDUCED VOLTAGE
CONTROL: Off
Range: On, Off
ASSIGN START CONTROL
RELAYS: None
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, Alarm & Aux1, Alarm &
Aux2, Aux1 & Aux2, Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2
START CONTROL RELAY
TIMER: 1.0 s
Range: 1.0 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.5
TRANSITION ON:
Current Only
Range: Current Only, Current or Timer, Current and
Timer
REDUCED VOLTAGE
START LEVEL: 100%FLA
Range: 25 to 300% FLA in steps of 1
REDUCED VOLTAGE
START TIMER: 200 s
Range: 1 to 500 s in steps of 1
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, Trip & Aux1, Trip & Aux2,
Aux1 & Aux2, Trip & Aux1&Aux2
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
The 369 is capable of controlling the transition of a reduced voltage starter from reduced to full voltage. That transition may
be based on “Current Only”, “Current and Timer”, or “Current or Timer” (whichever comes first). When the 369 measures
the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current, a 'Start' is assumed to be occurring (typically current will
rise quickly to a value in excess of FLA, e.g. 3 x FLA). At this point, the REDUCED VOLTAGE START TIMER will be initialized
with the programmed value in seconds.
•
If "Current Only" is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level, transition will be initiated by activating the assigned output relay for the time programmed in the START CONTROL RELAY TIMER setpoint.
If the timer expires before that transition is initiated, an Incomplete Sequence Trip will occur activating the assigned trip
relay(s).
•
If "Current or Timer" is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level, transition will be
initiated by activating the assigned output relay for the time programmed in the START CONTROL RELAY TIMER setpoint. If the timer expires before that transition is initiated, the transition will be initiated regardless.
•
If “Current and Timer” is selected, when the motor current falls below the programmed Transition Level and the timer
expires, transition will be initiated by activating the assigned output relay for the time programmed in the START CONTROL RELAY TIMER setpoint. If the timer expires before current falls below the Transition Level, an Incomplete
Sequence Trip will occur activating the assigned trip relay(s).
369
BLOCK TRIP
START
STOP
CC1
369
Aux
REDUCED VOLTAGE
CONTACTOR
CC1 SEAL-IN
5
CC2
CC2 SEAL-IN
Figure 5–2: REDUCED VOLTAGE START CONTACTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
motor
current
(% FLA)
When the current falls below the transition
level and/or the timer expires, the auxiliary relay
activates for the time programmed in
the START CONTROL RELAY TIMER setpoint
3 × FLA
Transition
level
FLA
time
Transition time
signifies
Open Transition
840836A1.CDR
Figure 5–3: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CURRENT CHARACTERISTIC
NOTE
If this feature is used, the Starter Status Switch input must be either from a common control contact or a parallel
combination of Auxiliary ‘a’ contacts or a series combination of Auxiliary ‘b’ contacts from the reduced voltage contactor and the full voltage contactor. Once transition is initiated, the 369 will assume the motor is still running for at
least 2 seconds. This will prevent the 369 from recognizing an additional start if motor current goes to zero during
an open transition.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-19
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
51
51
52
52
Figure 5–4: REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY A/B STATUS INPUTS
d) AUTORESTART
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØØØØ CONTROL FUNCTIONS ØØØ AUTORESTART
AUTORESTART
5
AUTORESTART ENABLED:
No
Range: Yes, No
TOTAL RESTARTS:
1
Range: 0 to 65000 in steps of 1
RESTART
DELAY: 0 s
Range: 0 to 20000 s in steps of 1
PROGRESSIVE
DELAY: 0 s
Range: 0 to 20000 s in steps of 1
HOLD
DELAY: 0 s
Range: 0 to 20000 s in steps of 1
BUS VALID ENABLED:
No
Range: Yes, No
BUS VALID LEVEL:
100%
Range: 15 to 100% of Motor Rated Voltage in steps of 1
AUTORESTART ATTEMPT
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
AUTORESTART SUCCESS
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
AUTORESTART ABORTED
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
The 369 can be configured to automatically restart the motor after it tripped on system or process related disturbances,
such as an undervoltage or an overload. This feature is useful in remote unmanned pumping applications. Before using
autorestart, the feature must be enabled, the required restart time after a trip programmed, and an output contact configured to initiate the autorestart by closing the circuit breaker or contactor. This output contact can also be wired with OR logic
in the start circuit of the motor.
To prevent the possibility of closing onto a fault upon autorestarting, this feature is not allowed for all trips. The 369 never
attempts an autorestart after Short Circuit or Ground Fault trips. Furthermore, only one autorestart is attempted after an
Overload trip, provided that Single Shot Restart is enabled, which allows a single restart attempt. The thermal capacity is
cleared to prevent another overload trip during this start and if the 369 trips again (second time) on Overload the autorestarting is aborted. Any normal manual starting will probably be inhibited, (lockout time) allowing the motor to cool (thermal
capacity to decay) before permitting another start.
The trip relay should reset before closing the auto-restart contact to allow the breaker or contactor to close. This is done by
programming S2 SYSTEM SETUP ÖØ OUPUT RELAY SETUP ÖØ TRIP RESET MODE to “Remote Only” or “All Resets”. The
close contact selection is enabled by setting the S2 SYSTEM SETUP ÖØ CONTROL FUNCTIONS ÖØ SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL ÖØ SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL setpoint to “On” and selecting the desired output contact.
5-20
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
The 369 follows the logic shown in Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC on page 5–22 to determine restart conditions. The
total autorestart delay comprises the sum of three delays: Restart Delay, Progressive Delay, and Hold Delay. If any of these
are not required, the autorestart delay can be set to zero.
Total Delay = Restart Delay + (auto-restarts number x Progressive Delay) + Hold Delay
The Restart Delay controls the basic auto-restart time and the timer start when the motor tripped. The Progressive Delay
increases each consecutive auto-restart delay with its set amount. For example, assume that Restart Delay, Progressive
Delay, and Hold Delay are 1, 3, and 0 seconds respectively. Therefore the fifth autorestart waiting time is:
1 sec. + 5th auto-restart × 3 sec. + 0 sec. = 1 sec. + 5 x 3 sec. = 16 sec.
The number of autorestarts is limited by the TOTAL RESTARTS setting to a maximum of 65000. Once this is exceeded, the
369 blocks further autorestarts until it is reset, either manually or remotely. This limit does not affect normal starting. Please
note that 65000 autorestarts implies the motor has been tripped that many times and inspection or maintenance is probably
due. The vendor's suggested number of circuit breaker or contactor operations before maintenance can affect this setting.
The Hold Delay sequentially staggers auto-restarts for multiple motors on a bus. For example, if four motors on a bus have
settings of 60, 120, 180, and 240 seconds, respectively, it is advantageous, after a common fault that trips all four motors,
to autorestart at 60 second intervals to minimize voltage sag and overloading
The presence of healthy bus voltage prior to the auto-restart can be verified by enabling the Bus Valid feature. The BUS
VALID LEVEL setting is the voltage level below which autorestart is not to be attempted. The 369 checks the BUS VALID
LEVEL just before the autorestart to allow the bus voltage to recover. This setpoint is only available if the Metering Option
(M) or Backspin Option (B) is enabled.
Five different types of “Autorestart Aborted” events have been provided to help in troubleshooting. The following flowchart
shows the logic flow of the Autorestart algorithm. Each type of Autorestart Aborted event and where it occurs within the
logic flow is indicated in this diagram. For example, if an “Autorestart Aborted1” event is recorded in the event recorder, the
logic diagram immediately indicates that the abort cause was the number of restart attempts being more than the MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF RESTARTS setpoint.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-21
5
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETPOINTS
Motor Running
No
Trip
Yes
AutoRestart
Enabled
Reset Attempt
No
Yes
Change Trip Contact
State
No
Yes
Cause of Trip NOT
Short Circuit or
Ground Fault
No
Yes
5
Cause of Trip =
Thermal Overload
Restart Attempts
> Max Restarts
Setting
No
Autorestart Aborted 1
Event
Yes
No
Yes
Autorestart_Delay =
(Restart Attempts x
Progressive Timer Delay)+
Restart Delay +
Hold Timer Delay
One Shot Restart On
Overload Enabled
Abort Restart
No
Yes
Autorestart Aborted 2
Event
Yes
AutoRestart Delay
Active
Autorestart Aborted 4
Event
Abort Restart
No
Bus Valid Enabled
Second Attempt on
Overload Restart
No
Yes
No
Any Trip Active
Abort Restart
No
Autorestart Aborted 5
Event
Yes
Any Trip Active
or Bus Invalid
No
Close Start Relay
Yes
Autorestart Aborted 3
Event
Yes
Abort Restart and load
Overload Start Inhibit
Timer
Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC
5-22
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.3 S2 SYSTEM SETUP
e) FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
PATH: S2 SYSTEM SETUP ØØØØØ CONTROL FUNCTIONS ØØØØ FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
ASSIGN COMMS FORCE
RELAYS: None
Range: None, Trip, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
of these.
TRIP COM FORCE O/P
TYPE: Latched
Range: Latched, Pulsed
TRIP PULSED OP DWELL
TIME: 0.5 s
Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if the
TRIP COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.
ALARM COM FORCE O/P
TYPE: Latched
Range: Latched, Pulsed
ALARM PULSED OP DWELL
TIME: 0.5 s
Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if the
ALARM COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.
AUX1 COM FORCE O/P
TYPE: Latched
Range: Latched, Pulsed
AUX1 PULSED OP DWELL
TIME: 0.5 s
Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if the
AUX1 COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.
AUX2 COM FORCE O/P
TYPE: Latched
Range: Latched, Pulsed
AUX2 PULSED OP DWELL
TIME: 0.5 s
Range: 0.5 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1. Only seen if the
AUX2 COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed”.
The force output relays function allows the user to energize and de-energize output relays via remote communications
(Modbus or Profibus-DVP1).
To allow the forcing of relay states, the ASSIGN COMMS FORCE RELAY setting must be programmed. Only relays assigned
under this setpoint can be forced through Modbus or Profibus-DPV1 communications.
Commands can be sent to energize or de-energize any of the four output relays. A bit value of “1” for the corresponding
relay will energize that relay; a bit value of “0” will de-energize that relay.
The COM FORCE O/P TYPE setting for each relay determines whether it remains latched in the state sent through the command, or whether it operates for a duration programmed in the associated PULSED OP DWELL TIME setting. If COM FORCE
O/P TYPE is “Latched”, the relay remains energized until a value of “0” for the relay has been sent through the command. If
COM FORCE O/P TYPE is “Pulsed” and a command is sent to energize the output relay while a pulse dwell timer from a previous command has not yet timed to zero, then the timer will reset back to the value of the corresponding PULSED OP
DWELL TIME setpoint and start counting down from this value.
If a relay state is programmed as “Latched” and forced through the force output relays function, the only way to de-energize
it is through another serial command or by cycling power to the 369.
NOTE
For safety reasons, if any of the relays in the S11 TESTING Ø TEST OUTPUT RELAYS section are programmed to any
value other than “Disabled” (i.e. energized or de-energized), then the force relays functionality through Modbus and
Profibus-DPV1 will be disabled.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-23
5
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5 SETPOINTS
5.4S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5.4.1 DESCRIPTION
Heat is one of the principle enemies of motor life. When a motor is specified, the purchaser communicates to the manufacturer what the loading conditions, duty cycle, environment and pertinent information about the driven load such as starting
torque. The manufacturer then provides a stock motor or builds a motor that should have a reasonable life under those conditions. The purchaser should request all safe stall, acceleration and running thermal limits for all motors they receive in
order to effectively program the 369.
Motor thermal limits are dictated by the design of the stator and the rotor. Motors have three modes of operation: locked
rotor or stall (rotor is not turning), acceleration (rotor is coming up to speed), and running (rotor turns at near synchronous
speed). Heating occurs in the motor during each of these conditions in very distinct ways. Typically, during motor starting,
locked rotor, and acceleration conditions, the motor is rotor limited. That is, the rotor approaches its thermal limit before the
stator. Under locked rotor conditions, voltage is induced in the rotor at line frequency, 50 or 60 Hz. This voltage causes a
current to flow in the rotor, also at line frequency, and the heat generated (I2R) is a function of the effective rotor resistance.
At 50/60 Hz, the rotor cage reactance causes the current to flow at the outer edges of the rotor bars. The effective resistance of the rotor is therefore at a maximum during a locked rotor condition as is rotor heating. When the motor is running
at rated speed, the voltage induced in the rotor is at a low frequency (approximately 1 Hz) and therefore, the effective resistance of the rotor is reduced quite dramatically. During running overloads, the motor thermal limit is typically dictated by stator parameters. Some special motors might be all stator or all rotor limited. During acceleration, the dynamic nature of the
motor slip dictates that rotor impedance is also dynamic, and a third overload thermal limit characteristic is necessary.
Typical thermal limit curves are shown below. The motor starting characteristic is shown for a high inertia load at 80% voltage. If the motor started quicker, the distinct characteristics of the thermal limit curves would not be required and the running overload curve would be joined with locked rotor safe stall times to produce a single overload curve.
400
5
HIGH
INERTIA
MOTOR
300
200
RUNNING OVERLOAD
100
80
A,B,AND C ARE THE
ACCELERATION THERMAL LIMIT
CURVES AT 100%, 90%, AND
80%VOLTAGE, REPECTIVELY
TIME-SECONDS
60
40
C
B
20
A
G
F
10
8
E
6
4
E,F, AND G ARE THE
SAFE STALL THERMAL LIMIT
TIMES AT 100%, 90%, AND
80%VOLTAGE, REPECTIVELY
2
1
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
% CURRENT
806827A1.CDR
Figure 5–6: TYPICAL TIME-CURRENT AND THERMAL LIMIT CURVES (ANSI/IEEE C37.96)
5-24
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5.4.2 THERMAL MODEL
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION Ø THERMAL MODEL
THERMAL MODEL
OVERLOAD PICKUP
LEVEL: 1.01 x FLA
Range: 1.01 to 1.25 in steps of 0.01
THERMAL CAPACITY
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TC ALARM
RELAYS: Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
TC ALARM LEVEL:
75 % Used
Range: 1 to 100% in steps of 1
THERMAL CAPACITY
ALARM EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
ASSIGN TC TRIP
RELAYS: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations of them
(TC trip always on and latched)
ENABLE UNBALANCE
BIAS OF TC: Off
Range: On, Off
UNBALANCE BIAS
K FACTOR: Learned
Range: Learned, 1 to 29 in steps of 1
Only shown if UNBALANCE BIAS is enabled
HOT/COLD SAFE STALL
RATIO: 1.00
Range: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
ENABLE LEARNED COOL
TIME: No
Range: No, Yes
RUNNING COOL TIME
CONSTANT: 15 min.
Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1
Not shown if LEARNED COOL TIME is enabled
STOPPED COOL TIME
CONSTANT: 30 min.
Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1
Not shown if Learned Cool time is enabled
ENABLE RTD BIASING:
No
Range: No, Yes
RTD BIAS MINIMUM:
40 °C
Range: 1 to RTD BIAS MID POINT
Only shown if RTD BIASING is enabled
RTD BIAS MID POINT:
120 °C
Range: RTD BIAS MINIMUM to MAXIMUM
Only shown if RTD BIASING is enabled
RTD BIAS MAXIMUM:
155 °C
Range: RTD BIAS MID POINT to 200
Only shown if RTD BIASING is enabled
MOTOR LOAD AVERAGING
INTERVAL: 3 cycles
Range: 3 to 60 cycles in steps of 3
5
The primary protective function of the 369 is the thermal model. It consists of five key elements: the overload curve and
pickup level, unbalance biasing, motor cooling time constants, and temperature biasing based on Hot/Cold motor information and measured stator RTD temperature.
The 369 integrates both stator and rotor heating into one model. Motor heating is reflected in the THERMAL CAPACITY
USED actual value. If stopped for a long period of time, the motor will be at ambient temperature and THERMAL CAPACITY
USED should be zero. If the motor is in overload, a trip will occur once the thermal capacity used reaches 100%. Insulation
does not immediately melt when a motor’s thermal limit is exceeded. Rather, the rate of insulation degradation reaches a
point where the motor life will be significantly reduced if the condition persists. The thermal capacity used alarm may be
used as a warning of an impending overload trip.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-25
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5 SETPOINTS
The 369 thermal model can be modified to allow compensation for motors used to drive cyclic loads, such as a reciprocating compressor. The MOTOR LOAD AVERAGING INTERVAL setting allows the user to dampen the effects of these loads as
they relate to the overall interpretation of the motor thermal characteristics. The load cycle can be determined using the 369
waveform capture feature or through external equipment. The size of the load cycle is then entered into the MOTOR LOAD
AVERAGING INTERVAL setpoint. The 369 uses this value to average the motor load, as applied to the thermal model, over
the duration of the load cycle. The result is a damping effect applied to the thermal model. The setting is entered in steps of
3 to correspond with the run rate of the 369 thermal model. For load cycles not evenly divisible by 3, enter a value equal to
the next multiple of 3 for the MOTOR LOAD AVERAGING INTERVAL.
Motor load averaging may increase trip/alarm times by 16.7 ms for every additional cycle averaged greater
than 3.
WARNING
5.4.3 OVERLOAD CURVES
a) SETTINGS
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION ØØ OVERLOAD CURVE
OVERLOAD CURVE
5
5-26
SELECT CURVE STYLE:
Standard
Range: Standard, Custom
STANDARD OVERLOAD
CURVE NUMBER: 4
Range: 1 to 15 in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Standard
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.01xFLA: 17415s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.05xFLA: 3415 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.10xFLA: 1667 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.20xFLA: 795 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.30xFLA: 507 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.40xFLA: 365 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.50xFLA: 280 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
1.75xFLA: 170 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
2.00xFLA: 117 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
2.25xFLA: 86 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
2.50xFLA: 67 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
2.75xFLA: 53 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
3.00xFLA: 44 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
TIME TO TRIP AT
3.25xFLA: 37 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
3.50xFLA: 31 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
3.75xFLA: 27 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
4.00xFLA: 23 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
4.25xFLA: 21 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
4.50xFLA: 18 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
4.75xFLA: 16 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
5.00xFLA: 15 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
5.50xFLA: 12 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
6.00xFLA: 10 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
6.50xFLA: 9 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
7.00xFLA: 7 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
7.50xFLA: 6 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
8.00xFLA: 6 S
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
10.0xFLA: 6 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
15.0xFLA: 6 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
TIME TO TRIP AT
20.0xFLA: 6 s
Range: 0 to 65534 s in steps of 1
Only seen if CURVE STYLE is Custom
5
b) STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVE:
The overload curve accounts for motor heating during stall, acceleration, and running in both the stator and the rotor. The
OVERLOAD PICKUP setpoint dictates where the running overload curve begins as the motor enters an overload condition.
This is useful for service factor motors as it allows the pickup level to be defined. The curve is effectively cut off at current
values below this pickup.
Motor thermal limits consist of three distinct parts based on the three conditions of operation, locked rotor or stall, acceleration, and running overload. Each of these curves may be provided for both a hot motor and a cold motor. A hot motor is
defined as one that has been running for a period of time at full load such that the stator and rotor temperatures have settled at their rated temperature. A cold motor is defined as a motor that has been stopped for a period of time such that the
stator and rotor temperatures have settled at ambient temperature. For most motors, the distinct characteristics of the
motor thermal limits are formed into one smooth homogeneous curve. Sometimes only a safe stall time is provided. This is
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-27
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5 SETPOINTS
acceptable if the motor has been designed conservatively and can easily perform its required duty without infringing on the
thermal limit. In this case, the protection can be conservative and process integrity is not compromised. If a motor has been
designed very close to its thermal limits when operated as required, then the distinct characteristics of the thermal limits
become important.
The 369 overload curve can take one of two formats: Standard or Custom Curve. Regardless of which curve style is
selected, the 369 will retain thermal memory in the form of a register called THERMAL CAPACITY USED. This register is
updated every 100 ms using the following equation:
100 ms
TCusedt = TCused t – 100 ms + ------------------------------- × 100%
time_to_trip
(EQ 5.2)
where: time_to_trip = time taken from the overload curve at Ieq as a function of FLA.
The overload protection curve should always be set slightly lower than the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer. This
will ensure that the motor is tripped before the thermal limit is reached.
If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times, it is recommended that the 369 Standard Overload Curves be
used. The standard overload curves are a series of 15 curves with a common curve shape based on typical motor thermal
limit curves (see Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES on page 5–28 and Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD
OVERLOAD CURVES on page 5–28).
100000
5
TIME IN SECONDS
10000
1000
100
x15
10
x1
1.00
0.10
1.00
10
100
MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD AMPS
1000
840719A1.CDR
Figure 5–7: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES
5-28
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
Table 5–1: 369 STANDARD OVERLOAD CURVES
PICKUP
LEVEL
(× FLA)
STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS
×1
×2
×3
×4
×5
×6
×7
×8
×9
× 10
× 11
× 12
× 13
× 14
× 15
13061
17414
21768
26122
30475
34829
39183
43536
1.01
4353.6 8707.2
47890
52243
56597
60951
65304
1.05
853.71 1707.4 2561.1 3414.9 4268.6 5122.3 5976.0 6829.7 7683.4 8537.1 9390.8
10245
11098
11952
12806
1.10
416.68 833.36 1250.0 1666.7 2083.4 2500.1 2916.8 3333.5 3750.1 4166.8 4583.5 5000.2 5416.9 5833.6 6250.2
1.20
198.86 397.72 596.58 795.44 994.30 1193.2 1392.0 1590.9 1789.7 1988.6 2187.5 2386.3 2585.2 2784.1 2982.9
1.30
126.80 253.61 380.41 507.22 634.02 760.82 887.63 1014.4 1141.2 1268.0 1394.8 1521.6 1648.5 1775.3 1902.1
1.40
91.14
182.27 273.41 364.55 455.68 546.82 637.96 729.09 820.23 911.37 1002.5 1093.6 1184.8 1275.9 1367.0
1.50
69.99
139.98 209.97 279.96 349.95 419.94 489.93 559.92 629.91 699.90 769.89 839.88 909.87 979.86 1049.9
1.75
42.41
84.83
2.00
29.16
58.32
87.47
116.63 145.79 174.95 204.11 233.26 262.42 291.58 320.74 349.90 379.05 408.21 437.37
2.25
21.53
43.06
64.59
86.12
2.50
16.66
33.32
49.98
66.64
83.30
99.96
116.62 133.28 149.94 166.60 183.26 199.92 216.58 233.24 249.90
2.75
13.33
26.65
39.98
53.31
66.64
79.96
93.29
106.62 119.95 133.27 146.60 159.93 173.25 186.58 199.91
3.00
10.93
21.86
32.80
43.73
54.66
65.59
76.52
87.46
98.39
109.32 120.25 131.19 142.12 153.05 163.98
127.24 169.66 212.07 254.49 296.90 339.32 381.73 392.15 466.56 508.98 551.39 593.81 636.22
107.65 129.18 150.72 172.25 193.78 215.31 236.84 258.37 279.90 301.43 322.96
3.25
9.15
18.29
27.44
36.58
45.73
54.87
64.02
73.16
82.31
91.46
100.60 109.75 118.89 128.04 137.18
3.50
7.77
15.55
23.32
31.09
38.87
46.64
54.41
62.19
69.96
77.73
85.51
93.28
3.75
6.69
13.39
20.08
26.78
33.47
40.17
46.86
53.56
60.25
66.95
73.64
80.34
87.03
93.73
100.42
4.00
5.83
11.66
17.49
23.32
29.15
34.98
40.81
46.64
52.47
58.30
64.13
69.96
75.79
81.62
87.45
4.25
5.12
10.25
15.37
20.50
25.62
30.75
35.87
41.00
46.12
51.25
56.37
61.50
66.62
71.75
76.87
4.50
4.54
9.08
13.63
18.17
22.71
27.25
31.80
36.34
40.88
45.42
49.97
54.51
59.05
63.59
68.14
4.75
4.06
8.11
12.17
16.22
20.28
24.33
28.39
32.44
36.50
40.55
44.61
48.66
52.72
56.77
60.83
5.00
3.64
7.29
10.93
14.57
18.22
21.86
25.50
29.15
32.79
36.43
40.08
43.72
47.36
51.01
54.65
5.50
2.99
5.98
8.97
11.96
14.95
17.94
20.93
23.91
26.90
29.89
32.88
35.87
38.86
41.85
44.84
6.00
2.50
5.00
7.49
9.99
12.49
14.99
17.49
19.99
22.48
24.98
27.48
29.98
32.48
34.97
37.47
6.50
2.12
4.24
6.36
8.48
10.60
12.72
14.84
16.96
19.08
21.20
23.32
25.44
27.55
29.67
31.79
7.00
1.82
3.64
5.46
7.29
9.11
10.93
12.75
14.57
16.39
18.21
20.04
21.86
23.68
25.50
27.32
7.50
1.58
3.16
4.75
6.33
7.91
9.49
11.08
12.66
14.24
15.82
17.41
18.99
20.57
22.15
23.74
101.05 108.83 116.60
8.00
1.39
2.78
4.16
5.55
6.94
8.33
9.71
11.10
12.49
13.88
15.27
16.65
18.04
19.43
20.82
10.00
1.39
2.78
4.16
5.55
6.94
8.33
9.71
11.10
12.49
13.88
15.27
16.65
18.04
19.43
20.82
15.00
1.39
2.78
4.16
5.55
6.94
8.33
9.71
11.10
12.49
13.88
15.27
16.65
18.04
19.43
20.82
20.00
1.39
2.78
4.16
5.55
6.94
8.33
9.71
11.10
12.49
13.88
15.27
16.65
18.04
19.43
20.82
Above 8.0 x Pickup, the trip time for 8.0 is used. This prevents the overload curve from acting as an instantaneous element.
NOTE
The Standard Overload Curves equation is:
curve_multiplier × 2.2116623
time_to_trip = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------2
0.02530337 × ( pickup – 1 ) + 0.05054758 × ( pickup – 1 )
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
(EQ 5.3)
5-29
5
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5 SETPOINTS
c) CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE:
If the motor starting current begins to infringe on the thermal damage curves, it may be necessary to use a custom curve to
ensure successful starting without compromising motor protection. Furthermore, the characteristics of the starting thermal
damage curve (locked rotor and acceleration) and the running thermal damage curves may not fit together very smoothly.
In this instance, it may be necessary to use a custom curve to tailor protection to the motor thermal limits so the motor may
be started successfully and used to its full potential without compromising protection. The distinct parts of the thermal limit
curves now become more critical. For these conditions, it is recommended that the 369 custom curve thermal model be
used. The custom overload curve of the 369 allows the user to program their own curve by entering trip times for 30 predetermined current levels. The 369 smooths the areas between these points to make the protection curve.
It can be seen below that if the running overload thermal limit curve were smoothed into one curve with the locked rotor
overload curve, the motor could not start at 80% line voltage. A custom curve is required.
g
GE Power Management
TYPICAL CUSTOM CURVE
6500 HP, 13800 VOLT INDUCED DRAFT FAN MOTOR
10000
1000
1
PROGRAMMED CUSTOM CURVE
2
3
4
RUNNING SAFETIME (STATOR LIMIT)
5
MOTOR CURRENT @ 80% VOLTAGE
ACCELERATION SAFETIME (ROTOR LIMIT)
MOTOR CURRENT @ 100% VOLTAGE
5
1
TIME TO TRIP IN SECONDS
2
100
3
10
4
5
MULTIPLE OF FULL LOAD CURRENT SETPOINT
1000
100
10
0.5
0.1
1
1.0
840730A2.CDR
Figure 5–8: CUSTOM CURVE EXAMPLE
During the interval of discontinuity, the longer of the two trip times is used to reduce the chance of nuisance tripping during motor starts.
NOTE
5-30
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
d) UNBALANCE BIAS
Unbalanced phase currents cause additional rotor heating not accounted for by electromechanical relays and may not be
accounted for in some electronic protective relays. When the motor is running, the rotor rotates in the direction of the positive-sequence current at near synchronous speed. Negative-sequence current, having a phase rotation opposite to the
positive sequence current, and hence, opposite to the rotor rotation, generates a rotor voltage that produces a substantial
rotor current. This induced current has a frequency approximately twice the line frequency: 100 Hz for a 50 Hz system,
120 Hz for a 60 Hz system. Skin effect in the rotor bars at this frequency causes a significant increase in rotor resistance,
and therefore a significant increase in rotor heating. This extra heating is not accounted for in the motor manufacturer thermal limit curves, since these curves assume positive-sequence currents only from a perfectly balanced supply and motor
design.
The 369 measures the percentage unbalance for the phase currents. The thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating caused by negative-sequence current, present during an unbalance when the motor is running. This is done
by creating an equivalent motor heating current that takes into account the unbalanced current effect along with the average phase current. This current is calculated as follows:
2
I avg 1 + k × ( UB% )
I eq = ----------------------------------------------------FLA
where:
(EQ 5.4)
Ieq = equivalent unbalance biased heating current
Iavg = average RMS phase current measured
UB% = unbalance percentage measured (100% = 1, 50% = 0.5, etc.)
k = unbalance bias k factor
The figure on the left shows motor derating as a function of voltage unbalance as recommended by the American organization NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association). Assuming a typical induction motor with an inrush of 6 × FLA
and a negative sequence impedance of 0.167, voltage unbalances of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5% equal current unbalances of 6, 12,
18, 24, and 30% respectively. Based on this assumption, the figure on the right below illustrates the amount of motor derating for different values of k entered for the setpoint UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR. Note that the curve for k = 8 is almost
identical to the NEMA derating curve.
GE MULTILIN
1.05
1.00
1.00
DERATING FACTOR
DERATING FACTOR
NEMA
1.05
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.95
k=2
0.90
0.85
k=4
0.80
k=6
0.75
0.75
0.70
0.70
k=8
k=10
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
1
2
3
4
5
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
Figure 5–9: MEDIUM MOTOR DERATING FACTOR DUE TO UNBALANCED VOLTAGE
If a k value of 0 is entered, the unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will time out against the measured per
unit motor current. The k value may be calculated as:
175- (typical estimate); k = 230
k = ------------------ (conservative estimate), where I LR is the per unit locked rotor current
2
2
I LR
I LR
(EQ 5.5)
The 369 can also learn the unbalance bias k factor. It is recommended that the learned k factor not be enabled until the
motor has had at least five successful starts. The calculation of the learned k factor is as follows:
175
k = --------------------------------( I LSC ⁄ FLA ) 2
GE Multilin
where I LSC = learned start current, FLA = Full Load Amps setpoint
369 Motor Management Relay
(EQ 5.6)
5-31
5
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5 SETPOINTS
e) MOTOR COOLING
The thermal capacity used quantity is reduced in an exponential manner when the motor is stopped or current is below the
overload pickup setpoint. This reduction simulates motor cooling. The motor cooling time constants should be entered for
both the stopped and running cases. A stopped motor will normally cool significantly slower than a running motor. Note that
the cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100% thermal capacity used down to 0% thermal capacity used.
The 369 can learn and estimate the stopped and running cool time constants for a motor. Calculation of a cool time constant is performed whenever the motor state transitions from starting to running or from running to stopped. The learned
cool times are based on the cooling rate of the hottest stator RTD, the hot/cold ratio, the ambient temperature (40 if no
ambient RTD), the measured motor load and the programmed service factor or overload pickup. Learned values should
only be enabled for motors that have been started, stopped and run at least five times.
Note that any learned cool time constants are mainly based on stator RTD information. Cool time, for starting, is typically a
rotor limit. The use of stator RTDs can only render an approximation. The learned values should only be used if the real values are not available from the motor manufacturer. Motor cooling is calculated using the following formulas:
TCused = ( TCused_start – TCused_end ) ⋅ ( e
–t ⁄ τ
) + TCused_end
hot-⎞ × 100%
TCused_end = I eq × ⎛ 1 – ---------⎝
cold⎠
where:
5
(EQ 5.7)
(EQ 5.8)
TCused = thermal capacity used
TCused_start = TC used value caused by overload condition
TCused_end = TC used value set by the hot/cold curve ratio when motor is running = '0' when motor is stopped.
t = time in minutes
τ = cool time constant (running or stopped)
Ieq = equivalent motor heating current
overload_pickup = overload pickup setpoint as a multiple of FLA
hot/cold = hot/cold curve ratio
f) HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO
The motor manufacturer will sometimes provide thermal limit information for a hot/cold motor. The 369 thermal model will
adapt for these conditions if the Hot/Cold Curve Ratio is programmed. The value entered for this setpoint dictates the level
of thermal capacity used that the relay will settle at for levels of current that are below the Overload Pickup Level. When the
motor is running at a level that is below the Overload Pickup Level, the thermal capacity used will rise or fall to a value
based on the average phase current and the entered Hot/Cold Curve Ratio. Thermal capacity used will either rise at a fixed
rate of 5% per minute or fall as dictated by the running cool time constant.
hot
TCused_end = I eq × ⎛⎝ 1 – -----------⎞⎠ × 100%
cold
where:
(EQ 5.9)
TCused_end = Thermal Capacity Used if Iper_unit remains steady state
Ieq = equivalent motor heating current
hot/cold = HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO setpoint
The hot/cold curve ratio may be determined from the thermal limit curves if provided or the hot and cold safe stall times.
Simply divide the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. If hot and cold times are not provided, there can be no differentiation and the hot/cold curve ratio should be entered as 1.00.
5-32
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
100
100
75
75
Thermal Capacity Used
Thermal Capacity Used
5 SETPOINTS
Cool Time Constant= 15 min
TCused_start= 85%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
Ieq/Overload Pickup= 80%
50
25
50
25
0
0
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
0
30
60
90
120
Time in Minutes
Time in Minutes
80% LOAD
100% LOAD
100
150
180
100
75
Thermal Capacity Used
Thermal Capacity Used
Cool Time Constant= 15 min
TCused_start= 85%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
Ieq/Overload Pickup= 100%
Cool Time Constant= 30 min
TCused_start= 85%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
Motor Stopped after running Rated Load
TCused_end= 0%
50
25
0
75
Cool Time Constant= 30 min
TCused_start= 100%
Hot/Cold Ratio= 80%
Motor Overload
TCused_end= 0%
50
25
5
0
0
30
60
90
120
150
180
0
30
60
90
120
Time in Minutes
Time in Minutes
MOTOR STOPPED
MOTOR TRIPPED
150
180
808705A2.CDR
Figure 5–10: THERMAL MODEL COOLING
g) RTD BIAS
The 369 thermal replica operates as a complete and independent model. The thermal overload curves however, are based
solely on measured current, assuming a normal 40°C ambient and normal motor cooling. If there is an unusually high ambient temperature, or if motor cooling is blocked, motor temperature will increase. If the motor stator has embedded RTDs,
the 369 RTD bias feature should be used to correct the thermal model.
The RTD bias feature is a two part curve constructed using three points. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below
the RTD Bias Minimum setpoint (typically 40°C), no biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the
RTD Bias Maximum setpoint (typically at the stator insulation rating or slightly higher), then the thermal memory is fully
biased and thermal capacity is forced to 100% used. At values in between, the present thermal capacity used created by
the overload curve and other elements of the thermal model is compared to the RTD Bias thermal capacity used from the
RTD Bias curve. If the RTD Bias thermal capacity used value is higher, then that value is used from that point onward. The
RTD Bias Center point should be set at the rated running temperature of the motor. The 369 will automatically determine
the thermal capacity used value for the center point using the HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setpoint.
hot-⎞ × 100%
TCused@RTD_Bias_Center = ⎛ 1 – ---------⎝
cold⎠
(EQ 5.10)
At temperatures less than the RTD_Bias_Center temperature,
T actual – T min
RTD_Bias_TCused = ------------------------------------ × TCused@RTD_Bias_Center
T center – T min
(EQ 5.11)
At temperatures greater than the RTD_Bias_Center temperature,
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-33
5.4 S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION
5 SETPOINTS
T actual – T center
RTD_Bias_TCused = ----------------------------------------- × ( 100 – TCused@RTD_Bias_Center ) + TCused@RTD_Bias_Center
T max – T center
where:
(EQ 5.12)
RTD_Bias_TCused = TC used due to hottest stator RTD
Tactual = Actual present temperature of hottest stator RTD
Tmin = RTD Bias minimum setpoint (ambient temperature)
Tcenter = RTD Bias center setpoint (motor running temperature)
Tmax = RTD Bias max setpoint (winding insulation rating temperature)
TCused@RTD_Bias_Center = TC used defined by HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO setpoint
In simple terms, the RTD bias feature is real feedback of measured stator temperature. This feedback acts as correction of
the thermal model for unforeseen situations. Since RTDs are relatively slow to respond, RTD biasing is good for correction
and slow motor heating. The rest of the thermal model is required during starting and heavy overload conditions when
motor heating is relatively fast.
It should be noted that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. If the RTD bias feature forces the thermal capacity
used to 100%, the motor current must be above the overload pickup before an overload trip occurs. Presumably, the motor
would trip on programmed stator RTD temperature setpoint at that time.
RTD Bias Maximum
Thermal Capacity Used
100
5
Hot/Cold = 0.85
Rated Temperature=130 C
Insulation Rating=155 C
80
60
40
20
RTD Bias Center Point
RTD Bias Minimum
0
-50
0
50
100
150
200
250
Maximum Stator RTD Temperature
Figure 5–11: RTD BIAS CURVE
5.4.4 OVERLOAD ALARM
PATH: S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION ØØØ OVERLOAD ALARM
OVERLOAD ALARM
OVERLOAD
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
OVERLOAD ALARM
LEVEL: 1.01 x FLA
Range: 1.01 to 1.50 in steps of 0.01
ASSIGN O/L ALARM
RELAYS: Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
OVERLOAD ALARM
DELAY: 1 s
Range: 0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
OVERLOAD ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
An overload alarm will occur only when the motor is running and the current rises above the programmed OVERLOAD
ALARM LEVEL. The overload alarm is disabled during a start. An application of an unlatched overload alarm is to signal a
PLC that controls the load on the motor, whenever the motor is too heavily loaded.
5-34
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5.5S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5.5.1 DESCRIPTION
These elements deal with functions that are based on the current readings of the 369 from the external phase and/or
ground CTs. All models of the 369 include these features.
5.5.2 SHORT CIRCUIT
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS Ø SHORT CIRCUIT
SHORT CIRCUIT
NOTE
SHORT CIRCUIT
TRIP: Off
Range: 50/60 Hz Nominal: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Variable: Off, Latched
ASSIGN S/C TRIP
RELAYS: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP
LEVEL: 10.0 x CT
Range: 2.0 to 20.0 x CT in steps of 0.1
ADD S/C TRIP
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01
0 = Instantaneous
SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP
BACKUP: Off
Range: 50/60 Hz Nominal: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Variable: Off, Latched
ASSIGN S/C BACKUP
RELAYS: Aux1
Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
ADD S/C BACKUP TRIP
DELAY: 0.20 s
Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01
0 = Instantaneous
5
Care must be taken when turning on this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) is
not rated to break the fault current, this feature should be disabled. Alternatively, this feature may be
assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current.
Once the magnitude of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Pickup Level × Phase CT Primary for a period of time specified
by the delay, a trip will occur. Note the delay is in addition to the 45 ms instantaneous operate time.
There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. The backup delay should be greater than the short circuit delay
plus the breaker clearing time. If a short circuit trip occurs with the backup on, and the phase current to the motor persists
for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second backup trip will occur. It is intended that this second trip be
assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker trip relay.
Various situations (e.g. charging a long line to the motor or power factor correction capacitors) may cause transient inrush
currents during motor starting that may exceed the Short Circuit Pickup level for a very short period of time. The Short Circuit time delay is adjustable in 10 ms increments. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still responds
very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Phase Short Circuit time delay will be set as
quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs.
When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. This
asymmetrical current may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. If the short circuit level was set at 1.25 times the symmetrical starting current, it is probable that there would be nuisance trips during
motor starting. As a rule of thumb the short circuit protection is typically set to at least 1.6 times the symmetrical starting
current value. This allows the motor to start without nuisance tripping.
Both the main Short Circuit delay and the backup delay start timing when the current exceeds the Short Circuit
Pickup level.
NOTE
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-35
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.5.3 MECHANICAL JAM
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ØØ MECHANICAL JAM
MECHANICAL JAM
5
MECHANICAL JAM
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
MECHANICAL JAM ALARM
LEVEL: 1.50 x FLA
Range: 1.01 to 6.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
MECHANICAL JAM ALARM
DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 125.0 s in steps of 0.5
MECHANICAL JAM ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
MECHANICAL JAM
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
MECHANICAL JAM TRIP
LEVEL: 1.50 x FLA
Range: 1.01 to 6.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
MECHANICAL JAM TRIP
DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 125.0 s in steps of 0.5
After a motor start, once the magnitude of any one of either phase A, B, or C exceeds the Trip/Alarm Pickup Level × FLA for
a period of time specified by the Delay, a Trip/Alarm will occur. This feature may be used to indicate a stall condition when
running. Not only does it protect the motor by taking it off-line quicker than the thermal model (overload curve), it may also
prevent or limit damage to the driven equipment that may occur if motor starting torque persists on jammed or broken
equipment.
The level for the Mechanical Jam Trip should be set higher than motor loading during normal operations, but lower than the
motor stall level. Normally the delay would be set to the minimum time delay, or set such that no nuisance trips occur due to
momentary load fluctuations.
5-36
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5.5.4 UNDERCURRENT
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ØØØ UNDERCURRENT
UNDERCURRENT
BLOCK UNDERCURRENT
FROM START: 0 s
Range: 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1
UNDERCURRENT
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN U/C ALARM
RELAYS: Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
UNDERCURRENT ALARM
LEVEL: 0.70 x FLA
Range: 0.10 to 0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01
UNDERCURRENT ALARM
DELAY: 1 s
Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1
UNDERCURRENT ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
UNDERCURRENT
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN U/C TRIP
RELAYS: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
UNDERCURRENT TRIP
LEVEL: 0.70 x FLA
Range: 0.10 to 0.99 x FLA in steps of 0.01
UNDERCURRENT TRIP
DELAY: 1 s
Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1
5
If enabled, once the magnitude of either phase A, B or C falls below the pickup level × FLA for a period of time specified by
the Delay, a trip or alarm will occur. The undercurrent element is an indication of loss of load to the motor. Thus, the pickup
level should be set lower than motor loading levels during normal operations. The undercurrent element is active when the
motor is starting or running.
The undercurrent element can be blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by the U/C Block
From Start setpoint (e.g. this block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element trips). A
value of 0 means undercurrent protection is immediately enabled upon motor starting (no block). If a value other than 0 is
entered, the feature will be disabled from the time a start is detected until the time entered expires.
APPLICATION EXAMPLE:
If a pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps, loss of load may cause the pump to overheat. Undercurrent protection should
thus be enabled. If the motor loading should never fall below 0.75 × FLA, even for short durations, the Undercurrent Trip
pickup could be set to 0.70 and the Undercurrent Alarm to 0.75. If the pump is always started loaded, the block from start
feature should be disabled (programmed as 0).
Time delay is typically set as quick as possible, 1 second.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-37
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.5.5 CURRENT UNBALANCE
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ØØØØ CURRENT UNBALANCE
CURRENT UNBALANCE
5
BLOCK UNBALANCE FROM
START: 0 s
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
CURRENT UNBALANCE
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN U/B ALARM
RELAYS: Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
UNBALANCE ALARM
LEVEL: 15 %
Range: 4 to 30% in steps of 1
UNBALANCE ALARM
DELAY: 1 s
Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1
UNBALANCE ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
CURRENT UNBALANCE
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN U/B TRIP
RELAYS: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
UNBALANCE TRIP
LEVEL: 20 %
Range: 4 to 30% in steps of 1
UNBALANCE TRIP
DELAY: 1 s
Range: 1 to 255 s in steps of 1
Unbalanced three phase supply voltages are a major cause of induction motor thermal damage. Causes of unbalance can
include: increased resistance in one phase due to a pitted or faulty contactor, loose connections, unequal tap settings in a
transformer, non-uniformly distributed three phase loads, or varying single phase loads within a plant. The most serious
case of unbalance is single phasing – that is, the complete loss of one phase. This can be caused by a utility supply problem or a blown fuse in one phase and can seriously damage a three phase motor. A single phase trip will occur in 2 seconds if the Unbalance trip is on and the level exceeds 30%. A single phase trip will also activate in 2 seconds if the Motor
Load is above 30% and at least one of the phase currents is zero. Single phasing protection is disabled if the Unbalance
Trip is turned Off.
During balanced conditions in the stator, current in each motor phase is equal, and the rotor current is just sufficient to provide the turning torque. When the stator currents are unbalanced, a much higher current is induced into the rotor due to its
lower impedance to the negative sequence current component present. This current is at twice the power supply frequency
and produces a torque in the opposite direction to the desired motor output. Usually the increase in stator current is small
and timed overcurrent protection takes a long time to trip. However, the much higher induced rotor current can cause extensive rotor damage in a short period of time. Motors can tolerate different levels of current unbalance depending on the rotor
design and heat dissipation characteristics.
To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damage the rotor,
the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30% of the full load current
(IFLA) setting. Unbalance is calculated as follows:
I max – I avg
If I avg ≥ I FLA , Unbalance = ----------------------------- × 100
I avg
where:
5-38
I max – I avg
If I avg < I FLA , Unbalance = ----------------------------- × 100
I FLA
(EQ 5.13)
Iavg = average phase current,
Imax = current in a phase with maximum deviation from Iavg,
IFLA = motor full load amps setting
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
Unbalance protection is recommended at all times. When setting the unbalance pickup level, it should be noted that a 1%
voltage unbalance typically translates into a 6% current unbalance. Therefore, in order to prevent nuisance trips or alarms,
the pickup level should not be set too low. Also, since short term unbalances are common, a reasonable delay should be
set to avoid nuisance trips or alarms. It is recommended that the unbalance thermal bias feature be used to bias the Thermal Model to account for rotor heating that may be caused by cyclic short term unbalances.
5.5.6 GROUND FAULT
PATH: S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ØØØØØ GROUND FAULT
GROUND FAULT
GROUND FAULT
ALARM: Off
Range: 50/60 Hz Nominal: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Variable: Off, Latched
ASSIGN G/F ALARM
RELAYS: Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of
them
GROUND FAULT ALARM
LEVEL: 0.10 x CT
Range: 0.10 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Only shown if G/F CT is 1A or 5A
GROUND FAULT ALARM
LEVEL: 0.25 A
Range: 0.25 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01
Only shown if G/F CT is 50:0.025
GROUND FAULT ALARM
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01s
GROUND FAULT ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: On, Off
GROUND FAULT
TRIP: Off
Range: 50/60 Hz Nominal: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Variable: Off, Latched
ASSIGN GF TRIP
RELAYS: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
GROUND FAULT TRIP
LEVEL: 0.20 x CT
Range: 0.10 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Only shown if Ground Fault CT is 1A or 5A
GROUND FAULT TRIP
LEVEL: 0.25 A
Range: 0.25 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01
Only shown if Ground Fault CT is 50:0.025
GROUND FAULT TRIP
DELAY: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01
GROUND FAULT TRIP
BACKUP: Off
Range: 50/60 Hz Nominal: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Variable: Off, Latched
ASSIGN G/F BACKUP
RELAYS: Aux2
Range: None, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
G/F TRIP BACKUP
DELAY: 0.20 s
Range: 0.00 to 255.00 s in steps of 0.01
5
Once the magnitude of ground current exceeds the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the Delay, a trip and/or
alarm will occur. There is also a backup trip feature that can be enabled. If the backup is On, and a Ground Fault trip has
initiated, and the ground current persists for a period of time that exceeds the backup delay, a second ‘backup’ trip will
occur. It is intended that this second trip be assigned to Aux1 or Aux2 which would be dedicated as an upstream breaker
trip relay. The Ground Fault Trip Backup delay must be set to a time longer than the breaker clearing time.
NOTE
Care must be taken when turning On this feature. If the interrupting device (contactor or circuit breaker) is
not rated to break ground fault current (low resistance or solidly grounded systems), the feature should be
disabled. Alternately, the feature may be assigned to an auxiliary relay and connected such that it trips an
upstream device that is capable of breaking the fault current.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-39
5.5 S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
Various situations (e.g. contactor bounce) may cause transient ground currents during motor starting that may exceed the
Ground Fault Pickup levels for a very short period of time. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still
responds very fast, but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Ground Fault time delays will be set as
quick as possible, 0 ms. Time may have to be increased if nuisance tripping occurs.
Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired to the phase CTs in a residual connection. When a motor starts,
the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction motor) has an asymmetrical component. This asymmetrical current
may cause one phase to see as much as 1.6 times the normal RMS starting current. This momentary DC component will
cause each of the phase CTs to react differently and the net current into the ground input of the 369 will not be negligible. A
20 ms block of the ground fault elements when the motor starts enables the 369 to ride through this momentary ground current signal.
Both the main Ground Fault delay and the backup delay start timing when the Ground Fault current exceeds the
pickup level.
NOTE
5
5-40
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS
5.6S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS
5.6.1 DESCRIPTION
These setpoints deal with those functions that prevent the motor from restarting once stopped until a set condition clears
and/or a set time expires. None of these functions will trip a motor that is already running.
5.6.2 ACCELERATION TRIP
PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS Ø ACCELERATION TRIP
ACCELERATION TRIP
ACCELERATION
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations of them
ACCELERATION TIME
FROM START: 10.0 s
Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1
The 369 Thermal Model is designed to protect the motor under both starting and overload conditions. The Acceleration
Timer trip feature may be used in addition to that protection. If for example, the motor should always start in 2 seconds, but
the safe stall time is 8 seconds, there is no point letting the motor remain in a stall condition for 7 or 8 seconds when the
thermal model would take it off line. Furthermore, the starting torque applied to the driven equipment for that period of time
could cause severe damage.
If enabled, the Acceleration Timer trip element will function as follows: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the
369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. Typically current will rise quickly to a value
in excess of FLA (e.g. 6 x FLA). At this point, the Acceleration Timer will be initialized with the entered value in seconds. If
the current does not fall below the overload curve pickup level before the timer expires, an acceleration trip will occur. If the
acceleration time of the motor is variable, this feature should be set just beyond the longest acceleration time.
NOTE
Some motor soft starters may allow current to ramp up slowly while others may limit current to less than
Full Load Amps throughout the start. In these cases, as a generic relay that must protect all motors, the 369
cannot differentiate between a motor that has a slow ramp up time and one that has completed a start and
gone into an overload condition. Therefore, if the motor current does not rise to greater than full load within
1 second on start, the acceleration timer feature is ignored. In any case, the motor is still protected by the
overload curve.
5.6.3 START INHIBITS
PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS ØØ START INHIBITS
START INHIBITS
ENABLE SINGLE SHOT
RESTART: No
Range: No, Yes
ENABLE
START INHIBIT: No
Range: No, Yes
MAX STARTS/HOUR
PERMISSIBLE: Off
Range: 1 to 5 in steps of 1, Off (0)
TIME BETWEEN STARTS
PERMISSIBLE: Off
Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1, Off (0)
RESTART BLOCK:
Off
Range: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1, Off (0)
ASSIGN BLOCK RELAY:
Trip & Aux2
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
The start inhibit setpoints are individually described below.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-41
5
5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS
5
5 SETPOINTS
•
ENABLE SINGLE SHOT RESTART: Enabling this feature will allow the motor to be restarted immediately after an
overload trip has occurred. To accomplish this, a reset will cause the 369 to decrease the accumulated thermal capacity to zero. However, if a second overload trip occurs within one hour of the first, another immediate restart will not be
permitted. The displayed lockout time must then be allowed to expire before the motor can be started.
•
ENABLE START INHIBIT: The Start Inhibit feature is intended to help prevent tripping of the motor during a start if
there is insufficient thermal capacity for a start. The average value of thermal capacity used from the last five successful starts is multiplied by 1.25 and stored as thermal capacity used on start. This 25% margin is used to ensure that a
motor start will be successful. If the number is greater than 100%, 100% is stored as thermal capacity used on start. A
successful motor start is one in which phase current rises from 0 to greater than overload pickup and then, after acceleration, falls below the overload curve pickup level. If the Start Inhibit feature is enabled, each time the motor is
stopped, the amount of thermal capacity available (100% – Thermal Capacity Used) is compared to the THERMAL
CAPACITY USED ON START. If the thermal capacity available does not exceed the THERMAL CAPACITY USED ON
START, or is not equal to 100%, the Start Inhibit will become active until there is sufficient thermal capacity. When an
inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time required for the motor to cool to an acceptable temperature for
a start. This time will be a function of the COOL TIME CONSTANT STOPPED programmed. If this feature is turned Off,
thermal capacity used must reduce to 15% before an overload lockout resets. This feature should be turned off if the
load varies for different starts.
•
MAX STARTS/HOUR PERMISSIBLE: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition
of no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, one of the Starts/Hour timers is loaded with 60 minutes. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, the number
of starts within the past hour is compared to the number of starts allowable. If the two are the same, an inhibit will
occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to one hour less the longest time elapsed since a start within
the past hour. An Emergency restart will clear the oldest start time remaining.
•
TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE: A motor start is assumed to be occurring when the 369 measures the transition of no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, the Time Between Starts timer is loaded with the
entered time. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, if
the time elapsed since the most recent start is less than the TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE setpoint, an inhibit
will occur. If an inhibit occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the time elapsed since the most recent start subtracted
from the TIME BETWEEN STARTS PERMISSIBLE setpoint.
•
RESTART BLOCK: Restart Block may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes between stopping a
motor and restarting that motor. This timer feature may be very useful for some process applications or motor considerations. If a motor is on a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin the
rotor backwards. It would be very undesirable to start the motor at this time. In another scenario, a motor may be driving a very high inertia load. Once the supply to the motor is disconnected, the rotor may continue to turn for a long
period of time as it decelerates. The motor has now become a generator and applying supply voltage out of phase may
result in catastrophic failure.
•
ASSIGN BLOCK RELAY: The relay(s) assigned here will be used for all blocking/inhibit elements in this section. The
assigned relay will activate only when the motor is stopped. When a block/inhibit condition times out or is cleared, the
assigned relay will automatically reset itself.
NOTES FOR ALL INHIBITS AND BLOCKS:
1.
In the event of control power loss, all lockout times will be saved. Elapsed time will be recorded and decremented from
the inhibit times whether control power is applied or not. Upon control power being re-established to the 369, all
remaining inhibits (have not time out) will be re-activated.
2.
If the motor is started while an inhibit is active an event titled ‘Start while Blocked’ will be recorded.
5-42
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.6 S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS
5.6.4 BACKSPIN DETECTION
PATH: S5 MOTOR START/INHIBITS ØØØ BACKSPIN DETECTION
BACKSPIN DETECTION
ENABLE BACKSPIN
START INHIBIT: No
Range: No, Yes
Only shown if B option installed
MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE
FREQUENCY: 0.00 Hz
Range: 0 to 9.99 Hz in steps of 0.01
Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
PREDICTION ALGORITHM
Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
ASSIGN BSD RELAY:
Aux2
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
Seen only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
NUM OF MOTOR POLES:
2
Range: 2 to 16 in steps of 2
Shown only if backspin start inhibit is enabled
Immediately after the motor is stopped, backspin detection commences and a backspin start inhibit is activated to prevent
the motor from being restarted. The backspin frequency is sensed through the BSD voltage input. If the measured frequency is below the programmed MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY, the backspin start inhibit will be removed. The time
for the motor to reach the MINIMUM PERMISSIBLE FREQUENCY is calculated throughout the backspin state. If the BSD frequency signal is lost prior to reaching the Minimum Permissible Frequency, the inhibit remains active until the prediction
time has expired. The calculated Prediction Time and the Backspin State can be viewed in Section 6.3.4 Backspin Metering
on page 6–8.
APPLICATION:
Backspin protection is typically used on down hole pump motors which can be located several kilometers underground.
Check valves are often used to prevent flow reversal when the pump stops. Very often however, the flow reverses due to
faulty or non existent check valves, causing the pump impeller to rotate the motor in the reverse direction. Starting the
motor during this period of reverse rotation (back-spinning) may result in motor damage. Backspin detection ensures that
the motor can only be started when the motor has slowed to within acceptable limits. Without backspin detection a long
time delay had to be used as a start permissive to ensure the motor had slowed to a safe speed.
These setpoints are only visible when option B has been installed.
NOTE
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-43
5
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5 SETPOINTS
5.7S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5.7.1 DESCRIPTION
These setpoints deal with the RTD overtemperature elements of the 369. The Local RTD Protection setpoints will only be
seen if the 369 has option R installed. The Remote RTD Protection setpoints will only be seen if the 369 has the RRTD
accessory enabled. Both can be enabled and used at the same time and have the same functionality.
5.7.2 LOCAL RTD PROTECTION
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE Ø LOCAL RTD PROTECTION Ø LOCAL RTD 1(12)
LOCAL RTD 1
5
RTD 1 APPLICATION:
None
Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other
RTD 1 TYPE:
100 Ohm Platinum
Range 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel, 120 Ohm
Nickel, 100 Ohm Platinum.
RTD 1 NAME:
RTD 1
Range: 8 alphanumeric characters
RTD 1 ALARM:
Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
RTD 1 ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
RTD 1 ALARM
LEVEL: 130°C
Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1
RTD 1 HI ALARM:
Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
RTD 1 HI ALARM
RELAYS: Aux1
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
RTD 1 HI ALARM
LEVEL: 130°C
Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1
RECORD RTD 1 ALARMS
AS EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
RTD 1 TRIP:
Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
RTD 1 TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
RTD 1 TRIP
LEVEL: 130°C
Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1
ENABLE RTD 1 TRIP
VOTING: Off
Range: Off, RTD 1 to RTD12, All Stator
The above setpoints will only be shown if the RTD 1(12) APPLICATION setpoint is other than “None”
NOTE
5-44
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5.7.3 REMOTE RTD PROTECTION
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ØØ REMOTE RTD PROTECTN Ø REMOTE RTD MODULE 1(4)
REMOTE RTD MODULE 1
RRTD 1 ADDRESS:
1
RRTD 1 RTD1
Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
See page 5–46.
RRTD 1 RTD2
RRTD 1 RTD12
RRTD 1 OPEN RTD
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, On
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
RRTD 1 OPEN RTD
EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
RRTD 1 SHORT/LOW RTD
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, On
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
RRTD 1 SHORT/LOW RTD
EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
5
These setpoints are applicable for units with a GE Multilin Remote RTD module.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-45
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5 SETPOINTS
b) REMOTE RTD 1(12)
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ØØ REMOTE RTD PROTECTN Ø REMOTE RTD MODULE 1(4) ØØ RRTD 1 RTD 1(12)
REMOTE RTD MODULE 1
5
RTD 1 APPLICATION:
None
Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other
RRTD 1 RTD1 TYPE:
100 Ohm Platinum
Range: 10 Ohm Copper, 100 Ohm Nickel, 120 Ohm
Nickel, 100 Ohm Platinum
RRTD 1 RTD1 NAME:
RRTD1
Range: 8 character alphanumeric. Seen only if RRTD 1
APPLICATION is other than “None”
RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARM:
Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Seen only if RRTD 1
APPLICATION is other than “None”
RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARM
RELAYS: Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Seen
only if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is not “None”
RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARM
LEVEL: 130 °C
Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1. Seen only
if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is other than “None”
RRTD 1 RTD1 HI ALARM:
Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Seen only if RRTD 1
APPLICATION is other than “None”.
RRTD1 RTD1 HI ALARM
RELAY: Aux1
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Seen
only if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is not “None”.
RRTD 1 RTD1 HI ALARM
LEVEL: 130 °C
Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1. Seen only
if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is other than “None”.
RRTD 1 RTD1 ALARMS
AS EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes. Seen only if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is
other than “None”.
RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIP:
Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Seen only if RRTD 1
APPLICATION is other than “None”.
RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIP
RELAYS: Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations. Seen
only if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is not “None”.
RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIP
LEVEL: 130 °C
Range: 1 to 200°C or 34 to 392°F in steps of 1. Seen only
if RRTD 1 APPLICATION is other than “None”.
RRTD 1 RTD1 TRIP
VOTING: Off
Range: Off, RRTD 1 to 12, All Stator. Seen only if RRTD
1 APPLICATION is other than “None”
•
RTD 1(12) APPLICATION: Each individual RTD may be assigned an application. A setting of “None” turns an individual RTD off. Only RTDs with the application set to “Stator” are used for RTD biasing of the thermal model. If an RTD
application is set to “Ambient”, then its is used in calculating the learned cool time of the motor.
•
RTD 1(12) TYPE: Each RTD is individually assigned the RTD type it is connected to. Multiple types may be used with
a single 369.
•
RTD 1(12) NAME: Each RTD may have 8 character name assigned to it. This name is used in alarm and trip messages.
•
RTD 1(12) ALARM, RTD 1(12) HI ALARM, and RTD 1(12) TRIP: Each RTD can be programmed for separate Alarm,
Hi Alarm and Trip levels and relays. Trips are automatically stored as events. Alarms and Hi Alarms are stored as
events only if the Record Alarms as Events setpoint for that RTD is set to Yes.
•
RTD 1(12) TRIP VOTING: This feature provides added RTD trip reliability in situations where malfunction and nuisance tripping is common. If enabled, the RTD trips only if the RTD (or RTDs) to be voted with are also above their trip
level. For example, if RTD 1 is set to vote with All Stator RTDs, the 369 will only trip if RTD 1 is above its trip level and
any one of the other stator RTDs is also above its own trip level. RTD voting is typically only used on Stator RTDs and
typically done between adjacent RTDs to detect hot spots.
5-46
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
Stator RTDs can detect heating due to non overload (current) conditions such as blocked or inadequate cooling and ventilation or high ambient temperature as well as heating due to overload conditions. Bearing or other RTDs can detect overheating of bearings or auxiliary equipment.
Table 5–2: RTD RESISTANCE TO TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
RTD RESISTANCE (IN OHMS)
°C
°F
100 Ohm Pt
DIN 43760
120 Ohm Ni
100 Ohm Ni
10 Ohm Cu
–40
–40
84.27
92.76
79.13
7.49
–30
–22
88.22
99.41
84.15
7.88
–20
–4
92.16
106.15
89.23
8.26
–10
14
96.09
113.00
94.58
8.65
0
32
100.00
120.00
100.0
9.04
10
50
103.90
127.17
105.6
9.42
20
68
107.79
134.52
111.2
9.81
30
86
111.67
142.06
117.1
10.19
40
104
115.54
149.79
123.0
10.58
50
122
119.39
157.74
129.1
10.97
60
140
123.24
165.90
135.3
11.35
70
158
127.07
174.25
141.7
11.74
80
176
130.89
182.84
148.3
12.12
90
194
134.70
191.64
154.9
12.51
100
212
138.50
200.64
161.8
12.90
110
230
142.29
209.85
168.8
13.28
120
248
146.06
219.29
176.0
13.67
130
266
149.82
228.96
183.3
14.06
140
284
153.58
238.85
190.9
14.44
150
302
157.32
248.95
198.7
14.83
160
320
161.04
259.30
206.6
15.22
170
338
164.76
269.91
214.8
15.61
180
356
168.47
280.77
223.2
16.00
190
374
172.46
291.96
231.6
16.39
200
392
175.84
303.46
240.0
16.78
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5
5-47
5.7 S6 RTD TEMPERATURE
5 SETPOINTS
5.7.4 OPEN RTD ALARM
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ØØØ OPEN LOCAL RTD ALARM
OPEN LOCAL RTD ALARM
OPEN LOCAL RTD
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
OPEN RTD ALARM
EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
The 369 has an Open RTD Sensor Alarm. This alarm will look at all RTDs that have been assigned an application other
than “None” and determine if an RTD connection has been broken. When a broken sensor is detected, the assigned output
relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that is broken. It is recommended that if this
feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent RTDs are detected and corrective action may be
taken.
5.7.5 SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ØØØØ SHORT/LOW RTD ALARM
SHORT/LOW RTD ALARM
5
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
SHORT/LOW TEMP ALARM
EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
The 369 has an RTD Short/Low Temperature alarm. This function tracks all RTDs that have an application other than
“None” to determine if an RTD has either a short or a very low temperature (less than –40°C). When a short/low temperature is detected, the assigned output relay will operate and a message will appear on the display identifying the RTD that
caused the alarm. It is recommended that if this feature is used, the alarm be programmed as latched so that intermittent
RTDs are detected and corrective action may be taken.
5.7.6 LOSS OF RRTD COMMS ALARM
PATH: S6 RTD TEMPERATURE ØØØØØ LOSS OF RRTD COMMS
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS
ALARM: OFF
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
LOSS OF RRTD COMMS
EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
The 369, if connected to a RRTD module, will monitor communications between them. If for some reason communications
is lost or interrupted the 369 can issue an alarm indicating the failure. This feature is useful to ensure that the remote RTDs
are continuously being monitored.
5-48
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5.8S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5.8.1 DESCRIPTION
These elements are not used by the 369 unless the M or B option is installed and the VT CONNECTION TYPE setpoint (see
Section 5.3.2: CT/VT Setup on page 5–11) is set to something other than “None”.
5.8.2 UNDERVOLTAGE
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS Ø UNDERVOLTAGE
UNDERVOLTAGE
U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR
STOPPED: No
Range: No, Yes
UNDERVOLTAGE
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
STARTING U/V ALARM
PICKUP: 0.85xRATED
Range: 0.50 to 0.99 x RATED in steps of 0.01
RUNNING U/V ALARM
PICKUP: 0.85xRATED
Range: 0.50 to 0.99 x RATED in steps of 0.01
UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM
DELAY: 3.0 S
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
UNDERVOLTAGE ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
UNDERVOLTAGE
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
STARTING U/V TRIP
PICKUP: 0.80xRATED
Range: 0.50 to 0.99 x RATED in steps of 0.01
RUNNING U/V TRIP
PICKUP: 0.80xRATED
Range: 0.50 to 0.99 x RATED in steps of 0.01
UNDERVOLTAGE TRIP
DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
5
If enabled, an undervoltage trip or alarm occurs once the magnitude of either Vab, Vbc, or Vca falls below the running
pickup level while running or the starting pickup level while starting, for a period of time specified by the alarm or trip delay
(pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).
An undervoltage on a running motor with a constant load results in increased current. The relay thermal model typically
picks up this condition and provides adequate protection. However, this setpoint may be used in conjunction with time delay
to provide additional protection that may be programmed for advance warning by tripping.
The U/V ACTIVE IF MOTOR STOPPED setpoint may be used to prevent nuisance alarms or trips when the motor is stopped.
If "No" is programmed the undervoltage element will be blocked from operating whenever the motor is stopped (no phase
current and starter status indicates breaker or contactor open). If the load is high inertia, it may be desirable to ensure that
the motor is tripped off line or prevented from starting in the event of a total loss or decrease in line voltage. Programming
"Yes" for the block setpoint will ensure that the motor is tripped and may be restarted only after the bus is re-energized.
A typical application of this feature is with an undervoltage of significant proportion that persists while starting a synchronous motor which may prevent it from coming up to rated speed within the rated time. This undervoltage may be an indication of a system fault. To protect a synchronous motor from being restarted while out of step it may be necessary to use
undervoltage to take the motor offline before a reclose is attempted.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-49
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.8.3 OVERVOLTAGE
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ØØ OVERVOLTAGE
OVERVOLTAGE
5
OVERVOLTAGE
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM
PICKUP: 1.05xRATED
Range: 1.01 to 1.25 x RATED in steps of 0.01
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM
DELAY: 3.0s
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
OVERVOLTAGE ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
OVERVOLTAGE
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
OVERVOLTAGE TRIP
PICKUP: 1.10xRATED
Range: 1.01 to 1.25 x RATED in steps of 0.01
OVERVOLTAGE TRIP
DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
If enabled, once the magnitude of either Vab, Vbc, or Vca rises above the Pickup Level for a period of time specified by the
Delay, a trip or alarm will occur (pickup levels are multiples of motor nameplate voltage).
An overvoltage on running motor with a constant load will result in decreased current. However, iron and copper losses
increase, causing an increase in motor temperature. The current overload relay will not pickup this condition and provide
adequate protection. Therefore, the overvoltage element may be useful for protecting the motor in the event of a sustained
overvoltage condition.
The Undervoltage and Overvoltage alarms and trips are activated based upon the phase to phase voltage
regardless of the VT connection type.
NOTE
5.8.4 PHASE REVERSAL
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ØØØ PHASE REVERSAL
PHASE REVERSAL
PHASE REVERSAL
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
The 369 can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltage. If the phase reversal feature is turned on when all 3
phase voltages are greater than 50% motor nameplate voltage and the phase rotation of the three phase voltages is not the
same as the setpoint, a trip and block start will occur in 500 ms to 700 ms.
5-50
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5.8.5 UNDERFREQUENCY
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ØØØØ UNDERFREQUENCY
UNDERFREQUENCY
BLOCK UNDERFREQUENCY
FROM START:
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
UNDERFREQUENCY
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM
LEVEL: 59.50 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM
DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
UNDERFREQUENCY ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
UNDERFREQUENCY
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
UNDERFREQUENCY TRIP
LEVEL: 59.50 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
UNDERFREQUENCY TRIP
DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
5
Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) falls below the underfrequency
pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.
This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entire
feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker. Underfrequency can also be used to detect loss of power to a synchronous motor. Due to motor generation, sustained voltage may prevent quick detection of power loss. Therefore, to
quickly detect the loss of system power, the decaying frequency of the generated voltage as the motor slows can be used.
The Underfrequency element is not active when the motor is stopped.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-51
5.8 S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.8.6 OVERFREQUENCY
PATH: S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ØØØØØ OVERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQUENCY
5
BLOCK OVERFREQUENCY
FROM START: 1 s
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
OVERFREQUENCY
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
OVERFREQUENCY ALARM
LEVEL: 60.50 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
OVERFREQUENCY ALARM
DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
OVERFREQUENCY ALARM
EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
OVERFREQUENCY
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
OVERFREQUENCY TRIP
LEVEL: 60.50 Hz
Range: 20.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
OVERFREQUENCY TRIP
DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.0 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
Once the frequency of the phase AN or AB voltage (depending on wye or delta connection) rises above the overfrequency
pickup level, a trip or alarm will occur.
This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be used to load shed an entire
feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker.
The Overfrequency element is not active when the motor is stopped.
5-52
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5.9S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5.9.1 DESCRIPTION
These protective elements rely on CTs and VTs being installed and setpoints programmed. The power elements are only
used if the 369 has option M or B installed. By convention, an induction motor consumes Watts and vars. This condition is
displayed on the 369 as +Watts and +vars. A synchronous motor can consume Watts and vars or consume Watts and generate vars. These conditions are displayed on the 369 as +Watts, +vars, and +Watts, –vars respectively.
^
I
1
5
^
I
2
^
I
3
^
I
4
Figure 5–12: POWER MEASUREMENT CONVENTIONS
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-53
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.9.2 LEAD POWER FACTOR
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS Ø LEAD POWER FACTOR
LEAD POWER FACTOR
5
BLOCK LEAD PF
FROM START: 1 s
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
LEAD POWER FACTOR
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
LEAD POWER FACTOR
ALARM LEVEL: 0.30
Range: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
LEAD POWER FACTOR
ALARM DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
LEAD POWER FACTOR
ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
LEAD POWER FACTOR
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
LEAD POWER FACTOR
TRIP LEVEL: 0.30
Range: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
LEAD POWER FACTOR
TRIP DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has been
applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point
forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lead level, for the
specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating a lead condition.
The lead power factor alarm can be used to detect over-excitation or loss of load.
5.9.3 LAG POWER FACTOR
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS ØØ LAG POWER FACTOR
LAG POWER FACTOR
5-54
BLOCK LAG PF
FROM START: 1 s
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
LAG POWER FACTOR
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
LAG POWER FACTOR
ALARM LEVEL: 0.85
Range: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
LAG POWER FACTOR
ALARM DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
LAG POWER FACTOR
ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
LAG POWER FACTOR
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
LAG POWER FACTOR
TRIP LEVEL: 0.80
Range: 0.05 to 0.99 in steps of 0.01
LAG POWER FACTOR
TRIP DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on power factor until the field has been
applied. Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point
forward, the power factor trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the power factor is less than the lag level, for the
specified delay, a trip or alarm will occur indicating lag condition.
The power factor alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation and out of step for a synchronous motor.
5.9.4 POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS ØØØ POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
POSITIVE REACTIVE
POWER (kvar)
BLOCK +kvar ELEMENT
FROM START: 1 s
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
POSITIVE kvar
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
POSITIVE kvar ALARM
LEVEL: 10 kvar
Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
POSITIVE kvar
ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
POSITIVE kvar
ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
POSITIVE kvar
TRIP:
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
POSITIVE kvar TRIP
LEVEL: 25 kvar
Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
POSITIVE kvar
TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
5
If the 369 is applied on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied.
Therefore, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward,
the kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the positive level, for the specified delay, a trip
or alarm will occur indicating a positive kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect loss of excitation
and out of step.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-55
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.9.5 NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS ØØØØ NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
POWER (kvar)
5
BLOCK -kvar ELEMENT
FROM START: 1 s
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
NEGATIVE kvar
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
NEGATIVE kvar ALARM
LEVEL: 10 kvar
Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
NEGATIVE kvar
ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
NEGATIVE kvar
ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
NEGATIVE kvar
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
NEGATIVE kvar TRIP
LEVEL: 25 kvar
Range: 1 to 25000 kvar in steps of 1
NEGATIVE kvar
TRIP DELAY: 1.0s
Range: 0.1 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.1
When using the 369 on a synchronous motor, it is desirable not to trip or alarm on kvar until the field has been applied. As
such, this feature can be blocked until the motor comes up to speed and the field is applied. From that point forward, the
kvar trip and alarm elements will be active. Once the kvar level exceeds the negative level for the specified delay, a trip or
alarm occurs, indicating a negative kvar condition. The reactive power alarm can be used to detect overexcitation or loss of
load.
5.9.6 UNDERPOWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS ØØØØØ UNDERPOWER
UNDERPOWER
5-56
BLOCK UNDERPOWER
FROM START: 1 s
Range: 0 to 15000 s in steps of 1
UNDERPOWER
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
UNDERPOWER ALARM
LEVEL: 2 kW
Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
UNDERPOWER
ALARM DELAY: 1 s
Range: 0.5 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.5
UNDERPOWER
ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
UNDERPOWER
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.9 S8 POWER ELEMENTS
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
UNDERPOWER TRIP
LEVEL: 1 kW
Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
UNDERPOWER
TRIP DELAY: 1 s
Range: 0.5 to 255.0 s in steps of 0.5
If enabled, a trip or alarm occurs when the magnitude of three-phase total real power falls below the pickup level for a
period of time specified by the delay. The underpower element is active only when the motor is running and will be blocked
upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time defined by the BLOCK UNDERPOWER FROM START setpoint (e.g. this
block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the underpower element trips or alarms). A value of 0 means the
feature is not blocked from start; otherwise the feature is disabled when the motor is stopped and also from the time a start
is detected until the time entered expires. The pickup level should be set lower than motor loading during normal operations.
Underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions. Loss of load conditions will not always cause a significant loss
of current. Power is a more accurate representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive detection of load loss or
pump cavitation. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.
5.9.7 REVERSE POWER
PATH: S8 POWER ELEMENTS ØØØØØØ REVERSE POWER
REVERSE POWER
BLOCK REVERSE POWER
FROM START: 1 s
Range: 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1
REVERSE POWER
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combination
REVERSE POWER ALARM
LEVEL: 1 kW
Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
REVERSE POWER
ALARM DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 30.0 s in steps of 0.5
REVERSE POWER
ALARM EVENTS: Off
Range: Off, On
REVERSE POWER
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
REVERSE POWER TRIP
LEVEL: 1 kW
Range: 1 to 25000 kW in steps of 1
REVERSE POWER
TRIP DELAY: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 30 s in steps of 0.5
5
If enabled, once the magnitude of three-phase total real power exceeds the pickup level in the reverse direction (negative
kW) for a period of time specified by the delay, a trip or alarm will occur.
NOTE
The minimum power measurement magnitude is determined by the phase CT minimum of 5% rated CT primary. If the reverse power level is set below this, a trip or alarm will only occur once the phase current
exceeds the 5% cutoff.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-57
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.10S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5.10.1 DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTIONS
a) DESCRIPTION
Any of the digital inputs may be selected and programmed as a separate General Switch, Digital Counter, or Waveform
Capture Input. The xxxxx term in the following menus refers to the configurable switch input function – either the Spare
Switch, Emergency Restart, Differential Switch, Speed Switch, or Remote Reset inputs described in the following sections.
b) GENERAL
GENERAL SWITCH
NAME: General
Range: 12 character alphanumeric
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
GENERAL SWITCH
TYPE: NO
Range: NO (normally open), NC (normally closed)
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
BLOCK INPUT FROM
START: 0 s
Range: 0 to 5000 s in steps of 1
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
GENERAL SWITCH
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
GENERAL SWITCH
ALARM DELAY: 5.0 s
Range: 0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
RECORD ALARMS AS
EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
GENERAL SWITCH
TRIP: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations
Only seen if function is selected as General
MESSAGE
GENERAL SWITCH
TRIP DELAY: 5.0 s
Range: 0.1 to 5000.0 s in steps of 0.1
Only seen if function is selected as General
xxxxx SW FUNCTION:
General
5
The above selections will be shown if the in the corresponding menu if SPARE SW FUNCTION, EMERGENCY FUNCTION, DIFF
SW FUNCTION, or SPEED SW FUNCTION setpoints are set to “General”. Refer to the individual sections for Spare Switch,
Emergency Restart, Differential Switch, Speed Switch, or Remote Reset below for additional function-specific setpoints.
5-58
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
c) DIGITAL COUNTER
COUNTER
NAME: Counter
Range: 8 character alphanumeric
Only seen if function is Digital Counter
MESSAGE
COUNTER
UNITS: Units
Range: 6 character alphanumeric
Only seen if function is Digital Counter
MESSAGE
COUNTER
TYPE: Increment
Range: Increment, Decrement
Only seen if function is Digital Counter
MESSAGE
DIGITAL COUNTER
ALARM: Off
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched
Only seen if function is Digital Counter
MESSAGE
ASSIGN ALARM RELAYS:
Alarm
Range: None, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations.
Only seen if function is Digital Counter
MESSAGE
COUNTER ALARM LEVEL:
100
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Only seen if function is Digital Counter
MESSAGE
RECORD ALARMS AS
EVENTS: No
Range: No, Yes
Only seen if function is Digital Counter
xxxxx SW FUNCTION:
Digital Counter
The above selections will be shown if the SPARE SW FUNCTION, EMERGENCY FUNCTION, DIFF SW FUNCTION, or SPEED SW
FUNCTION setpoints are set to “Digital Counter”. Refer to the individual sections for Spare Switch, Emergency Restart, Differential Switch, Speed Switch, or Remote Reset below for additional function-specific setpoints.
Only one digital input may be selected as a digital counter at a time. User defined units and counter name may be defined
and these will appear on all counter related actual value and alarm messages. To clear a digital counter alarm, the alarm
level must be increased or the counter must be cleared or preset to a lower value.
d) WAVEFORM CAPTURE
The Waveform Capture setting for the digital inputs allows the 369 to capture a waveform upon command (contact closure).
The captured waveforms can then be displayed via the EnerVista 369 Setup program.
e) DEVICENET CONTROL
This function is available for the DeviceNet option only. The digital input set with the DeviceNet control function and the
switch status closed allows motor start, motor stop, and fault reset commands through DeviceNet communications.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-59
5
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.10.2 SPARE SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS Ø SPARE SWITCH
SPARE SW FUNCTION:
Off
Range: Off, Starter Status, General, Digital Counter,
Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control
MESSAGE
STARTER AUX CONTACT
TYPE: 52a
Range: 52a, 52b
Only seen if FUNCTION is "Starter Status"
MESSAGE
STARTER OPERATION
MONITOR DELAY: 3 s
Range: OFF, 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
Only seen if FUNCTION is “Starter Status”
MESSAGE
STARTER OPERATION
TYPE: Off
MESSAGE
ASSIGN RELAYS:
None
Range: Off, Latched, Unlatched. Only seen if SPARE SW
FUNCTION is “Starter Status” and STARTER
OPERATION MONITOR DELAY is not “OFF”
Range: None, Trip, Alarm, Aux1, Aux2, or combinations.
Only seen if SPARE SW FUNCTION is “Starter
Status” and STARTER OPERATION MONITOR
DELAY is not “Off”.
SPARE SWITCH
See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of the spare switch functions.
In addition to regular selections, the Spare Switch may be used as a starter status contact input. An auxiliary ‘52a’ type contact follows the state of the main contactor or breaker and an auxiliary ‘52b’ type contact is in the opposite state. This feature is recommended for use on all motors. It is essential for proper operation of start inhibits (i.e., starts/hour, time between
starts, start inhibit, restart block, backspin start inhibit), especially when the motor may be run lightly or unloaded.
5
A motor stop condition is detected when the current falls below 5% of CT. When SPARE SWITCH is programmed as “Starter
Status”, motor stop conditions are detected when the current falls below 5% of CT and the breaker is open. Enabling the
Starter Status and wiring the breaker contactor to the Spare Switch eliminates nuisance lockouts initiated by the 369 if the
motor (synchronous or induction) is running unloaded or idling, and if the STARTS/HOUR, TIME BETWEEN STARTS, START
INHIBIT, RESTART BLOCK, and BACKSPIN START INHIBIT are programmed.
In addition, there may be applications where current is briefly present after the breaker is opened on a motor stop (for
example, discharge from power factor correction capacitors). In such a case, the 369 will detect this current as an additional start. To prevent this from occurring, the STARTER OPERATION MONITOR DELAY setpoint is used. If this setpoint is
programmed to any value other than “OFF”, a motor start is logged only if current above 5% of the CT is present and the
breaker is closed (for an “52a” type contact). If the breaker is open (for an “52a” type contact) and the current above 5% of
CT is present for longer than the STARTER OPERATION MONITOR DELAY time, then a trip or alarm will occur (according to
the relay settings). If the trip relay is assigned under the ASSIGN RELAYS setpoint, then a trip will occur and a trip event will
be recorded; otherwise, an alarm will occur and an alarm event recorded. If the STARTER OPERATION MONITOR DELAY is
“OFF”, this functionality will be disabled.
The Access switch is predefined and is non programmable.
NOTE
5.10.3 EMERGENCY RESTART
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ØØ EMERGENCY RESTART
EMERGENCY RESTART
EMERGENCY FUNCTION:
Emergency Restart
Range: Off, Emergency Restart, General, Digital Counter,
Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control
See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of the emergency restart functions. In addition
to the normal selections, the Emergency Restart Switch may be used as a emergency restart input to the 369 to override
protection for the motor.
When the emergency restart switch is closed all trip and alarm functions are reset. Thermal capacity used is set to zero and
all protective elements are disabled until the switch is opened. Starts per hour are also reduced by one each time the switch
is closed.
5-60
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.10 S9 DIGITAL INPUTS
5.10.4 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ØØØ DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH
DIFF SW FUNCTION:
Differential Switch
Range: Off, Differential Switch, General, Digital Counter,
Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control
DIFF SW TRIP RELAY:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
Only seen if FUNCTION is "Differential Switch".
See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of differential switch functions. In addition to
the normal selections, the Differential Switch may be used as a contact input for a separate external 86 (differential trip)
relay. Contact closure will cause the 369 relay to issue a differential trip.
5.10.5 SPEED SWITCH
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ØØØØ SPEED SWITCH
SPEED SWITCH
SPEED SW FUNCTION:
Speed Switch
Range: Off, Speed Switch, General, Digital Counter,
Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control
SPEED SWITCH TIME
DELAY: 2.0s
Range: 0.5 to 100.0s in steps of 0.5
Only seen if FUNCTION is "Speed Switch"
SPEED SW TRIP RELAY:
Trip
Range: None, Trip, Aux1, Aux2 or combinations
Only seen if FUNCTION is "Speed Switch"
See Section 5.10.1: Digital Input Functions on page 5–58 for an explanation of speed switch functions. In addition to the
normal selections, the Speed Switch may be used as an input for an external speed switch. This allows the 369 to utilize a
speed device for locked rotor protection. During a motor start, if no contact closure occurs within the programmed time
delay, a trip will occur. The speed input must be opened for a speed switch trip to be reset.
5.10.6 REMOTE RESET
PATH: S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ØØØØØ REMOTE RESET
REMOTE RESET
REMOTE SW FUNCTION:
Remote Reset
Range: Off, Remote Reset, General, Digital Counter,
Waveform Capture, DeviceNet Control
See the following section for an explanation of remote reset functions. In addition to the normal selections, the Remote
Reset may be used as a contact input to reset the relay.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-61
5
5.11 S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
5 SETPOINTS
5.11S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS
5.11.1 ANALOG OUTPUTS
PATH: S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS Ø ANALOG OUTPUT 1(4)
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
ANALOG OUTPUT 1:
DISABLED
Range: Disabled, Enabled
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
RANGE: 0-1 mA
Range: 0–1mA, 0–20 mA, 4–20 mA
ANALOG OUTPUT 1:
Phase A Current
Range: See Analog Output selection table
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
MIN: 0 A
Range: See Analog Output selection table
ANALOG OUTPUT 1
MAX: 100 A
Range: See Analog Output selection table
The analog output parameters are indicated in the following table:
Table 5–3: ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETERS
PARAMETER NAME
5
RANGE /UNITS
STEP
DEFAULT
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
Phase A Current
0 to 65535 A
1
0
100
Phase B Current
0 to 65535 A
1
0
100
Phase C Current
0 to 65535 A
1
0
100
Avg. Phase Current
0 to 65535 A
1
0
100
AB Line Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
3200
4500
BC Line Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
3200
4500
CA Line Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
3200
4500
Avg. Line Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
3200
4500
Phase AN Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
1900
2500
Phase BN Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
1900
2500
Phase CN Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
1900
2500
2500
Avg. Phase Voltage
0 to 65000 V
1
1900
Hottest Stator RTD
–40 to +200°C or –40 to +392°F
1
0
200
RTD #1 to 12
–40 to +200°C or –40 to +392°F
1
–40
200
Power Factor
–0.99 to 1.00
0.01
0.01
0.80
Reactive Power
–32000 to 32000 kvar
1
0
750
Real Power
–32000 to 32000 kW
1
0
1000
Apparent Power
Thermal Capacity Used
Relay Lockout Time
0 to 65000 kVA
1
0
1250
0 to 100%
1
0
100
0 to 999 minutes
1
0
150
Motor Load
0.00 to 20.00 x FLA
0.01
0.00
1.25
MWhrs
0 to 65535 MWhrs
1
0
65535
5-62
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETPOINTS
5.12 S11 369 TESTING
5.12S11 369 TESTING
5.12.1 TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
PATH: S11 369 TESTING Ø TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
FORCE TRIP RELAY:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized
FORCE TRIP RELAY
DURATION: Static
Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1
FORCE AUX1 RELAY:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized
FORCE AUX1 RELAY
DURATION: Static
Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1
FORCE AUX2 RELAY:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized
FORCE AUX2 RELAY:
DURATION: Static
Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1
FORCE ALARM RELAY:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized
FORCE ALARM RELAY
DURATION: Static
Range: Static, 1 to 300 s in steps of 1
The Test Output Relay feature provides a method of performing checks on all relay contact outputs. This feature is not
meant for control purposes during operation of the motor. For control purposes, the force output relays functionality (refer to
Force Output Relays on page 5–23) is used.
The forced state, if enabled (energized or de-energized), forces the selected relay into the programmed state for as long as
the programmed duration. After the programmed duration expires, the forced state will return to disabled and relay operation will return to normal. If the duration is programmed as Static, the forced state will remain in effect until changed or disabled. If control power to the 369 is interrupted, any forced relay condition will be removed.
When the relays in this feature are programmed to any value other than “Disabled”, the In Service LED on the front panel
will turn on. The provides notification that the relay is not currently operating in a normal condition.
5.12.2 TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
PATH: S11 369 TESTING ØØ TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
FORCE ANALOG
OUTPUT 1: Off
Range: Off, 1 to 100% in steps of 1
FORCE ANALOG
OUTPUT 2: Off
Range: Off, 1 to 100% in steps of 1
FORCE ANALOG
OUTPUT 3: Off
Range: Off, 1 to 100% in steps of 1
FORCE ANALOG
OUTPUT 4: Off
Range: Off, 1 to 100% in steps of 1
The Test Analog Output setpoints may be used during startup or testing to verify that the analog outputs are functioning correctly. It may also be used when the motor is running to give manual or communication control of an analog output. Forcing
an analog output overrides its normal functionality.
When the Force Analog Outputs Function is enabled, the output will reflect the forced value as a percentage of the range 4
to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA, or 0 to 1 mA. Selecting Off will place the analog output channels back in service, reflecting the
parameters programmed to each.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
5-63
5
5.12 S11 369 TESTING
5 SETPOINTS
5
5-64
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW
A1 ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
MOTOR STATUS
LAST TRIP DATA
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
START BLOCK STATUS
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
REAL TIME CLOCK
FIELDBUS SPEC STATUS
A2 ACTUAL VALUES
METERING DATA
CURRENT METERING
VOLTAGE METERING
POWER METERING
BACKSPIN METERING
LOCAL RTD
REMOTE RTD
OVERALL STATOR RTD
DEMAND METERING
PHASORS
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
See page 6–3.
See page 6–3.
See page 6–4.
See page 6–4.
See page 6–5.
See page 6–5.
See page 6–5.
See page 6–6.
See page 6–7.
See page 6–7.
6
See page 6–8.
See page 6–8.
See page 6–9.
See page 6–9.
See page 6–9.
See page 6–10.
See page 6–10.
6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW
A3 ACTUAL VALUES
LEARNED DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MOTOR DATA
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
A4 ACTUAL VALUES
STATISTICAL DATA
TRIP COUNTERS
MOTOR STATISTICS
A5 ACTUAL VALUES
EVENT RECORD
EVENT: 250
See page 6–12.
See page 6–13.
See page 6–13.
See page 6–14.
See page 6–15.
See page 6–16.
EVENT: 249
EVENT: 2
EVENT: 1
6
A6 ACTUAL VALUES
RELAY INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
FIRMWARE VERSION
6-2
369 Motor Management Relay
See page 6–17.
See page 6–17.
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2A1 STATUS
6.2.1 MOTOR STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS Ø MOTOR STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
MOTOR STATUS:
Stopped
Range: Stopped, Starting, Running, Overload, Tripped
MOTOR THERMAL
CAPACITY USED: 0%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
ESTIMATED TRIP TIME
ON OVERLOAD: Never
Range: Never, 0 to 65500 s in steps of 1
These messages describe the status of the motor at the current point in time. The Motor Status message indicates the current state of the motor.
MOTOR STATE
DEFINITION
Stopped
phase current = 0 A and starter status input = breaker/contactor open
Starting
motor previously stopped and phase current has gone from 0 to > FLA
Running
FLA > phase current > 0 or starter status input = breaker/contactor closed and motor was previously running
Overload
motor previously running and phase current now > FLA
Tripped
a trip has been issued and not cleared
The Motor Thermal Capacity Used message indicates the current level which is used by the overload and cooling algorithms. The Estimated Trip Time On Overload is only active for the Overload motor status.
6.2.2 LAST TRIP DATA
PATH: A1 STATUS ØØ LAST TRIP DATA
LAST TRIP DATA
CAUSE OF LAST TRIP:
No Trip to date
Range: No Trip to Date, cause of trip
LAST TRIP
TIME: 00:00:00
Range: hour: min: seconds
LAST TRIP
DATE: Sep 01 2005
Range: month day year
A: 0
C: 0
GE Multilin
B: 0
A Pretrip
6
Range: 0 to 100000 A in steps of 1
MOTOR LOAD
Pretrip 0.00 x FLA
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 in steps of 0.01
CURRENT UNBALANCE
Pretrip: 0%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
GROUND CURRENT
Pretrip: 0.0 Amps
Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 Amps in steps of 0.1
HOTTEST STATOR RTD
RTD#1 0°C Pretrip
Range: –40 to +200 °C in steps of 1
Only shown if a STATOR RTD is programmed
Vab: 0 Vbc: 0
Vca: 0 V Pretrip
Range: 0 to 20000 in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
Van: 0 Vbn: 0
Vcn: 0 V Pretrip
Range: 0 to 20000 in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is "Wye"
369 Motor Management Relay
6-3
6.2 A1 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
SYSTEM FREQUENCY
Pretrip: 0.00 Hz
Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120.00 in steps of 0.01
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
0 kW 0 kVA
0 kvar Pretrip
Range: –50000 to +50000 in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
POWER FACTOR
Pretrip: 1.00
Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 lead
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
Immediately prior to a trip, the 369 takes a snapshot of the metered parameters along with the cause of trip and the date
and time and stores this as pre-trip values. This allows for ease of troubleshooting when a trip occurs. Instantaneous trips
on starting (< 50 ms) may not allow all values to be captured. These values are overwritten when the next trip occurs. The
event record shows details of the last 40 events including trips.
6.2.3 DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
PATH: A1 STATUS ØØØ DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES
No Trips or Alarms
are Active
Range: No Trips or Alarms are Active, active alarm
name and level, active trip name
Any active trips or alarms may be viewed here. If there is more than one active trip or alarm, using the Line Up and Down
keys will cycle through all the active alarm messages. If the Line Up and Down keys are not pressed, the active messages
will automatically cycle. The current level causing the alarm is displayed along with the alarm name.
6.2.4 START BLOCK STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS ØØØØ START BLOCK STATUS
START BLOCK STATUS
6
OVERLOAD LOCKOUT
TIMER: None
Range: 1 to 9999 min. in steps of 1
START INHIBIT
TIMER: None
Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1
STARTS/HOUR TIMERS:
0 0 0 0 0 min
Range: 1 to 60 min. in steps of 1
TIME BETWEEN STARTS
TIMER: None
Range: 1 to 500 min. in steps of 1
RESTART BLOCK TIMER:
None
Range: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1
•
OVERLOAD LOCKOUT TIMER: Determined from the thermal model, this is the remaining amount of time left before
the thermal capacity available will be sufficient to allow another start and the start inhibit will be removed.
•
START INHIBIT TIMER: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time for the Thermal Capacity to reduce to a
level to allow for a safe start according to the Start Inhibit setpoints.
•
STARTS/HOUR TIMER: If enabled this display will indicate the number of starts within the last hour by showing the
time remaining in each. The oldest start will be on the left. Once the time of one start reaches 0, it is no longer considered a start within the hour and is removed from the display and any remaining starts are shifted over to the left.
•
TIME BETWEEN STARTS TIMER: If enabled this timer will indicate the remaining time from the last start before the
start inhibit will be removed and another start may be attempted. This time is measure from the beginning of the last
motor start.
•
RESTART BLOCK TIMER: If enabled this display will reflect the amount of time since the last motor stop before the
start block will be removed and another start may be attempted.
6-4
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 A1 STATUS
6.2.5 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS ØØØØØ DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
EMERGENCY RESTART:
Open
Range: Open, Closed
Note: Programmed input name displayed
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY:
Open
Range: Open, Closed
Note: Programmed input name displayed
SPEED SWITCH:
Open
Range: Open, Closed
Note: Programmed input name displayed
RESET:
Open
Range: Open, Closed
Note: Programmed input name displayed
ACCESS:
Open
Range: Open, Closed
Note: Programmed input name displayed
SPARE:
Open
Range: Open, Closed
Note: Programmed input name displayed
The present state of the digital inputs will be displayed here.
6.2.6 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS ØØØØØØ OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
TRIP: De–energized
Range: Energized, De–energized
ALARM: De–energized
Range: Energized, De–energized
AUX 1: De–energized
Range: Energized, De–energized
AUX 2: De–energized
Range: Energized, De–energized
6
The present state of the output relays will be displayed here. Energized indicates that the NO contacts are now closed and
the NC contacts are now open. De-energized indicates that the NO contacts are now open and the NC contacts are now
closed.
6.2.7 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: A1 STATUS ØØØØØØØ REAL TIME CLOCK
REAL TIME CLOCK
DATE: 09/30/2005
TIME: 00:00:00
Range: month/day/year, hour: minute: second
The date and time from the 369 real time clock may be viewed here.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
6-5
6.2 A1 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.8 FIELDBUS SPECIFICATION STATUS
PATH: A1 STATUS ØØØØØØØØ FIELDBUS SPEC STATUS
FIELDBUS SPEC STATUS
EXPLICIT STATUS:
Nonexistent
Range: Nonexistent, Configuring, Established,
Timed Out, Deleted
IO POLLED STATUS:
Nonexistent
Range: Nonexistent, Configuring, Established,
Timed Out, Deleted
NETWORK STATUS:
Power Off/Not Online
Range: Power Off/Not Online, Online/Connected,
Link Failure
When the device is on the non-connected bus, the NETWORK STATUS message will continually cycle between
“Power Off/Not Online” and “Online/Connected”.
NOTE
6
6-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6.3A2 METERING DATA
6.3.1 CURRENT METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA Ø CURRENT METERING
CURRENT METERING
A: 0
C: 0
B: 0
Amps
Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1
AVERAGE PHASE
CURRENT: 0 Amps
Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1
MOTOR LOAD:
0.00 X FLA
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
CURRENT UNBALANCE:
0%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
U/B BIASED MOTOR
LOAD: 0.00 x FLA
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01. Only visible
if unbalance biasing is enabled in thermal model.
GROUND CURRENT:
0.0 Amps
Range: 0 to 6553.5 A in steps of 0.1 (for 1A/5A CT)
0.00 to 25.00 A in steps of 0.01 (for
50:0.025 A CT)
All measured current values are displayed here. Note that the unbalance level is de-rated below FLA. See the unbalance
setpoints in Section 5.4.2 Thermal Model on page 5–25 for more details.
6.3.2 VOLTAGE METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØ VOLTAGE METERING
VOLTAGE METERING
Vab: 0
Vca: 0
Vbc: 0
V RMS φ-φ
Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
AVERAGE LINE
VOLTAGE: 0 V
Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
Va: 0
Vc: 0
Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1
Only shown if a Wye connection programmed
Vb: 0
V RMS φ-N
AVERAGE PHASE
VOLTAGE: 0 V
Range: 0 to 65535 V in steps of 1
Only shown if a Wye connection programmed
SYSTEM FREQUENCY:
0.00 Hz
Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Measured voltage parameters will be displayed here. These displays are only visible if option M or B has been installed.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
6-7
6
6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.3 POWER METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØØ POWER METERING
POWER METERING
6
POWER FACTOR:
1.00
Range: 0.00 to 1.00 lag or lead
REAL POWER:
0 kW
Range: –32000 to 32000 kW in steps of 1
REAL POWER:
0 hp
Range: 0 to 42912 hp in steps of 1
REACTIVE POWER:
0 kvar
Range: –32000 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1
APPARENT POWER:
0 kVA
Range: 0 to 65000 kVA in steps of 1
POSITIVE WATTHOURS:
0 MWh
Range: 0 to 65535 MWh or 0 to 999 kWh in steps of 1
POSITIVE VARHOURS:
0 Mvarh
Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh or 0 to 999 kvarh in steps of 1
NEGATIVE VARHOURS:
0 Mvarh
Range: 0 to 65535 Mvarh or 0 to 999 kvarh in steps of 1
These actual values are only shown if the VT CONNECTION TYPE setpoint has been programmed (i.e., is not set to “None”).
The values for three phase power metering, consumption and generation are displayed here. The energy values displayed
here will be in units of MWh/Mvarh or kWh/kvarh, depending on the S1 369 SETUP Ö DISPLAY PREFERENCES ÖØ ENERGY
UNIT DISPLAY setpoint. The energy registers will roll over to zero and continue accumulating once their respective maximums have been reached. The MWh/Mvarh registers will continue accumulating after their corresponding kWh/kvarh registers have rolled over.
These displays are only visible if option M or B has been installed.
6.3.4 BACKSPIN METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØØØ BACKSPIN METERING
BACKSPIN METERING
BACKSPIN FREQUENCY:
Low Signal
Range: Low Signal, 1 to 120 Hz in steps of 0.01
Only shown if option B installed and enabled.
BACKSPIN DETECTION
STATE: No_BSD_Running
Range: Motor Running, No Backspin, Slowdown,
Acceleration, Backspinning, Prediction, Soon to
Restart. Seen only if Backspin Start Inhibit is
enabled
BACKSPIN PREDICTION
TIMER:30 s
Range: 0 to 50000 s in steps of 1.
Shown only if Backspin Start Inhibit is enabled
and predication timer is enabled.
Backspin metering parameters are displayed here. These values are shown if option B has been installed and the ENABLE
BACKSPIN START INHIBIT setting is “Yes”.
6-8
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6.3.5 LOCAL RTD
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØØØØ LOCAL RTD
LOCAL RTD
HOTTEST STATOR RTD
NUMBER: 1
Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1
HOTTEST STATOR RTD
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #1
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #2
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #12
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
The temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs are displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The programmed name of
each RTD (if changed from the default) appears as the first line of each message. These displays are only visible if option
R has been installed.
6.3.6 REMOTE RTD
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØØØØØ REMOTE RTD Ø REMOTE RTD MODULE 1(4)
REMOTE RTD MODULE 1
MOD 1 HOTTEST STATOR
NUMBER: 0
Range: None, 1 to 12 in steps of 1
MOD 1 HOTTEST STATOR
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RRTD 1 RTD #1
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RRTD 1 RTD #2
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RRTD 1 RTD #12
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
6
The temperature level of all 12 remote RTDs will be displayed here if programmed and connected to a RRTD module. The
name of each RRTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message. These displays are only visible if option R has been installed.
If communications with the RRTD module is lost, the RRTD MODULE COMMUNICATIONS LOST message will be displayed.
6.3.7 OVERALL STATOR RTD
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØØØØØØ OVERALL STATOR RTD
OVERALL STATOR RTD
GE Multilin
HOTTEST OVERALL
STATOR TEMP: 70°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
HOTTEST STATOR RTD:
Local 369 RTD#: 4
Range: No RTD, Local 369, RRTD#1 to RRTD#4 (for
RTD Name), 1 to 12 in steps of 1 (for RTD #)
369 Motor Management Relay
6-9
6.3 A2 METERING DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.8 DEMAND METERING
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØØØØØØØ DEMAND METERING
DEMAND METERING
CURRENT
DEMAND: 0 Amps
Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1
REAL POWER
DEMAND: 0 kW
Range: 0 to 32000 kW in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed
REACTIVE POWER
DEMAND: 0 kvar
Range: 0 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed
APPARENT POWER
DEMAND: 0 kVA
Range: 0 to 65000 kVA in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed
PEAK CURRENT
DEMAND: 0 Amps
Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1
PEAK REAL POWER
DEMAND: 0 kW
Range: 0 to 32000 kW in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed
PEAK REACTIVE POWER
DEMAND: 0 kvar
Range: 0 to 32000 kvar in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed
PEAK APPARENT POWER
DEMAND: 0 kVA
Range: 0 to 65000 kVA in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION programmed
The values for current and power demand are displayed here. Peak demand information can be cleared using the
CLEAR PEAK DEMAND command located in S1 369 SETUP Ø CLEAR/PRESET DATA. Demand is only shown for positive real
(kW) and reactive (kvar) powers. Only the current demand will be visible if options M or B are not installed.
6.3.9 PHASORS
6
PATH: A2 METERING DATA ØØØØØØØØØ PHASORS
PHASORS
Ia PHASOR:
0 Degrees Lag
Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1
Ib PHASOR:
0 Degrees Lag
Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1
Ic PHASOR:
0 Degrees Lag
Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1
Va PHASOR:
0 Degrees Lag
Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
Vb PHASOR:
0 Degrees Lag
Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
Vc PHASOR:
0 Degrees Lag
Range: 0 to 359 degrees in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
All angles shown are with respect to the reference phasor. The reference phasor is based on the VT connection type. In the
event that option M has not been installed, Van for Wye is 0 V, or Vab for Delta is 0 V, Ia will be used as the reference phasor.
Reference Phasor
VT Connection Type
Ia
None
6-10
Van
Wye
Vab
Delta
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 A2 METERING DATA
Note that the phasor display is not intended to be used as a protective metering element. Its prime purpose is to diagnose
errors in wiring connections.
To aid in wiring, the following tables can be used to determine if VTs and CTs are on the correct phase and their polarity is
correct. Problems arising from incorrect wiring are extremely high unbalance levels (CTs), erroneous power readings (CTs
and VTs), or phase reversal trips (VTs). To correct wiring, simply start the motor and record the phasors. Using the following
tables along with the recorded phasors, system rotation, VT connection type, and motor power factor, the correct phasors
can be determined. Note that Va (Vab if delta) is always assumed to be 0° and is the reference for all angle measurements.
Common problems include:
Phase currents 180° from proper location (CT polarity reversed)
Phase currents or voltages 120° or 240° out (CT/VT on wrong phase)
Table 6–1: THREE PHASE WYE VT CONNECTION
ABC
ROTATION
Va
Vb
Vc
Ia
Ib
Ic
kW
kvar
kVA
72.5°
= 0.3 PF LAG
0
120
240
75
195
315
+
+
+
45°
= 0.7 PF LAG
0° lag
120
240
45
165
285
+
+
+
0°
= 1.00 PF
0° lag
120
240
0
120
240
+
0
+ (= kW)
–45°
= 0.7 PF LEAD
0° lag
120
240
315
75
195
+
–
+
–72.5°
= 0.2 PF LEAD
0
120
240
285
45
165
+
–
+
ACB
ROTATION
Va
Vb
Vc
Ia
Ib
Ic
kW
kvar
kVA
72.5°
= 0.3 PF LAG
0
240
120
75
315
195
+
+
+
45°
= 0.7 PF LAG
0° lag
240
120
45
285
165
+
+
+
0°
= 1.00 PF
0° lag
240
120
0
240
120
+
0
+ (= kW)
–45°
= 0.7 PF LEAD
0° lag
240
120
315
195
75
+
–
+
–72.5°
= 0.2 PF LEAD
0
240
120
285
165
45
+
–
+
6
Table 6–2: THREE PHASE OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION
ABC
ROTATION
Va
Vb
Vc
Ia
Ib
Ic
kW
kvar
kVA
72.5°
= 0.3 PF LAG
0
---300
100
220
340
+
+
+
45°
= 0.7 PF LAG
0°
---300
75
195
315
+
+
+
0°
= 1.00 PF
0°
---300
30
150
270
+
0
+ (= kW)
–45°
= 0.7 PF LEAD
0°
---300
345
105
225
+
–
+
–72.5°
= 0.3 PF LEAD
0
---300
320
80
200
+
–
+
ACB
ROTATION
Va
Vb
Vc
Ia
Ib
Ic
kW
kvar
kVA
72.5°
= 0.3 PF LAG
0
---60
45
285
165
+
+
+
45°
= 0.7 PF LAG
0°
---60
15
255
135
+
+
+
0°
= 1.00 PF
0°
---60
330
210
90
+
0
+ (= kW)
–45°
= 0.7 PF LEAD
0°
---60
285
165
45
+
–
+
–72.5°
= 0.3 PF LEAD
0
---60
260
140
20
+
–
+
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
6-11
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4A3 LEARNED DATA
6.4.1 DESCRIPTION
This page contains the data the 369 learns to adapt itself to the motor protected.
6.4.2 MOTOR DATA
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA Ø MOTOR DATA
MOTOR DATA
6
LEARNED ACCELERATION
TIME: 0.0 s
Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1
LEARNED STARTING
CURRENT: 0 A
Range: 0 to 100000 A in steps of 1
LEARNED STARTING
CAPACITY: 85%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
LEARNED RUNNING COOL
TIME CONST.: 0 min
Range: 0 to 500 min in steps of 1
LEARNED STOPPED COOL
TIME CONST.: 0 min
Range: 0 to 500 min in steps of 1
LAST STARTING
CURRENT: 0 A
Range: 0 to 100000 A in steps of 1
LAST STARTING
CAPACITY: 85%
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
LAST ACCELERATION
TIME: 0.0 s
Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1
AVERAGE MOTOR LOAD
LEARNED: 0.00 X FLA
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
LEARNED UNBALANCE k
FACTOR: 0
Range: 0 to 29 in steps of 1
The learned values for acceleration time and starting current are the average of the individual values acquired for the last
five successful starts. The value for starting current is used when learned k factor is enabled.
The learned value for starting capacity is the amount of thermal capacity required for a start determined by the 369 from the
last five successful motor starts. The last five learned start capacities are averaged and a 25% safety margin factored in.
This guarantees enough thermal capacity available to start the motor. The Start Inhibit feature, when enabled, uses this
value in determining lockout time.
The learned cool time constants and unbalance k factor are displayed here. The learned value is the average of the last five
measured constants. These learned cool time constants are used only when the ENABLE LEARNED COOL TIMES thermal
model setpoint is "Yes". The learned unbalance k factor is the average of the last five calculated k factors. The learned k
factor is only used when unbalance biasing of thermal capacity is set on and to learned.
Note that learned values are calculated even when features requiring them are turned off. The learned features should not
be used until at least five successful motor starts and stops have occurred.
Starting capacity, starting current, and acceleration time values are displayed for the last start. The average motor load
while running is also displayed here. The motor load is averaged over a 15 minute sliding window.
Clearing motor data (see Section 5.2.9: Clear/Preset Data on page 5–9) resets these values to their default settings.
6-12
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 A3 LEARNED DATA
6.4.3 LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA ØØ LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
RTD #1 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #2 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #3 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #12 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
The maximum temperature level of all 12 internal RTDs will be displayed here if the 369 has option R enabled. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear as the first line of each message.
These displays are only visible if option R has been installed and RTDs have been programmed.
6.4.4 REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS
PATH: A3 LEARNED DATA ØØØ REMOTE RTD MAXIMUMS Ø RRTD #1(4)
RRTD #1
RTD #1 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #2 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #3 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
RTD #12 MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE: 40°C
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
6
The maximum temperature level of the 12 remote RTDs for each RRTD will be displayed here if the 369 has been programmed and connected to a RRTD module. The programmed name of each RTD (if changed from the default) will appear
as the first line of each message. If an RRTD module is connected and no RRTDs are programmed, the display reads NO
RRTDS PROGRAMMED when an attempt is made to enter this actual values page.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
6-13
6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.5A4 STATISTICAL DATA
6.5.1 TRIP COUNTERS
PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA Ø TRIP COUNTERS
TRIP COUNTERS
6
6-14
TOTAL NUMBER OF
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
INCOMPLETE SEQUENCE
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
SWITCH
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
OVERLOAD
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
SHORT CIRCUIT
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
MECHANICAL JAM
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
UNDERCURRENT
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
CURRENT UNBALANCE
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
SINGLE PHASE
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
GROUND FAULT
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
ACCELERATION
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
STATOR RTD
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
BEARING RTD
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
OTHER RTD
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
AMBIENT RTD
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
UNDERVOLTAGE
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
OVERVOLTAGE
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
PHASE REVERSAL
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
UNDERFREQUENCY
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
OVERFREQUENCY
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.5 A4 STATISTICAL DATA
LEAD POWER FACTOR
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
LAG POWER FACTOR
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
POSITIVE REACTIVE
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
NEGATIVE REACTIVE
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
UNDERPOWER
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
REVERSE POWER
TRIPS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
TRIP COUNTERS LAST
CLEARED: 09/01/2005
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
The number of trips by type is displayed here. When the total reaches 50000, the counter resets to 0 on the next trip and
continues counting. This information can be cleared with the setpoints in the CLEAR/PRESET DATA section of setpoints
page one. The date the counters are cleared will be recorded.
6.5.2 MOTOR STATISTICS
PATH: A4 STATISTICAL DATA ØØ MOTOR STATISTICS
MOTOR STATISTICS
NUMBER OF MOTOR
STARTS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
NUMBER OF EMERGENCY
RESTARTS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
MOTOR RUNNING HOURS:
0 hrs
Range: 0 to 100000 in steps of 1
AUTORESTART START
ATTEMPTS: 0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
TIME TO AUTORESTART:
0
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
COUNTER:
0 Units
Range: 0 to 65535 Units in steps of 1
Shown if Counter set to a digital input
6
These values display the number of motor starts and emergency restarts. This information is useful for troubleshooting a
motor failure or in understanding the history and use of a motor for maintenance purposes. When any of these counters
reaches 50000, they are automatically reset to 0.
The MOTOR RUNNING HOURS indicates the elapsed time since the 369 determined the motor to be in a running state (current applied and/or starter status indicating contactor/breaker closed). The NUMBER OF MOTOR STARTS, NUMBER OF
EMERGENCY RESTARTS, and MOTOR RUNNING HOURS counters can be cleared with the S1 369 SETUP Ø CLEAR/PRESET
DATA Ø CLEAR MOTOR DATA setpoint.
The digital counter will be displayed when one of the digital inputs has been set up as a digital counter. The digital counter
can be cleared with the S1 369 SETUP Ø CLEAR/PRESET DATA Ø PRESET DIGITAL COUNTER setpoint. When the digital
counter has exceeded 65535, it will automatically be reset by the 369 relay to 0.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
6-15
6.6 A5 EVENT RECORD
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.6A5 EVENT RECORD
6.6.1 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: A5 EVENT RECORD Ø EVENT 01
EVENT 01
TIME OF EVENT 01
00:00:00:00
Time:
hours / minutes / seconds / hundreds of seconds
DATE OF EVENT 01
Sep. 01, 2005
Date:
month / day / year
A: 0
C: 0
B: 0
A
E:
MOTOR LOAD
0.00 X FLA
Range: 0 to 65535 A in steps of 1
01
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01
E:
01
CURRENT UNBALANCE:
0%
E:
01
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
GROUND CURRENT:
0.0 Amps E:
01
Range: 0.0 to 5000.0 A steps of 0.1 (1A/5A CT)
0.00 to 25.00 A steps of 0.01 (50: 0.025 A CT)
HOTTEST STATOR
RTD 1: 0°C
E:
01
Range: –40 to 200°C or –40 to 392°F,
No RTD = open, Shorted = shorted RTD
Vab:
Vca:
0 Vbc: 0
0 V
E:
01
Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is "Delta"
Van:
Vcn:
0 Vbn: 0
0 V
E:
01
Range: 0 to 20000 V in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is "Wye"
SYSTEM FREQUENCY:
0.00 Hz
E:
01
0 kW
0 kvar
6
0 kVA
E:
01
POWER FACTOR:
1.00
E:
01
Range: 0.00, 15.00 to 120 Hz in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
Range: –50000 to +50000 in steps of 1
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
Range: 0.00 lag to 1 to 0.00 lead
Only shown if VT CONNECTION is programmed
A breakdown of the last 250 events is available here along with the cause of the event and the date and time. All trips automatically trigger an event. Alarms only trigger an event if turned on for that alarm. Loss or application of control power, service alarm and emergency restart opening and closing also triggers an event. After 250 events have been recorded, the
oldest one is removed when a new one is added. The event record may be cleared in the setpoints page 1, clear/preset
data, clear event record section.
6-16
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION
6.7A6 RELAY INFORMATION
6.7.1 MODEL INFORMATION
PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION Ø MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
SERIAL NUMBER:
MXXXXXXXX
Range: See Autolabel for details
INSTALLED OPTIONS:
369-HI-R-M-0-0-0
Range: 369 HI/LO, R/0, M/B/0, F/0, P/P1/E/D/0, H/0
MANUFACTURE
DATE: Sep. 01 2005
Range: month/day/year
LAST CALIBRATION
DATE: Sep. 01 2005
Range: month/day/year
The relay model and manufacturing information may be viewed here. The last calibration date is the date the relay was last
calibrated at GE Multilin.
6.7.2 FIRMWARE VERSION
PATH: A6 RELAY INFORMATION ØØ FIRMWARE VERSION
FIRMWARE VERSION
FIRMWARE REVISION:
250
BUILD DATE & TIME:
Apr 12, 2006 13:55:42
BOOT REVISION:
100
ANYBUS CARD SOFTWARE
REVISION: 112
Note:
Only shown with the Profibus (P or P1), Modbus/
TCP (E), and DeviceNet (D) options.
This information reflects the revisions of the software currently running in the 369. This information should be noted and
recorded before calling for technical support or service.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
6-17
6
6.7 A6 RELAY INFORMATION
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
6-18
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.1 269-369 COMPARISON
7 APPLICATIONS 7.1269-369 COMPARISON
7.1.1 369 AND 269PLUS COMPARISON
Table 7–1: COMPARISON BETWEEN 369 AND 269PLUS
369
269Plus
All options can be turned on or added in the field
Must be returned for option change or add other devices
Current and optional voltage inputs are included on all relays
Current inputs only. Must use additional meter device to obtain
voltage and power measurements.
Optional 12 RTDs with an additional 12 RTDs available with the
RRTD. All RTDs are individually configured
(100P, 100N, 120N, 10C)
10 RTDs not programmable, must be specified at time of order.
Fully programmable digital inputs
No programmable digital inputs
4 programmable analog outputs assignable to 33 parameters
1 Analog output programmable for 5 parameters
1 RS232 (19.2K baud), 3 RS485 (1200 TO 19.2K baud
programmable) communication ports. Also Optional profibus port
and optional fiber optics port
1 RS485 Communication port (2400 baud maximum)
Flash memory firmware upgrade thru PC software and comm port
EPROM must be replaced to change firmware
EVENT RECORDER: time and date stamp last 250 events.
Records all trips and selectable alarms
Displays cause of last trip and last event
OSCILLOGRAPHY: up to 64 cycles at 16 samples/cycle for last
event(s)
N/A
Programmable text message(s)
N/A
Backspin frequency detection and backspin timer
Backspin timer
Starter failure indication
N/A
Measures up to 20 x CT at 16 samples/cycle
Measures up to 12 x CT at 12 samples/cycle
15 standard overload curves
8 standard overload curves
Remote display is standard
Remote display with mod
7
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-1
7.2 369 FAQS
7 APPLICATIONS
7.2369 FAQS
1.
7.2.1 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS (FAQS)
What is the difference between Firmware and Software?
Firmware is the program running inside the relay, which is responsible for all relay protection and control elements.
Software is the program running on the PC, which is used to communicate with the relay and provide relay control
remotely in a user friendly format.
2.
How can I obtain copies of the latest manual and PC software?
I need it now!: via the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
I guess I can wait: fax a request to the GE Multilin Literature department at (905) 201-2113
3.
Cannot communicate through the front port (RS232).
Check the following settings:
4.
•
Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC
•
Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)
•
Baud rate setting on the master (PC or PLC) must match RS232 baud rate on the 369 relay.
•
Cable has to be a straight through cable, do not use null modem cables where pin 2 and 3 are transposed
•
Check the pin outs of RS232 cable (TX - pin 2, RX - pin 3, GND - pin 5)
Cannot communicate with RS485.
Check the following settings:
•
Communication Port (COM1, COM2, COM3 etc.) on PC or PLC
•
Parity settings must match between the relay and the master (PC or PLC)
•
Baud rate must match between the relay and the master
•
Slave address polled must match between the relay and the master
•
Is terminating filter circuit present?
•
Are you communicating in half duplex? (369 communicates in half duplex mode only)
•
Is wiring correct? (“+” wire should go to “+” terminal of the relay, and “–” goes to “–” terminal)
•
Is the RS485 cable shield grounded? (shielding diminishes noise from external EM radiation)
Check the appropriate communication port LED on the relay. The LED should be solidly lit when communicating properly. The LED will blink on and off when the relay has communication difficulties and the LED will be off if no activity
detected on communication lines.
7
5.
Can the 4 wire RS485 (full duplex) be used with 369?
No, the 369 communicates in 2-wire half duplex mode only. However, there are commercial RS485 converters that will
convert a 4 wire to a 2 wire system.
6.
Cannot store setpoint into the relay.
Check and ensure the ACCESS switch is shorted, and check for any PASSCODE restrictions.
7.
The 369 relay displays incorrect power reading, yet the power system is balanced. What could be the possible
reasons?
It is highly possible that the secondary wiring to the relay is not correct. Incorrect power can be read when any of the A,
B, or C phases are swapped, a CT or VT is wired backwards, or the relay is programmed as ABC sequence when the
power system is actually ACB and vice versa. The easiest way to verify is to check the voltage and the current phasor
readings on the 369 relay and ensure that each respective voltage and current angles match.
8.
What are the merits of a residual ground fault connection versus a core balance connection?
The use of a zero sequence (core balance) CT to detect ground current is recommended over the G/F residual connection. This is especially true at motor starting. During across-the-line starting of large motors, care must be taken to
prevent the high inrush current from operating the ground element of the 369. This is especially true when using the
residual connection of 2 or 3 CTs.
7-2
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.2 369 FAQS
In a residual connection, the unequal saturation of the current transformers, size and location of motor, size of power
system, resistance in the power system from the source to the motor, type of iron used in the motor core & saturation
density, and residual flux levels may all contribute to the production of a false residual current in the secondary or relay
circuit. The common practice in medium and high voltage systems is to use low resistance grounding. By using the
“doughnut CT” scheme, such systems offer the advantages of speed and reliability without much concern for starting
current, fault contribution by the motor, or false residual current.
When a zero sequence CT is used, a voltage is generated in the secondary winding only when zero sequence current
is flowing in the primary leads. Since virtually all motors have their neutrals ungrounded, no zero sequence current can
flow in the motor leads unless there is a ground fault on the motor side.
9.
Can I send a 269 setpoint file to a 369 relay?
Yes. Using the 369PC software, a 269 setpoint file can be sent to the 369. Note that any settings/features not in the
269 setpoint file are set to default values on the 369. All setpoints should be confirmed before operating the relay.
10. Can I use an 86 lockout on the 369?
Yes, but if an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369, ensure the 369 is reset prior to attempting
to reset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped, it will immediately re-trip the lockout switch. Also, if the lockout
switch is held reset, the high current draw of the switch coil may cause damage to itself and/or the 369 output relay.
11. Can I assign more than one output relay to be blocked when using Start Inhibits?
Yes, but keep in mind that if two output relays are wired in series to inhibit a start it is possible that another element
could be programmed to control one or both of the relays. If this is happening and the other element is programmed
with a longer delay time, this will make it seem as if the Start Inhibit is not working properly when in fact, it is.
12. Can I name a digital input?
Yes. By configuring the digital input as "General" a menu will appear that will allow naming.
13. Can I apply an external voltage to the digital inputs on the 369?
No. The 369 uses an internal voltage to operate the digital inputs. Applying an external voltage may cause damage to
the internal circuitry.
14. No display, no characters on the display but there is a backlight.
Check the contrast using the help button. Press and hold the help button for 2 seconds. When all the LED’s are illuminated press the value up key to darken the contrast or value down key to lighten the contrast. When the desired contrast is selected press the enter key to accept the change.
15. Can I upload setpoint files from previous versions to the latest version of firmware?
Yes, with the exception of setpoint files from versions 1.10 and 1.12. Unfortunately these setpoint files must be rewritten, as they are not compatible.
16. What method does the 369 use to calculate current unbalance?
The 369 uses the NEMA method. Previous revisions of the 369 manual have incorrectly included a functional test that
measured the ratio of negative sequence current to positive sequence current. The NEMA method is as follows:
I max – I avg
If Iavg ≥ IFLA, then Unbalance = -------------------------- × 100
I avg
where:
Iavg = average phase current
Imax = current in a phase with maximum derivation from Iavg
IFLA = motor full load amps setting
I max – I avg
If Iavg < IFLA, then Unbalance = -------------------------- × 100
I FLA
To prevent nuisance trips/alarms on lightly loaded motors when a much larger unbalance level will not damage the
rotor, the unbalance protection will automatically be defeated if the average motor current is less than 30% of the full
load current (IFLA) setting.
17. I need to update the options for my 369/RRTD in the field, can I do this?
Yes. All options of the 369/RRTD can be turned on or added in the field. To do this contact the factory.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-3
7
7.2 369 FAQS
7 APPLICATIONS
18. Can I test my output relays?
Yes, but keep in mind that the output relays cannot be forced into a different state while the motor is running.
19. Is the communication interface for Profibus RS232 or RS485?
It is RS485. The 9-pin connector on the rear of the 369 is the connector used by the manufacturer of the Profibus card
and although it is a DB-9, the electrical interface is RS485.
20. Can I use the options enabler code to upgrade my 369 in the field to get the Profibus option?
Yes, but keep in mind that there is a Profibus card that is required and is not installed in units that were not ordered
from the factory with the Profibus option.
21. Can the 369 be used as a remote unit, similar to the 269 remote?
Yes. Every 369 can be used as remote. When ordering the 369, an external 15 foot cable must be ordered.
22. Can the RRTD module be used as a standalone unit?
Yes. The RRTD unit with the IO option, has 4 output relays, 6 digital inputs and 4 analog outputs. With this option the
RRTD can provide temperature protection.
23. Why is there a filter ground and a safety ground connection? Why are they separate?
The safety ground ensures operator safety with regards to hazardous shocks; the filter ground protects the internal
electronic circuitry from transient noise.
These two grounds are separated for hi-pot (dielectric strength) testing purposes. Both grounds should be tied to the
ground bus external to the relay.
7
7-4
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.3 369 DOS AND DONT’S
7.3369 DOS AND DONT’S
7.3.1 DOS AND DONT’S
a) DOS
Always check the power supply rating before applying power to the relay
Applying voltage greater than the maximum rating to the power supply (e.g. 120 V AC to the low-voltage rated power
supply) could result in component damage to the relay's power supply. This will result in the unit no longer being able
to power up.
Ensure that the 369 nominal phase current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating and the connections of the
connected CTs
Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate protection.
Ensure that the source CT and VT polarity match the relay CT and VT polarity
Polarity of the Phase CTs is critical for power measurement, and residual ground current detection (if used). Polarity of
the VTs is critical for correct power measurement and voltage phase reversal operation.
Properly ground the 369
Connect both the Filter Ground (terminal 123) and Safety Ground (terminal 126) of the 369 directly to the main
GROUND BUS. The benefits of proper grounding of the 369 are numerous, e.g,
•
Elimination of nuisance tripping
•
Elimination of internal hardware failures
•
Reliable operation of the relay
•
Higher MTBF (Mean Time Between Failures)
•
It is recommended that a tinned copper braided shielding and bonding cable be used. A Belden 8660 cable or
equivalent should be used as a minimum to connect the relay directly to the ground bus.
Grounding of Phase and Ground CTs
All Phase and Ground CTs must be grounded. The potential difference between the CT's ground and the ground bus
should be minimal (ideally zero).
It is highly recommended that the two CT leads be twisted together to minimize noise pickup, especially when the
highly sensitive 50:0.025 Ground CT sensor is used.
RTDs
Consult the application notes of the 369 Instruction Manual for the full description of the 369 RTD circuitry and the different RTD wiring schemes acceptable for proper operation. However, for best results the following recommendations
should be adhered to:
a)
Use a 3 wire twisted, shielded cable to connect the RTDs from the motor to the 369. The shields should be connected to the proper terminals on the back of the 369.
b)
RTD shields are internally connected to the 369 ground (terminal #126) and must not be grounded anywhere else.
c)
RTD signals can be characterized as very small, sensitive signals. Therefore, cables carrying RTD signals should
be routed as far away as possible from power carrying cables such as power supply and CT cables.
d)
If after wiring the RTD leads to the 369, the RTD temperature displayed by the Relay is zero, then check for the
following conditions:
1. Shorted RTD
2. RTD hot and compensation leads are reversed, i.e. hot lead in compensation terminal and compensation lead
in hot terminal.
RS485 Communications Port
The 369 can provide direct or remote communications (via a modem). An RS232 to RS485 converter is used to tie it to
a PC/PLC or DCS system. The 369 uses the Modicon MODBUS® RTU protocol (functions 03, 04, and 16) to interface
with PCs, PLCs, and DCS systems.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-5
7
7.3 369 DOS AND DONT’S
7 APPLICATIONS
RS485 communications was chosen to be used with the 369 because it allows communications over long distances of
up to 4000 ft. However, care must be taken for it to operate properly and trouble free. The recommendations listed
below must be followed to obtain reliable communications:
a)
A twisted, shielded pair (preferably a 24 gauge Belden 9841 type or 120 equivalent) must be used and routed
away from power carrying cables, such as power supply and CT cables.
b)
No more than 32 devices can co-exist on the same link. If however, more than 32 devices should be daisy chained
together, a REPEATER must be used. Note that a repeater is just another RS232 to RS485 converter device. The
shields of all 369 units should also be daisy chained together and grounded at the MASTER (PC/PLC) only. This
is due to the fact that if shields are grounded at different points, a potential difference between grounds might exist
resulting in placing one or more of the transceiver chips (chip used for communications) in an unknown state, i.e.
not receiving nor sending. The corresponding 369 communications might be erroneous, intermittent or unsuccessful.
c)
Two sets of 120 ohm/ 0.5 W resistor and 1 nF / 50 V capacitor in series must be used (value matches the characteristic impedance of the line). One set at the 369 end, connected between the positive and negative terminals
(#46 & #47 on 369) and the second at the other end of the communications link. This is to prevent reflections and
ringing on the line. If a different value resistor is used, it runs the risk of over loading the line and communications
might be erroneous, intermittent or totally unsuccessful.
d)
It is highly recommended that connection from the 369 communication terminals be made directly to the interfacing Master Device (PC/PLC/DCS), without the use of stub lengths and/or terminal blocks. This is also to minimize
ringing and reflections on the line.
b) DON'TS
Don’t apply direct voltage to the Digital Inputs.
There are 6 switch inputs (Spare Input; Differential Input; Speed Switch; Access; Emergency Restart; External Reset)
that are designed for dry contact connections only. Applying direct voltage to the inputs, it may result in component
damage to the digital input circuitry.
Grounding of the RTDs should not be done in two places.
When grounding at the 369, only one Return lead need be grounded as all are hard-wired together internally. No error
will be introduced into the RTD reading by grounding in this manner.
Running more than one RTD Return lead back will cause significant errors as two or more parallel paths for return
have been created.
Don’t reset an 86 Lockout switch before resetting the 369.
If an external 86 lockout device is used and connected to the 369, ensure that the 369 is reset prior to attempting to
reset the lockout switch. If the 369 is still tripped, it will immediately re-trip the lockout switch. Also if the lockout switch
is held reset, the high current draw of the lockout switch coil may cause damage to itself and/or the 369 output relay.
7
7-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION
7.4CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION
7.4.1 CT SPECIFICATION
a) 369 CT WITHSTAND
Withstand is important when the phase or ground CT has the capability of driving a large amount of current into the interposing CTs in the relay. This typically occurs on retrofit installations when the CTs are not sized to the burden of the relay.
Electronic relays typically have low burdens (mΩ), while the older electromechanical relays have typically high burdens
(1 Ω).
For high current ground faults, the system will be either low resistance or solidly grounded. The limiting factor that determines the ground fault current that can flow in these types of systems is the source capacity. Withstand is not important for
ground fault on high resistance grounded systems. On these systems, a resistor makes the connection from source to
ground at the source (generator, transformer). The resistor value is chosen so that in the event of a ground fault, the current
that flows is limited to a low value, typically 5, 10, or 20 A.
Since the potential for very large faults exists (ground faults on high resistance grounded systems excluded), the fault must
be cleared as quickly as possible. It is therefore recommended that the time delay for short circuit and high ground faults be
set to instantaneous. Then the duration for which the 369 CTs subjected to high withstand will be less than 250 ms (369
reaction time is less than 50ms + breaker clearing time).
NOTE
Care must be taken to ensure that the interrupting device is capable of interrupting the potential fault. If
not, some other method of interrupting the fault should be used, and the feature in question should be disabled (e.g. a fused contactor relies on fuses to interrupt large faults).
The 369 CTs were subjected to high currents for 1 second bursts. The CTs were capable of handling 500 A (500 A relates
to a 100 times the CT primary rating). If the time duration required is less than 1 second, the withstand level will increase.
b) CT SIZE AND SATURATION
The rating (as per ANSI/IEEE C57.13.1) for relaying class CTs may be given in a format such as: 2.5C100, 10T200, T1OO,
10C50, or C200. The number preceding the letter represents the maximum ratio correction; no number in this position
implies that the CT accuracy remains within a 10% ratio correction from 0 to 20 times rating.
The letter is an indication of the CT type:
•
A 'C' (formerly L) represents a CT with a low leakage flux in the core where there is no appreciable effect on the ratio
when used within the limits dictated by the class and rating. The 'C' stands for calculated; the actual ratio correction
should be different from the calculated ratio correction by no more than 1%. A 'C' type CT is typically a bushing, window, or bar type CT with uniformly distributed windings.
•
A 'T' (formerly H) represents a CT with a high leakage flux in the core where there is significant effect on CT performance. The 'T' stands for test; since the ratio correction is unpredictable, it is to be determined by test. A 'T' type CT is
typically primary wound with unevenly distributed windings. The subsequent number specifies the secondary terminal voltage that may be delivered by the full winding at 20 times rated secondary current without exceeding the ratio
correction specified by the first number of the rating. (Example: a 10C100 can develop 100 V at 20 × 5 A, therefore an
appropriate external burden would be 1 Ω or less to allow 20 times rated secondary current with less than 10% ratio
correction.) Note that the voltage rating is at the secondary terminals of the CT and the internal voltage drop across the
secondary resistance must be accounted for in the design of the CT. There are seven voltage ratings: 10, 20, 50, 100,
200, 400, and 800. If a CT comes close to a higher rating, but does not meet or exceed it, then the CT must be rated to
the lower value.
In order to determine how much current CTs can output, the secondary resistance of the CT is required. This resistance will
be part of the equation as far as limiting the current flow. This is determined by the maximum voltage that may be developed by the CT secondary divided by the entire secondary resistance, CT secondary resistance included.
7.4.2 CT SELECTION
The 369 phase CT should be chosen such that the FLA (FLC) of the motor falls within 50 to 100% of the CT primary rating.
For example, if the FLA of the motor is 173 A, a primary CT rating of 200, 250, or 300 can be chosen (200 being the better
choice). This provides maximum protection of the motor.
The CT selected must then be checked to ensure that it can drive the attached burden (relay and wiring and any auxiliary
devices) at maximum fault current levels without saturating. There are essentially two ways of determining if the CT is being
driven into saturation:
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-7
7
7.4 CT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION
1.
7 APPLICATIONS
Use CT secondary resistance.
Burden = CT secondary resistance + Wire resistance + Relay burden resistance
I fault maximum
CT secondary voltage = Burden × ----------------------------------CT ratio
Example:
Maximum fault level = 6 kA
369 burden = 0.003 Ω
CT = 300:5
CT secondary resistance = 0.088 Ω
Wire length (1 lead) = 50 m
Wire Size = 4.00 mm2
Ohms/km = 4.73 Ω
∴ Burden = 0.088 + (2 × 50)(4.73 / 1000) + 0.003 = 0.564 Ω
∴ CT secondary voltage = 0.564 × (6000 / (300 / 5)) = 56.4 V
Using the excitation curves for the 300:5 CT we see that the knee voltage is at 70 V, therefore this CT is acceptable for
this application.
2.
Use CT class.
Burden = Wire resistance + Relay burden resistance
I fault maximum
CT secondary voltage = Burden × ----------------------------------CT ratio
Example:
Maximum fault level = 6 kA, 369 burden = 0.003 Ω, CT = 300:5, CT class = C20,
Wire length (1 lead) = 50 m, Wire Size = 4.00 mm2, Ohms/km = 4.73 Ω
∴ Burden = (2 × 50) × (4.73/1000) + 0.003 = 0.476 Ω
∴ CT secondary voltage = 0.476 × (6000 / (300 / 5)) = 47.6 V
From the CT class (C20): The amount of secondary voltage the CT can deliver to the load burden at 20 × CT without
exceeding the 10% ratio error is 20 V. This application calls for 6000/300 = 20 × CT (Fault current / CT primary). Thus
the 10% ratio error may be exceeded.
The number in the CT class code refers to the guaranteed secondary voltage of the CT. Therefore, the maximum current that the CT can deliver can be calculated as follows:
7
maximum secondary current = CT class / Burden = 20 / 0.476 = 42.02 A
CT secondary resistance
CT class voltage
{
Wire
resistance
Wire
resistance
Relay
burden resistance
Figure 7–1: EQUIVALENT CT CIRCUIT
7-8
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7.5PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7.5.1 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
Information provided by a motor manufacturer can vary from nameplate information to a vast amount of data related to
every parameter of the motor. The table below shows selected information from a typical motor data sheet and Figure 7–2:
Motor Thermal Limits shows the related motor thermal limit curves. This information is required to set the 369 for a proper
protection scheme.
The following is a example of how to determine the 369 setpoints. It is only a example and the setpoints should be
determined based on the application and specific design of the motor.
Table 7–2: SELECTED INFORMATION FROM A TYPICAL MOTOR DATA SHEET
Driven equipment
Reciprocating Compressor
Ambient Temperature
min. –20°C; max. 41°C
Type or Motor
Synchronous
Voltage
6000 V
Nameplate power
2300 kW
Service Factor
1
Insulation class
F
Temperature rise stator / rotor
79 / 79 K
Max. locked rotor current
550% FLC
Locked rotor current% FLC
500% at 100% Voltage / 425% at 85% Voltage
Starting time
4 seconds at 100% Voltage / 6.5 seconds at 85% Voltage
Max. permissible starts cold / hot
3/2
Rated Load Current
229A at 100% Load
1000
Current vs. Time Diagram
1) at V=100% rated voltage
2) at V=85% rated voltage
Thermal Limit
3) from hot condition
4) from cold condition
7
TIME (S)
100
4
3
369 OVERLOAD
CURVE #4
10
2
1
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CURRENT P.U.
8
9
10
840736A2.CDR
Figure 7–2: MOTOR THERMAL LIMITS
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-9
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7 APPLICATIONS
Phase CT
The phase CT should be chosen such that the FLC is 50% to 100% of CT primary. Since the FLC is 229 A a 250:5, 300:5,
or 400:5 CT may be chosen (a 250:5 is the better choice).
229 / 0.50 = 458
or
229 / 1.00 = 229
Motor FLC
Set the Motor Full Load Current to 229A, as per data sheets.
Ground CT
For high resistive grounded systems, sensitive ground detection is possible with the 50:0.025 CT. On solidly grounded or
low resistive grounded systems where the fault current is much higher, a 1A or 5A CT should be used. If residual ground
fault connection is to be used, the ground fault CT ratio most equal the phase CT ratio. The zero sequence CT chosen
needs to be able to handle all potential fault levels without saturating.
VT Settings
The motor is going to be connected in Wye, hence, the VT connection type will be programmed as Wye. Since the motor
voltage is 6000V, the VT being used will be 6000:120. The VT ratio to be programmed into the 369 will then be 50:1 (6000/
120) and the Motor Rated Voltage will be programmed to 6000V, as per the motor data sheets.
Overload Pickup
The overload pickup is set to the same as the service factor of the motor. In this case, it would be set to the lowest setting
of 1.01 x FLC for the service factor of 1.
Unbalance Bias Of Thermal Capacity
Enable the Unbalance Bias of Thermal Capacity so that the heating effect of unbalance currents is added to the Thermal
Capacity Used.
Unbalance Bias K Factor
The K value is used to calculate the contribution of the negative sequence current flowing in the rotor due to unbalance. It
is defined as:
R r2
-------- , where: Rr2 = rotor negative sequence resistance, Rr1 = rotor positive sequence resistance
R r1
175
175
K = ---------- = ----------- @ 6
2
2
5.5
L RA
7
where: LRA = Locked Rotor Current
The above formula is based on empirical data.
NOTE
The 369 has the ability to learn the K value after five successful starts. After 5 starts, turn this setpoint off so that the 369
uses the learned value
Hot/Cold Curve Ratio
The hot/cold curve ratio is calculated by simply dividing the hot safe stall time by the cold safe stall time. This information
can be extracted from the Thermal Limit curves. From Figure 7–2: Motor Thermal Limits, we can determine that the hot
safe stall time is approximately 18 seconds and the cold safe stall time is approximately 24 seconds. Therefore, the Hot/
Cold curve ratio should be programmed as 0.75 (18 / 24) for this example.
Running and Stopped Cool Time Constant
The running cool time is the time required for the motor to cool while running. This information is usually supplied by the
motor manufacturer but is not part of the given data. The motor manufacturer should be contacted to find out what the cool
times are.
7-10
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
The Thermal Capacity Used quantity decays exponentially to simulate the cooling of the motor. The rate of cooling is based
upon the running cool time constant when the motor is running, or the stopped cool time constant when the motor is
stopped. The entered cool time constant is one fifth the total cool time from 100% thermal capacity used down to 0% thermal capacity used.
The 369 has a unique capability of learning the cool time constant. This learned parameter is only functional if the Stator
RTDs are connected to the 369. The learned cool time algorithm observes the temperature of the motor as it cools, thus
determining the length of time required for cooling. If the cool times can not be retrieved from the motor manufacturer, then
the Learned Cool Time must be enabled (if the stator RTDs are connected).
Motors have a fanning action when running due to the rotation of the rotor. For this reason, the running cool time is typically
half of the stopped cool time.
Refer to the Selection of Cool Time application note for more details on how to determine the cool time constants when not
provided with the motor.
RTD Biasing
This will enable the temperature from the Stator RTD sensors to be included in the calculations of Thermal Capacity. This
model determines the Thermal Capacity Used based on the temperature of the Stators and is a separate calculation from
the overload model for calculating Thermal Capacity Used. RTD biasing is a back up protection element which accounts for
such things as loss of cooling or unusually high ambient temperature. There are three parameters to set: RTD Bias Min,
RTD Bias Mid, RTD Bias Max.
RTD Bias Minimum
Set to 40°C which is the ambient temperature (obtained from data sheets).
RTD Bias Mid Point
The center point temperature is set to the motor’s hot running temperature and is calculated as follows:
Temperature Rise of Stator + Ambient Temperature.
The temperature rise of the stator is 79°K, obtained from the data sheets. Therefore, the RTD Center point temperature is
set to 120°C (79 + 40).
RTD Bias Maximum
This setpoint is set to the rating of the insulation or slightly less. A class F insulation is used in this motor which is rated at
155°C.
Overload Curve
If only one thermal limit curve is provided, the chosen overload curve should fit below it. When a hot and cold thermal limit
curve is provided, the chosen overload curve should fit between the two curves and the programmed Hot/Cold ratio is used
in the Thermal Capacity algorithm to take into account the thermal state of the motor. The best fitting 369 standard curve is
curve # 4, as seen in Figure 7–2: Motor Thermal Limits on page 7–9.
Short Circuit Trip
The short circuit trip should be set above the maximum locked rotor current but below the short circuit current of the fuses.
The data sheets indicate a maximum locked rotor current of 550% FLC or 5.5 × FLC. A setting of 6 × FLC with a instantaneous time delay will be ideal but nuisance tripping may result due to unusually high demanding starts or starts while the
load is coupled. If need be, set the S/C level higher to a maximum of 8 × FLC to override these conditions.
Mechanical Jam
If the process causes the motor to be prone to mechanical jams, set the Mechanical Jam Trip and Alarm accordingly. In
most cases, the overload trip will become active before the Mechanical Trip, however, if a high overload curve is chosen,
the Mechanical Jam level and time delay become more critical. The setting should then be set to below the overload curve
but above any normal overload conditions of the motor. The main purpose of the mechanical jam element is to protect the
driven equipment due to jammed, or broken equipment.
Undercurrent
If detection of loss of load is required for the specific application, set the undercurrent element according to the current that
will indicate loss of load. For example, this could be programmed for a pump application to detect loss of fluid in the pipe.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-11
7
7.5 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE
7 APPLICATIONS
Unbalance Alarm and Trip
The unbalance settings are determined by examining the motor application and motor design. In this case, the motor being
protected is a reciprocating compressor, in which unbalance will be a normal running condition, thus this setting should be
set high. A setting of 20% for the Unbalance Alarm with a delay of 10 seconds would be appropriate and the trip may be set
to 25% with a delay of 10 seconds
Ground Fault
Unfortunately, there is not enough information to determine a ground fault setting. These settings depend on the following
information:
1.
The Ground Fault current available.
2.
System Grounding - high resistive grounding, solidly grounded, etc.
3.
Ground Fault CT used.
4.
Ground Fault connection - zero sequence or Residual connection.
Acceleration Trip
This setpoint should be set higher than the maximum starting time to avoid nuisance tripping when the voltage is lower or
for varying loads during starting. If reduced voltage starting is used, a setting of 8 seconds would be appropriate, or if direct
across the line starting is used, a setting of 5 seconds could be used.
Start Inhibit
This function should always be enabled after five successful starts to protect the motor during starting while it is already hot.
The 369 learns the amount of thermal capacity used at start. If the motor is hot, thus having some thermal capacity, the 369
will not allow a start if the available thermal capacity is less than the required thermal capacity for a start. For more information regarding start inhibit refer to application note in section 7.6.6.
Starts/Hour
Starts/Hour can be set to the # of cold starts as per the data sheet. For this example, the starts/hour would be set to 3.
Time Between Starts
In some cases, the motor manufacturer will specify the time between motor starts. In this example, this information is not
given so this feature can be turned “Off”. However, if the information is given, the time provided on the motor data sheets
should be programmed.
Stator RTDs
7
RTD trip level should be set at or below the maximum temperature rating of the insulation. This example has a class F insulation which has a temperature rating of 155°C, therefore the Stator RTD Trip level should be set to between 140°C to
155°C. The RTD alarm level should be set to a level to provide a warning that the motor temperature is rising. For this
example, 120°C or 130°C would be appropriate.
Bearing RTDs
The Bearing RTD alarm and trip settings will be determined by evaluating the temperature specification from the bearing
manufacturer.
7-12
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6APPLICATIONS
7.6.1 MOTOR STATUS DETECTION
The 369 detects a stopped motor condition when the phase current falls below 5% of CT, and detects a starting motor condition when phase current is sensed after a stopped motor condition. If the motor idles at 5% of CT, several starts and stops
can be detected causing nuisance lockouts if Starts/Hour, Time Between Starts, Restart Block, Start Inhibit, or Backspin
Timer are programmed. As well, the learned values, such as the Learned Starting Thermal Capacity, Learned Starting Current and Learned Acceleration time can be incorrectly calculated.
To overcome this potential problem, the Spare Digital Input can be configured to read the status of the breaker and determine whether the motor is stopped or simply idling. With the spare input configured as Starter Status and the breaker auxiliary contacts wired across the spare input terminals, the 369 senses a stopped motor condition only when the phase
current is below 5% of CT (or zero) AND the breaker is open. If both of these conditions are not met, the 369 will continue
to operate as if the motor is running and the starting elements remain unchanged. Refer to the flowchart below for details of
how the 369 detects motor status and how the starter status element further defines the condition of the motor.
When the Starter Status is programmed, the type of breaker contact being used for monitoring must be set. The following
are the states of the breaker auxiliary contacts in relation to the breaker:
•
52a, 52aa - open when the breaker contacts are open and closed when the breaker contacts are closed
•
52b, 52bb - closed when the breaker contacts are open and open when the breaker contacts are closed
GET PREVIOUS
MOTOR MODE
ACTIVE OR
LATCHED TRIP
Y
IS TRIP
RESETABLE
Y
RESET
REQUEST
N
N
Y
RESET TRIP
N
TRIP
MODE = STOP
Y
I > FLA
START
7
N
N
I>0
MODE = START
Y
Y
N
Y
RUN
N
BREAKER
CLOSED?
Y
N
STOPPED
MODE = RUN
Y
N
N
I > FLA
Y
RUN IN OVERLOAD
PREVIOUS MODE
MUST = RUN IN
OVERLOAD
Figure 7–3: FLOWCHART SHOWING HOW MOTOR STATUS IS DETERMINED
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-13
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6.2 SELECTION OF COOL TIME CONSTANTS
Thermal limits are not a black and white science and there is some art to setting a protective relay thermal model. The definition of thermal limits mean different things to different manufacturers and quite often, information is not available. Therefore, it is important to remember what the goal of the motor protection thermal modeling is: to thermally protect the motor
(rotor and stator) without impeding the normal and expected operating conditions that the motor will be subject to.
The thermal model of the 369 provides integrated rotor and stator heating protection. If cooling time constants are supplied
with the motor data they should be used. Since the rotor and stator heating and cooling is integrated into a single model,
use the longer of the cooling time constants (rotor or stator).
If however, no cooling time constants are provided, settings will have to be determined. Before determining the cool time
constant settings, the duty cycle of the motor should be considered. If the motor is typically started and run continuously for
very long periods of time with no overload duty requirements, the cooling time constants can be large. This would make the
thermal model conservative. If the normal duty cycle of the motor involves frequent starts and stops with a periodic overload
duty requirement, the cooling time constants will need to be shorter and closer to the actual thermal limit of the motor.
Normally motors are rotor limited during starting. Thus RTDs in the stator do not provide the best method of determining
cool times. Determination of reasonable settings for the running and stopped cool time constants can be accomplished in
one of the following manners listed in order of preference.
1.
The motor running and stopped cool times or constants may be provided on the motor data sheets or by the manufacturer if requested. Remember that the cooling is exponential and the time constants are one fifth the total time to go
from 100% thermal capacity used to 0%.
2.
Attempt to determine a conservative value from available data on the motor. See the following example for details.
3.
If no data is available an educated guess must be made. Perhaps the motor data could be estimated from other motors
of a similar size or use. Note that conservative protection is better as a first choice until a better understanding of the
motor requirements is developed. Remember that the goal is to protect the motor without impeding the operating duty
that is desired.
EXAMPLE:
Motor data sheets state that the starting sequence allowed is 2 cold or 1 hot after which you must wait 5 hours before
attempting another start.
7
•
This implies that under a normal start condition the motor is using between 34 and 50% thermal capacity. Hence, two
consecutive starts are allowed, but not three (i.e. 34 × 3 > 100).
•
If the hot and cold curves or a hot/cold safe stall ratio are not available program 0.5 (1 hot / 2 cold starts) in as the hot/
cold ratio.
•
Programming Start Inhibit ‘On’ makes a restart possible as soon as 62.5% (50 × 1.25) thermal capacity is available.
•
After 2 cold or 1 hot start, close to 100% thermal capacity will be used. Thermal capacity used decays exponentially
(see 369 manual section on motor cooling for calculation). There will be only 37% thermal capacity used after 1 time
constant which means there is enough thermal capacity available for another start. Program 60 minutes (5 hours) as
the stopped cool time constant. Thus after 2 cold or 1 hot start, a stopped motor will be blocked from starting for 5
hours.
Since the rotor cools faster when the motor is running, a reasonable setting for the running cool time constant might be half
the stopped cool time constant or 150 minutes.
7-14
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6.3 THERMAL MODEL
start
U/B I/P to
Thermal Memory
Enabled?
Y
N
Ieq = Iavg ⋅ 1 + k ⋅ UB2
Ieq = Iavg
Ieq >
FLC x O/L
Pickup ?
Add to TC as per Ieq
and O/L Curve
Y
N
Ieq > FLC
TC >
FLC TCR x
(Iavg/FLC)
Y
N
Y
N
TC <
FLC TCR X
(Iavg/FLC)
Add 6% TC per Minute until
TC = FLC TCR x (Iavg/FLC)
Y
N
Decrement TC to
FLC TCR x (Iavg/FLC) as per
the rate defined by User's Cool
Rate or Learned Cool Rate
RTD BIAS
ENABLED?
N
Y
RTD BIAS TC >
TC ?
Y
TC = RTD BIAS TC
7
N
end
Figure 7–4: THERMAL MODEL BLOCK DIAGRAM
UB, U/B...................Unbalance
I/P ...........................Input
Iavg .........................Average Three Phase Current
Ieq...........................Equivalent Average Three Phase Current
Ip.............................Positive Sequence Current
In.............................Negative Sequence Current
K .............................Constant Multiplier that Equates In to Ip
FLC .........................Full Load Current
FLC TCR ................FLC Thermal Capacity Reduction setpoint
TC ...........................Thermal Capacity used
RTD BIAS TC .........TC Value looked up from RTD Bias Curve
If Unbalance input to thermal memory is enabled, the increase in heating is reflected in the thermal model.
If RTD Input to Thermal Memory is enabled, the feed-back from the RTDs will correct the thermal model.
NOTE
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-15
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6.4 RTD BIAS FEATURE
START
N
RTD BIAS
ENABLED ?
Y
Y
HOTTEST
STATOR RTD
> Tmax
N
T.C. = T.C. RTD =
100%
Y
HOTTEST
STATOR RTD
<Tmin
N
N
Tmin < HOTTEST
STATOR RTD < Tmax
(T.C. LOOKED UP ON
RTD BIAS CURVE)
OVERLOAD ?
Y
N
T.C. MODEL =
100%
Y
T.C. RTD >
T.C. THERMAL
MODEL
Y
N
TRIP
7
T.C. = T.C. RTD
T.C. = T.C. MODEL
END
840739A1.CDR
Figure 7–5: RTD BIAS FEATURE
LEGEND
Tmax .......................RTD Bias Maximum Temperature Value
Tmin ........................RTD Bias Minimum Temperature Value
Hottest RTD ............Hottest Stator RTD measured
TC ...........................Thermal Capacity Used
TC RTD...................Thermal Capacity Looked up on RTD Bias Curve.
TC Model ................Thermal Capacity based on the Thermal Model
7-16
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6.5 THERMAL CAPACITY USED CALCULATION
The overload element uses a Thermal Capacity algorithm to determine an overload trip condition. The extent of overload
current determines how fast the Thermal Memory is filled, i.e. if the current is just over FLC × O/L Pickup, Thermal Capacity
slowly increases; versus if the current far exceeds the FLC pickup level, the Thermal Capacity rapidly increases. An overload trip occurs when the Thermal Capacity Used reaches 100%.
The overload current does not necessarily have to pass the overload curve for a trip to take place. If there is Thermal
Capacity already built up, the overload trip will occur much faster. In other words, the overload trip will occur at the specified
time on the curve only when the Thermal Capacity is equal to zero and the current is applied at a stable rate. Otherwise, the
Thermal Capacity increases from the value prior to overload, until a 100% Thermal Capacity is reached and an overload
trip occurs.
It is important to chose the overload curve correctly for proper protection. In some cases it is necessary to calculate the
amount of Thermal Capacity developed after a start. This is done to ensure that the 369 does not trip the motor prior to the
completion of a start. The actual filling of the Thermal Capacity is the area under the overload current curve. Therefore, to
calculate the amount of Thermal Capacity after a start, the integral of the overload current most be calculated. Below is an
example of how to calculate the Thermal Capacity during a start:
Thermal Capacity Calculation:
1.
Draw lines intersecting the acceleration curve and the overload curve. This is illustrated in Figure 7–6: Thermal Limit
Curves on page 7–18.
2.
Determine the time at which the drawn line intersect, the acceleration curve and the time at which the drawn line intersects the chosen overload curve.
3.
Integrate the values that have been determined.
Table 7–3: THERMAL CAPACITY CALCULATIONS
Time Period
(seconds)
Motor Starting Current
(% of FLC)
Custom Curve Trip
Time (seconds)
Total Accumulated Thermal
Capacity Used (%)
0 to 3
580
38
3 / 38 × 100 = 7.8%
3 to 6
560
41
(3 / 41 × 100) + 7.8% = 15.1%
(3 / 44 × 100) + 15.1% = 21.9%
6 to 9
540
44
9 to 12
520
47
(3 / 47 × 100) + 21.9% = 28.3%
12 to 14
500
51
(2 / 51 × 100) + 28.3% = 32.2%
14 to 15
480
56
(1 / 56 × 100) + 32.2% = 34.0%
15 to 16
460
61
(1 / 61 × 100) + 34.0% = 35.6%
16 to 17
440
67
(1 / 67 × 100) + 35.6% = 37.1%
17 to 18
380
90
(1 / 90 × 100) + 37.1% = 38.2%
18 to 19
300
149
(1 / 149 × 100) + 38.2% = 38.9%
19 to 20
160
670
(1 / 670 × 100) + 38.9% = 39.0%
7
Therefore, after this motor has completed a successful start, the Thermal Capacity would have reached approximately
40%.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-17
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
100000
Motor Manufacturer's Thermal Limit
Curve
369 Custom Overload Curve
10000
44 sec.
Time (Seconds)
1000
Motor
Acceleration
Curve
38 sec.
100
9 sec.
10
3 sec.
7
1
101
140
180
220
260
300
340
380
420
460
500
540
580
5
60
60
20
Percent Full Load
Figure 7–6: THERMAL LIMIT CURVES
Thermal limit curves illustrate thermal capacity used calculation during a start.
7.6.6 START INHIBIT
The Start Inhibit element of the 369 provides an accurate and reliable start protection without unnecessary prolonged lockout times causing production down time. The lockout time is based on the actual performance and application of the motor
and not on the worst case scenario, as other start protection elements.
The 369 Thermal Capacity algorithm is used to establish the lockout time of the Start Inhibit element. Thermal Capacity is a
percentage value that gives an indication of how hot the motor is and is derived from the overload currents (as well as
Unbalance currents and RTDs if the respective biasing functions are enabled). The easiest way to understand the Thermal
Modeling function of the 369 is to image a bucket that holds Thermal Capacity. Once this imaginary bucket is full, an overload trip occurs. The bucket is filled by the amount of overload current integrated over time and is compared to the programmed overload curve to obtain a percentage value. The thermal capacity bucket is emptied based on the programmed
running cool time when the current has fallen below the Full Load Current (FLC) and is running normally.
7-18
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
Upon a start, the inrush current is very high, causing the thermal capacity to rapidly increase. The Thermal Capacity Used
variable is compared to the amount of the Thermal Capacity required to start the motor. If there is not enough thermal
capacity available to start the motor, the 369 blocks the operator from starting until the motor has cooled to a level of thermal capacity to successfully start.
Assume that a motor requires 40% Thermal Capacity to start. If the motor was running in overload prior to stopping, the
thermal capacity would be some value; say 80%. Under such conditions the 369 (with Start Inhibit enabled) will lockout or
prevent the operator from starting the motor until the thermal capacity has decreased to 60% so that a successful motor
start can be achieved. This example is illustrated in Figure 7–7: Illustration of the Start Inhibit Functionality on page 7–19.
The lockout time is calculated as follows:
TCused
lockout time = stopped_cool_time_constant × ln ⎛⎝ --------------------------------------------⎞⎠
100 – TClearned
(EQ 7.1)
where:
TC_used = Thermal Capacity Used
TC_learned = Learned Thermal Capacity required to start
stopped_cool_time = one of two variables will be used:
1. Learned cool time is enabled, or
2. Programmed stopped cool time
The learned start capacity is updated every four starts. A safe margin is built into the calculation of the LEARNED START
CAPACITY REQUIRED to ensure successful completion of the longest and most demanding starts. The Learned Start
Capacity is calculated as follows:
Start_TC1 + Start_TC2 + Start_TC3 + Start_TC4 + Start_TC5
4
LEARNED START CAPACITY = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
where:
(EQ 7.2)
Start_TC1 = the thermal capacity required for the first start
Start_TC2 = the thermal capacity required for the second start, etc.
40%
80%
{
80%
20%
60%
Thermal Capacity
required to start
Thermal Capacity Used
due to Overload
7
Thermal Capacity must
decay by 20% to 60%
in order to start the motor
Figure 7–7: ILLUSTRATION OF THE START INHIBIT FUNCTIONALITY
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-19
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6.7 TWO-PHASE CT CONFIGURATION
This section illustrates how to use two CTs to sense three phase currents.
The proper configuration for using two CTs rather than three to detect phase current is shown below. Each of the two CTs
acts as a current source. The current from the CT on phase ‘A’ flows into the interposing CT on the relay marked ‘A’. From
there, the it sums with the current flowing from the CT on phase ‘C’ which has just passed through the interposing CT on
the relay marked ‘C’. This ‘summed’ current flows through the interposing CT marked ‘B’ and splits from there to return to its
respective source (CT). Polarity is very important since the value of phase ‘B’ must be the negative equivalent of 'A'
+ 'C' for the sum of all the vectors to equate to zero. Note that there is only one ground connection. Making two ground
connections creates a parallel path for the current
A
B
C
:5
A
:COM
:5
B
:COM
:5
C
:COM
Figure 7–8: TWO PHASE WIRING
In the two CT configuration, the currents sum vectorially at the common point of the two CTs. The following diagram illustrates the two possible configurations. If one phase is reading high by a factor of 1.73 on a system that is known to be balanced, simply reverse the polarity of the leads at one of the two phase CTs (taking care that the CTs are still tied to ground
at some point). Polarity is important.
7
Figure 7–9: VECTORS SHOWING REVERSE POLARITY
To illustrate the point further, the diagram here shows how the current in phases 'A' and 'C' sum up to create phase 'B'.
Figure 7–10: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT, CORRECTLY WIRED TWO-PHASE CT SYSTEM
7-20
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
Once again, if the polarity of one of the phases is out by 180°, the magnitude of the resulting vector on a balanced system
will be out by a factor of 1.73.
Figure 7–11: RESULTANT PHASE CURRENT, INCORRECTLY WIRED TWO-PHASE CT SYSTEM
On a three wire supply, this configuration will always work and unbalance will be detected properly. In the event of a single
phase, there will always be a large unbalance present at the interposing CTs of the relay. If for example phase ‘A’ was lost,
phase ‘A’ would read zero while phases ‘B’ and ‘C’ would both read the magnitude of phase ‘C’. If on the other hand, phase
‘B’ was lost, at the supply, ‘A’ would be 180× out of phase with phase ‘C’ and the vector addition would be zero at phase ‘B’.
7.6.8 GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS
The 50:0.025 ground fault input is designed for sensitive detection of faults on a high resistance grounded system. Detection of ground currents from 1 to 10 A primary translates to an input of 0.5 mA to 5 mA into the 50:0.025 tap. Understanding
this allows the use of this input in a simple manner for the detection of ground faults on ungrounded systems.
The following diagram illustrates how to use a wye-open delta voltage transformer configuration to detect phase grounding.
Under normal conditions, the net voltage of the three phases that appears across the 50:0.025 input and the resistor is
close to zero. Under a fault condition, assuming the secondaries of the VTs to be 69 V, the net voltage seen by the relay
and the resistor is 3Vo or 3 × 69 V = 207 V.
a
b
c
7
101
104
369
50:0.025
INPUT
RESISTOR
Figure 7–12: GROUND FAULT DETECTION ON UNGROUNDED SYSTEMS
Since the wire resistance should be relatively small in comparison to the resistor chosen, the current flow will be a function
of the fault voltage seen on the open delta transformer divided by the chosen resistor value plus the burden of the 50:0.025
input (1200 Ω).
EXAMPLE:
If a pickup range of 10 to 100 V is desired, the resistor should be chosen as follows:
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-21
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
1.
1 to 10 A pickup on the 2000:1 tap = 0.5 mA – 5 mA.
2.
10 V / 0.5 mA = 20 kΩ.
3.
If the resistor chosen is 20 kΩ – 1.2 kΩ = 18.8 kΩ, the wattage should be greater than E2/R, approximately (207 V)2 /
18.8 kΩ = 2.28 W. Therefore, a 5 W resistor will suffice.
The VTs must have a primary rating equal or greater than the line to line voltage, as this is the voltage
that will be seen by the unfaulted inputs in the event of a fault.
NOTE
7.6.9 RTD CIRCUITRY
This section illustrates the functionality of the RTD circuitry in the 369 Motor Protection Relay.
A
B
3 mA
COMPENSATION
6 mA
RETURN
RTD
C
HOT
3 mA
840733A1.CDR
Figure 7–13: RTD CIRCUITRY
A constant current source sends 3 mA DC down legs A and C. A 6 mA DC current returns down leg B. It may be seen that:
( V AB = V LeadA + V LeadB )
and
V CB = V LeadC + V RTD + V LeadB
(EQ 7.3)
or
( V AB = V comp + V return )
and
V CB = V hot + V RTD + V return
(EQ 7.4)
The above holds true providing that all three leads are the same length, gauge, and material, hence the same resistance.
R LeadA = R LeadB = R LeadC = R Lead
(EQ 7.5)
or
7
R comp = R return = R hot = R Lead
(EQ 7.6)
Electronically, subtracting VAB from VBC leaves only the voltage across the RTD. In this manner lead length is effectively
negated:
V CB – V AB = ( V Lead + V RTD + V Lead ) – ( V Lead + V Lead )
V CB – V AB = V RTD
7-22
369 Motor Management Relay
(EQ 7.7)
GE Multilin
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7.6.10 REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER APPLICATION
The 369 requires three leads to be brought back from each RTD: Hot, Return, and Compensation. In certain situations this
can be quite expensive. However, it is possible to reduce the number of leads so that three are required for the first RTD
and only one for each successive RTD. Refer to the following diagram for wiring configuration.
369
SHIELD
MOTOR
RTD #1
RTD #2
RTD #3
RTD #4
RTD #5
RTD #6
HOT
1
RETURN
2
COMPENSATION
3
HOT
5
RETURN
6
COMPENSATION
7
RTD #1
RTD #2
HOT
9
RETURN
10
COMPENSATION
11
HOT
13
RETURN
14
COMPENSATION
15
HOT
17
RETURN
18
COMPENSATION
19
HOT
21
RETURN
22
COMPENSATION
23
SHIELD
24
RTD #3
RTD #4
RTD #5
RTD #6
840732A2.CDR
Figure 7–14: REDUCED WIRING RTDS
The Hot line for each RTD is run as usual for each RTD. However, the Compensation and Return leads need only be run for
the first RTD. At the motor RTD terminal box, connect the RTD Return leads together with as short as possible jumpers. At
the 369 relay, the Compensation leads must be jumpered together.
Note that an error is produced on each RTD equal to the voltage drop across the RTD return jumper. This error increases
for each successive RTD added as:
VRTD1 = VRTD1
VRTD2 = VRTD2 + VJ3
VRTD3 = VRTD3 + VJ3 + VJ4
VRTD4 = VRTD4 + VJ3+ VJ4 + VJ5,
etc....
This error is directly dependent on the length and gauge of the jumper wires and any error introduced by a poor connection.
For RTD types other than 10C, the error introduced by the jumpers is negligible.
Although this RTD wiring technique reduces the cost of wiring, the following disadvantages must be noted:
1.
There is an error in temperature readings due to lead and connection resistances. Not recommended for 10C RTDs.
2.
If the RTD Return lead to the 369 or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will read
open.
3.
If the Compensation lead breaks or one of the jumpers breaks, all RTDs from the point of the break onwards will function without any lead compensation.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
7-23
7
7.6 APPLICATIONS
7 APPLICATIONS
7.6.11 TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION
An example of how to add lead compensation to a two wire RTD is shown below.
369
COMPENSATION
RESISTOR
RETURN
24
RTD #6
23 COMPENSATION
22
RETURN
MOTOR
21 HOT
HOT
TERMINAL
840734A1.CDR
Figure 7–15: 2 WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION
The compensation lead would be added and it would compensate for the Hot and the Return assuming they are all of equal
length and gauge. To compensate for resistance of the Hot and Compensation leads, a resistor equal to the resistance of
the Hot lead could be added to the compensation lead, though in many cases this is unnecessary.
7.6.12 AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING
7
Figure 7–16: AUTO TRANSFORMER, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING CIRCUIT
7-24
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
8 TESTING
8.1 TEST SETUP
8 TESTING 8.1TEST SETUP
8.1.1 INTRODUCTION
This chapter demonstrates the procedures necessary to perform a complete functional test of all the 369 hardware while
also testing firmware/hardware interaction in the process. Testing of the relay during commissioning using a primary injection test set will ensure that CTs and wiring are correct and complete.
8.1.2 SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP
C(B)
3 PHASE VARIABLE AC TEST SET
FREQUENCY
GENERATOR
START
A
B(C)
V
A
VB
VC
IAN
IA
VN
IC
IBN
IB
ICN
+
-
91
90
N
V
MULTILIN
50:.025
105 106 107 108 109 110
93
VA VN VB VN VC VN
1A COM 5A
94 92
1A COM 5A
96 97
1A COM 5A
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Phase A
Phase B
Phase C
WITH METERING OPTION (M)
Motor Management
Relay R
RTD3
RTD4
ALARM
AUX. 1
AUX. 2
shld.
Com
RTD5
SPARE
Com
RTD6
shld.
Com
RTD7
DIGITAL INPUTS
shld.
DIFFERENTIAL
RELAY
SPEED
SWITCH
ACCESS
SWITCH
EMERGENCY
RESTART
EXTERNAL
RESET
shld.
RTD8
2
ANALOG
OUTPUTS
OPTION
(M,B)
V+
V-
RTD9
CAN_L
Com
SHIELD
1
CAN_H
Com
shld.
3
4
Com-
shld.
shld.
Com
Profibus (option P or P1)
Modbus/TCP (option E)
START
TRIGGER
G
STOP
TRIGGER
G
00000
R
TIMER
G
R
G
R
+
-
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
80
81
82
83
84
85
A
A
A
A
8
DeviceNet
Option (D)
RTD11
shld.
Com
L
N
RTD10
shld.
Com
GROUND
BUS
123
124
125
126
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
TRIP
shld.
Com
FILTER GROUND
LINE +
NEUTRAL SAFETY GROUND
369
shld.
Com
CONTROL
POWER
GE Multilin
shld.
Com
Option (B)
CURRENT INPUTS
RTD1
RTD2
Back Spin
Neut/Gnd
OUTPUT RELAYS
Com
50:
0.025A
1A COM 5A
OPTION ( R )
500 ohm
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
95 99 100 98 102 104 103 101
CHANNEL 1
CHANNEL 2
RS485
RS485
DB-9
(front)
SHLD
RTD12
71
72
73
CHANNEL 3
75
76
FIBER
SHLD Tx
SHLD
74
OPTION (F)
RS485
77
78
Rx
79
shld.
RTD1
5
4
9
3
8
2
7
REMOTE
RTD
MODULE
1
6
RTD12
369 PC
PROGRAM
PC
GE Multilin
840726B6.CDR
Figure 8–1: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP
369 Motor Management Relay
8-1
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8 TESTING
8.2HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.2.1 PHASE CURRENT ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for phase current accuracy is ±0.5% of 2 × CT when the injected current is less than 2 × CT. Perform
the steps below to verify accuracy.
1.
Alter the following setpoint:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT / VT SETUP Ø PHASE CT PRIMARY: 1000 A
Measured values should be within ±10A of expected. Inject the values shown in the table below and verify accuracy of
the measured values. View the measured values in:
2.
A2 METERING DATA Ø CURRENT METERING
INJECTED
CURRENT 1 A
UNIT
INJECTED
CURRENT 5 A
UNIT
EXPECTED
CURRENT
READING
0.1 A
0.5 A
100 A
0.2 A
1.0 A
200 A
0.5 A
2.5 A
500 A
1A
5A
1000 A
1.5 A
7.5 A
1500 A
2A
10 A
2000 A
MEASURED
CURRENT PHASE
A
MEASURED
CURRENT PHASE
B
MEASURED
CURRENT PHASE
C
8.2.2 VOLTAGE INPUT ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for voltage input accuracy is ±1.0% of full scale (240 V). Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S2 SYSTEM Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø VT CONNECTION TYPE: Wye
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER RATIO: 10
Measured values should be within ±24 V (±1 × 240 × 10) of expected. Apply the voltage values shown in the table and
verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
2.
A2 METERING DATA Ø VOLTAGE METERING
APPLIED LINENEUTRALVOLTAGE
EXPECTED VOLTAGE
READING
30 V
300 V
50 V
500 V
100 V
1000 V
150 V
1500 V
200 V
2000 V
240 V
2400 V
8
8-2
MEASURED VOLTAGE
A-N
MEASURED VOLTAGE
B-N
369 Motor Management Relay
MEASURED VOLTAGE
C-N
GE Multilin
8 TESTING
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.2.3 GROUND (1 A / 5 A) ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for the 1 A/5 A ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of 1 × CT for the 5 A input and ±0.5% of
5 × CT for the 1 A input. Perform the steps below to verify accuracy.
5A INPUT:
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø GROUND CT TYPE: 5A Secondary
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A
2.
Measured values should be ±5 A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracy of
the measured values. View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA Ø CURRENT METERING
INJECTED
CURRENT
5 A UNIT
EXPECTED
CURRENT
READING
0.5 A
100 A
1.0 A
200 A
2.5 A
500 A
5A
1000 A
MEASURED
GROUND
CURRENT
1A INPUT:
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø GROUND CT TYPE: 1A Secondary
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø GROUND CT PRIMARY: 1000 A
2.
Measured values should be ±25 A. Inject the values shown in the table below into one phase only and verify accuracy
of the measured values. View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA Ø CURRENT METERING
INJECTED
CURRENT
1 A UNIT
EXPECTED
CURRENT
READING
0.1 A
100 A
0.2 A
200 A
0.5 A
500 A
1.0 A
1000 A
MEASURED
GROUND
CURRENT
8.2.4 50:0.025 GROUND ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for GE Multilin 50:0.025 ground current input accuracy is ±0.5% of CT rated primary (25 A). Perform
the steps below to verify accuracy.
1.
Alter the following setpoint:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø GROUND CT TYPE: MULTILIN 50:0.025
2.
Measured values should be within ±0.125 A of expected. Inject the values shown below either as primary values into a
GE Multilin 50:0.025 Core Balance CT or as secondary values that simulate the core balance CT. Verify accuracy of
the measured values. View the measured values in A2 METERING DATA Ø CURRENT METERING
PRIMARY INJECTED
CURRENT 50:0.025 CT
SECONDARY INJECTED
CURRENT
0.25 A
0.125 mA
0.25 A
1A
0.5 mA
1.00 A
10 A
5 mA
10.00 A
25 A
12.5 mA
25.00 A
GE Multilin
EXPECTED CURRENT
READING
369 Motor Management Relay
MEASURED GROUND
CURRENT
8-3
8
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8 TESTING
8.2.5 RTD ACCURACY TEST
The 369 specification for RTD input accuracy is ±2°. Alter the following setpoints:
1.
S6 RTD TEMPERATURE Ø RTD TYPE Ø STATOR RTD TYPE: “100 ohm Platinum” (select desired type)
Measured values should be ±2°C or ±4°F. Alter the resistances applied to the RTD inputs as per the table below to simulate RTDs and verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured values in:
2.
A2 METERING DATA Ø LOCAL RTD (and/or REMOTE RTD if using the RRTD Module)
3.
Select the preferred temperature units for the display. Alter the following setpoint:
S1 369 SETUP Ø DISPLAY PREFERENCES Ø TEMPERATURE DISPLAY: “Celsius” (or “Fahrenheit” if preferred)
4.
Repeat the above measurements for the other RTD types (120 ohm Nickel, 100 ohm Nickel and 10 ohm Copper)
APPLIED
RESISTANCE
100 Ohm
PLATINUM
84.27 ohms
CELSIUS
FAHRENHEIT
–40°C
–40°F
100.00 ohms
0°C
32°F
119.39 ohms
50°C
122°F
138.50 ohms
100°C
212°F
157.32 ohms
150°C
302°F
175.84 ohms
200°C
392°F
APPLIED
RESISTANCE
120 Ohm
NICKEL
CELSIUS
FAHRENHEIT
–40°F
92.76 ohms
–40°C
0°C
32°F
157.74 ohms
50°C
122°F
200.64 ohms
100°C
212°F
248.95 ohms
150°C
302°F
303.46 ohms
200°C
392°F
FAHRENHEIT
79.13 ohms
–40°C
–40°F
100.0 ohms
0°C
32°F
129.1 ohms
50°C
122°F
161.8 ohms
100°C
212°F
198.7 ohms
150°C
302°F
240.0 ohms
200°C
392°F
2
3
CELSIUS
FAHRENHEIT
7.49 ohms
–40°C
–40°F
9.04 ohms
0°C
32°F
50°C
122°F
12.90 ohms
100°C
212°F
14.83 ohms
150°C
302°F
16.78 ohms
200°C
392°F
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
10
11
12
10
11
12
10
11
12
MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE
9 SELECT ONE: ____(°C) ____(°F)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE
9 SELECT ONE: ____(°C) ____(°F)
1
2
3
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE
READING
10.97 ohms
8-4
1
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE
READING
CELSIUS
APPLIED
RESISTANCE
10 Ohm
COPPER
MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE
9 SELECT ONE: ____(°C) ____(°F)
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE
READING
120.00 ohms
APPLIED
RESISTANCE
100 Ohm
NICKEL
8
EXPECTED RTD TEMPERATURE
READING
4
5
6
7
8
9
MEASURED RTD TEMPERATURE
9 SELECT ONE: ____(°C) ____(°F)
1
2
3
4
369 Motor Management Relay
5
6
7
8
9
GE Multilin
8 TESTING
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.2.6 DIGITAL INPUTS
The digital inputs can be verified easily with a simple switch or pushbutton. Perform the steps below to verify functionality of
the digital inputs.
1.
Open switches of all of the digital inputs.
2.
View the status of the digital inputs in A1 STATUS Ø DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
3.
Close switches of all of the digital inputs.
4.
View the status of the digital inputs in A1 STATUS Ø DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
INPUT
EXPECTED
STATUS
(SWITCH OPEN)
SPARE
Open
9 PASS
8 FAIL
EXPECTED STATUS
(SWITCH CLOSED)
9 PASS
8 FAIL
Shorted
DIFFERENTIAL RELAY
Open
Shorted
SPEED SWITCH
Open
Shorted
ACCESS SWITCH
Open
Shorted
EMERGENCY RESTART
Open
Shorted
EXTERNAL RESET
Open
Shorted
8.2.7 ANALOG INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
The 369 specification for analog input and analog output accuracy is ±1% of full scale. Perform the steps below to verify
accuracy.
4 to 20mA ANALOG INPUT:
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS Ø ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Ø ANALOG RANGE: 4-20 mA (repeat for analog inputs 2 to 4)
2.
Analog output values should be ±0.2 mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following setpoints:
S11 TESTING Ø TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS Ø FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: 0%
(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2 to 4)
3.
Verify the ammeter readings for all the analog outputs
4.
Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings
ANALOG OUTPUT
FORCE VALUE
EXPECTED AMMETER
READING
0
4 mA
25
8 mA
50
12 mA
75
16 mA
100
20 mA
MEASURED AMMETER READING (mA)
1
2
3
4
8
0 to 1mA ANALOG INPUT:
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS Ø ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Ø ANALOG RANGE: “0-1 mA” (repeat for analog inputs 2 to 4)
2.
Analog output values should be ±0.01 mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following setpoints:
S11 TESTING Ø TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS Ø FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: “0%”
(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2 to 4)
3.
Verify the ammeter readings for all the analog outputs
4.
Repeat 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
8-5
8.2 HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING
ANALOG OUTPUT
FORCE VALUE
EXPECTED AMMETER
READING
0
0 mA
25
0.25 mA
50
0.5 mA
75
0.75 mA
100
1.0 mA
8 TESTING
MEASURED AMMETER READING (mA)
1
2
3
4
0 to 20mA ANALOG INPUT:
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS Ø ANALOG OUTPUT 1 Ø ANALOG RANGE: “0-20 mA” (repeat for analog inputs 2 to 4)
Analog output values should be ±0.2 mA on the ammeter. Force the analog outputs using the following setpoints:
2.
S11 TESTING Ø TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS Ø FORCE ANALOG OUTPUT 1: “0%”
(enter desired percent, repeat for analog outputs 2 to 4)
3.
Verify the ammeter readings for all the analog outputs
4.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 for the other forced output settings.
ANALOG OUTPUT
FORCE VALUE
EXPECTED AMMETER
READING
0
0 mA
25
5 mA
50
10 mA
75
15 mA
100
20 mA
MEASURED AMMETER READING (mA)
1
2
3
4
8.2.8 OUTPUT RELAYS
To verify the functionality of the output relays, perform the following steps:
1.
Use the following setpoints:
S11 TESTING Ø TEST OUTPUT RELAYS Ø FORCE TRIP RELAY: “Energized”
S11 TESTING Ø TEST OUTPUT RELAYS Ø FORCE TRIP RELAY DURATION: “Static”
2.
8
Using the above setpoints, individually select each of the other output relays (AUX 1, AUX 2 and ALARM) and verify
operation.
FORCE
OPERATION
SETPOINT
EXPECTED MEASUREMENT (9 for SHORT)
R1
no
R2
R3
nc
no
R2 Auxiliary
9
9
R3 Auxiliary
9
9
R4 Alarm
9
9
R1 Trip
8-6
9
nc
no
9
ACTUAL MEASUREMENT (9 for SHORT)
R4
nc
no
R1
nc
9
9
9
9
9
no
R2
nc
no
R3
nc
no
R4
nc
no
nc
9
9
9
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
8 TESTING
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.3ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8.3.1 OVERLOAD CURVE TEST
The 369 specification for overload curve timing accuracy is ±100 ms or ±2% of time to trip. Pickup accuracy is as per current inputs (±0.5% of 2 × CT when the injected current is < 2 × CT; ±1% of 20 × CT when the injected current is ≥ 2 × CT).
1.
Perform the steps below to verify accuracy. Alter the following setpoints:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1000”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø MOTOR FULL LOAD AMPS FLA: “1000”
S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION Ø OVERLOAD CURVES Ø SELECT CURVE STYLE: “Standard”
S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION Ø OVERLOAD CURVES Ø STANDARD OVELOAD CURVE NUMBER: “4”
S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION Ø THERMAL MODEL Ø OVERLOAD PICKUP LEVEL: “1.10”
S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION Ø THERMAL MODEL Ø UNBALANCE BIAS K FACTOR: “0”
S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION Ø THERMAL MODEL Ø HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO: “1.00”
S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION Ø THERMAL MODEL Ø ENABLE RTD BIASING: “No”
2.
Any trip must be reset prior to each test. Short the emergency restart terminals momentarily immediately prior to each
overload curve test to ensure that the thermal capacity used is zero. Failure to do so will result in shorter trip times.
Inject the current of the proper amplitude to obtain the values as shown and verify the trip times. Motor load may be
viewed in A2 METERING DATA Ø CURRENT METERING
Thermal capacity used and estimated time to trip may be viewed in A1 STATUS Ø MOTOR STATUS
AVERAGE PHASE
CURRENT
DISPLAYED
INJECTED
CURRENT
1 A UNIT
PICKUP
LEVEL
EXPECTED TIME
TO TRIP
TOLERANCE RANGE
1050 A
1.05 A
1.05
never
N/A
1200 A
1.20 A
1.20
795.44 s
779.53 to 811.35 s
1750 A
1.75 A
1.75
169.66 s
166.27 to 173.05 s
3000 A
3.0 A
3.00
43.73 s
42.86 to 44.60 s
6000 A
6.0 A
6.00
9.99 s
9.79 to 10.19 s
10000 A
10.0 A
10.00
5.55 s
5.44 to 5.66 s
MEASURED TIME TO
TRIP
8.3.2 POWER MEASUREMENT TEST
The 369 specification for reactive and apparent power is ±1.5% of 2 × CT × VT full scale at Iavg < 2 × CT. Perform the steps
below to verify accuracy.
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1000”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø VT CONNECTION TYPE: “Wye”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø VT RATIO: “10.00:1”
2.
Inject current and apply voltage as per the table below. Verify accuracy of the measured values. View the measured
values in A2 METERING DATA Ø POWER METERING
INJECTED CURRENT / APPLIED VOLTAGE
(Ia is reference vector)
POWER QUANTITY
POWER FACTOR
1 A UNIT
5 A UNIT
EXPECTED
TOLERANCE
RANGE
Ia = 1 A∠0°
Ib = 1 A∠120°
Ic = 1 A∠240°
Va = 120 V∠342°
Vb = 120 V∠102°
Vc = 120 V∠222°
Ia = 5 A∠0°
Ib = 5 A∠120°
Ic = 5 A∠240°
Va = 120 V∠342°
Vb = 120 V∠102°
Vc = 120 V∠222°
+3424 kW
3352 to 3496
kW
0.95 lag
Ia = 1 A∠0°
Ib = 1 A∠120°
Ic = 1 A∠240°
Va = 120 V∠288°
Vb = 120 V∠48°
Vc = 120 V∠168°
Ia = 5 A∠0°
Ib = 5 A∠120°
Ic = 5 A∠240°
Va = 120 V∠288°
Vb = 120 V∠48°
Vc = 120 V∠168°
+3424 kvar
3352 to 3496
kvar
0.31 lag
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
MEASURED
EXPECTED
MEASURED
8-7
8
8.3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TESTING
8 TESTING
8.3.3 VOLTAGE PHASE REVERSAL TEST
The 369 can detect voltage phase rotation and protect against phase reversal. To test the phase reversal element, perform
the following steps:
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø VT CONNECTION TYPE: “Wye” or “Open Delta”
S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS Ø PHASE REVERSAL Ø PHASE REVERSAL TRIP: “On”
S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS Ø PHASE REVERSAL Ø ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: “Trip”
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø SYSTEM PHASE SEQUENCE: “ABC”
2.
Apply voltages as per the table below. Verify the 369 operation on voltage phase reversal.
APPLIED VOLTAGE
EXPECTED RESULT
8 NO TRIP
9 PHASE REVERSAL TRIP
Va = 120 V∠0°
Vb = 120 V∠120°
Vc = 120 V∠240°
8
Va = 120 V∠0°
Vb = 120 V∠240°
Vc = 120 V∠120°
9
OBSERVED RESULT
8 NO TRIP
9 PHASE REVERSAL TRIP
8.3.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST
The 369 specification for short circuit timing is +40 ms or ±0.5% of total time. The pickup accuracy is as per the phase current inputs. Perform the steps below to verify the performance of the short circuit element.
1.
Alter the following setpoints:
S2 SYSTEM SETUP Ø CT/VT SETUP Ø PHASE CT PRIMARY: “1000”
S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS Ø SHORT CIRCUIT Ø SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP: “On”
S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS Ø SHORT CIRCUIT Ø ASSIGN TRIP RELAYS: “Trip”
S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS Ø SHORT CIRCUIT Ø SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP LEVEL: “5.0 x CT”
S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS Ø SHORT CIRCUIT Ø ADD S/C DELAY: “0”
2.
Inject current as per the table below, resetting the unit after each trip by pressing the [RESET] key, and verify timing
accuracy. Pre-trip values may be viewed in
A1 STATUS Ø LAST TRIP DATA
INJECTED CURRENT
8
8-8
TIME TO TRIP (ms)
5 A UNIT
1 A UNIT
EXPECTED
30 A
6A
< 40 ms
40 A
8A
< 40 ms
50 A
10 A
< 40 ms
MEASURED
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.1 OVERVIEW
9 COMMUNICATIONS 9.1OVERVIEW
9.1.1 ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
The hardware or electrical interface is one of the following:
•
one of three 2-wire RS485 ports from the rear terminal connector,
•
the RS232 from the front panel connector
•
a fibre optic connection.
In a 2-wire RS485 link, data flow is bidirectional. Data flow is half-duplex for both the RS485 and the RS232 ports. That is,
data is never transmitted and received at the same time. RS485 lines should be connected in a daisy chain configuration
(avoid star connections) with a terminating network installed at each end of the link, i.e. at the master end and at the slave
farthest from the master. The terminating network should consist of a 120 ohm resistor in series with a 1 nF ceramic capacitor when used with Belden 9841 RS485 wire. The value of the terminating resistors should be equal to the characteristic
impedance of the line. This is approximately 120 ohms for standard #22 AWG twisted pair wire. Shielded wire should
always be used to minimize noise. Polarity is important in RS485 communications. Each '+' terminal of every 369 must be
connected together for the system to operate. See Section 3.3.14: RS485 Communications on page 3–13 for details on
correct serial port wiring.
When using a fibre optic link the Tx from the 369 should be connected to the Rx of the Master device and the Rx from the
369 should be connected to the Tx of the Master device.
9.1.2 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports both Profibus-DP (order code P) and Profibus-DPV1 (order code P1) communication interfaces as slave that can be read and written to/from a Profibus-DP/V1 master. The Profibus-DP/V1 Master
must read the GSD (Device Master Data) file of the 369 for the purposes of configuration and parameterization.
•
The GSD file for the Profibus-DP option is 369_090C.gse.
•
The GSD file for the Profibus-DPV1 option is 369_09E6.gse.
The relay supports the following configurations and indications:
•
Fieldbus type: PROFIBUS-DP (IEC 61158 Type 3, and IEC 61784)
•
Auto baud rate detection 9.6Kbit - 12Mbit.
•
Address range: 1-126, setting via EnerVista 369 Setup software or front keypad.
•
Input data: 220 bytes - cyclical.
•
Extended Diagnostic data: 26 bytes - non-cyclical.
Sections 9.2.2 to 9.2.4 pertain to the Profibus-DP option.
In addition to the above, the Profibus-DPV1 (P1) option supports:
•
Fieldbus type: Profibus-DPV1 (IEC 61158 Type 3, and IEC 61784)
•
Acyclic read/write between a Master (Class1/Class2) and the 369 slave according to the DPV1 extensions of IEC
61158.
•
Output Data: 2 bytes - cyclical.
Sections 9.3.1 through to 9.3.6 of this manual pertain to the Profibus-DPV1 option.
9.1.3 DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports the optional DeviceNet protocol as slave that can be read by a DeviceNet
master. The device can be added to a DeviceNet list by adding the 369.eds file in the scanner list.
The relay supports following configuration.
•
Field bus type: DeviceNet
•
Functions supported: Explicit, Polled, COS and Cyclic IO messaging
•
Baud Rate: 125, 250 and 500 kbps, programmable through software or relay front keypad
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-1
9
9.1 OVERVIEW
•
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Mac ID: 0 to 63, programmable through software or relay front keypad
See Section 9.4.1: DeviceNet Communications on page 9–15 for complete details.
9.1.4 MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS
The 369 implements a subset of the AEG Modicon Modbus RTU serial communication standard. Many popular programmable controllers support this protocol directly with a suitable interface card allowing direct connection of relays. Although
the Modbus protocol is hardware independent, the 369 interfaces include three 2-wire RS485 ports and one RS232 port.
Modbus is a single master, multiple slave protocol suitable for a multi-drop configuration as provided by RS485 hardware.
In this configuration up to 32 slaves can be daisy-chained together on a single communication channel.
The 369 is always a slave. It cannot be programmed as a master. Computers or PLCs are commonly programmed as masters. The Modbus protocol exists in two versions: Remote Terminal Unit (RTU, binary) and ASCII. Only the RTU version is
supported by the 369. Monitoring, programming and control functions are possible using read and write register commands. See Section 9.5: Modbus RTU Protocol on page 9–30 for complete details.
9.1.5 MODBUS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS/TCP OPTION:
When configured with the “E” Option, the 369 can connect to Ethernet networks via the DB9 connection or the supplied
DB9 to RJ45 adapter connection, using the Modbus/TCP protocol as detailed in the document “Open Modbus / TCP Specification” by Andy Swales, Release 1.0, 29 March 1999 (a search via the internet can produce a free copy of this document).
This description contains information to the location of Setting registers for configuring the 369 for a LAN connection, and
the physical connection of the 369 with, or without, the supplied DB9 to RJ45 adaptor. Information pertaining to the application of an IED over Ethernet is beyond the scope of this manual and the user should consult their Network Administrator for
configuration details.
The implementation of this option is for the intention of data retrieval and device configuration. The 369
does not support firmware upgrade via this connection.
NOTE
SETPOINTS CONFIGURATION:
The user needs to configure the following settings for interface to a LAN: IP ADDRESS, SUBNET MASK, and GATEWAY
ADDRESS. Each setting contains 4 octets. The user configures the octets as shown in the following example:
IP ADDRESS: “127.0.0.1”
SUBNET MASK: “255.255.255.252”
GATEWAY ADDRESS: “127.0.0.1”
SETPOINT
9
MEMORY MAP
ADDRESS
DATA VALUE
(DEC)
IP ADDRESS OCTET1
0x101C
127
IP ADDRESS OCTET2
0x101D
0
IP ADDRESS OCTET3
0x101E
0
IP ADDRESS OCTET4
0x101F
1
SUBNET MASK OCTET1
0x1020
255
SUBNET MASK OCTET2
0x1021
255
SUBNET MASK OCTET3
0x1022
255
SUBNET MASK OCTET4
0x1023
252
GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET1
0x1024
127
GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET2
0x1025
0
GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET3
0x1026
0
GATEWAY ADDRESS OCTET4
0x1027
1
These settings can also be configured via the keypad under the S1 369 SETUP ØØØ 369 COMMUNICATIONS path.
9-2
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.1 OVERVIEW
PHYSICAL CONNECTION:
The 369 can be connected to an Ethernet LAN via the supplied RJ45 adaptor, or directly from the DB9 connector at the
back of the 369 using the following connections:
9
Figure 9–1: MODBUS/TCP WIRING
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-3
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.2PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
9.2.1 PROFIBUS COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports either Profibus-DP (order code P) or Profibus-DPV1 (order code P1) communication interfaces as slave that can be read and written to/from a Profibus-DP/V1 master. The Profibus-DP/V1 Master
must read the GSD (Device Master Data) file of the 369 for the purposes of configuration and parameterization.
•
The GSD file for the Profibus-DP option is 369_090C.GSE.
•
The GSD file for the Profibus-DPV1 option is 369_09E6.GSE.
Sections 9.2.2 to 9.2.4 pertain to the Profibus-DP option.
Sections 9.3.1 through to 9.3.6 of this manual pertain to the Profibus-DPV1 option.
9.2.2 369 PROFIBUS-DP PARAMETERIZATION
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports mandatory parametrization. The relay keeps its user parameter data / setpoints in a non-volatile memory and does not need device related parametrization during startup of the DP master. The
EnerVista 369 Setup software is the best tool for user parametrization of the 369 device.
9.2.3 369 PROFIBUS-DP CONFIGURATION
The Profibus-DP basic configuration has one DP master and one DP slave. In a typical bus segment up to 32 stations can
be connected (a repeater has to be used if more then 32 stations operate on a bus). The end nodes on a Profibus-DP network must be terminated to avoid reflections on the bus line.
The bus address for the relay as Profibus-DP node can be set using the S1 369 SETUP Ø 369 COMMUNICATIONS Ø PROFIBUS ADDRESS setpoint or via the EnerVista 369 Setup software, which extends address range from 1 to 126. Address 126
is used only for commissioning purposes and should not be used to exchange user data.
The media for the fieldbus is a twisted pair copper cable along with 9-pin SUB-D connector, which connects the bus to the
369 socket on the back of the relay. The 369 Motor Management Relay has autobaud support. The baud rates and other
slave specific information needed for configuration are contained in 369_090C.gs* which is used by a network configuration program.
The 369 Motor Management Relay as a DP slave transfers fast process data to the DP master according to master-slave
principle. The 369 Motor Management Relay is a modular device, supporting up to 8 input modules.
During the configuration session, all modules have to be selected in order to get the entire area of 110 words of input data.
There are no output data for processing. The following diagram shows the possible DP Master Class 2 configuration menu:
9
9-4
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
Figure 9–2: SLAVE CONFIGURATION
Table 9–1: PROFIBUS INPUT DATA (Sheet 1 of 3)
OFFSET CYCLIC DATA
(ACTUAL VALUES)
LENGTH
(BYTES)
MINIMUM
VALUE
HEX
MAXIMUM
VALUE
HEX
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT DEFAULT
CODE
0
MotorStatus
2
0
0000
4
0004
1
–
F133
0
2
TC_Used
2
0
0000
100
0064
1
%
F1
0
4
Time_to_Trip
2
–1
FFFF
65500
FFDC
1
s
F20
–1
6
OverloadLT
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
s
F1
0
8
StartsHourLT[5]
2
0
0000
60
003C
1
min
F1
0
10
TimeBetween StartsLT
2
0
0000
500
01F4
1
min
F1
0
12
RestartBlock LT
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
s
F1
0
14
StartInhibitLT
2
0
0000
60
003C
1
min
F1
0
16
AccessSwitch Status
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
–
F131
0
18
SpeedSwitch Status
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
–
F131
0
20
SpareSwitch Status
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
–
F131
0
22
DiffSwitch Status
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
–
F131
0
24
EmergencySwitch status
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
–
F131
0
26
ResetSwitch Status
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
–
F131
0
28
TripRelayStatus
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
N/A
F150
2
30
AlarmRelayStatus
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
N/A
F150
2
32
Aux1RelayStatus
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
N/A
F150
2
34
Aux2RelayStatus
2
0
0000
1
0001
1
N/A
F150
2
36
Ia
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
38
Ib
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
40
Ic
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
42
AveragePhaseCurrent
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
44
MotorLoad
2
0
0000
2000
07D0
1
xFLA
F3
0
46
CurrentUnbalance
2
0
0000
100
0064
1
%
F1
0
48
U/B Biased Motor Load
2
0
0000
2000
07D0
1
xFLC
F3
0
50
GroundCurrent
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
A
F23
0
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-5
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–1: PROFIBUS INPUT DATA (Sheet 2 of 3)
OFFSET CYCLIC DATA
(ACTUAL VALUES)
9
LENGTH
(BYTES)
MINIMUM
VALUE
HEX
MAXIMUM
VALUE
HEX
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT DEFAULT
CODE
52
Vab
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
54
Vbc
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
56
Vca
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
58
Van
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
60
Vbn
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
62
Vcn
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
64
AvgLineVoltage
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
66
AvgPhaseVoltage
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
68
Frequency
2
0
0000
12000
2EE0
1
Hz
F3
0
70
BackSpinFrequency
2
1
0001
12000
2EE0
1
Hz
F3
0
72
PowerFactor
2
–99
FF9D
100
0064
1
–
F21
0
74
RealPower–kW
2
–32000
8300
32000
7D00
1
kW
F4
0
76
RealPower–hp
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
hp
F1
0
78
ReactivePower
2
–32000
8300
32000
7D00
1
kvar
F4
0
80
ApparentPower
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
kVA
F1
0
82
MWh
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
MWh
F1
0
84
PositiveMvarh
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
Mvarh
F1
0
86
NegativeMvarh
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
Mvarh
88
HottestStatorRtd
2
0
0000
12
000C
1
90
HottestStatorRtdTemp
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
92
LocalRtd1
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
94
LocalRtd2
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
96
LocalRtd3
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
98
LocalRtd4
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
100
LocalRtd5
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
102
LocalRtd6
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
104
LocalRtd7
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
106
LocalRtd8
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
F1
0
F2
0
108
LocalRtd9
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
110
LocalRtd10
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
112
LocalRtd11
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
114
LocalRtd12
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
–42
116
CurrentDemand
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
A
F1
0
118
RealPowerDemand
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
kW
F1
0
120
ReactivePowerDemand
2
–32000
8300
32000
7D00
1
kvar
F4
0
122
ApparentPowerDemand
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
kVA
F1
0
124
PeakCurrent
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
126
PeakRealPower
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
kW
F1
0
128
PeakReactivePower
2
–32000
8300
32000
7D00
1
kvar
F4
0
130
PeakApparentPower
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
kVA
F1
0
132
Va angle
2
0
0000
359
0167
1
o
F1
0
134
Vb angle
2
0
0000
359
0167
1
o
F1
0
136
Vc angle
2
0
0000
359
0167
1
o
F1
0
138
Ia angle
2
0
0000
359
0167
1
o
F1
0
140
Ib angle
2
0
0000
359
0167
1
o
F1
0
142
Ic angle
2
0
0000
359
0167
1
o
F1
0
144
Learned AccelerationTime
2
1
0001
2500
09C4
1
s
F2
0
146
Learned StartingCurrent
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
9-6
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–1: PROFIBUS INPUT DATA (Sheet 3 of 3)
OFFSET CYCLIC DATA
(ACTUAL VALUES)
LENGTH
(BYTES)
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
VALUE
HEX
VALUE
HEX
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT DEFAULT
CODE
148
Learned StartingCapacity
2
0
0000
100
0064
1
%
F1
0
150
Learned RunningCoolTime
Constant
2
0
0000
500
01F4
1
min
F1
0
152
LearnedStoppedCoolTime
Constant
2
0
0000
500
01F4
1
min
F1
0
154
Last StartingCapacity
2
0
0000
100
0064
1
%
F1
0
156
Learned UnbalanceKfactor
2
0
0000
29
001D
1
–
F1
0
158
BSDState
2
0
0000
6
0006
1
–
F27
0
160
RawPredictionTimer
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
s
F2
0
162
NumberOfStarts
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
–
F1
0
164
NumberOfRestarts
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
–
F1
0
166
DigitalCounter
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
–
F1
0
168
MotorRunningHours
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
hr
F1
0
170
RelayOperatingHours
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
hr
F1
0
172
Last trip Cause
2
0
0000
169
00A9
1
–
F134
0
174
Last trip Date
4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F18
N/A
178
Last trip Time
4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F19
N/A
182
Last pre-trip Ia
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
184
Last pre-trip Ib
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
186
Last pre-trip Ic
2
0
0000
65535
FFFF
1
A
F1
0
188
Last pre-trip MotorLoad
2
0
0000
2000
07D0
1
FLA
F3
0
190
Last pre-trip Unbalance
2
0
0000
100
0064
1
%
F1
0
192
Last pre-trip Ig
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
A
F23
0
194
Last trip HottestStatorRtd
2
0
0000
12
000C
1
–
F1
0
196
Last trip HottestStatorTemp
2
–40
FFD8
200
00C8
1
°C
F4
0
198
Last pre–trip Vab
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
200
Last pre–trip Vbc
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
202
Last pre–trip Vca
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
204
Last pre–trip Van
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
206
Last pre–trip Vbn
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
208
Last pre–trip Vcn
2
0
0000
65000
FDE8
1
V
F1
0
210
Last pre–trip Frequency
2
0
0000
12000
2EE0
1
Hz
F3
0
212
Last pre–trip KiloWatts
2
–32000
8300
32000
7D00
1
kW
F4
0
214
Last pre–trip KiloVAR
2
–32000
8300
32000
7D00
1
kvar
F4
0
216
Last pre–trip KiloVA
2
0
0000
50000
C350
1
kVA
F1
0
218
Last pre–trip PowerFactor
2
–99
FF9D
100
0064
1
–
F21
0
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-7
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.2.4 369 PROFIBUS-DP DIAGNOSTICS
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports both slave mandatory (6 bytes system-wide standardized) and slave specific
diagnostic data. If the diagnostics are considered high priority, the PLC/host program will be informed of the fault (alarm or
trip) and can call a special error routine.
Diagnostic bytes 1 through 6 represent standard diagnostic data and are formatted as follows.
Table 9–2: DIAGNOSTIC BITS 1 THROUGH 7
BYTE
DESCRIPTION
1
Station Status 1
2
Station Status 2
3
Station Status 3
4
Diagnostic Master Address
5
Identification Number (High Byte)
6
Identification Number (Low Byte)
The extended diagnosis for the relay is composed of 26 bytes (bytes 7 to 32) and contains diagnostic information according
to the following table.
Table 9–3: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 1 of 5)
9
BIT
BYTE
0 to 7
7
Table 9–3: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 2 of 5)
FUNCTION
BIT
BYTE
Number of Diagnostic Bytes
29
11
FUNCTION
UnderVoltageTrip
0
8
SinglePhasingTrip
30
11
OverVoltageTrip
1
8
SpareSwitchTrip
31
11
VoltagePhaseReversalTrip
2
8
EmergencySwitchTrip
32
12
UnderfrequencyTrip
3
8
DifferentialSwitchTrip
33
12
OverfrequencyTrip
4
8
SpeedSwitchTrip
34
12
LeadPowerFactorTrip
5
8
ResetSwitchTrip
35
12
LagPowerFactorTrip
6
8
Reserved
36
12
PositivekvarTrip
7
8
OverloadTrip
37
12
NegativekvarTrip
8
9
ShortCircuitTrip
38
12
UnderpowerTrip
9
9
ShortCircuitBackupTrip
39
12
ReversePowerTrip
10
9
MechanicalJamTrip
40
13
IncompleteSequenceTrip
11
9
UndercurrentTrip
41
13
SpareSwitchAlarm
12
9
CurrentUnbalanceTrip
42
13
EmergencySwitchAlarm
13
9
GroundFaultTrip
43
13
DifferentialSwitchAlarm
14
9
GroundFaultBackupTrip
44
13
SpeedSwitchAlarm
15
9
Reserved
45
13
ResetSwitchAlarm
16
10
AccelerationTimerTrip
46
13
Reserved
17
10
Rtd1Trip
47
13
ThermalCapacityAlarm
18
10
Rtd2Trip
48
14
OverloadAlarm
19
10
Rtd3Trip
49
14
MechanicalJamAlarm
20
10
Rtd4Trip
50
14
UndercurrentAlarm
21
10
Rtd5Trip
51
14
CurrentUnbalanceAlarm
22
10
Rtd6Trip
52
14
GroundFaultAlarm
23
10
Rtd7Trip
53
14
UndervoltageAlarm
24
11
Rtd8Trip
54
14
OvervoltageAlarm
25
11
Rtd9Trip
55
14
OverfrequencyAlarm
26
11
Rtd10Trip
56
15
UnderfrequencyAlarm
27
11
Rtd11Trip
57
15
LeadPowerFactorAlarm
28
11
Rtd12Trip
58
15
LagPowerFactorAlarm
9-8
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–3: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 3 of 5)
Table 9–3: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 4 of 5)
BIT
BYTE
FUNCTION
BIT
BYTE
59
15
PositivekvarAlarm
108
21
FUNCTION
60
15
NegativekvarAlarm
109
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd6Trip
61
15
UnderpowerAlarm
110
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd7Trip
62
15
ReversePowerAlarm
111
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd8Trip
63
15
Rtd1Alarm
112
22
RemoteRTD1Rtd9Trip
64
16
Rtd2Alarm
113
22
RemoteRTD1Rtd10Trip
65
16
Rtd3Alarm
114
22
RemoteRTD1Rtd11Trip
66
16
Rtd4Alarm
115
22
RemoteRTD1Rtd12Trip
67
16
Rtd5Alarm
116
22
RemoteRTD2Rtd1Trip
68
16
Rtd6Alarm
117
22
RemoteRTD2Rtd2Trip
69
16
Rtd7Alarm
118
22
RemoteRTD2Rtd3Trip
70
16
Rtd8Alarm
119
22
RemoteRTD2Rtd4Trip
71
16
Rtd9Alarm
120
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd5Trip
RemoteRTD1Rtd5Trip
72
17
Rtd10Alarm
121
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd6Trip
73
17
Rtd11Alarm
122
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd7Trip
74
17
Rtd12Alarm
123
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd8Trip
75
17
Rtd1HighAlarm
124
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd9Trip
76
17
Rtd2HighAlarm
125
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd10Trip
77
17
Rtd3HighAlarm
126
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd11Trip
78
17
Rtd4HighAlarm
127
23
RemoteRTD2Rtd12Trip
79
17
Rtd5HighAlarm
128
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd1Trip
80
18
Rtd6HighAlarm
129
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd2Trip
81
18
Rtd7HighAlarm
130
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd3Trip
82
18
Rtd8HighAlarm
131
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd4Trip
83
18
Rtd9HighAlarm
132
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd5Trip
84
18
Rtd10HighAlarm
133
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd6Trip
85
18
Rtd11HighAlarm
134
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd7Trip
86
18
Rtd12HighAlarm
135
24
RemoteRTD3Rtd8Trip
87
18
OpenRTDSensorAlarm
136
25
RemoteRTD3Rtd9Trip
RemoteRTD3Rtd10Trip
88
19
ShortRTDAlarm
137
25
89
19
TripCountersAlarm
138
25
RemoteRTD3Rtd11Trip
90
19
StarterFailureAlarm
139
25
RemoteRTD3Rtd12Trip
91
19
CurrentDemandAlarm
140
25
RemoteRTD4Rtd1Trip
92
19
KWDemandAlarm
141
25
RemoteRTD4Rtd2Trip
93
19
KVARDemandAlarm
142
25
RemoteRTD4Rtd3Trip
94
19
KVADemandAlarm
143
25
RemoteRTD4Rtd4Trip
95
19
DigitalCounterAlarm
144
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd5Trip
96
20
OverloadLockoutBlock
145
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd6Trip
97
20
StartInhibitBlock
146
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd7Trip
98
20
StartsHourBlock
147
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd8Trip
99
20
TimeBetweenStartsBlock
148
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd9Trip
100
20
RestartBlock
149
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd10Trip
101
20
Reserved
150
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd11Trip
102
20
BackSpinBlock
151
26
RemoteRTD4Rtd12Trip
103
20
LossofRemoteRTDCommunication
152
27
RemoteRTD1Rtd1Alarm
104
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd1Trip
153
27
RemoteRTD1Rtd2Alarm
105
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd2Trip
154
27
RemoteRTD1Rtd3Alarm
106
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd3Trip
155
27
RemoteRTD1Rtd4Alarm
107
21
RemoteRTD1Rtd4Trip
156
27
RemoteRTD1Rtd5Alarm
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-9
9.2 PROFIBUS-DP COMMUNICATIONS
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–3: PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS (Sheet 5 of 5)
9
BIT
BYTE
157
27
FUNCTION
RemoteRTD1Rtd6Alarm
158
27
RemoteRTD1Rtd7Alarm
159
27
RemoteRTD1Rtd8Alarm
160
28
RemoteRTD1Rtd9Alarm
161
28
RemoteRTD1Rtd10Alarm
162
28
RemoteRTD1Rtd11Alarm
163
28
RemoteRTD1Rtd12Alarm
164
28
RemoteRTD2Rtd1Alarm
165
28
RemoteRTD2Rtd2Alarm
166
28
RemoteRTD2Rtd3Alarm
167
28
RemoteRTD2Rtd4Alarm
168
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd5Alarm
169
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd6Alarm
170
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd7Alarm
171
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd8Alarm
172
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd9Alarm
173
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd10Alarm
174
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd11Alarm
175
29
RemoteRTD2Rtd12Alarm
176
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd1Alarm
177
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd2Alarm
178
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd3Alarm
179
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd4Alarm
180
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd5Alarm
181
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd6Alarm
182
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd7Alarm
183
30
RemoteRTD3Rtd8Alarm
184
31
RemoteRTD3Rtd9Alarm
185
31
RemoteRTD3Rtd10Alarm
186
31
RemoteRTD3Rtd11Alarm
187
31
RemoteRTD3Rtd12Alarm
188
31
RemoteRTD4Rtd1Alarm
189
31
RemoteRTD4Rtd2Alarm
190
31
RemoteRTD4Rtd3Alarm
191
31
RemoteRTD4Rtd4Alarm
192
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd5Alarm
193
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd6Alarm
194
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd7Alarm
195
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd8Alarm
196
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd9Alarm
197
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd10Alarm
198
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd11Alarm
199
32
RemoteRTD4Rtd12Alarm
9-10
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3.1 369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 PARAMETERIZATION
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports mandatory parametrization as well as three bytes of user parameter data necessary for DPV1 devices. The relay keeps its user parameter data/setpoints in a non-volatile memory and does not require
device related parametrization during startup of the DP/V1 master, with the exception of the DPV1 Enable parameter. To
enable the DPV1 acyclical functionality, the DPV1 parameter must be set to “Enable” when configuring the device in your
master using the GSD file.
The EnerVista 369 Setup software is the best tool for editing user parametrization (setpoints) of the 369 device.
Figure 9–3: USER PARAMETER SETUP – ENABLE DPV1
9.3.2 369 PROFIBUS CONFIGURATION
The Profibus-DPV1 basic configuration has one DP/V1 master and one DPV1 slave. In a typical bus segment up to 32 stations can be connected (a repeater has to be used if more then 32 stations operate on a bus). The end nodes on a Profibus-DPV1 network must be terminated to avoid reflections on the bus line.
The bus address for the relay as Profibus-DPV1 node can be set using the S1 369 SETUP ÖØ 369 COMMUNICATIONS ÖØ
PROFIBUS ADDRESS setpoint or via the EnerVista 369 Setup software, which extends address range from 1 to 126.
Address 126 is used only for commissioning purposes and should not be used to exchange user data.
The Profibus media is a twisted-pair copper cable along with 9-pin Sub-D connector, which connects the bus to the 369
socket on the back of the relay. The 369 Motor Management Relay has autobaud support. The baud rates and other slave
specific information needed for configuration are contained in the 369_09E6.gse file, which is used by a network configuration program.
The 369 Motor Management Relay as a DPV1 slave transfers fast process data to the DP/V1 master according to masterslave principle. The 369 is a modular device, supporting up to 111 input modules.
Modules define a block size of input data to be read by the master, starting from offset zero. Adding modules in your Master
configuration increases the size of the total block of data that the Master will read, making it easy to choose a total block
size of data that matches the user's requirements.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-11
9
9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3.3 369 PROFIBUS INPUT DATA
There are two options for configuring what data is made available through Profibus Input Data, based on the value of the
PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint (see Section 5.2.3: 369 Communications on page 5–5 for details). If the PROFIBUS
CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint is set to “0” (default map), then the data available to be read matches Table 9–1: Profibus Input
Data on page 9–5.
The user can also exactly define the data provided and the order of that data. The Modbus User Definable Memory Map
area (refer to Section 9.6.2: User Definable Memory Map Area on page 9–34) and the PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint
are used to define this data. The PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint determines the number of 16-bit registers available to
be read through Profibus Input Data and the Modbus User Definable Memory Map is used to determine the data provided
and the order of the data.
For example, if the user only wishes to read two 16-bit registers of data (4 bytes), the user selects a number of Input Modules from the GSD file that add up to a total of 4 bytes. When the Profibus Master is reading the Input data, only 4 bytes of
Input data will be sent in the communication packet. The number of words should match the PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint, but it's not necessary. If the number of Input data bytes read from the master is greater than the user has defined with
the PROFIBUS CYCLIC IN DATA setpoint, the balance of the data will return zero values.
Figure 9–4: SLAVE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 1 – 4 BYTES OF INPUT DATA
9
Figure 9–5: SLAVE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE 2 – 220 BYTES OF INPUT DATA
9-12
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3.4 369 PROFIBUS OUTPUT DATA
The capability to force the output relays states has been implemented in cyclic output data. As cyclic data is continuously
written, the 369 looks for a change in the value to execute the force relays command. Refer to Section 5.3.6e): Force Output Relays on page 5–23 more information about the force output relays feature.
A slave configuration example for 4 bytes of input data and 2 bytes of output data is shown below.
Figure 9–6: SLAVE CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE – 4 BYTES OF INPUT DATA, 2 BYTES OF OUTPUT DATA
Table 9–4: PROFIBUS OUTPUT DATA
OFFSET CYCLIC DATA
(ACTUAL VALUES)
0
Force Output Relays
LENGTH
(BYTES)
2
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
VALUE
HEX
VALUE
HEX
0
0
15
F
FORMAT
CODE
F141
9.3.5 369 PROFIBUS DIAGNOSTICS
The diagnostic data available for the Profibus-DPV1 option matches Table 9–3: Profibus Diagnostics on page 9–8. When
no diagnostic information is available and the master initiates a diagnostics read, the six slave mandatory bytes are read.
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-13
9.3 PROFIBUS-DPV1 COMMUNICATIONS
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.3.6 369 PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLICAL COMMUNICATION
The following items have been made available through Profibus-DPV1 acyclical communication. Data is addressed through
the use of “slot and index” addressing. Three parameters are required to read or write data from the 369 using a ProfibusDPV1 master:
1.
Slot number
2.
Index number
3.
Data length (number of 16-bit words)
The value that is written acyclically to either FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS or BLOCK PROTECTION FUNCTIONS must be
a 16-bit value. The lower byte contains the bitmask data (as per format codes noted) and the upper byte written
must always contain a value of zero.
NOTE
Table 9–5: PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLIC WRITE DATA
OBJECT
SLOT
INDEX
LENGTH
DESCRIPTION
FORMAT
0
0
0
2 bytes
Force Output Relays
F141
2
2 bytes
Block Protection Functions
F180
Refer to Section 5.3.6e): Force Output Relays on page 5–23 for additional information about the force output relays feature.
Refer to Section 5.3.4: Block Functions on page 5–16 for additional information about the protection function blocking feature.
Table 9–6: PROFIBUS-DPV1 ACYCLIC READ DATA
OBJECT
SLOT
INDEX
LENGTH
DATA ITEM
FORMAT
0
0
0
2 bytes
Trip Relay Status
F150
2
2 bytes
Alarm Relay Status
F150
4
2 bytes
Aux1 Relay Status
F150
6
2 bytes
Aux2 Relay Status
F150
8
2 bytes
Functions Currently Blocked
F141
9
9-14
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9.4DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9.4.1 DEVICENET COMMUNICATIONS
The device profile is an extension of the Generic Device Profile (0x00). It is a group 2 only server. The MAC ID and baud
rate are programmable through relay front panel or the EnerVista 369 Setup software. The Poll function will return seven
bytes of the status and metering data and consumes one byte of control data. The COS\CYC operation is not supported.
The seven bytes of polling data are described in assembly object class 04, instance 64h. The single byte of control data is
described under assembly object class 04, instance 96h.
The 369 Motor Management Relay supports following DeviceNet object classes.
Table 9–7: DEVICENET OBJECT CLASSES
CLASS
Object
01h
Identity
02h
Message Router
03h
DeviceNet
04h
Assembly
05h
Connection
2Bh
Acknowledge Handler
A0h
IO data Input Mapping
A1h
IO data Output Mapping
B0h
Parameter Data input Mapping
9.4.2 IDENTITY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 01H)
Identity object, Class code 01h, Services.
CODE
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO THIS OBJECT
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0x05
Reset
Reset the device to power up configuration
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single
Returns the contents of the given attribute
Identity object, Class code 01h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Revision of Identity object
UINT
1
Identity object, Class code 01h, Instance 01h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Vendor ID
UINT
928
02h
Get
Device Type
UINT
0
03h
Get
Product Code
UINT
53
04h
Get
Revision (Major, Minor)
USINT (2)
2.20
05h
Get
Status
F178
---
07h
Get
Product Name
Short-String
369 Motor Management Relay
The USINT and UINT data types are defined as follows: USINT = Unsigned integer byte (range 0 to 255); UINT = Unsigned
integer word (range 0 to 65535).
9.4.3 MESSAGE ROUTER (CLASS CODE 02H)
The message router (class code 2) object provides a messaging connection point through which a client may address a
service to any object or instance residing in the physical device. There is no external visible interface to the message router
object.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-15
9
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4.4 DEVICENET OBJECT (CLASS CODE 03H)
DeviceNet object, Class code 03h, Services:
CODE
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO THIS OBJECT
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single
Returns the contents of the given attribute
DeviceNet object, Class Code 03h, Attributes:
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Revision of DeviceNet object
USINT
2
DeviceNet object, Class Code 03h, Instance 01h, Attributes:
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
MAC ID
USINT
0 to 63
02h
Get
Baud Rate
USINT
0 = 125 kbps, 1 = 250 kbps,
2 = 500 kbps
05h
Get
Allocation choice
BYTE
Bit 0: explicit messaging
Bit 1: polled I/O
Bit 4: COS I/O
Bit 5: cyclic I/O
Bit 6: acknowledge suppression
Master’s MAC ID
USINT
0 to 63: address;
255 = unallocated
The USINT and UINT data types are defined as follows: USINT = Unsigned integer byte (range 0 to 255); UINT = Unsigned
integer word (range 0 to 65535).
9.4.5 ASSEMBLY OBJECT (CLASS CODE 04H)
The assembly objects bind attributes of multiple objects to allow data to or from each object to be sent or received over a
single connection. There are 6 instances of the assembly object for the device.
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Services:
CODE
SERVICES AVAILABLE TO THIS OBJECT
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single
Returns the contents of the given attribute
0X10
Set_Attribute_Single
Sets the contents of the given attribute
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
01h
Get
Revision of Assembly object
UINT
VALUE
2
02h
Get
Maximum instance number
UINT
150
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Instance 64h, Attributes.
9
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
03h
Get
Motor data
bytes (7)
see below
DATA FORMATS, MOTOR DATA
BYTE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
UNITS
FORMAT
DEFAULT
1
Motor status
1 byte
-
F172
0
2
Digital input status
1 byte
-
F173
0
3
Digital output status
1 byte
-
F174
0
4
Flag change state
1 byte
-
F175
0
5
Thermal capacity used
1 byte
%
USINT
0
6 (lo), 7 (hi)
Time to trip
2 bytes
seconds
F20
–1
9-16
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Instance 65h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
03h
Get
Flag change state
byte
see below
DATA FORMATS, FLAG CHANGE STATE
BIT POSITION
NAME
VALUES
0
Trip/alarm flag
0 = no change; 1 = trip or alarm
1 to 7
Reserved
---
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Instance 66h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
03h
Get
Digital data
bytes (4)
see below
DATA FORMATS, DIGITAL DATA
BYTE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
UNITS
FORMAT
1
Motor status
1 byte
---
F172
DEFUALT
0
2
Digital input status
1 byte
---
F173
0
3
Digital output status
1 byte
---
F174
0
4
Flag change state
1 byte
---
F175
0
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Instance 67h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
03h
Get
Thermal capacity used
USINT
%
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Instance 68h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
DATA FORMAT
VALUE
03h
Get
Time to trip
Word
F20
–1 second
Assembly object, Class code 04h, Instance 96h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
03h
Set
Control byte
1 byte
see below
DATA FORMATS, CONTROL BYTE
BIT POSITION
NAME
0
Motor start
VALUE
0, 1
1
Motor stop
0, 1
2
Fault reset
0, 1
3
Reserved
---
4
Reserved
---
5
Reserved
---
6
Reserved
---
7
Reserved
---
For execution of DeviceNet control commands, one of the switch assignments should be set to “DeviceNet Control” and be
closed.
The motor start command energizes the output relay set with the START CONTROL RELAY setpoint. The motor stop command energizes the trip relay. The fault reset command resets the latched trip and alarm conditions, provided the cause of
alarm/trip is removed. The commands are executed continuously as long as the control bits are high. When two or more
commands are executed simultaneously, only one will be executed. The command hierarchy for execution is given below.
1. Motor stop
2. Fault reset
3. Motor start
The corresponding command bit should be high for more than 500 ms to execute the command.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-17
9
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4.6 DEVICENET CONNECTION OBJECT (CLASS CODE 05H)
The connection objects manage the characteristics of each communication connection. There are two instances of the connection object in the device: explicit connection (<50 ms response) and input/output connection poll (<10 ms response).
Connection Object, Class Code 05h, Services:
CODE
NAME AND DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES AVAILABLE TO THIS OBJECT
0x05
Reset the connection - restart timer
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single: Returns the contents of the given attribute.
0x10
Set_Attribute_Single: Sets the contents of the given attribute
Connection Object, Class Code 05h, Instance 01h (explicit message connection):
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
State
BYTE
0x03
02h
Get
Instance_type
BYTE
0x00, 0x01
03h
Get
Export class trigger
BYTE
0x83
04h
Get
Produced connection ID
UINT
10xxxxxx011, xxxxxx = MAC ID
05h
Get
Consumed connection ID
UINT
10xxxxxx011, xxxxxx = MAC ID
06h
Get
Initial comm. characteristics
UINT
0x21
07h
Get
Produced connection size
UINT
0x12
08h
Get
Consumed connection size
UINT
0x12
09h
Get/Set
Expected package rate
UINT
0x00
0Ch
Get/Set
Watchdog timeout action
USINT
0 = transition to time-out
1 = auto delete, 2 = auto reset
3 = deferred delete
0Dh
Get
Produced path length
UINT
0x0000
0Eh
Get
Produced path
BYTE [6]
<null>
0Fh
Get
Consumed path length
UINT
0x0000
10h
Get
Consumed path
BYTE [6]
<null>
11h
Get
Production inhibit timer
UINT
0x0000
Connection Object, Class Code 05h, Instance 02h (polled input/output connection):
9
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
State
BYTE
0x03
02h
Get
Instance_type
BYTE
0x01
03h
Get
Export class trigger
BYTE
0x80, 0x82
04h
Get
Produced connection ID
UINT
MAC ID
05h
Get
Consumed connection ID
UINT
MAC ID
06h
Get
Initial comm. characteristics
UINT
0x01, 0xF1
07h
Get
Produced connection size
UINT
0x01
08h
Get
Consumed connection size
UINT
0x01
09h
Get/Set
Expected package rate
UINT
0x00
0Ch
Get/Set
Watchdog timeout action
UINT
0x00
0Dh
Get
Produced path length
UINT
0x0006
0Eh
Get
Produced path
BYTE [6]
<null>
0x0006
0Fh
Get
Consumed path length
UINT
10h
Get
Consumed path
BYTE [6]
<null>
11h
Get
Production inhibit timer
UINT
0x0000
9-18
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9.4.7 ACKNOWLEDGE HANDLER OBJECT (CLASS CODE 2BH)
Acknowledge Handler Object, Class Code 2Bh, Services:
CODE
NAME
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single
DESCRIPTION
Returns the contents of the given attribute
0x10
Set_Attribute_Single
Sets the contents of the given attribute
Acknowledge Handler object, Class code 2Bh, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Revision of Acknowledge Handler
object
UINT
1
02h
Get
Maximum instance number
UINT
1
Acknowledge Handler object, Class code 2Bh, Instance 01h, Attributes:
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Acknowledge timer
UINT
16 ms
02h
Get
Retry limit
USINT
1
9.4.8 I/O DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A0H)
I/O Data Input Mapping Object, Class code A0h, Services:
CODE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single
Returns the contents of the given attribute
Input/Output Data Input Mapping object, Class code A0h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Revision of I/O Data Input Mapping object
UINT
1
I/O Data Input Mapping object, Class code A0h, Instance 01h, Attributes:
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
DATA FORMAT
01h
Get
Motor data
bytes (7)
see below
02h
Get
Flag change state
byte
F175
03h
Get
Digital data
bytes (4)
see below
04h
Get
Thermal capacity used
USINT
%
05h
Get
Time to trip
Word
F20
DATA FORMATS, MOTOR DATA
BYTE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
UNITS
FORMAT
DEFAULT
1
Motor status
1 byte
---
F172
0
2
Digital input status
1 byte
---
F173
0
3
Digital output status
1 byte
---
F174
0
4
Flag change state
1 byte
---
F175
0
5
Thermal capacity used
1 byte
%
USINT
0
6 (lo)
Time to trip
2 bytes
seconds
INT
–1
9
7 (hi)
DATA FORMATS, DIGITAL DATA
BYTE
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
UNITS
FORMAT
DEFAULT
1
Motor status
1 byte
---
F172
0
2
Digital input status
1 byte
---
F173
0
3
Digital output status
1 byte
---
F174
0
4
Flag change state
1 byte
---
F175
0
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-19
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4.9 I/O DATA OUTPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE A1H)
I/O Data Output Mapping Object, Class code A1h, Services:
CODE
NAME
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single
DESCRIPTION
Returns the contents of the given attribute
0x10
Set_Attribute_Single
Sets the contents of the given attribute
I/O Data Input Mapping object, Class code A0h, Instance 01h, Attributes:
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
DATA FORMAT
01h
Set
Control byte
1 byte
see below
DATA FORMATS, CONTROL BYTE
BIT POSITION
NAME
0
Motor start
VALUES
1
Motor stop
0, 1
2
Fault reset
0, 1
3
Reserved
---
4
Reserved
---
5
Reserved
---
6
Reserved
---
7
Reserved
---
0, 1
9
9-20
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9.4.10 PARAMETER DATA INPUT MAPPING OBJECT (CLASS CODE B0H)
Parameter Data Input Mapping object, Class code B0h, Services:
CODE
NAME
DESCRIPTION
0x0E
Get_Attribute_Single
Returns the contents of the given attribute
Parameter Data Input Mapping object, Class code B0h, Attributes.
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Revision of Identity object
UINT
1
Parameter Data Input Mapping object, Class code B0h, Instance 01h, Attributes:
ATTRIBUTE
ACCESS
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DATA TYPE
VALUE
01h
Get
Currents
bytes (10)
see below
02h
Get
Current angles
bytes (6)
see below
03h
Get
Motor load
bytes (6)
see below
04h
Get
Line voltages
bytes (8)
see below
05h
Get
Phase voltages
bytes (8)
see below
06h
Get
Phase voltage angles
bytes (6)
see below
07h
Get
Frequency
bytes (2)
see below
08h
Get
BSD state and frequency
bytes (4)
see below
09h
Get
Power
bytes (10)
see below
0Ah
Get
Energy
bytes (6)
see below
0Bh
Get
Local hottest stator RTD and temperature
bytes (4)
see below
0Ch
Get
Local RTD temperatures
bytes (24)
see below
0Dh
Get
Demand
bytes (8)
see below
0Eh
Get
Peak values
bytes (8)
see below
0Fh
Get
Learned data
bytes (14)
see below
see below
10h
Get
Motor statistics
bytes (12)
11h
Get
Cause of trip
bytes (2)
see below
12h
Get
Last trip date and time
bytes (16)
see below
13h
Get
Last pre-trip currents
bytes (8)
see below
14h
Get
Last pre-trip motor load
bytes (4)
see below
15h
Get
Pre-trip local hottest stator RTD and temperature
bytes (4)
see below
16h
Get
Last pre-trip line voltages
bytes (6)
see below
17h
Get
Last pre-trip phase voltages
bytes (6)
see below
see below
18h
Get
Last pre-trip frequency
bytes (2)
19h
Get
Last pre-trip power
bytes (8)
see below
1Ah
Get
Trip diagnostic data
bytes (6)
see below
1Bh
Get
Alarm diagnostic data
bytes (8)
see below
1Ch
Get
Start block status data
bytes (10)
see below
1Dh
Get
Actual values
bytes (202)
see below
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-21
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
DATA FORMATS FOR CLASS CODE B0H, INSTANCE 1 (Sheet 1 of 5)
ATTRIBUTE
BYTES
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
FORMAT
VALUE/UNIT
01h
CURRENTS
1,2 (low, high)
Phase Current Ia
16 bits
UINT
A
3,4 (low, high)
Phase Current Ib
16 bits
UINT
A
5,6 (low, high)
Phase Current Ic
16 bits
UINT
A
7,8 (low, high)
Average phase current Iav
16 bits
UINT
A
9,10 (low, high)
Ground current Ig
16 bits
F23
0.1 × A or 0.01 × A
1,2 (low, high)
Ia angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
3,4 (low, high)
Ib angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
5,6 (low, high)
Ic angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
1,2 (low, high)
Motor load
16 bits
F3
0.01 × FLA
3,4 (low, high)
Current unbalance
16 bits
UINT
%
5,6 (low, high)
Unbalanced biased motor load (Ieq)
16 bits
F3
0.01 × FLA
1,2 (low, high)
Voltage Vab
16 bits
UINT
V
3,4 (low, high)
Voltage Vbc
16 bits
UINT
V
5,6 (low, high)
Voltage Vca
16 bits
UINT
V
7,8 (low, high)
Average line voltage
16 bits
UINT
V
1,2 (low, high)
Voltage Van
16 bits
UINT
V
3,4 (low, high)
Voltage Vbn
16 bits
UINT
V
5,6 (low, high)
Voltage Vcn
16 bits
UINT
V
02h
CURRENT
ANGLES
03h
MOTOR
LOAD
04h
LINE
VOLTAGES
05h
PHASE
VOLTAGES
7,8 (low, high)
Average phase voltage
16 bits
UINT
V
06h
PHASE
VOLTAGE
ANGLES
1,2 (low, high)
Va angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
3,4 (low, high)
Vb angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
5,6 (low, high)
Vc angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
07h
FREQUENCY
1,2 (low, high)
Frequency
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 Hz
08h
BSD STATE
AND FREQ.
1,2 (low, high)
BSD state
16 bits
F27
--
3,4 (low, high)
Backspin frequency
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 Hz
5,6 (low, high)
Backspin prediction timer
16 bits
F1
s
1,2 (low, high)
Power factor
16 bits
F21
× 0.01 PF
3,4 (low, high)
Real power (kW)
16 bits
F4
kW
5,6 (low, high)
Real power (hp)
16 bits
UINT
hp
7,8 (low, high)
Reactive power
16 bits
F4
kvar
9,10 (low, high)
Apparent power
16 bits
UINT
kVA
1,2 (low, high)
MWh
16 bits
UINT
MWh
3,4 (low, high)
Positive Mvarh
16 bits
UINT
Mvarh
5,6 (low, high)
Negative Mvarh
16 bits
UINT
Mvarh
1,2 (low, high)
Local hottest stator RTD
16 bits
UINT
---
3,4 (low, high)
Local hottest stator RTD temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
09h
POWER
0Ah
ENERGY
0Bh
RTD TEMPERATURE
9
9-22
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
DATA FORMATS FOR CLASS CODE B0H, INSTANCE 1 (Sheet 2 of 5)
ATTRIBUTE
BYTES
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
FORMAT
VALUE/UNIT
0Ch
LOCAL RTD
TEMPERATURE
1,2 (low, high)
Local RTD 1 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
3,4 (low, high)
Local RTD 2 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
5,6 (low, high)
Local RTD 3 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
7,8 (low, high)
Local RTD 4 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
9,10 (low, high)
Local RTD 5 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
11,12 (low, high)
Local RTD 6 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
13,14 (low, high)
Local RTD 7 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
15,16 (low, high)
Local RTD 8 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
17,18 (low, high)
Local RTD 9 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
19,20 (low, high)
Local RTD 10 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
21,22 (low, high)
Local RTD 11 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
23,24 (low, high)
Local RTD 12 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
1,2 (low, high)
Current demand
16 bits
UINT
A
3,4 (low, high)
Real power demand
16 bits
UINT
kW
0Dh
DEMAND
0Eh
PEAK
DEMAND
0Fh
LEARNED
DATA
10h
MOTOR
STATISTICS
5,6 (low, high)
Reactive power demand
16 bits
UINT
kvar
7,8 (low, high)
Apparent power demand
16 bits
UINT
kVA
1,2 (low, high)
Peak current demand
16 bits
UINT
A
3,4 (low, high)
Peak real power demand
16 bits
UINT
kW
kvar
5,6 (low, high)
Peak reactive power demand
16 bits
UINT
7,8 (low, high)
Peak apparent power demand
16 bits
UINT
kVA
1,2 (low, high)
Learned acceleration time
16 bits
F2
x 0.1 seconds
3,4 (low, high)
Learned starting current
16 bits
UINT
A
5,6 (low, high)
Learned starting capacity
16 bits
UINT
%
7,8 (low, high)
Learned running cool time constant
16 bits
UINT
minutes
9,10 (low, high)
Learned stopped cool time constant
16 bits
UINT
minutes
11,12 (low, high)
Last starting capacity
16 bits
UINT
%
13,14 (low, high)
Learned unbalance k-factor
16 bits
UINT
--
1,2 (low, high)
Number of starts
16 bits
UINT
--
3,4 (low, high)
Number of restarts
16 bits
UINT
--
5,6 (low, high)
Digital counter
16 bits
UINT
--
7,8 (low, high)
Motor running hours
16 bits
UINT
hours
11h
CAUSE OF
LAST TRIP
1,2 (low, high)
Cause of last trip
16 bits
F134
--
12h
LAST PRETRIP DATE
AND TIME.
1 to 4(low, high)
Last trip date
32 bits
F18
--
5 to 8(low, high)
Last trip time
32 bits
F19
--
13h
LAST PRETRIP
CURRENTS
1,2 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Ia
16 bits
UINT
A
3,4 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Ib
16 bits
UINT
A
5,6 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Ic
16 bits
UINT
A
7,8 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Ig
16 bits
F2
0.1 × A
14h
LAST PRETRIP MOTOR
LOAD
1,2 (low, high)
Last pre-trip motor load
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 FLA
3,4 (low, high)
Last pre-trip unbalance
16 bits
UINT
%
15h
PRE-TRIP
STATOR RTD
TEMP.
1,2 (low, high)
Local pre-trip hottest stator RTD
16 bits
UINT
---
3,4 (low, high)
Local pre-trip hottest stator RTD
temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-23
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
DATA FORMATS FOR CLASS CODE B0H, INSTANCE 1 (Sheet 3 of 5)
ATTRIBUTE
BYTES
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
FORMAT
VALUE/UNIT
16h
LAST PRETRIP LINE
VOLTAGES
1,2 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vab
16 bits
UINT
volts
3,4 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vbc
16 bits
UINT
volts
5,6 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vca
16 bits
UINT
volts
17h
LAST PRETRIP PHASE
VOLTAGES
1,2 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Van
16 bits
UINT
volts
3,4 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vbn
16 bits
UINT
volts
5,6 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vcn
16 bits
UINT
volts
18h
LAST PRETRIP FREQ.
1,2 (low, high)
Last pre-trip frequency
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 Hz
19h
LAST PRETRIP POWER
1,2 (low, high)
Last pre-trip kilowatts
16 bits
F4
kW
3,4 (low, high)
Last pre-trip kvar
16 bits
F4
kvar
5,6 (low, high)
Last pre-trip KVA
16 bits
UINT
kVA
× 0.01 PF
7,8 (low, high)
Last pre-trip power factor
16 bits
F21
1Ah
TRIP DIAG.
6 bytes
Trip diagnostic data
48 bits
F176
1Bh
ALARM DIAG.
8 bytes
Alarm diagnostic data
64 bits
F177
1Ch
START
BLOCK
STATUS
1,2 (low, high)
Overload lockout timer
16 bits
UINT
minutes
3,4 (low, high)
Starts timer [1]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
5,6 (low, high)
Starts timer [2]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
7,8 (low, high)
Starts timer [3]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
9,10 (low, high)
Starts timer [4]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
1Dh
ACTUAL
VALUES
9
9-24
11,12 (low, high)
Starts timer [5]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
13,14 (low, high)
Time between starts timer
16 bits
UINT
minutes
15,16 (low, high)
Restart block timer
16 bits
UINT
seconds
17,16 (low, high)
Start inhibit timer
16 bits
UINT
minutes
1,2 (low, high)
Phase current Ia
16 bits
UINT
A
3,4 (low, high)
Phase current Ib
16 bits
UINT
A
5,6 (low, high)
Phase current Ic
16 bits
UINT
A
7,8 (low, high)
Average phase current Iav
16 bits
UINT
A
0.1 × A or 0.01 × A
9,10 (low, high)
Ground current Ig
16 bits
F23
11,12 (low, high)
Ia angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
13,14 (low, high)
Ib angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
15,16 (low, high)
Ic angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
× 0.01 FLA
17,18 (low, high)
Motor load
16 bits
F3
19,20 (low, high)
Current unbalance
16 bits
UINT
%
21,22 (low, high)
Unbalanced biased motor load (Ieq)
16 bits
F3
0.01 × FLA
23,24 (low, high)
Voltage Vab
16 bits
UINT
V
25,26 (low, high)
Voltage Vbc
16 bits
UINT
V
27,28 (low, high)
Voltage Vca
16 bits
UINT
V
29,30 (low, high)
Average line voltage
16 bits
UINT
V
31,32 (low, high)
Voltage Van
16 bits
UINT
V
33,34 (low, high)
Voltage Vbn
16 bits
UINT
V
35,36 (low, high)
Voltage Vcn
16 bits
UINT
V
37,38 (low, high)
Average phase voltage
16 bits
UINT
V
39,40 (low, high)
Va angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
41,42 (low, high)
Vb angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
43,44 (low, high)
Vc angle
16 bits
UINT
degrees
45,46 (low, high)
Frequency
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 Hz
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
DATA FORMATS FOR CLASS CODE B0H, INSTANCE 1 (Sheet 4 of 5)
ATTRIBUTE
BYTES
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
FORMAT
1Dh
ACTUAL
VALUES
continued
47,48 (low, high)
BSD state
16 bits
F27
--
49,50 (low, high)
Backspin frequency
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 Hz
51,52 (low, high)
Backspin prediction timer
16 bits
F1
seconds
53,54 (low, high)
Power factor
16 bits
F21
× 0.01 PF
55,56 (low, high)
Real power (kW)
16 bits
F4
kW
57,58 (low, high)
Real power (hp)
16 bits
UINT
hp
kvar
GE Multilin
VALUE/UNIT
59,60 (low, high)
Reactive power
16 bits
F4
61,62 (low, high)
Apparent power
16 bits
UINT
kVA
63,64 (low, high)
MWh
16 bits
UINT
MWh
65,66 (low, high)
Positive Mvarh
16 bits
UINT
Mvarh
67,68 (low, high)
Negative Mvarh
16 bits
UINT
Mvarh
69,70 (low, high)
Local Hottest stator RTD
16 bits
UINT
---
71,72 (low, high)
Local Hottest stator RTD temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
73,74 (low, high)
Local RTD 1 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
75,76 (low, high)
Local RTD 2 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
77,78 (low, high)
Local RTD 3 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
79,80 (low, high)
Local RTD 4 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
81,82 (low, high)
Local RTD 5 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
83,84 (low, high)
Local RTD 6 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
85,86 (low, high)
Local RTD 7 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
87,88 (low, high)
Local RTD 8 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
89,90 (low, high)
Local RTD 9 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
91,92 (low, high)
Local RTD 10 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
93,94 (low, high)
Local RTD 11 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
95,96 (low, high)
Local RTD 12 temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
97,98 (low, high)
Current demand
16 bits
UINT
A
99,100 (low, high)
Real power demand
16 bits
UINT
kW
101,102 (low, high)
Reactive power demand
16 bits
F4
kvar
103, 104 (low, high)
Apparent power demand
16 bits
UINT
kVA
105, 106 (low, high)
Peak current demand
16 bits
UINT
A
107, 108 (low, high)
Peak real power demand
16 bits
UINT
kW
109, 110 (low, high)
Peak reactive power demand
16 bits
F4
kvar
111,112 (low, high)
Peak apparent power demand
16 bits
UINT
kVA
113,114 (low, high)
Learned acceleration time
16 bits
F2
× 0.1 seconds
115,116 (low, high)
Learned starting current
16 bits
UINT
A
117,118 (low, high)
Learned starting capacity
16 bits
UINT
%
119,120 (low, high)
Learned running cool time constant
16 bits
UINT
minutes
121,122 (low, high)
Learned stopped cool time constant
16 bits
UINT
minutes
123,124 (low, high)
Last starting capacity
16 bits
UINT
%
125,126 (low, high)
Learned unbalance k-factor
16 bits
UINT
--
127,128 (low, high)
Number of starts
16 bits
UINT
--
129,130 (low, high)
Number of restarts
16 bits
UINT
--
131,132 (low, high)
Digital counter
16 bits
UINT
--
133,134 (low, high)
Motor running Hours
16 bits
UINT
hours
135,136 (low, high)
Cause of last trip
16 bits
F134
--
137 to 140 (low, high) Last trip date
32 bits
F18
--
141 to 144 (low, high) Last trip time
32 bits
F19
--
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-25
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
DATA FORMATS FOR CLASS CODE B0H, INSTANCE 1 (Sheet 5 of 5)
ATTRIBUTE
BYTES
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
FORMAT
VALUE/UNIT
1Dh
ACTUAL
VALUES
continued
145, 146 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Ia
16 bits
UINT
A
147, 148 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Ib
16 bits
UINT
A
149, 150 (low, high)
Last Pre-trip Ic
16 bits
UINT
A
151, 152 (low, high)
Last Pre-trip Ig
16 bits
F2
× 0.1 A
153, 154 (low, high)
Last pre-trip motor load
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 FLA
155, 156 (low, high)
Last pre-trip unbalance
16 bits
UINT
%
157, 158 (low, high)
Last pre-trip local hottest stator RTD
16 bits
UINT
---
159, 160 (low, high)
Last pre-trip local hottest stator RTD
temperature
16 bits
F4
°C
161, 162 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vab
16 bits
UINT
volts
163, 164 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vbc
16 bits
UINT
volts
165, 166 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vca
16 bits
UINT
volts
167, 168 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Van
16 bits
UINT
volts
169, 170 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vbn
16 bits
UINT
volts
171, 172 (low, high)
Last pre-trip Vcn
16 bits
UINT
volts
173, 174 (low, high)
Last pre-trip frequency
16 bits
F3
× 0.01 Hz
175, 176 (low, high)
Last pre-trip kilowatts
16 bits
F4
kW
177, 178 (low, high)
Last pre-trip kvar
16 bits
F4
kvar
179, 180 (low, high)
Last pre-trip KVA
16 bits
UINT
kVA
181, 182 (low, high)
Last pre-trip power factor
16 bits
F21
× 0.01 PF
183 to 188
Trip diagnostic data
48 bits
F176
189 to 196
Alarm diagnostic data
64 bits
F177
197, 198 (low, high)
Overload lockout timer
16 bits
UINT
minutes
199, 200 (low, high)
Starts timer [1]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
201, 202 (low, high)
Starts timer [2]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
203, 204 (low, high)
Starts timer [3]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
205, 206 (low, high)
Starts timer [4]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
207, 208 (low, high)
Starts timer [5]
16 bits
UINT
minutes
209, 210 (low, high)
Time between starts timer
16 bits
UINT
minutes
211, 212 (low, high)
Restart block timer
16 bits
UINT
seconds
213, 214 (low, high)
Start inhibit timer
16 bits
UINT
minutes
9
9-26
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
9.4.11 DEVICENET DATA FORMATS
FORMAT
F167
F168
F170
F172
VALUE
0
Power off / Not online
1
Online, Connected
2
Link failure
3
Not defined
VALUE
Bit 0
Trip/Alarm status; 1= operated
Bits 1 to 7
F176
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Flag change state: unsigned 8 bit integer
Reserved
Relay trips: bitmask
Byte 1
Bit 0
Single Phasing Trip
Bit 1
Spare Switch Trip
Nonexistent
Bit 2
Emergency Switch Trip
1
Configuring
Bit 3
Differential Switch Trip
2
(Not used)
Bit 4
Speed Switch Trip
3
Established
Bit 5
Reset Switch Trip
4
Timed out
Bit 6
Reserved
5
Deferred delete
Bit 7
Overload Trip
Bit 0
Short Circuit Trip
Short Circuit Backup Trip
DeviceNet baud rate: unsigned 16 bit integer
Byte 2
0
125 kbps
Bit 1
1
250 kbps
Bit 2
Mechanical Jam Trip
2
500 kbps
Bit 3
Undercurrent Trip
Bit 4
Current Unbalance Trip
Stopped
Bit 5
Ground Fault Trip
Bit 1
Starting
Bit 6
Ground Fault Backup Trip
Bit 2
Running
Bit 7
Reserved
Bit 3
Overloaded
Bit 0
Acceleration Timer Trip
Bit 4
Tripped
Bit 1
RTD 1 Trip
Reserved
Bit 2
RTD 2 Trip
Digital input status: unsigned 8 bit integer
Bit 3
RTD 3 Trip
Bit 4
RTD 4 Trip
Bit 5
RTD 5 Trip
Bit 6
RTD 6 Trip
Motor status: Unsigned 8 bit integer
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 3
Access Switch Status
0 = Open, 1= Closed
Speed Switch Status
0 = Open, 1= Closed
Spare Switch Status
0 = Open, 1= Closed
Byte 4
Bit 7
RTD 7 Trip
Bit 0
RTD 8 Trip
Bit 3
Differential Switch Status
0 = Open, 1= Closed
Bit 1
RTD 9 Trip
Bit 4
Emergency Switch status
0 = Open, 1= Closed
Bit 2
RTD 10 Trip
Bit 3
RTD 11 Trip
Bit 5
Reset Switch Status
0 = Open, 1= Closed
Bit 4
RTD 12 Trip
Bit 5
Undervoltage Trip
Bit 6
Reserved
Bit 7
Reserved
Bit 6
Overvoltage Trip
Bit 7
Voltage Phase Reversal Trip
Output relay status: unsigned 8 bit integer
Bit 0
Trip Relay Status
0 = De-energized, 1 = Energized
Bit 1
Alarm Relay Status
0 = De-energized, 1 = Energized
Bit 2
Aux1 Relay Status
0 = De-energized, 1 = Energized
Bit 3
Aux2 Relay Status
0 = De-energized, 1 = Energized
Bits 4 to 7
GE Multilin
F175
0
Bits 5 to 7
F174
FORMAT
Connection status: unsigned 16 bit integer
Bit 0
F173
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Network status: unsigned 16 bit integer
9
Reserved
369 Motor Management Relay
9-27
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
FORMAT
F176
ctd.
VALUE
Byte 5
Byte 6
F177
Byte 2
Byte 3
9-28
NAME/DESCRIPTION
FORMAT
Bit 0
Underfrequency Trip
Bit 1
Overfrequency Trip
F177
ctd.
Bit 2
VALUE
RTD 3 Alarm
Bit 1
RTD 4 Alarm
Lead Power Factor Trip
Bit 2
RTD 5 Alarm
Bit 3
Lag Power Factor Trip
Bit 3
RTD 6 Alarm
Bit 4
Positive kvar Trip
Bit 4
RTD 7 Alarm
Bit 5
Negative kvar Trip
Bit 5
RTD 8 Alarm
Bit 6
Underpower Trip
Bit 6
RTD 9 Alarm
Bit 7
Reverse Power Trip
Bit 0
Incomplete Sequence Trip
Bit 1
Bit 2
Byte 4
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Bit 0
Bit 7
RTD 10 Alarm
Bit 0
RTD 11 Alarm
Reserved
Bit 1
RTD 12 Alarm
Reserved
Bit 2
RTD 1 High Alarm
Bit 3
Reserved
Bit 3
RTD 2 High Alarm
Bit 4
Reserved
Bit 4
RTD 3 High Alarm
Bit 5
Reserved
Bit 5
RTD 4 High Alarm
Bit 6
Reserved
Bit 6
RTD 5 High Alarm
Bit 7
Reserved
Relay alarms: bitmask
Byte 1
9
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Byte 5
Byte 6
Bit 7
RTD 6 High Alarm
Bit 0
RTD 7 High Alarm
Bit 0
Spare Switch Alarm
Bit 1
RTD 8 High Alarm
Bit 1
Emergency Switch Alarm
Bit 2
RTD 9 High Alarm
Bit 2
Differential Switch Alarm
Bit 3
RTD 10 High Alarm
Bit 3
Speed Switch Alarm
Bit 4
RTD 11 High Alarm
Bit 4
Reset Switch Alarm
Bit 5
RTD 12 High Alarm
Bit 5
Reserved
Bit 6
Open RTD Sensor Alarm
Bit 6
Thermal Capacity Alarm
Bit 7
Overload Alarm
Bit 0
Bit 1
Bit 7
Short RTD Alarm
Bit 0
Trip Counters Alarm
Mechanical Jam Alarm
Bit 1
Starter Failure Alarm
Undercurrent Alarm
Bit 2
Current Demand Alarm
Bit 2
Current Unbalance Alarm
Bit 3
kW Demand Alarm
Bit 3
Ground Fault Alarm
Bit 4
kvar Demand Alarm
Bit 4
Undervoltage Alarm
Bit 5
kVA Demand Alarm
Bit 5
Overvoltage Alarm
Bit 6
Digital Counter Alarm
Bit 6
Overfrequency Alarm
Bit 7
Underfrequency Alarm
Byte 7
Byte 8
Bit 7
Overload Lockout Block
Bit 0
Start Inhibit Block
Bit 0
Lead Power Factor Alarm
Bit 1
Starts Hour Block
Bit 1
Lag Power Factor Alarm
Bit 2
Time Between Starts Block
Bit 2
Positive kvar Alarm
Bit 3
Restart Block
Bit 3
Negative kvar Alarm
Bit 4
Reserved
Bit 4
Underpower Alarm
Bit 5
Back-Spin Block
Bit 5
Reverse Power Alarm
Bit 6
Bit 6
RTD 1 Alarm
Loss of Remote RTD
Communication
Bit 7
RTD 2 Alarm
Bit 7
Spare Switch Alarm
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
FORMAT
F178
VALUE
9.4 DEVICENET PROTOCOL
NAME/DESCRIPTION
DeviceNet Communication status: unsigned 16
bit integer
Bit 0
0 = not owned,
1 = owned by master
Bit 1
Reserved
Bit 2
Bits 3 to 7
0 = factory default, 1= configured
Reserved
Bit 8
1 = Minor recoverable fault
Bit 9
1 = Minor unrecoverable fault
Bit 10
1 = Major recoverable fault
Bit 11
1 = Major unrecoverable fault
Bits 12 to 15
Reserved
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-29
9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
9.5MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.5.1 DATA FRAME FORMAT AND DATA RATE
One data frame of an asynchronous transmission to or from an 369 is default to 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit. This
produces a 10 bit data frame. This is important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit data frames are
not supported by Hayes modems at bit rates of greater than 300 bps). The parity bit is optional as odd or even. If it is programmed as odd or even, the data frame consists of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit, and 1 stop bit.
Modbus protocol can be implemented at any standard communication speed. The 369 RS485, fiber optic and RS232 ports
support operation at 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud.
9.5.2 DATA PACKET FORMAT
A complete request/response sequence consists of the following bytes (transmitted as separate data frames):
Master Request Transmission:
SLAVE ADDRESS
FUNCTION CODE
DATA
CRC
- 1 byte
- 1 byte
- variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE
- 2 bytes
Slave Response Transmission:
SLAVE ADDRESS
FUNCTION CODE
DATA
CRC
- 1 byte
- 1 byte
- variable number of bytes depending on FUNCTION CODE
- 2 bytes
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the first byte of every transmission. It represents the user-assigned address of the slave device
that is to receive the message sent by the master. Each slave device must be assigned a unique address and only the
addressed slave will respond to a transmission that starts with its address. In a master request transmission the SLAVE
ADDRESS represents the address of the slave to which the request is being sent. In a slave response transmission the
SLAVE ADDRESS represents the address of the slave that is sending the response. Note: A master transmission with a
SLAVE ADDRESS of 0 indicates a broadcast command. Broadcast commands can be used for specific functions.
FUNCTION CODE: This is the second byte of every transmission. The modbus protocol defines function codes of 1 to 127.
The 369 implements some of these functions. In a master request transmission the FUNCTION CODE tells the slave what
action to perform. In a slave response transmission if the FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is the same as the FUNCTION CODE sent from the master indicating the slave performed the function as requested. If the high order bit of the
FUNCTION CODE sent from the slave is a 1 (i.e. if the FUNCTION CODE is > 127) then the slave did not perform the function as requested and is sending an error or exception response.
DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the FUNCTION CODE. This may be actual values, setpoints,
or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master. Data is sent MSByte first followed by the LSByte.
CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. CRC is sent LSByte first followed by the MSByte.
9.5.3 ERROR CHECKING
9
The RTU version of Modbus includes a two byte CRC-16 (16 bit cyclic redundancy check) with every transmission. The
CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous
binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the transmission, LSByte first. The
resulting message including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no
transmission errors have occurred.
If an 369 Modbus slave device receives a transmission in which an error is indicated by the CRC-16 calculation, the slave
device will not respond to the transmission. A CRC-16 error indicates than one or more bytes of the transmission were
received incorrectly and thus the entire transmission should be ignored in order to avoid the 369 performing any incorrect
operation.
The CRC-16 calculation is an industry standard method used for error detection. An algorithm is included here to assist
programmers in situations where no standard CRC-16 calculation routines are available.
9-30
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
9.5.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
Once the following algorithm is complete, the working register "A" will contain the CRC value to be transmitted. Note that
this algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The MSbit of the characteristic polynomial is
dropped since it does not affect the value of the remainder. The following symbols are used in the algorithm:
-->
A
AL
AH
CRC
i, j
(+)
Di
G
shr(x)
data transfer
16 bit working register
low order byte of A
high order byte of A
16 bit CRC-16 value
loop counters
logical exclusive or operator
i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 with MSbit dropped and bit order
reversed
shift right (the LSbit of the low order byte of x shifts into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the
MSbit of the high order byte of x, all other bits shift right one location
The algorithm is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
FFFF hex --> A
0 --> i
0 --> j
Di (+) AL --> AL
j+1 --> j
shr(A)
is there a carry?
8. is j = 8?
9. i+1 --> i
10. is i = N?
No: go to 8.
Yes: G (+) A --> A
No: go to 5.
Yes: go to 9.
No: go to 3.
Yes: go to 11.
11. A --> CRC
9.5.5 TIMING
Data packet synchronization is maintained by timing constraints. The receiving device must measure the time between the
reception of characters. If three and one half character times elapse without a new character or completion of the packet,
then the communication link must be reset (i.e. all slaves start listening for a new transmission from the master). Thus at
9600 baud a delay of greater than 3.5 × 1 / 9600 × 10 = 3.65 ms will cause the communication link to be reset.
9.5.6 SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS
The following Modbus functions are supported by the 369:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
03 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values
04 - Read Setpoints and Actual Values
05 - Execute Operation
06 - Store Single Setpoint
07 - Read Device Status
08 - Loopback Test
16 - Store Multiple Setpoints
9
For detailed Modbus function code descriptions, refer to the Modicon Modbus Protocol Reference guide.
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-31
9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.5.7 ERROR RESPONSES
When an 369 detects an error other than a CRC error, a response will be sent to the master. The MSbit of the FUNCTION
CODE byte will be set to 1 (i.e. the function code sent from the slave will be equal to the function code sent from the master
plus 128). The following byte will be an exception code indicating the type of error that occurred.
Transmissions received from the master with CRC errors will be ignored by the 369. The slave response to an error (other
than CRC error) will be:
SLAVE ADDRESS
FUNCTION CODE
EXCEPTION CODE
CRC
- 1 byte
- 1 byte (with MSbit set to 1)
- 1 byte
- 2 bytes
The 369 implements the following exception response codes.
•
01 - ILLEGAL FUNCTION:
The function code transmitted is not one of the functions supported by the 369.
•
02 - ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS:
•
03 - ILLEGAL DATA VALUE:
The address referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not an allowable address for the 369.
The value referenced in the data field transmitted by the master is not within range for the selected data address.
9
9-32
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.5 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
9.5.8 MODBUS COMMANDS
The following commands can be sent to Modbus address 0x0080 (format code F31). Commands 1 to 4 can also be sent
using Modbus function code 5 (Execute Operation).
•
Command 1 (Remote Reset 369): Modbus Command 1 will attempt to clear the status of protection elements and
output relay states.
•
Command 2 (Motor Start): Modbus Command 2 will activate the programmed start relay, as long as it is not currently
active and the stop relay is not currently active.
•
Command 3 (Motor Stop): Modbus Command 3 will activate the trip relay as long as it is not currently active and the
start relay is not currently active.
•
Command 4 (Waveform Trigger): Modbus Command 4 will trigger the waveform capture trace memory.
•
Command 6 (Clear Trip Counters): Modbus Command 6 will clear all trip counters.
•
Command 7 (Clear Last Trip Data): Modbus Command 7 will clear the last trip data.
•
Command 10 (Clear RTD Maximums): Modbus Command 10 will initialize all RTD (and Remote RTD, if applicable)
maximum data to default values.
•
Command 11 (Reset Motor Info): Modbus Command 11 will clear the number of motor starts, number of motor
restarts, motor running hours, and number of restart attempts. It will also clear all learned motor statistics data.
•
Command 12 (Clear/Reset All Data): Modbus Command 12 will clear all event data, trip counters, last trip data, peak
demand data, RTD maximums data, motor statistics data, and all energy data.
•
Command 20 (Protection Function Blocking): This command must be sent using Modbus function code 10h (Store
Multiple Setpoints). This allows the 369 to accept the two required 16-bit values in one transmission. The first data
word is the command number (20). The 2nd data word contains the bitmask information for which functions to block/
unblock as per format code F180.
When this command is sent to the 369, the protection function blocking setpoints (Modbus addresses 1520 to 1528)
are updated accordingly. For example, for Bit 0 in the 2nd data word, the setpoint value for Block Undercurrent/Underpower at address 1521 will be modified to contain either a “1” or “0”, depending on the bit value.
Refer to Section 5.3.4 Block Functions on page 5–16 for additional information about the protection function blocking
feature.
•
Command 21 (Force Output Relays): Modbus Command 20 must be sent using Modbus function code 10h (Store
Multiple Setpoints). This allows the 369 to accept the two required 16-bit values in one transmission. The first data
word is the command number (21). The 2nd data word contains the bitmask information for which relays to energize/
de-energize as per format code F141.
The purpose of this command is to allow the control of the output relay status, regardless of the motor status (running,
stopped, etc.). Only relays that have been programmed under the ASSIGN COMMS FORCE RELAYS setpoint can be
forced using this command.
Refer to Section e) Force Output Relays on page 5–23 more information about the force output relays feature.
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-33
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6MEMORY MAP
9.6.1 MEMORY MAP INFORMATION
The data stored in the 369 is grouped as setpoints and actual values. Setpoints can be read and written by a master computer. Actual Values are read-only. All setpoints and actual values are stored as two-byte values. That is, each register
address is the address of a two-byte value. Addresses are listed in hexadecimal. Data values (setpoint ranges, increments,
factory values) are in decimal.
NOTE
Many Modbus communications drivers add 40001d to the actual address of the register addresses. For
example: if address 0h was to be read, 40001d would be the address required by the Modbus communications driver; if address 320h (800d) was to be read, 40801d would be the address required by the Modbus
communications driver.
9.6.2 USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA
The 369 has a powerful feature, called the User Definable Memory Map, which allows a computer to read up to 125 nonconsecutive data registers (setpoints or actual values) by using one Modbus packet. It is often necessary for a master computer to continuously poll various values in each of the connected slave relays. If these values are scattered throughout the
memory map, reading them would require numerous transmissions and would burden the communication link. The User
Definable Memory Map can be programmed to join any memory map address to one in the block of consecutive User Map
locations, so that they can be accessed by reading these consecutive locations.
The User Definable area has two sections:
1.
A Register Index area (memory map addresses 0180h-01FCh) that contains 125 Actual Values or Setpoints registers.
2.
A Register area (memory map addresses 0100h-017Ch) that contains the data at the addresses in the Register Index.
Register data that is separated in the rest of the memory map may be remapped to adjacent register addresses in the User
Definable Registers area. This is accomplished by writing to register addresses in the User Definable Register Index area.
This allows for improved through-put of data and can eliminate the need for multiple read command sequences. For example, if the values of Average Phase Current (register address 0306h) and Hottest Stator RTD Temperature (register address
0320h) are required to be read from an 369, their addresses may be remapped as follows:
1.
Write 0306h to address 0180h (User Definable Register Index 0000) using function code 06 or 16.
2.
Write 0320h to address 0181h (User Definable Register Index 0001) using function code 06 or 16.
A read (function code 03 or 04) of registers 0100h (User Definable Register 0000) will return the Phase A Current and register 0101h (User Definable Register 0001) will return Hottest Stator RTD Temperature.
9.6.3 EVENT RECORDER
The 369 event recorder data starts at address 3000h. Address 3003h is a pointer to the event of interest (1 representing the
oldest event and 250 representing the latest event. To retrieve event 1, write ‘1’ to the Event Record Selector (3003h) and
read the data from 3004h to 3022h. To retrieve event 2, write ‘2’ to the Event Record Selector (3003h) and read the data
from 3004h to 3022h. All 250 events may be retrieved in this manner. The time and date stamp of each event may be used
to ensure that all events have been retrieved in order without new events corrupting the sequence of events (event 1 should
be more recent than event 2, event 2 should be more recent than event 3, etc.).
9.6.4 WAVEFORM CAPTURE
9
The 369 stores 16 cycles of A/D samples each time a trip occurs in a trace buffer. The Trace Memory Trigger is set up in S1
Preferences and determines how many pre-trip and post-trip cycles are stored. The trace buffer is time and date stamped
and may be correlated to a trip in the event record. 7 waveforms are captured this way when a trip occurs. These are the 3
phase currents, ground current and 3 voltage waveforms. The last three captured records are retained by the 369. This
information is stored in volatile memory and will be lost if power is cycled to the relay.
To access the captured waveforms, select the captured record by writing to the Trace Memory Buffer Selector (address
30F5h), then select waveform of interest by writing its trace memory channel (see following table) to the Trace Memory
Channel Selector (address 30F6h). Then read the trace memory data from address 3100h to 31FFh. The values read are
in actual amperes or volts.
9-34
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
TRACE MEMORY
CHANNEL
WAVEFORM
TRACE MEMORY
CHANNEL
WAVEFORM
0
Phase A current
4
Phase A voltage
1
Phase B current
5
Phase B voltage
2
Phase C current
6
Phase C voltage
3
Ground current
9.6.5 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
PRODUCT ID (ADDRESSES 0000 TO 007F)
PRODUCT ID
0000
GE Multilin Product Code
0001
Product Hardware Revision
0002
Firmware Revision
0003
Installed Modifications
0004
Boot Revision
0005
Boot Modification Number
0006
Reserved
0007
Reserved
0008
Order Code
↓
↓
000F
Modify Options
0010
Modify Options Passcode Characters 1 and 2
↓
↓
0017
Modify Options Passcode Characters 15 and 16
----0020
Serial Number character 1 and 2
0021
Serial Number character 3 and 4
0022
Serial Number character 5 and 6
0023
Serial Number character 7 and 8
0024
Serial Number character 9 and 10
0025
Serial Number character 11 and 12
0026
Main Firmware Build Date
0028
Main Firmware Build Time
...
Reserved
0040
Manufacturing Date
...
Reserved
SETPOINT ACCESS
0050
Keypad Access Level
0051
Comm Access Level
0052
Access Password Character 1 and 2
0053
Access Password Character 3 and 4
0054
Access Password Character 5 and 6
0055
Access Password Character 7 and 8
0056
Encrypted Access Password 1 and 2
0057
Encrypted Access Password 3 and 4
0058
Encrypted Access Password 5 and 6
0059
Encrypted Access Password 7 and 8
...
Reserved
COMMANDS (ADDRESSES 0080 TO 00FE)
0080
Command Function Code
0081
Reserved
0082
RRTD 1 Command Function Code
0083
RRTD 2 Command Function Code
0084
RRTD 3 Command Function Code
0085
RRTD 4 Command Function Code
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
1
N/A
0
0
0
0
32
32
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1995
-
26
N/A
65535
999
65535
N/A
127
127
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2094
-
1
N/A
1
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
-
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
ASCII
-
F1
F15
F16
F14
F1
F13
N/A
F1
F1
F22
F22
F22
F22
F22
F22
F18
F19
F18
-
53
A
N/A
0
0
0
""
""
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Jan.1,1999
-
0
0
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
-
1
1
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
127
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
N/A
N/A
-
F162
F162
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
-
0
0
""
""
""
“AI”
“KF”
“BA”
IK”
-
0
21
1
-
F31
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
-
F31
F31
F31
F31
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-35
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 2 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
...
Reserved
REAL TIME CLOCK
00F0
Time (2 words)
00F2
Date (2 words)
...
Reserved
PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS
00FF
Profibus Cyclic Input Data Configuration
USER MAP (ADDRESSES 0100 TO 017F)
0100
User Map Value # 1
↓
↓
017C
User Map Value # 125
...
Reserved
0180
User Map Address # 1
↓
↓
01FC
User Map Address # 125
...
Reserved
ACTUAL VALUES (ADDRESSES 0200 TO 0FFF)
MOTOR STATUS
0200
Motor Status
0201
Motor Thermal Capacity Used
0202
Estimated Time to Trip on Overload
AUTORESTART
0203
Restart Attempts
0204
Restart Total Delay
0205
Restart In Progress
...
Reserved
LAST TRIP DATA
0220
Cause of Last Trip
0221
Last Trip Time (2 words)
0223
Last Trip Date (2 words)
0225
Reserved
0226
Phase A Pre-Trip Current
0228
Phase B Pre-Trip Current
022A
Phase C Pre-Trip Current
022C
Motor Load Pre - Trip
022D
Current Unbalance Pre - Trip
022E
Ground Current Pre - Trip
...
Reserved
0234
Hottest Stator RTD During Trip
0235
Pre-Trip Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD
0236
Pre-Trip Voltage Vab
0237
Pre-Trip Voltage Vbc
0238
Pre-Trip Voltage Vca
0239
Pre-Trip Voltage Van
023A
Pre-Trip Voltage Vbn
023B
Pre-Trip Voltage Vcn
023C
Pre-Trip System Frequency
023D
Pre-Trip Real Power
023E
Pre-Trip Reactive Power
023F
Pre-Trip Apparent Power
0240
Pre-Trip Power Factor
...
Reserved
ALARM STATUS
0260
General Spare Switch Alarm Status or
Starter Monitor Alarm/Trip Status
0261
General Emergency Restart Switch Alarm Status
0262
General Differential Switch Alarm Status
0263
General Speed Switch Alarm Status
0264
General Reset Switch Alarm Status
...
Reserved
9-36
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
valid
valid
time
date
N/A
N/A
-
F19
F18
-
0
110
1
-
F1
0
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
0
3FFF
1
hex
F1
0
0
3FFF
1
hex
F1
0
0
0
-1
4
100
65500
1
1
1
%
s
F133
F1
F20
0
0
-1
0
0
0
20000
65535
1
1
1
1
sec.
Y/N
F1
F1
F1
-
0
N/A
N/A
276
N/A
N/A
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F134
F19
F18
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-40
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-32000
-32000
0
-99
-
65535
65535
65535
2000
100
50000
12
200
65000
65000
65000
65000
65000
65000
12000
32000
32000
50000
100
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
A
A
A
FLA
%
A
°C
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz
kW
kvar
kVA
-
F1
F1
F1
F3
F1
F2
F1
F4
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F3
F4
F4
F1
F21
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
4
1
-
F123
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 3 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
0267
Thermal Capacity Alarm
0268
Overload Alarm Status
0269
Mechanical Jam Alarm Status
026A
Undercurrent Alarm Status
026B
Current Unbalance Alarm Status
026C
Ground Fault Alarm Status
...
Reserved
026F
Undervoltage Alarm Status
0270
Overvoltage Alarm Status
0271
Overfrequency Alarm Status
0272
Underfrequency Alarm Status
...
Reserved
0275
Lead Power Factor Alarm Status
0276
Lag Power Factor Alarm Status
0277
Positive kvar Alarm Status
0278
Negative kvar Alarm Status
0279
Underpower Alarm Status
027A
Reverse Power Alarm Status
...
Reserved
027D
Local RTD #1 Alarm Status
027E
Local RTD #2 Alarm Status
027F
Local RTD #3 Alarm Status
0280
Local RTD #4 Alarm Status
0281
Local RTD #5 Alarm Status
0282
Local RTD #6 Alarm Status
0283
Local RTD #7 Alarm Status
0284
Local RTD #8 Alarm Status
0285
Local RTD #9 Alarm Status
0286
Local RTD #10 Alarm Status
0287
Local RTD #11 Alarm Status
0288
Local RTD #12 Alarm Status
0289
Local RTD #1 High Alarm Status
028A
Local RTD #2 High Alarm Status
028B
Local RTD #3 High Alarm Status
028C
Local RTD #4 High Alarm Status
028D
Local RTD #5 High Alarm Status
028E
Local RTD #6 High Alarm Status
028F
Local RTD #7 High Alarm Status
0290
Local RTD #8 High Alarm Status
0291
Local RTD #9 High Alarm Status
0292
Local RTD #10 High Alarm Status
0293
Local RTD #11 High Alarm Status
0294
Local RTD #12 High Alarm Status
0295
Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status
0296
Short / Low Temp Alarm Status
0297
Reserved
0298
Trip Counter Alarm Status
0299
Starter Failure Alarm
029A
Current Demand Alarm Status
029B
kW Demand Alarm Status
029C
kvar Demand Alarm Status
029D
kVA Demand Alarm Status
029E
Self Test Alarm
START BLOCK STATUS
02C0
Overload Lockout Timer
02C1
Start Timer 1
02C2
Start Timer 2
02C3
Start Timer 3
02C4
Start Timer 4
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
4
4
4
4
4
4
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9999
60
60
60
60
1
1
1
1
1
min
min
min
min
min
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-37
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 4 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
02C5
Start Timer 5
02C6
Time Between Starts Timer
02C7
Restart Block Timer
02C8
Reserved
02C9
Start Inhibit Timer
02CA
Starts Per Hour Lockout Timer
...
Reserved
DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
02D0
Access
02D1
Speed
02D2
Spare
02D3
Differential Relay
02D4
Emergency Restart
02D5
Reset
...
Reserved
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
02E0
Trip
02E1
Alarm
02E2
Aux.1
02E3
Aux.2
...
Reserved
REAL TIME CLOCK
02F0
Date (Read Only)
02F4
Time (Read Only)
...
Reserved
FIELDBUS SPECIFICATION STATUS
02F8
Explicit Connection Status
02F9
Input/Output Polled Connection Status
02FA
Network Status
...
Reserved
CURRENT METERING
0300
Phase A Current
0302
Phase B Current
0304
Phase C Current
0306
Average Phase Current
0308
Motor Load
0309
Current Unbalance
030A
Unbalaced Biased Motor Load
030B
Ground Current
...
Reserved
OVERALL STATOR RTD
031C
Overall Hottest Stator RTD Owner
031D
Overall Hottest Stator RTD Number
031E
Overall Hottest Stator RTD Temperature
TEMPERATURE
031F
Local Hottest Stator RTD Number
0320
Local Hottest Stator RTD Temperature
0321
Local RTD #1 Temperature
0322
Local RTD #2 Temperature
0323
Local RTD #3 Temperature
0324
Local RTD #4 Temperature
0325
Local RTD #5 Temperature
0326
Local RTD #6 Temperature
0327
Local RTD #7 Temperature
0328
Local RTD #8 Temperature
0329
Local RTD #9 Temperature
032A
Local RTD #10 Temperature
032B
Local RTD #11 Temperature
032C
Local RTD #12 Temperature
9-38
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
60
500
50000
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
min
min
s
FORMAT
CODE
F1
F1
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
500
60
1
1
min
min
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F150
F150
F150
F150
0
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F18
F19
N/A
N/A
0
0
0
5
5
3
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
F168
F168
F167
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
65535
65535
65535
65535
2000
100
9999
65535
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
A
A
A
A
× FLA
%
× FLA
A
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F3
F1
F3
F23
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
0
0
–40
5
12
200
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
°C
F165
F1
F4
0
0
-
0
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
–40
12
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F1
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
0
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 5 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
...
Reserved
VOLTAGE METERING
0360
Vab
0361
Vbc
0362
Vca
0363
Average Line Voltage
0364
Van
0365
Vbn
0366
Vcn
0367
Average Phase Voltage
0368
System Frequency
BACKSPIN METERING
0369
Backspin Frequency (a value of “0” represents ‘low signal’)
036A
Backspin Detection State
036B
Backspin Prediction Timer
...
Reserved
POWER METERING
0370
Power Factor
0371
Real Power
0373
Real Power
0374
Reactive Power
0376
Apparent Power
0377
Positive MegaWatthours
0379
Positive Megavarhours
037B
Negative Megavarhours
037D
Positive KiloWatthours
037F
Positive Kilovarhours
0381
Negative Kilovarhours
...
Reserved
DEMAND METERING
0390
Current Demand
0392
Real Power Demand
0394
Reactive Power Demand
0396
Apparent Power Demand
0397
Peak Current Demand
0399
Peak Real Power Demand
039B
Peak Reactive Power Demand
039D
Peak Apparent Power Demand
...
Reserved
MOTOR DATA (0 = OFF)
03C0
Learned Acceleration Time
03C1
Learned Starting Current
03C2
Learned Starting Capacity
03C3
Learned Running Cool Time Constant
03C4
Learned Stopped Cool Time Constant
03C5
Last Starting Current
03C6
Last Starting Capacity
03C7
Last Acceleration Time
03C8
Average Motor Load Learned
03C9
Learned Unbalance k factor
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD MAXIMUMS
03E0
Local RTD # 1 Max. Temperature
03E1
Local RTD # 2 Max. Temperature
03E2
Local RTD # 3 Max. Temperature
03E3
Local RTD # 4 Max. Temperature
03E4
Local RTD # 5 Max. Temperature
03E5
Local RTD # 6 Max. Temperature
03E6
Local RTD # 7 Max. Temperature
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
65535
12000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12000
6
50000
1
1
1
Hz
s
F3
F27
F1
0
0
0
–99
–32000
0
–32000
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
100
32000
42912
32000
65000
65535
65535
65535
999
999
999
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
kW
hp
kvar
kVA
MWh
Mvarh
Mvarh
kWh
kvarh
kvarh
F21
F4
F1
F4
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
65535
32000
32000
65000
65535
32000
32000
65000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A
kW
kvar
kVA
A
kW
kvar
kVA
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
2500
65535
100
500
500
65535
100
2500
2000
29
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
A
%
min
min
A
%
s
x FLA
-
F2
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F2
F3
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-39
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 6 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
03E7
Local RTD # 8 Max. Temperature
03E8
Local RTD # 9 Max. Temperature
03E9
Local RTD # 10 Max. Temperature
03EA
Local RTD # 11 Max. Temperature
03EB
Local RTD # 12 Max. Temperature
...
Reserved
TRIP COUNTERS
0430
Total Number of Trips
...
Reserved
0433
Switch Trips
...
Reserved
0436
Overload Trips
0437
Short Circuit Trips
0438
Mechanical Jam Trips
0439
Undercurrent Trips
043A
Current Unbalance Trips
043B
Single Phase Trips
043C
Ground Fault Trips
043D
Acceleration Trips
...
Reserved
043F
Undervoltage Trips
0440
Overvoltage Trips
0441
Phase Reversal Trips
0442
Under Frequency Trips
0443
Over Frequency Trips
...
Reserved
0446
Lead Power Factor Trips
0447
Lag Power Factor Trips
0448
Positive Reactive Power Trips
0449
Negative Reactive Power Trips
044A
Underpower Trips
044B
Reverse Power Trips
...
Reserved
044E
Stator RTD Trips
044F
Bearing RTD Trips
0450
Other RTD Trips
0451
Ambient RTD Trips
...
Reserved
0454
Incomplete Sequence Trips
...
Reserved
0457
Trip Counters Last Cleared
...
Reserved
MOTOR STATISTICS
0470
Number of Motor Starts
0471
Number of Emergency Restarts
0472
Reserved
0473
Digital Counter
...
Reserved
04A0
Motor Running Hours
...
Reserved
PHASORS
0500
Va Angle
0501
Vb Angle
0502
Vc Angle
0503
Ia Angle
0504
Ib Angle
0505
Ic Angle
...
Reserved
9-40
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
200
200
200
200
200
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
FORMAT
CODE
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
FACTORY
DEFAULT
40
40
40
40
40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
0
50000
1
-
F1
0
0
50000
1
-
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
1
1
-
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
50000
1
-
F1
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F18
N/A
0
0
0
50000
50000
65535
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
65535
1
hr.
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
359
359
359
359
359
359
1
1
1
1
1
1
degrees
degrees
degrees
degrees
degrees
degrees
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 7 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
REMOTE RTD ACTUAL VALUES (ADDRESSES 0600 TO 1FFF)
RRTD 1 TEMPERATURES
0600
RRTD 1 - Hottest Stator Number
0601
RRTD 1 - Hottest Stator Temperature
0602
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Temperature
0603
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Temperature
0604
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Temperature
0605
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Temperature
0606
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Temperature
0607
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Temperature
0608
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Temperature
0609
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Temperature
060A
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Temperature
060B
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Temperature
060C
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Temperature
060D
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Temperature
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 TEMPERATURES
0610
RRTD 2 - RTD - Hottest Stator Number
0611
RRTD 2 - RTD - Hottest Stator Temperature
0612
RRTD 2 - RTD #1Temperature
0613
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Temperature
0614
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Temperature
0615
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Temperature
0616
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Temperature
0617
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Temperature
0618
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Temperature
0619
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Temperature
061A
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Temperature
061B
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Temperature
061C
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Temperature
061D
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Temperature
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 TEMPERATURES
0620
RRTD 3 - RTD - Hottest Stator Number
0621
RRTD 3 - RTD - Hottest Stator Temperature
0622
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Temperature
0623
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Temperature
0624
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Temperature
0625
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Temperature
0626
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Temperature
0627
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Temperature
0628
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Temperature
0629
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Temperature
062A
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Temperature
062B
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Temperature
062C
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Temperature
062D
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Temperature
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 TEMPERATURES
0630
RRTD 4 - RTD- Hottest Stator Number
0631
RRTD 4 - RTD- Hottest Stator Temperature
0632
RRTD 4 - RTD#1 Temperature
0633
RRTD 4 - RTD#2 Temperature
0634
RRTD 4 - RTD#3 Temperature
0635
RRTD 4 - RTD#4 Temperature
0636
RRTD 4 - RTD#5 Temperature
0637
RRTD 4 - RTD#6 Temperature
0638
RRTD 4 - RTD#7 Temperature
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
12
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F1
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
0
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
0
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
12
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F1
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
0
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
0
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
12
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F1
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
0
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
0
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
12
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F1
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
0
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-41
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 8 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
0639
RRTD 4 - RTD#8 Temperature
063A
RRTD 4 - RTD#9 Temperature
063B
RRTD 4 - RTD#10 Temperature
063C
RRTD 4 - RTD#11 Temperature
063D
RRTD 4 - RTD#12 Temperature
LOSS OF RRTD COMMUNICATIONS
063E
Lost RRTD Communications alarm
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 ALARM STATUS
0650
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Status
0651
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm Status
0652
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm Status
0653
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm Status
0654
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm Status
0655
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Status
0656
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Status
0657
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Status
0658
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Alarm Status
0659
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm Status
065A
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarm Status
065B
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarm Status
065C
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status
065D
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status
065E
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status
065F
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status
0660
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status
0661
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status
0662
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status
0663
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status
0664
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status
0665
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status
0666
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status
0667
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status
0668
RRTD 1 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status
0669
RRTD 1 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status
066A
RRTD 1 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status
066B
RRTD 1 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status
066C
RRTD 1 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status
066D
RRTD 1 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status
066E
RRTD 1 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status
066F
RRTD 1 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status
RRTD 2 ALARM STATUS
0670
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm Status
0671
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm Status
0672
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm Status
0673
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm Status
0674
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Alarm Status
0675
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarm Status
0676
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm Status
0677
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarm Status
0678
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Alarm Status
0679
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm Status
067A
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Alarm Status
067B
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Alarm Status
067C
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status
067D
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status
067E
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status
067F
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status
0680
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status
9-42
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
200
200
200
200
200
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
FORMAT
CODE
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
FACTORY
DEFAULT
40
40
40
40
40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
0
4
1
-
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 9 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
0681
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status
0682
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status
0683
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status
0684
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status
0685
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status
0686
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status
0687
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status
0688
RRTD 2 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status
0689
RRTD 2 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status
068A
RRTD 2 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status
068B
RRTD 2 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status
068C
RRTD 2 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status
068D
RRTD 2 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status
068E
RRTD 2 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status
068F
RRTD 2 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status
RRTD 3 ALARM STATUS
0690
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm Status
0691
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Alarm Status
0692
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Alarm Status
0693
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Alarm Status
0694
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Alarm Status
0695
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarm Status
0696
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm Status
0697
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm Status
0698
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Alarm Status
0699
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Alarm Status
069A
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm Status
069B
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Alarm Status
069C
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status
069D
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status
069E
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status
069F
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status
06A0
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status
06A1
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status
06A2
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status
06A3
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status
06A4
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status
06A5
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status
06A6
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status
06A7
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status
06A8
RRTD 3 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status
06A9
RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status
06AA
RRTD 3 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status
06AB
RRTD 3 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status
06AC
RRTD 3 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status
06AD
RRTD 3 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status
06AE
RRTD 3 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status
06AF
RRTD 3 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status
RRTD 4 ALARM STATUS
06B0
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarm Status
06B1
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm Status
06B2
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Alarm Status
06B3
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Alarm Status
06B4
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm Status
06B5
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Alarm Status
06B6
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm Status
06B7
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarm Status
06B8
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Alarm Status
06B9
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Alarm Status
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
369 Motor Management Relay
-
FORMAT
CODE
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
9-43
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 10 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
06BA
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarm Status
06BB
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm Status
06BC
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 High Alarm Status
06BD
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm Status
06BE
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 High Alarm Status
06BF
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 High Alarm Status
06C0
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm Status
06C1
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 High Alarm Status
06C2
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm Status
06C3
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 High Alarm Status
06C4
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 High Alarm Status
06C5
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 High Alarm Status
06C6
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 High Alarm Status
06C7
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm Status
06C8
RRTD 4 - Broken / Open RTD Alarm Status
06C9
RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Status
06CA
RRTD 4 - Digital Input 6 Alarm Status
06CB
RRTD 4 - Digital Input 2 Alarm Status
06CC
RRTD 4 - Digital Input 5 Alarm Status
06CD
RRTD 4 - Digital Input 4 Alarm Status
06CE
RRTD 4 - Digital Input 1 Alarm Status
06CF
RRTD 4 - Digital Input 3 Alarm Status
RRTD 1 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURES
0700
RRTD 1 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature
0701
RRTD 1 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature
0702
RRTD 1 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature
0703
RRTD 1 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature
0704
RRTD 1 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature
0705
RRTD 1 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature
0706
RRTD 1 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature
0707
RRTD 1 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature
0708
RRTD 1 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature
0709
RRTD 1 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature
070A
RRTD 1 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature
070B
RRTD 1 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURES
0710
RRTD 2 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature
0711
RRTD 2 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature
0712
RRTD 2 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature
0713
RRTD 2 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature
0714
RRTD 2 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature
0715
RRTD 2 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature
0716
RRTD 2 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature
0717
RRTD 2 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature
0718
RRTD 2 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature
0719
RRTD 2 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature
071A
RRTD 2 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature
071B
RRTD 2 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURES
0720
RRTD 3 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature
0721
RRTD 3 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature
0722
RRTD 3 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature
0723
RRTD 3 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature
0724
RRTD 3 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature
0725
RRTD 3 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature
0726
RRTD 3 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature
0727
RRTD 3 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature
9-44
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
F123
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 11 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
0728
RRTD 3 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature
0729
RRTD 3 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature
072A
RRTD 3 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature
072B
RRTD 3 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 MAXIMUM TEMPERATURES
0730
RRTD 4 - RTD # 1 Max. Temperature
0731
RRTD 4 - RTD # 2 Max. Temperature
0732
RRTD 4 - RTD # 3 Max. Temperature
0733
RRTD 4 - RTD # 4 Max. Temperature
0734
RRTD 4 - RTD # 5 Max. Temperature
0735
RRTD 4 - RTD # 6 Max. Temperature
0736
RRTD 4 - RTD # 7 Max. Temperature
0737
RRTD 4 - RTD # 8 Max. Temperature
0738
RRTD 4 - RTD # 9 Max. Temperature
0739
RRTD 4 - RTD # 10 Max. Temperature
073A
RRTD 4 - RTD # 11 Max. Temperature
073B
RRTD 4 - RTD # 12 Max. Temperature
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 TRIP COUNTER
0800
RRTD 1 - Stator RTD Trips
0801
RRTD 1 - Bearing RTD Trips
0802
RRTD 1 - Other RTD Trips
0803
RRTD 1 - Ambient RTD Trips
0804
RRTD 1 - Digital Input Trips
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 TRIP COUNTER
0810
RRTD 2 - Stator RTD Trips
0811
RRTD 2 - Bearing RTD Trips
0812
RRTD 2 - Other RTD Trips
0813
RRTD 2 - Ambient RTD Trips
0814
RRTD 2 - Digital Input Trips
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 TRIP COUNTER
0820
RRTD 3 - Stator RTD Trips
0821
RRTD 3 - Bearing RTD Trips
0822
RRTD 3 - Other RTD Trips
0823
RRTD 3 - Ambient RTD Trips
0824
RRTD 3 - Digital Input Trips
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 TRIP COUNTER
0830
RRTD 4 - Stator RTD Trips
0831
RRTD 4 - Bearing RTD Trips
0832
RRTD 4 - Other RTD Trips
0833
RRTD 4 - Ambient RTD Trips
0834
RRTD 4 - Digital Input Trips
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
0840
Digital Input 3
0841
Digital Input 4
0842
Digital Input 6
0843
Digital Input 5
0844
Digital Input 2
0845
Digital Input 1
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
0850
Digital Input 3
0851
Digital Input 4
0852
Digital Input 6
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
200
200
200
200
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
FORMAT
CODE
F4
F4
F4
F4
FACTORY
DEFAULT
40
40
40
40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
-40
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
°C
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
F4
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
50000
50000
50000
50000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F131
F131
F131
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-45
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 12 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
0853
Digital Input 5
0854
Digital Input 2
0855
Digital Input 1
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
0860
Digital Input 3
0861
Digital Input 4
0862
Digital Input 6
0863
Digital Input 5
0864
Digital Input 2
0865
Digital Input 1
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 DIGITAL INPUT STATUS
0870
Digital Input 3
0871
Digital Input 4
0872
Digital Input 6
0873
Digital Input 5
0874
Digital Input 2
0875
Digital Input 1
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
0880
RRTD 1 - Trip
0881
RRTD 1 - Alarm
0882
RRTD 1 - Aux. 1
0883
RRTD 1 - Aux. 2
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
0890
RRTD 2 - Trip
0891
RRTD 2 - Alarm
0892
RRTD 2 - Aux. 1
0893
RRTD 2 - Aux. 2
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
08A0
RRTD 3 - Trip
08A1
RRTD 3 - Alarm
08A2
RRTD 3 - Aux. 1
08A3
RRTD 3 - Aux. 2
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
08B0
RRTD 4 - Trip
08B1
RRTD 4 - Alarm
08B2
RRTD 4 - Aux. 1
08B3
RRTD 4 - Aux. 2
...
Reserved
COMMUNICATIONS MODULE
08C0
Ethernet Module Status
08C1
Anybus Module Software Revision
...
Reserved
PROTECTION FUNCTION BLOCKING
08D0
Protection Functions Currently Blocked
...
Reserved
SETPOINTS (ADDRESSES 1000 TO 1FFF)
DISPLAY PREFERENCES
1000
Default Message Cycle Time
1001
Default Message Timeout
1002
Contrast Adjustment
1003
Flash Message
1004
Temperature Display Units
1005
Energy Unit Display
9-46
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
1
1
1
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F131
F131
F131
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
F131
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F150
F150
F150
F150
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F150
F150
F150
F150
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F150
F150
F150
F150
2
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F150
F150
F150
F150
2
2
2
2
0
-
65535
-
1
-
N/A
-
F164
F16
-
0
256
1
N/A
F180
0
5
10
1
1
0
0
100
900
254
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
F100
F166
20
300
145
2
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 13 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
...
Reserved
EVENT RECORDS
1006
Motor Running Events
1007
Motor Stopped Events
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
1008
Trigger Position
...
Reserved
369 COMMUNICATIONS
100F
Reset Profibus Interface
1010
Slave Address
1011
Computer RS232 Baud Rate
1012
Computer RS232 Parity
1013
Channel 1 Parity
1014
Channel 1 Baud Rate
1015
Channel 2 Parity
1016
Channel 2 Baud Rate
1017
Channel 3 Parity
1018
Channel 3 Baud Rate
1019
Channel 3 Connection
101A
Channel 3 Application
101B
Profibus Slave Address
101C
IP Address Octet 1
101D
IP Address Octet 2
101E
IP Address Octet 3
101F
IP Address Octet 4
1020
Subnet Mask Octet 1
1021
Subnet Mask Octet 2
1022
Subnet Mask Octet 3
1023
Subnet Mask Octet 4
1024
Gateway Address Octet 1
1025
Gateway Address Octet 2
1026
Gateway Address Octet 3
1027
Gateway Address Octet 4
1028
DeviceNet MAC ID
1029
DeviceNet Baud Rate
...
Reserved
REAL TIME CLOCK
1030
Date (2 words)
1034
Time (2 words)
...
Reserved
DEFAULT MESSAGES
1041
Default to Current Metering
1042
Default to Motor Load
1043
Default to Delta Voltage Metering
1044
Default to Power Factor
1045
Default to Positive Watthours
1046
Default to Real Power
1047
Default to Reactive Power
1048
Default to Hottest Stator RTD
1049
Default to Text Message 1
104A
Default to Text Message 2
104B
Default to Text Message 3
104C
Default to Text Message 4
104D
Default to Text Message 5
104E
Default to Hottest Stator RTD Temperature
104F
Default to Unbalace Biased Motor Load
...
Reserved
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD
1060
1st & 2nd Character of 1st Scratchpad Message
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F103
0
0
0
100
1
%
F1
20
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
254
4
2
2
4
2
4
2
4
1
1
126
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
255
63
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F1
F101
F102
F102
F101
F102
F101
F102
F101
F151
F149
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F170
0
254
4
0
0
4
0
4
0
4
0
0
125
127
0
0
1
255
255
255
0
127
0
0
1
63
0
valid
valid
date
time
N/A
N/A
-
F18
F19
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
-
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
F103
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
32
127
1
-
F1
’T’
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-47
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 14 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
↓
↓
1073
39th & 40th Character of 1st Scratchpad Message
1074
1st & 2nd Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message
↓
↓
1087
39th & 40th Character of 2nd Scratchpad Message
1088
1st & 2nd Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message
↓
↓
109B
39th & 40th Character of 3rd Scratchpad Message
109C
1st & 2nd Character of 4th Scratchpad Message
↓
↓
10AF
39th & 40th Character of 4th Scratchpad Message
10B0
1st & 2nd Character of 5th Scratchpad Message
↓
↓
10C3
39th & 40th Character of 5th Scratchpad Message
...
Reserved
CLEAR PRESET DATA
1130
Clear Last Trip Data
1131
Clear Peak Demand Data
1132
Clear RTD Maximums
1133
Preset Positive MWh
1134
Clear Trip Counters
1135
Preset Digital Counter
1136
Clear Event Records
1137
Preset Positive Mvarh
1138
Preset Negative Mvarh
...
Reserved
1140
Clear Motor Data
1141
Reserved
1142
Clear All Data
1143
RRTD 1 - Preset Digital Counter
1144
RRTD 2 - Preset Digital Counter
1145
RRTD 3 - Preset Digital Counter
1146
RRTD 4 - Preset Digital Counter
1147
Clear Energy Data
...
Reserved
CT/VT SETUP
1180
Phase CT Primary
1181
Motor Full Load Amps
1182
Ground CT Type
1183
Ground CT Primary
...
Reserved
11A0
Voltage Transformer Connection Type
11A1
Voltage Transformer Ratio
11A2
Motor Rated Voltage
...
Reserved
11C0
Nominal Frequency
11C1
System Phase Sequence
...
Reserved
SERIAL COMM CONTROL
11C8
Serial Communication Control
11C9
Assign Start Control Relays
...
Reserved
REDUCED VOLTAGE
11CF
Start Control Relay Timer
11D0
Reduced Voltage Starting
11D1
Assign Start Control Relays
11D2
Transition On
11D3
Incomplete Sequence Trip Relays
11D4
Reduced Voltage Start Level
9-48
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
32
32
127
127
1
1
-
F1
F1
""
’T’
32
32
127
127
1
1
-
F1
F1
""
’T’
32
32
127
127
1
1
-
F1
F1
""
’T’
32
32
127
127
1
1
-
F1
F1
""
’T’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
65535
1
65535
1
65535
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MWh
Mvarh
Mvarh
F103
F103
F103
F1
F103
F1
F103
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
65535
65535
65535
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F103
F1
F1
F1
F1
F103
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
5000
5000
3
5000
1
1
1
1
A
A
A
F1
F1
F104
F1
500
10
2
100
0
100
100
2
24000
20000
1
1
1
V
F106
F3
F1
0
35
4160
0
0
2
1
1
1
-
F107
F124
0
0
0
0
1
7
1
1
-
F103
F113
0
2
10
0
0
0
0
25
100
1
7
2
6
300
5
1
1
1
1
1
s
% FLA
F2
F103
F113
F108
F111
F1
10
0
4
0
0
100
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 15 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
11D5
Reduced Voltage Start Timer
AUTORESTART
11D6
Autorestart
11D7
Total Restarts
11D8
Restart Delay
11D9
Progressive Delay
11DA
Hold Delay
11DB
Bus Valid
11DC
Bus Valid Level
11DD
Reserved
11DE
Autorestart Attempt Events
11DF
Autorestart Success Events
11E0
Autorestart Aborted Events
...
Reserved
DIGITAL COUNTER
12E6
First Character of Counter Name
12F2
First Character of Counter Unit Name
12F8
Counter Type
12F9
Digital Counter Alarm
12FA
Assign Alarm Relays
12FB
Counter Alarm Level
12FD
Reserved
12FE
Record Alarms as Events
EMERGENCY
1330
1st & 2nd Character of Emergency Switch Name
1340
General Emergency Switch Type
1341
General Emergency Switch Block Input From Start
1342
General Emergency Switch Alarm
1343
General Emergency Switch Alarm Relays
1344
General Emergency Switch Alarm Delay
1345
General Emergency Switch Alarm Events
1346
General Emergency Switch Trip
1347
General Emergency Switch Trip Relays
1348
General Emergency Switch Trip Delay
1349
Emergency Switch Assignable Function
...
Reserved
DIFFERENTIAL
1370
1st & 2nd Character of Differential Switch Name
1380
General Differential Switch Type
1381
General Differential Switch Block Input From Start
1382
General Differential Switch Alarm
1383
General Differential Switch Alarm Relays
1384
General Differential Switch Alarm Delay
1385
General Differential Switch Alarm Events
1386
General Differential Switch Trip
1387
General Differential Switch Trip Relays
1388
General Differential Switch Trip Delay
1389
Differential Switch Assignable Function
138A
Assign Differential Switch Trip Relays
...
Reserved
SPEED
13A0
1st & 2nd Character of Speed Switch Name
13B0
General Speed Switch Type
13B1
General Speed Switch Block Input from Start
13B2
General Speed Switch Alarm
13B3
General Speed Switch Alarm Relays
13B4
General Speed Switch Alarm Delay
13B5
General Speed Switch Alarm Events
13B6
General Speed Switch Trip
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
500
STEP
VALUE
1
s
FORMAT
CODE
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
200
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
0
0
0
1
65000
20000
20000
20000
1
100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
starts
sec.
sec.
sec.
%VT
-
F103
F1
F1
F1
F1
F103
F1
F103
F103
F103
0
1
60
0
0
0
100
0
0
0
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
127
127
1
2
6
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F114
F115
F113
F1
F103
“G”
‘U’
0
0
0
100
0
32
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
127
1
5000
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
100ms
100ms
-
F22
F116
F1
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F110
’G’
0
0
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
127
1
5000
2
7
50000
1
2
7
50000
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
100ms
100ms
-
F22
F116
F1
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F157
F111
’G’
0
0
0
1
50
0
0
1
50
0
1
32
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
127
1
5000
2
7
50000
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
100ms
-
F22
F116
F1
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
’G’
0
0
0
1
50
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-49
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 16 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
13B7
General Speed Switch Trip Relays
13B8
General Speed Switch Trip Delay
13B9
Speed Switch Assignable Function
13BA
Speed Switch Delay
13BB
Assign Speed Switch Trip Relays
...
Reserved
RESET
13D0
1st & 2nd Character of Reset Switch Name
13E0
General Reset Switch Type
13E1
General Reset Switch Block Input From Start
13E2
General Reset Switch Alarm
13E3
General Reset Switch Alarm Relays
13E4
General Reset Switch Alarm Delay
13E5
General Reset Switch Alarm Events
13E6
General Reset Switch Trip
13E7
General Reset Switch Trip Relays
13E8
General Reset Switch Trip Delay
13E9
Reset Switch Assignable Function
...
Reserved
SPARE
1400
1st & 2nd Character of Spare Switch Name
1410
General Spare Switch Type
1411
General Spare Switch Block Input From Start
1412
General Spare Switch Alarm
1413
General Spare Switch Alarm Relays
1414
General Spare Switch Alarm Delay
1415
General Spare Switch Alarm Events
1416
General Spare Switch Trip
1417
General Spare Switch Trip Relays
1418
General Spare Switch Trip Delay
1419
Spare Switch Assignable Function
141A
Starter Aux Contact Type
141B
Starter Operation Monitor Delay Time
141C
Starter Operation Monitor Type
141D
Starter Operation Monitor Relays
...
Reserved
OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
1500
Trip Relay Reset Mode
1501
Alarm Relay Reset Mode
1502
Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode
1503
Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode
1504
Trip Relay Operation
1505
Alarm Relay Operation
1506
Aux1 Relay Operation
1507
Aux2 Relay Operation
...
Reserved
FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
1510
Assign Communications Force Relays
1511
Trip Communications Force Relay Output Type
1512
Trip Pulsed Output Dwell Time
1513
Alarm Communications Force Relay Output Type
1514
Alarm Pulsed Output Dwell Time
1515
Aux1 Communications Force Relay Output Type
1516
Aux1 Pulsed Output Dwell Time
1517
Aux2 Communications Force Relay Output Type
1518
Aux2 Pulsed Output Dwell Time
...
Reserved
PROTECTION FUNCTION BLOCKING
1520
Log Blocking Events
9-50
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
7
50000
7
1000
7
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
5
1
100ms
100ms
-
FORMAT
CODE
F111
F2
F158
F2
F111
FACTORY
DEFAULT
1
50
0
20
1
0
1
0
5
0
32
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
127
1
5000
2
7
50000
1
2
7
50000
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
100ms
100ms
-
F22
F116
F1
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F160
’G’
0
0
0
1
50
0
0
1
50
0
32
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
127
1
5000
2
7
50000
1
1
7
50000
7
1
60
2
15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
100ms
100 ms
seconds
-
F22
F116
F1
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F159
F109
F1
F115
F169
’G’
0
0
0
1
50
0
0
1
50
0
0
0 (Off)
0 (Off)
0 (None)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F117
F117
F117
F117
F161
F161
F161
F161
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
5
0
5
0
5
0
5
15
1
50000
1
50000
1
50000
1
50000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
N/A
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
100 ms
F169
F181
F2
F181
F2
F181
F2
F181
F2
0
0
5
0
5
0
5
0
5
0
1
1
N/A
F30
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 17 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
1521
Block Undercurrent/Underpower
1522
Block Current Unbalance
1523
Block Incomplete Sequence
1524
Block Thermal Model
1525
Block Short Circuit and Backup
1526
Block Overload Alarm
1527
Block Ground Fault
1528
Block Starts Per Hour and Time Between Starts
...
Reserved
THERMAL MODEL (0 = Off)
1581
Overload Pickup Level
1582
Assign Thermal Capacity Trip Relay
1583
Unbalance k Factor (0=Learned)
1584
Running Cool Time Constant
1585
Stopped Cool Time Constant
1586
Hot/Cold Safe Stall Ratio
1587
RTD Biasing
1588
RTD Bias Minimum
1589
RTD Bias Mid Point
158A
RTD Bias Maximum
158B
Thermal Capacity Alarm
158C
Assign Thermal Capacity Alarm Relays
158D
Thermal Capacity Alarm Level
158E
Thermal Capacity Alarm Events
158F
Enable Learned Cool Time
1590
Enable Unbalance Biasing
1591
Motor Load Averaging Interval
...
Reserved
15AE
Select Curve Style
O/L CURVE SETUP
15AF
Standard Overload Curve Number
15B0
Time to Trip at 1.01 x FLA
15B2
Time to Trip at 1.05 x FLA
15B4
Time to Trip at 1.10 x FLA
15B6
Time to Trip at 1.20 x FLA
15B8
Time to Trip at 1.30 x FLA
15BA
Time to Trip at 1.40 x FLA
15BC
Time to Trip at 1.50 x FLA
15BE
Time to Trip at 1.75 x FLA
15C0
Time to Trip at 2.00 x FLA
15C2
Time to Trip at 2.25 x FLA
15C4
Time to Trip at 2.50 x FLA
15C6
Time to Trip at 2.75 x FLA
15C8
Time to Trip at 3.00 x FLA
15CA
Time to Trip at 3.25 x FLA
15CC
Time to Trip at 3.50 x FLA
15CE
Time to Trip at 3.75 x FLA
15D0
Time to Trip at 4.00 x FLA
15D2
Time to Trip at 4.25 x FLA
15D4
Time to Trip at 4.50 x FLA
15D6
Time to Trip at 4.75 x FLA
15D8
Time to Trip at 5.00 x FLA
15DA
Time to Trip at 5.50 x FLA
15DC
Time to Trip at 6.00 x FLA
15DE
Time to Trip at 6.50 x FLA
15E0
Time to Trip at 7.00 x FLA
15E2
Time to Trip at 7.50 x FLA
15E4
Time to Trip at 8.00 x FLA
15E6
Time to Trip at 10.0 x FLA
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
FORMAT
CODE
F30
F30
F30
F30
F30
F30
F30
F30
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
101
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
3
125
7
29
500
500
100
1
198
199
200
2
7
100
1
1
1
60
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
0.01xFLA
min
min
°C
°C
°C
% used
cycles
F3
F111
F1
F1
F1
F3
F103
F1
F1
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F103
F103
F1
101
1
0
15
30
100
0
40
120
155
0
1
75
0
0
0
3
0
1
1
-
F128
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
15
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
65534
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
s
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
4
17415
3415
1667
795
507
365
280
170
117
86
67
53
44
37
31
27
23
21
18
16
15
12
10
9
7
6
6
6
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-51
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 18 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
15E8
Time to Trip at 15.0 x FLA
15EA
Time to Trip at 20.0 x FLA
...
Reserved
SHORT CIRCUIT TRIP (0 = INSTANTANEOUS TIME DELAY)
1640
Short Circuit Trip
1641
Reserved
1642
Assign Short Circuit Trip Relays
1643
Short Circuit Trip Level
1644
Short Circuit Trip Delay
1645
Short Circuit Trip Backup
1646
Assign Short Circuit Backup Relays
1647
Add Short Circuit Trip Backup Delay
...
Reserved
OVERLOAD ALARM
1650
Overload Alarm
1651
Overload Alarm Level
1652
Assign Overload Alarm Relays
1653
Overload Alarm Delay
1654
Overload Alarm Events
...
Reserved
MECHANICAL JAM
1660
Mechanical Jam Alarm
1661
Assign Alarm Relays
1662
Mechanical Jam Alarm Level
1663
Mechanical Jam Alarm Delay
1664
Mechanical Jam Alarm Events
1665
Mechanical Jam Trip
1666
Assign Trip Relays
1667
Mechanical Jam Trip Level
1668
Mechanical Jam Trip Delay
...
Reserved
UNDERCURRENT
1670
Block Undercurrent from Start
1671
Undercurrent Alarm
1672
Assign Undercurrent Alarm Relays
1673
Undercurrent Alarm Level
1674
Undercurrent Alarm Delay
1675
Undercurrent Alarm Events
1676
Undercurrent Trip
1677
Assign Undercurrent Trip Relays
1678
Undercurrent Trip Level
1679
Undercurrent Trip Delay
...
Reserved
CURRENT UNBALANCE
1680
Block Unbalance From Start
1681
Current Unbalance Alarm
1682
Assign Unbalance Alarm Relays
1683
Unbalance Alarm Level
1684
Unbalance Alarm Delay
1685
Unbalance Alarm Events
1686
Current Unbalance Trip
1687
Assign Unbalance Trip Relays
1688
Unbalance Trip Level
1689
Unbalance Trip Delay
...
Reserved
GROUND FAULT
16A1
Ground Fault Alarm
16A2
Assign Ground Fault Alarm Relays
16A3
Ground Fault Alarm Pickup
9-52
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
65534
65534
STEP
VALUE
1
1
s
s
FORMAT
CODE
F1
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
6
6
0
0
0
1
1
-
F115
0
0
20
0
0
0
0
7
200
255.00
2
3
25500
1
1
0.01
1
1
0.01
× CT
s
s
F111
F2
F3
F115
F119
F3
1
100
0
0
1
20
0
101
0
0
0
2
150
7
600
1
1
1
1
1
1
0.01 × FLA
s
-
F115
F3
F113
F2
F103
0
101
1
10
0
0
0
101
5
0
0
0
101
5
-
2
7
600
1250
1
2
7
600
1250
-
1
1
1
5
1
1
1
1
5
-
0.01 × FLA
s
0.01 × FLA
s
-
F115
F113
F3
F2
F103
F115
F111
F3
F2
-
0
1
150
10
0
0
1
150
10
-
0
0
0
10
1
0
0
0
10
1
15000
2
7
99
255
1
2
7
99
255
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
0.01 × FLA
s
0.01 × FLA
s
F1
F115
F113
F3
F1
F103
F115
F111
F3
F1
0
0
1
70
1
0
0
1
70
1
0
0
0
4
1
0
0
0
4
1
5000
2
7
30
255
1
2
7
30
255
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
%
s
%
s
F1
F115
F113
F1
F1
F103
F115
F111
F1
F1
0
0
1
15
1
0
0
1
20
1
0
0
10
2
7
100
1
1
1
0.1 × CT
F115
F113
F3
0
1
10
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 19 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
16A4
GF Alarm Pickup for GE Multilin 50:0.025 CT
16A5
Ground Fault Alarm Delay
16A6
Ground Fault Alarm Events
16A7
Ground Fault Trip
16A8
Assign Ground Fault Trip Relays
16A9
Ground Fault Trip Pickup
16AA
GF Trip Pickup for GE Multilin 50:0.025 CT
16AB
Ground Fault Trip Delay
16AC
Ground Fault Trip Backup
16AD
Ground Fault Trip Backup Relays
16AE
Ground Fault Trip Backup Delay
...
Reserved
ACCELERATION TRIP
16D0
Acceleration Trip
16D1
Assign Trip Relays
16D2
Acceleration Timer From Start
...
Reserved
16E0
Enable Single Shot Restart
16E1
Enable Start Inhibit
16E2
Maximum Starts/Hour Permissible
16E3
Time Between Starts
16E4
Restart Block
16E5
Assign Block Relays
...
Reserved
BACKSPIN DETECTION
1780
Enable Back-Spin Start Inhibit
1781
Minimum Permissible Frequency
...
Reserved
1784
Enable Prediction Algorithm
1785
Assign Backspin Inhibit Relays
1786
Number of Motor Poles
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #1
1790
Local RTD #1 Application
1791
Local RTD #1 High Alarm
1792
Local RTD #1 High Alarm Relays
1793
Local RTD #1 High Alarm Level
1794
Local RTD #1 Alarm
1795
Local RTD #1 Alarm Relays
1796
Local RTD #1 Alarm Level
1797
Record RTD #1 Alarms as Events
1798
Local RTD #1 Trip
1799
Enable RTD #1 Trip Voting
179A
Local RTD #1 Trip Relays
179B
Local RTD #1 Trip Level
179C
Local RTD #1 RTD Type
17A0
First Character of Local RTD #1 Name
↓
↓
17A3
8th Character of Local RTD #1 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #2
17B0
Local RTD #2 Application
17B1
Local RTD #2 High Alarm
17B2
Local RTD #2 High Alarm Relays
17B3
Local RTD #2 High Alarm Level
17B4
Local RTD #2 Alarm
17B5
Local RTD #2 Alarm Relays
17B6
Local RTD #2 Alarm Level
17B7
Record RTD #2 Alarms as Events
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
2500
255.00
1
2
7
100
2500
255.00
1
3
255.00
STEP
VALUE
1
0.01
1
1
1
1
1
0.01
1
1
0.01
25
0
0
0
0
10
25
0
0
0
0.10
0
0
10
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
7
2500
1
1
5
500
50000
7
0
0
Amps
s
0.1 × CT
0.1 × CT
s
s
FORMAT
CODE
F3
F3
F103
F 115
F 111
F3
F3
F3
F115
F119
F3
FACTORY
DEFAULT
25
0
0
0
1
20
25
0
0
33
0.20
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1s
min
s
-
F115
F111
F1
F103
F103
F1
F1
F1
F111
0
1
100
0
0
0
10
0
3
1
999
1
1
Hz
F103
F3
0
100
0
0
2
1
7
16
1
1
2
-
F103
F111
F1
1
1
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
369 Motor Management Relay
UNITS
9
9-53
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 20 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
17B8
Local RTD #2 Trip
17B9
Enable RTD #2 Trip Voting
17BA
Local RTD #2 Trip Relays
17BB
Local RTD #2 Trip Level
17BC
Local RTD #2 RTD Type
17C0
First Character of Local RTD #2 Name
↓
↓
17C3
8th Character of Local RTD #2 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #3
17D0
Local RTD #3 Application
17D1
Local RTD #3 High Alarm
17D2
Local RTD #3 High Alarm Relays
17D3
Local RTD #3 High Alarm Level
17D4
Local RTD #3 Alarm
17D5
Local RTD #3 Alarm Relays
17D6
Local RTD #3 Alarm Level
17D7
Record RTD #3 Alarms as Events
17D8
Local RTD #3 Trip
17D9
Enable RTD #3 Trip Voting
17DA
Local RTD #3 Trip Relays
17DB
Local RTD #3 Trip Level
17DC
Local RTD #3 RTD Type
17E0
First Character of Local RTD #3 Name
↓
↓
17E3
8th Character of Local RTD #3 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #4
17F0
Local RTD #4 Application
17F1
Local RTD #4 High Alarm
17F2
Local RTD #4 High Alarm Relays
17F3
Local RTD #4 High Alarm Level
17F4
Local RTD #4 Alarm
17F5
Local RTD #4 Alarm Relays
17F6
Local RTD #4 Alarm Level
17F7
Enable RTD #4 Alarms as Events
17F8
Local RTD #4 Trip
17F9
Enable RTD #4 Trip Voting
17FA
Local RTD #4 Trip Relays
17FB
Local RTD #4 Trip Level
17FC
Local RTD #4 RTD Type
1800
First Character of Local RTD #4 Name
↓
↓
1803
8th Character of Local RTD #4 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #5
1810
Local RTD #5 Application
1811
Local RTD #5 High Alarm
1812
Local RTD #5 High Alarm Relays
1813
Local RTD #5 High Alarm Level
1814
Local RTD #5 Alarm
1815
Local RTD #5 Alarm Relays
1816
Local RTD #5 Alarm Level
1817
Record RTD #5 Alarms as Events
1818
Local RTD #5 Trip
1819
Enable RTD #5 Trip Voting
181A
Local RTD #5 Trip Relays
181B
Local RTD #5 Trip Level
181C
Local RTD #5 RTD Type
9-54
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F 115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
4
2
7
250
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C / °F
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
0
0
1
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 21 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
1820
First Character of Local RTD #5 Name
↓
↓
1823
8th Character of Local RTD #5 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #6
1830
Local RTD #6 Application
1831
Local RTD #6 High Alarm
1832
Local RTD #6 High Alarm Relays
1833
Local RTD #6 High Alarm Level
1834
Local RTD #6 Alarm
1835
Local RTD #6 Alarm Relays
1836
Local RTD #6 Alarm Level
1837
Record RTD #6 Alarms as Events
1838
Local RTD #6 Trip
1839
Enable RTD #6 Trip Voting
183A
Local RTD #6 Trip Relays
183B
Local RTD #6 Trip Level
183C
Local RTD #6 RTD Type
1840
First Character of Local RTD #6 Name
↓
↓
1843
8th Character of Local RTD #6 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #7
1850
Local RTD #7 Application
1851
Local RTD #7 High Alarm
1852
Local RTD #7 High Alarm Relays
1853
Local RTD #7 High Alarm Level
1854
Local RTD #7 Alarm
1855
Local RTD #7 Alarm Relays
1856
Local RTD #7 Alarm Level
1857
Record RTD #7 Alarms as Events
1858
Local RTD #7 Trip
1859
Enable RTD #7 Trip Voting
185A
Local RTD #7 Trip Relays
185B
Local RTD #7 Trip Level
185C
Local RTD #7 RTD Type
1860
First Character of Local RTD #7 Name
↓
↓
1863
8th Character of Local RTD #7 Name
1864
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #8
1870
Local RTD #8 Application
1871
Local RTD #8 High Alarm
1872
Local RTD #8 High Alarm Relays
1873
Local RTD #8 High Alarm Level
1874
Local RTD #8 Alarm
1875
Local RTD #8 Alarm Relays
1876
Local RTD #8 Alarm Level
1877
Record RTD #8 Alarms as Events
1878
Local RTD #8 Trip
1879
Enable RTD #8 Trip Voting
187A
Local RTD #8 Trip Relays
187B
Local RTD #8 Trip Level
187C
Local RTD #8 RTD Type
1880
First Character of Local RTD #8 Name
↓
↓
1883
8th Character of Local RTD #8 Name
1884
Reserved
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
127
STEP
VALUE
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
’R’
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-55
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 22 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
LOCAL RTD #9
1890
Local RTD #9 Application
1891
Local RTD #9 High Alarm
1892
Local RTD #9 High Alarm Relays
1893
Local RTD #9 High Alarm Level
1894
Local RTD #9 Alarm
1895
Local RTD #9 Alarm Relays
1896
Local RTD #9 Alarm Level
1897
Record RTD #9 Alarms as Events
1898
Local RTD #9 Trip
1899
Enable RTD #9 Trip Voting
189A
Local RTD #9 Trip Relays
189B
Local RTD #9 Trip Level
189C
Local RTD #9 RTD Type
18A0
First Character of Local RTD #9 Name
↓
↓
18A3
8th Character of Local RTD #9 Name
18A4
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #10
18B0
Local RTD #10 Application
18B1
Local RTD #10 High Alarm
18B2
Local RTD #10 High Alarm Relays
18B3
Local RTD #10 High Alarm Level
18B4
Local RTD #10 Alarm
18B5
Local RTD #10 Alarm Relays
18B6
Local RTD #10 Alarm Level
18B7
Record RTD #10 Alarms as Events
18B8
Local RTD #10 Trip
18B9
Enable RTD #10 Trip Voting
18BA
Local RTD #10 Trip Relays
18BB
Local RTD #10 Trip Level
18BC
Local RTD #10 RTD Type
18C0
First Character of Local RTD #10 Name
↓
↓
18C3
8th Character of RTD #10 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #11
18D0
Local RTD #11 Application
18D1
Local RTD #11 High Alarm
18D2
Local RTD #11 High Alarm Relays
18D3
Local RTD #11 High Alarm Level
18D4
Local RTD #11 Alarm
18D5
Local RTD #11 Alarm Relays
18D6
Local RTD #11 Alarm Level
18D7
Record RTD #11 Alarm Events
18D8
Local RTD #11 Trip
18D9
Enable RTD #11 Trip Voting
18DA
Local RTD #11 Trip Relays
18DB
Local RTD #11 Trip Level
18DC
Local RTD #11 RTD Type
18E0
First Character of Local RTD #11 Name
↓
↓
18E3
8th Character of Local RTD #11 Name
...
Reserved
LOCAL RTD #12
18F0
Local RTD #12 Application
18F1
Local RTD #12 High Alarm
18F2
Local RTD #12 High Alarm Relays
18F3
Local RTD #12 High Alarm Level
9-56
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
4
2
7
200
1
1
1
1
°C
F121
F115
F113
F1
0
0
2
130
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 23 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
18F4
Local RTD #12 Alarm
18F5
Local RTD #12 Alarm Relays
18F6
Local RTD #12 Alarm Level
18F7
Record RTD #12 Alarms as Events
18F8
Local RTD #12 Trip
18F9
Enable RTD #12 Trip Voting
18FA
Local RTD #12 Trip Relays
18FB
Local RTD #12 Trip Level
18FC
Local RTD #12 RTD Type
1900
First Character of Local RTD #12 Name
↓
↓
1903
8th Character of Local RTD #12 Name
...
Reserved
OPEN RTD ALARM
1B20
Open RTD Alarm
1B21
Assign Alarm Relays
1B22
Open RTD Alarm Events
SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM
1B23
Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm
1B24
Assign Alarm Relays
1B25
Short / Low Temp Alarm Events
...
Reserved
LOSS OF REMOTE RTD COMMUNICATIONS
1B30
Loss RRTD Comm Alarm
1B31
Loss RRTD Comm Alarm Relays
1B32
Loss RRTD Comm Alarm Events
...
Reserved
UNDERVOLTAGE
1B60
Undervoltage Active If Motor Stopped
1B61
Undervoltage Alarm
1B62
Assign Alarm Relays
1B63
Undervoltage Alarm Pickup
1B64
Starting Undervoltage Alarm Pickup
1B65
Undervoltage Alarm Delay
1B66
Undervoltage Alarm Events
1B67
Undervoltage Trip
1B68
Undervoltage Trip Relays
1B69
Undervoltage Trip Pickup
1B6A
Starting Undervoltage Trip Pickup
1B6B
Undervoltage Trip Delay
...
Reserved
OVERVOLTAGE
1B80
Overvoltage Alarm
1B81
Overvoltage Alarm Relays
1B82
Overvoltage Alarm Pickup
1B83
Overvoltage Alarm Delay
1B84
Overvoltage Alarm Events
1B85
Overvoltage Trip
1B86
Overvoltage Trip Relays
1B87
Overvoltage Trip Pickup
1B88
Overvoltage Trip Delay
...
Reserved
PHASE REVERSAL
1BA0
Phase Reversal Trip
1BA1
Assign Trip Relays
...
Reserved
OVERFREQUENCY
1BB0
Block Overfrequency on Start
1BB1
Overfrequency Alarm
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
2
7
1
1
1
1
-
F115
F113
F103
0
1
0
0
0
0
-
2
7
1
-
1
1
1
-
-
F115
F113
F103
-
0
1
0
-
0
0
0
2
7
1
1
1
1
-
F115
F113
F103
0
1
0
0
0
0
50
50
0
0
0
0
50
50
0
1
2
7
99
99
2550
1
2
7
99
99
2550
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
× Rated
× Rated
0.1s
× Rated
× Rated
0.1s
F103
F115
F113
F3
F3
F2
F103
F115
F111
F3
F3
F2
0
0
1
85
85
30
0
0
1
80
80
10
0
0
101
0
0
0
0
101
0
2
7
125
2550
1
1
7
125
2550
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
x Rated
s
x Rated
s
F115
F113
F3
F2
F103
F103
F111
F3
F2
0
1
105
10
0
0
1
110
10
0
0
-
2
7
-
1
1
-
-
F115
F111
-
0
1
-
0
0
5000
2
1
1
s
-
F1
F115
1
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-57
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 24 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
1BB2
Assign Alarm Relays
1BB3
Overfrequency Alarm Level
1BB4
Overfrequency Alarm Delay
1BB5
Overfrequency Alarm Events
1BB6
Overfrequency Trip
1BB7
Assign Trip Relays
1BB8
Overfrequency Trip Level
1BB9
Overfrequency Trip Delay
...
Reserved
UNDERFREQUENCY
1BC0
Block Underfrequency on Start
1BC1
Underfrequency Alarm
1BC2
Assign Alarm Relays
1BC3
Underfrequency Alarm Level
1BC4
Underfrequency Alarm Delay
1BC5
Underfrequency Alarm Events
1BC6
Underfrequency Trip
1BC7
Assign Trip Relays
1BC8
Underfrequency Trip Level
1BC9
Underfrequency Trip Delay
...
Reserved
LEAD POWER FACTOR
1BD0
Block Lead Power Factor From Start
1BD1
Lead Power Factor Alarm
1BD2
Assign Lead Power Factor Alarm Relays
1BD3
Lead Power Factor Alarm Level
1BD4
Lead Power Factor Alarm Delay
1BD5
Lead Power Factor Alarm Events
1BD6
Lead Power Factor Trip
1BD7
Lead Power Factor Trip Relays
1BD8
Lead Power Factor Trip Level
1BD9
Lead Power Factor Trip Delay
...
Reserved
LAG POWER FACTOR
1BE0
Block Lag Power Factor From Start
1BE1
Lag Power Factor Alarm
1BE2
Assign Lag Power Factor Alarm Relays
1BE3
Lag Power Factor Alarm Level
1BE4
Lag Power Factor Alarm Delay
1BE5
Lag Power Factor Alarm Events
1BE6
Lag Power Factor Trip
1BE7
Assign Lag Power Factor Trip Relays
1BE8
Lag Power Factor Trip Level
1BE9
Lag Power Factor Trip Delay
...
Reserved
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER
1BF0
Block Positive kvar Element From Start
1BF1
Positive kvar Alarm
1BF2
Assign Alarm Relays
1BF3
Positive kvar Alarm Level
1BF4
Positive kvar Alarm Delay
1BF5
Positive kvar Alarm Events
1BF6
Positive kvar Trip
1BF7
Assign Trip Relays
1BF8
Positive kvar Trip Level
1BF9
Positive kvar Trip Delay
...
Reserved
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER
1C00
Block Negative kvar Element from Start
9-58
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
7
7000
2550
1
1
7
7000
2550
-
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
Hz
s
Hz
s
-
FORMAT
CODE
F113
F3
F2
F103
F103
F111
F3
F2
-
FACTORY
DEFAULT
1
6050
10
0
0
1
6050
10
-
0
2000
0
0
0
0
2000
0
0
0
0
2000
0
0
0
0
2000
0
5000
2
7
7000
2550
1
2
7
7000
2550
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
Hz
s
Hz
s
F1
F115
F113
F3
F2
F103
F115
F111
F3
F2
1
0
1
5950
10
0
0
1
5950
10
0
0
0
5
1
0
0
0
5
1
5000
2
7
99
2550
1
2
7
99
2550
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
F1
F115
F113
F3
F2
F103
F115
F111
F3
F2
1
0
1
30
10
0
0
1
10
10
0
0
0
5
1
0
0
0
5
1
5000
2
7
99
2550
1
2
7
99
2550
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
F1
F115
F113
F3
F2
F103
F115
F111
F3
F2
1
0
1
85
10
0
0
1
80
10
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
5000
2
7
25000
2550
1
1
7
25000
2550
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
kvar
s
kvar
s
F1
F115
F113
F1
F2
F103
F103
F111
F1
F2
1
0
1
10
10
0
0
1
25
10
0
5000
1
s
F1
1
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 25 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
1C01
Negative kvar Alarm
1C02
Assign Alarm Relays
1C03
Negative kvar Alarm Level
1C04
Negative kvar Alarm Delay
1C05
Negative kvar Alarm Events
1C06
Negative kvar Trip
1C07
Assign Trip Relays
1C08
Negative kvar Trip Level
1C09
Negative kvar Trip Delay
...
Reserved
UNDERPOWER
1C10
Block Underpower From Start
1C11
Underpower Alarm
1C12
Assign Alarm Relays
1C13
Underpower Alarm Level
1C14
Underpower Alarm Delay
1C15
Underpower Alarm Events
1C16
Underpower Trip
1C17
Underpower Trip Relays
1C18
Underpower Trip Level
1C19
Underpower Trip Delay
...
Reserved
REVERSE POWER
1C20
Block Reverse Power From Start
1C21
Reverse Power Alarm
1C22
Assign Alarm Relays
1C23
Reverse Power Alarm Level
1C24
Reverse Power Alarm Delay
1C25
Reverse Power Alarm Events
1C26
Reverse Power Trip
1C27
Assign Trip Relays
1C28
Reverse Power Trip Level
1C29
Reverse Power Trip Delay
...
Reserved
TRIP COUNTER
1C80
Trip Counter Alarm
1C81
Assign Alarm Relays
1C82
Alarm Pickup Level
1C83
Trip Counter Alarm Events
...
Reserved
STARTER FAILURE
1C90
Starter Failure Alarm
1C91
Starter Type
1C92
Assign Alarm Relays
1C93
Starter Failure Delay
1C94
Starter Failure Alarm Events
...
Reserved
CURRENT DEMAND
1CD0
Current Demand Period
1CD1
Current Demand Alarm
1CD2
Assign Alarm Relays
1CD3
Current Demand Alarm Limit
1CD5
Current Demand Alarm Events
...
Reserved
KW DEMAND
1CE0
kW Demand Period
1CE1
kW Demand Alarm
1CE2
Assign Alarm Relays
1CE3
kW Demand Alarm Limit
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
2
7
25000
2550
1
1
7
25000
2550
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
kvar
s
kvar
s
FORMAT
CODE
F115
F113
F1
F2
F103
F103
F111
F1
F2
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
1
10
10
0
0
1
25
10
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
0
1
5
15000
2
7
25000
2550
1
2
7
25000
2550
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
kW
s
kW
s
F1
F115
F113
F1
F2
F103
F115
F111
F1
F1
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
5
0
0
0
1
5
50000
2
7
25000
300
1
2
7
25000
300
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
kW
s
kW
s
F1
F115
F113
F1
F2
F103
F115
F111
F1
F2
0
0
1
2
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
2
7
50000
1
1
1
1
1
-
F115
F113
F1
F103
0
1
25
0
0
0
0
10
0
2
1
7
1000
1
1
1
1
10
1
ms
-
F115
F125
F113
F1
F103
0
0
1
100
0
5
0
0
0
0
90
2
7
65000
1
1
1
1
1
1
min
A
-
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
15
0
1
100
0
5
0
0
1
90
2
7
50000
1
1
1
1
min
kW
F1
F115
F113
F1
15
0
1
100
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-59
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 26 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
1CE4
kW Demand Alarm Events
...
Reserved
KVAR DEMAND
1CF0
kvar Demand Period
1CF1
kvar Demand Alarm
1CF2
Assign Alarm Relays
1CF3
kvar Demand Alarm Limit
1CF4
kvar Demand Alarm Events
...
Reserved
KVA DEMAND
1D00
kVA Demand Period
1D01
kVA Demand Alarm
1D02
Assign Alarm Relays
1D03
kVA Demand Alarm Limit
1D04
kVA Demand Alarm Events
...
Reserved
SELF-TEST RELAY
1D06
Assign Service Relay
...
Reserved
ANALOG OUTPUTS
1D40
Enable Analog Output 1
1D41
Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range
1D42
Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter
1D43
Analog Output 1 Minimum
1D44
Analog Output 1 Maximum
1D45
Enable Analog Output 2
1D46
Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range
1D47
Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter
1D48
Analog Output 2 Minimum
1D49
Analog Output 2 Maximum
1D4A
Enable Analog Output 3
1D4B
Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range
1D4C
Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter
1D4D
Analog Output 3 Minimum
1D4E
Analog Output 3 Maximum
1D4F
Enable Analog Output 4
1D50
Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range
1D51
Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter
1D52
Analog Output 4 Minimum
1D53
Analog Output 4 Maximum
...
Reserved
TEST OUTPUT RELAYS
1F80
Force Trip Relay
1F81
Force Trip Relay Duration
1F82
Force AUX1 Relay
1F83
Force AUX1 Relay Duration
1F84
Force AUX2 Relay
1F85
Force AUX2 Relay Duration
1F86
Force Alarm Relay
1F87
Force Alarm Relay Range
...
Reserved
TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
1F90
Force Analog Outputs
1F91
Analog Output 1 Forced Value
1F92
Analog Output 2 Forced Value
1F93
Analog Output 3 Forced Value
1F94
Analog Output 4 Forced Value
...
Reserved
9-60
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
1
STEP
VALUE
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F103
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
5
0
0
1
0
90
2
7
50000
1
1
1
1
1
1
min
kvar
-
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
15
0
1
100
0
5
0
0
1
0
90
2
7
50000
1
1
1
1
1
1
min
kVA
-
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
15
0
1
100
0
0
7
1
-
F113
0
0
0
0
TBD
TBD
0
0
0
TBD
TBD
0
0
0
TBD
TBD
0
0
0
TBD
TBD
1
2
35
TBD
TBD
1
2
35
TBD
TBD
1
2
35
TBD
TBD
1
2
35
TBD
TBD
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F26
F127
F1
F1
F103
F26
F127
F1
F1
F103
F26
F127
F1
F1
F103
F26
F127
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
300
2
300
2
300
2
300
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
s
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
% range
% range
% range
% range
F126
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 27 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
REMOTE RTD SLAVE ADDRESSES
1FF0
RRTD1 - Slave Address
1FF1
RRTD2 - Slave Address
1FF2
RRTD3 - Slave Address
1FF3
RRTD4 - Slave Address
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #1
2000
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Application
2001
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm
2002
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays
2003
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level
2004
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm
2005
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays
2006
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarm Level
2007
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events
2008
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip
2009
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Voting
200A
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Relays
200B
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Trip Level
200C
RRTD 1 - RTD #1 RTD Type
...
Reserved
2010
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Name
↓
↓
2013
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #1 Name
2014
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #2
2020
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Application
2021
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm
2022
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Relays
2023
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level
2024
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm
2025
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm Relays
2026
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarm Level
2027
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events
2028
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Trip
2029
Enable A Remote RTD #2 Trip Voting
202A
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Trip Relays
202B
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Trip Level
202C
RRTD 1 - RTD #2 RTD Type
...
Reserved
2030
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Name
↓
↓
2033
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #2 Name
2034
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #3
2040
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Application
2041
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm
2042
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm Relays
2043
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 High Alarm Level
2044
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm
2045
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm Relays
2046
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarm Level
2047
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Alarms as Events
2048
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip
2049
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip Voting
204A
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip Relays
204B
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Trip Level
204C
RRTD 1 - RTD #3 RTD Type
2050
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD # Name
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
254
254
254
254
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
32
127
1
-
F1
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
32
127
1
-
F1
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-61
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 28 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
↓
↓
2053
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #3 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #4
2060
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Application
2061
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm
2062
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm Relays
2063
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 High Alarm Level
2064
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm
2065
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm Relays
2066
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarm Level
2067
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Alarms as Events
2068
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip
2069
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip Voting
206A
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip Relays
206B
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Trip Level
206C
RRTD 1 - RTD #4 RTD Type
2070
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Name
↓
↓
2073
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #4 Name
2074
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #5
2080
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Application
2081
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm
2082
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Relays
2083
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 High Alarm Level
2084
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm
2085
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm Relays
2086
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarm Level
2087
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Alarms as Events
2088
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip
2089
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip Voting
208A
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip Relays
208B
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Trip Level
208C
RRTD 1 - RTD #5 RTD Type
2090
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Name
↓
↓
2093
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #5 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #6
20A0
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Application
20A1
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm
20A2
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Relays
20A3
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 High Alarm Level
20A4
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm
20A5
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Relays
20A6
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarm Level
20A7
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Alarms as Events
20A8
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip
20A9
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Voting
20AA
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Relays
20AB
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Trip Level
20AC
RRTD 1 - RTD #6 RTD Type
20B0
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Name
↓
↓
20B3
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #6 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #7
20C0
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Application
9-62
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
1
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
4
1
-
F121
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 29 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
20C1
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm
20C2
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays
20C3
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level
20C4
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm
20C5
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays
20C6
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarm Level
20C7
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events
20C8
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip
20C9
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Voting
20CA
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Relays
20CB
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Trip Level
20CC
RRTD 1 - RTD #7 RTD Type
20D0
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Name
↓
↓
20D3
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #7 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #8
20E0
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Application
20E1
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm
20E2
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Relays
20E3
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level
20E4
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm
20E5
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Relays
20E6
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarm Level
20E7
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Alarms as Events
20E8
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip
20E9
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Voting
20EA
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Relays
20EB
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Trip Level
20EC
RRTD 1 - RTD #8 RTD Type
20F0
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Name
↓
↓
20F3
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #8 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #9
2100
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Application
2101
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 High Alarm
2102
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 High Alarm Relays
2103
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 High Alarm Level
2104
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Alarm
2105
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Alarm Relays
2106
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Alarm Level
2107
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Alarms as Events
2108
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Trip
2109
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Trip Voting
210A
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Trip Relays
210B
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Trip Level
210C
RRTD 1 - RTD #9 RTD Type
2110
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Name
↓
↓
2113
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #9 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #10
2120
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Application
2121
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm
2122
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm Relays
2123
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 High Alarm Level
2124
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm
2125
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm Relays
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
4
2
7
200
2
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
0
0
2
130
0
1
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-63
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 30 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2126
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarm Level
2127
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Alarms as Events
2128
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Trip
2129
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD#10 Trip Voting
212A
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Trip Relays
212B
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Trip Level
212C
RRTD 1 - RTD #10 RTD Type
2130
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Name
↓
↓
2133
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #10 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #11
2140
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Application
2141
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 High Alarm
2142
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 High Alarm Relays
2143
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 High Alarm Level
2144
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarm
2145
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarm Relays
2146
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarm Level
2147
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Alarms as Events
2148
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Trip
2149
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Trip Voting
214A
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Trip Relays
214B
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Trip Level
214C
RRTD 1 - RTD #11 RTD Type
2150
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Name
↓
↓
2153
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #11 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – RTD #12
2160
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Application
2161
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 High Alarm
2162
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 High Alarm Relays
2163
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 High Alarm Level
2164
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarm
2165
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarm Relays
2166
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarm Level
2167
Record RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Alarms as Events
2168
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Trip
2169
Enable RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Trip Voting
216A
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Trip Relays
216B
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Trip Level
216C
RRTD 1 - RTD #12 RTD Type
2170
First Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Name
↓
↓
2173
8th Character of RRTD 1 - RTD #12 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – OPEN RTD ALARM
2180
RRTD A - Open RTD Alarm
2181
RRTD A - Assign Alarm Relays
2182
RRTD A - Open RTD Alarm Events
RRTD 1 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM
2183
RRTD A - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm
2184
RRTD A - Assign Alarm Relays
2185
RRTD A - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #1
2200
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Application
2201
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm
9-64
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
2
7
1
1
1
1
-
F115
F113
F103
0
1
0
0
0
0
-
2
7
1
-
1
1
1
-
-
F115
F113
F103
-
0
1
0
-
0
0
4
2
1
1
-
F121
F115
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 31 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2202
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays
2203
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level
2204
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm
2205
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays
2206
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarm Level
2207
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events
2208
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip
2209
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip Voting
220A
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip Relays
220B
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Trip Level
220C
RRTD 2 - RTD #1 RTD Type
2210
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Name
↓
↓
2213
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #1 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #2
2220
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Application
2221
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm
2222
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm Relays
2223
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level
2224
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm
2225
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm Relays
2226
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarm Level
2227
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events
2228
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Trip
2229
Enable A Remote RTD #2 Trip Voting
222A
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Trip Relays
222B
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Trip Level
222C
RRTD 2 - RTD #2 RTD Type
2230
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Name
↓
↓
2233
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #2 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #3
2240
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Application
2241
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm
2242
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm Relays
2243
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 High Alarm Level
2244
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm
2245
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm Relays
2246
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarm Level
2247
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Alarms as Events
2248
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip
2249
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip Voting
224A
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip Relays
224B
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Trip Level
224C
RRTD 2 - RTD #3 RTD Type
2250
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD # Name
↓
↓
2253
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #3 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #4
2260
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Application
2261
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm
2262
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm Relays
2263
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 High Alarm Level
2264
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm
2265
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm Relays
2266
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarm Level
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-65
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 32 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2267
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Alarms as Events
2268
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip
2069
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip Voting
226A
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip Relays
226B
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Trip Level
226C
RRTD 2 - RTD #4 RTD Type
2270
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Name
↓
↓
2273
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #4 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #5
2280
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Application
2281
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 High Alarm
2282
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 High Alarm Relays
2283
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 High Alarm Level
2284
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Alarm
2285
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Alarm Relays
2286
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Alarm Level
2287
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Alarms as Events
2288
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Trip
2289
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Trip Voting
228A
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Trip Relays
228B
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Trip Level
228C
RRTD 2 - RTD #5 RTD Type
2290
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Name
↓
↓
2293
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #5 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #6
22A0
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Application
22A1
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 High Alarm
22A2
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 High Alarm Relays
22A3
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 High Alarm Level
22A4
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarm
22A5
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarm Relays
22A6
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarm Level
22A7
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Alarms as Events
22A8
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Trip
22A9
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Trip Voting
22AA
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Trip Relays
22AB
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Trip Level
22AC
RRTD 2 - RTD #6 RTD Type
22B0
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Name
↓
↓
22B3
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #6 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #7
22C0
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Application
22C1
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm
22C2
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays
22C3
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level
22C4
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm
22C5
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays
22C6
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarm Level
22C7
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events
22C8
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip
22C9
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip Voting
22CA
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip Relays
22CB
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Trip Level
9-66
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
1
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 33 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
22CC
RRTD 2 - RTD #7 RTD Type
22D0
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Name
↓
↓
22D3
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #7 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #8
22E0
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Application
22E1
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 High Alarm
22E2
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 High Alarm Relays
22E3
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level
22E4
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarm
22E5
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarm Relays
22E6
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarm Level
22E7
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Alarms as Events
22E8
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Trip
22E9
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Trip Voting
22EA
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Trip Relays
22EB
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Trip Level
22EC
RRTD 2 - RTD #8 RTD Type
22F0
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Name
↓
↓
22F3
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #8 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #9
2300
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Application
2301
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 High Alarm
2302
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 High Alarm Relays
2303
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 High Alarm Level
2304
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Alarm
2305
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Alarm Relays
2306
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Alarm Level
2307
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Alarms as Events
2308
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Trip
2309
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Trip Voting
230A
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Trip Relays
230B
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Trip Level
230C
RRTD 2 - RTD #9 RTD Type
2310
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Name
↓
↓
2313
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #9 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #10
2320
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Application
2321
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm
2322
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm Relays
2323
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 High Alarm Level
2324
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm
2325
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm Relays
2326
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarm Level
2327
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Alarms as Events
2328
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Trip
2329
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD#10 Trip Voting
232A
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Trip Relays
232B
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Trip Level
232C
RRTD 2 - RTD #10 RTD Type
2330
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Name
↓
↓
2333
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #10 Name
...
Reserved
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
’R’
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
’’
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
’’
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-67
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 34 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
RRTD 2 – RTD #11
2340
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Application
2341
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 High Alarm
2342
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 High Alarm Relays
2343
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 High Alarm Level
2344
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Alarm
2345
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Alarm Relays
2346
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Alarm Level
2347
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Alarms as Events
2348
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Trip
2349
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Trip Voting
234A
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Trip Relays
234B
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Trip Level
234C
RRTD 2 - RTD #11 RTD Type
2350
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Name
↓
↓
2353
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #11 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – RTD #12
2360
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Application
2361
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 High Alarm
2362
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 High Alarm Relays
2363
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 High Alarm Level
2364
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Alarm
2365
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Alarm Relays
2366
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Alarm Level
2367
Record RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Alarms as Events
2368
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Trip
2369
Enable RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Trip Voting
236A
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Trip Relays
236B
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Trip Level
236C
RRTD 2 - RTD #12 RTD Type
2370
First Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Name
↓
↓
2373
8th Character of RRTD 2 - RTD #12 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – OPEN RTD ALARM
2380
RRTD B - Open RTD Alarm
2381
RRTD B - Assign Alarm Relays
2382
RRTD B - Open RTD Alarm Events
RRTD 2 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM
2383
RRTD B - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm
2384
RRTD B - Assign Alarm Relays
2385
RRTD B - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #1
2400
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Application
2401
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm
2402
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays
2403
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level
2404
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm
2405
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays
2406
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarm Level
2407
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events
2408
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip
2409
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip Voting
240A
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip Relays
240B
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Trip Level
240C
RRTD 3 - RTD #1 RTD Type
9-68
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
’’
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
2
7
1
1
1
1
-
F115
F113
F103
0
1
0
0
0
0
-
2
7
1
-
1
1
1
-
-
F115
F113
F103
-
0
1
0
-
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 35 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2410
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Name
↓
↓
2413
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #1 Name
2414
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #2
2420
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Application
2421
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 High Alarm
2422
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 High Alarm Relays
2423
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level
2424
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Alarm
2425
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Alarm Relays
2426
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Alarm Level
2427
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events
2428
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Trip
2429
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Trip Voting
242A
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Trip Relays
242B
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Trip Level
242C
RRTD 3 - RTD #2 RTD Type
2430
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Name
↓
↓
2433
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #2 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #3
2440
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Application
2441
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 High Alarm
2442
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 High Alarm Relays
2443
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 High Alarm Level
2444
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Alarm
2445
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Alarm Relays
2446
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Alarm Level
2447
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Alarms as Events
2448
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Trip
2449
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Trip Voting
244A
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Trip Relays
244B
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Trip Level
244C
RRTD 3 - RTD #3 RTD Type
2450
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD # Name
↓
↓
2453
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #3 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #4
2460
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Application
2461
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 High Alarm
2462
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 High Alarm Relays
2463
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 High Alarm Level
2464
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Alarm
2465
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Alarm Relays
2466
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Alarm Level
2467
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Alarms as Events
2468
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Trip
2469
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Trip Voting
246A
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Trip Relays
246B
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Trip Level
246C
RRTD 3 - RTD #4 RTD Type
2470
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Name
↓
↓
2473
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #4 Name
...
Reserved
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
127
STEP
VALUE
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
’R’
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-69
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 36 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
RRTD 3 – RTD #5
2480
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Application
2481
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 High Alarm
2482
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 High Alarm Relays
2483
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 High Alarm Level
2484
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Alarm
2485
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Alarm Relays
2486
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Alarm Level
2487
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Alarms as Events
2488
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Trip
2489
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Trip Voting
248A
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Trip Relays
248B
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Trip Level
248C
RRTD 3 - RTD #5 RTD Type
2490
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Name
↓
↓
2493
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #5 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #6
24A0
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Application
24A1
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 High Alarm
24A2
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 High Alarm Relays
24A3
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 High Alarm Level
24A4
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarm
24A5
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarm Relays
24A6
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarm Level
24A7
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Alarms as Events
24A8
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Trip
24A9
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Trip Voting
24AA
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Trip Relays
24AB
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Trip Level
24AC
RRTD 3 - RTD #6 RTD Type
24B0
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Name
↓
↓
24B3
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #6 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #7
24C0
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Application
24C1
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm
24C2
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays
24C3
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level
24C4
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm
24C5
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays
24C6
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarm Level
24C7
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events
24C8
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip
24C9
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip Voting
24CA
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip Relays
24CB
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Trip Level
24CC
RRTD 3 - RTD #7 RTD Type
24D0
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Name
↓
↓
24D3
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #7 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #8
24E0
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Application
24E1
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm
24E2
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm Relays
24E3
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level
9-70
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
1
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
4
2
7
200
1
1
1
1
°C
F121
F115
F113
F1
0
0
2
130
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 37 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
24E4
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm
24E5
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm Relays
24E6
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarm Level
24E7
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Alarms as Events
24E8
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip
24E9
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip Voting
24EA
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip Relays
24EB
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Trip Level
24EC
RRTD 3 - RTD #8 RTD Type
24F0
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Name
↓
↓
24F3
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #8 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #9
2500
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Application
2501
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 High Alarm
2502
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 High Alarm Relays
2503
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 High Alarm Level
2504
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Alarm
2505
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Alarm Relays
2506
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Alarm Level
2507
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Alarms as Events
2508
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Trip
2509
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Trip Voting
250A
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Trip Relays
250B
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Trip Level
250C
RRTD 3 - RTD #9 RTD Type
2510
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Name
↓
↓
2513
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #9 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #10
2520
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Application
2521
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 High Alarm
2522
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 High Alarm Relays
2523
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 High Alarm Level
2524
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Alarm
2525
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Alarm Relays
2526
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Alarm Level
2527
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Alarms as Events
2528
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Trip
2529
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD#10 Trip Voting
252A
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Trip Relays
252B
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Trip Level
252C
RRTD 3 - RTD #10 RTD Type
2530
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Name
↓
↓
2533
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #10 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #11
2540
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Application
2541
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm
2542
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm Relays
2543
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 High Alarm Level
2544
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm
2545
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm Relays
2546
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarm Level
2547
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Alarms as Events
2548
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-71
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 38 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2549
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip Voting
254A
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip Relays
254B
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Trip Level
254C
RRTD 3 - RTD #11 RTD Type
2550
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Name
↓
↓
2553
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #11 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – RTD #12
2560
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Application
2561
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 High Alarm
2562
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 High Alarm Relays
2563
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 High Alarm Level
2564
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Alarm
2565
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Alarm Relays
2566
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Alarm Level
2567
Record RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Alarms as Events
2568
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Trip
2569
Enable RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Trip Voting
256A
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Trip Relays
256B
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Trip Level
256C
RRTD 3 - RTD #12 RTD Type
2570
First Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Name
↓
↓
2573
8th Character of RRTD 3 - RTD #12 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – OPEN RTD ALARM
2580
RRTD 3 - Open RTD Alarm
2581
RRTD 3 - Assign Alarm Relays
2582
RRTD 3 - Open RTD Alarm Events
RRTD 3 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM
2583
RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm
2584
RRTD 3 - Assign Alarm Relays
2585
RRTD 3 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #1
2600
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Application
2601
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 High Alarm
2602
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 High Alarm Relays
2603
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 High Alarm Level
2604
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarm
2605
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarm Relays
2606
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarm Level
2607
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Alarms as Events
2608
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Trip
2609
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Trip Voting
260A
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Trip Relays
260B
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Trip Level
260C
RRTD 4 - RTD #1 RTD Type
2610
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Name
↓
↓
2613
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #1 Name
....
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #2
2620
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Application
2621
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm
2622
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm Relays
2623
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 High Alarm Level
2624
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm
9-72
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
2
7
1
1
1
1
-
F115
F113
F103
0
1
0
0
0
0
-
2
7
1
-
1
1
1
-
-
F115
F113
F103
-
0
1
0
-
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
4
2
7
200
2
1
1
1
1
1
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
0
0
2
130
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 39 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2625
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm Relays
2626
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarm Level
2627
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Alarms as Events
2628
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Trip
2629
Enable A Remote RTD #2 Trip Voting
262A
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Trip Relays
262B
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Trip Level
262C
RRTD 4 - RTD #2 RTD Type
2630
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Name
↓
↓
2633
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #2 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #3
2640
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Application
2641
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 High Alarm
2642
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 High Alarm Relays
2643
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 High Alarm Level
2644
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Alarm
2645
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Alarm Relays
2646
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Alarm Level
2647
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Alarms as Events
2648
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Trip
2649
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Trip Voting
264A
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Trip Relays
264B
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Trip Level
264C
RRTD 4 - RTD #3 RTD Type
2650
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD # Name
↓
↓
2653
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #3 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #4
2660
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Application
2661
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 High Alarm
2662
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 High Alarm Relays
2663
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 High Alarm Level
2664
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Alarm
2665
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Alarm Relays
2666
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Alarm Level
2667
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Alarms as Events
2668
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Trip
2669
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Trip Voting
266A
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Trip Relays
266B
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Trip Level
266C
RRTD 4 - RTD #4 RTD Type
2670
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Name
↓
↓
2673
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #4 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #5
2680
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Application
2681
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm
2682
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm Relays
2683
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 High Alarm Level
2684
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm
2685
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm Relays
2686
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarm Level
2687
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Alarms as Events
2688
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip
2689
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip Voting
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-73
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 40 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
268A
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip Relays
268B
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Trip Level
268C
RRTD 4 - RTD #5 RTD Type
2690
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Name
↓
↓
2693
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #5 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #6
26A0
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Application
26A1
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 High Alarm
26A2
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 High Alarm Relays
26A3
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 High Alarm Level
26A4
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Alarm
26A5
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Alarm Relays
26A6
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Alarm Level
26A7
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Alarms as Events
26A8
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Trip
26A9
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Trip Voting
26AA
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Trip Relays
26AB
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Trip Level
26AC
RRTD 4 - RTD #6 RTD Type
26B0
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Name
↓
↓
26B3
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #6 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #7
26C0
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Application
26C1
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm
26C2
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm Relays
26C3
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 High Alarm Level
26C4
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm
26C5
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm Relays
26C6
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarm Level
26C7
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Alarms as Events
26C8
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip
26C9
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip Voting
26CA
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip Relays
26CB
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Trip Level
26CC
RRTD 4 - RTD #7 RTD Type
26D0
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Name
↓
↓
26D3
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #7 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #8
26E0
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Application
26E1
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 High Alarm
26E2
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 High Alarm Relays
26E3
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 High Alarm Level
26E4
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarm
26E5
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarm Relays
26E6
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarm Level
26E7
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Alarms as Events
26E8
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Trip
26E9
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Trip Voting
26EA
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Trip Relays
26EB
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Trip Level
26EC
RRTD 4 - RTD #8 RTD Type
26F0
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Name
↓
↓
9-74
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
1
130
0
’R’
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
1
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 41 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
26F3
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #8 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #9
2700
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Application
2701
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 High Alarm
2702
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 High Alarm Relays
2703
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 High Alarm Level
2704
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Alarm
2705
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Alarm Relays
2706
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Alarm Level
2707
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Alarms as Events
2708
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Trip
2709
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Trip Voting
270A
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Trip Relays
270B
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Trip Level
270C
RRTD 4 - RTD #9 RTD Type
2710
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Name
↓
↓
2713
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #9 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #10
2720
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Application
2721
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 High Alarm
2722
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 High Alarm Relays
2723
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 High Alarm Level
2724
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Alarm
2725
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Alarm Relays
2726
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Alarm Level
2727
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Alarms as Events
2728
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Trip
2729
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD#10 Trip Voting
272A
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Trip Relays
272B
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Trip Level
272C
RRTD 4 - RTD #10 RTD Type
2730
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Name
↓
↓
2733
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #10 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #11
2740
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Application
2741
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 High Alarm
2742
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 High Alarm Relays
2743
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 High Alarm Level
2744
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarm
2745
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarm Relays
2746
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarm Level
2747
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Alarms as Events
2748
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Trip
2749
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Trip Voting
274A
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Trip Relays
274B
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Trip Level
274C
RRTD 4 - RTD #11 RTD Type
2750
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Name
↓
↓
2753
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #11 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – RTD #12
2760
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Application
2761
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
127
STEP
VALUE
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
""
32
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
4
2
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
F121
F115
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
0
0
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
4
2
1
1
-
F121
F115
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-75
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 42 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2762
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm Relays
2763
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 High Alarm Level
2764
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm
2765
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm Relays
2766
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarm Level
2767
Record RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Alarms as Events
2768
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip
2769
Enable RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip Voting
276A
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip Relays
276B
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Trip Level
276C
RRTD 4 - RTD #12 RTD Type
2770
First Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Name
↓
↓
2773
8th Character of RRTD 4 - RTD #12 Name
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – OPEN RTD ALARM
2780
RRTD 4- Open RTD Alarm
2781
RRTD 4 - Assign Alarm Relays
2782
RRTD 4 - Open RTD Alarm Events
RRTD 4 – SHORT/LOW TEMPERATURE RTD ALARM
2783
RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp RTD Alarm
2784
RRTD 4 - Assign Alarm Relays
2785
RRTD 4 - Short / Low Temp Alarm Events
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
27A0
Trip Relay Reset Mode
27A1
Alarm Relay Reset Mode
27A2
Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode
27A3
Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode
27A4
Trip Relay Operation
27A5
Alarm Relay Operation
27A6
Aux1 Relay Operation
27A7
Aux2 Relay Operation
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
27B0
Trip Relay Reset Mode
27B1
Alarm Relay Reset Mode
27B2
Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode
27B3
Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode
27B4
Trip Relay Operation
27B5
Alarm Relay Operation
27B6
Aux1 Relay Operation
27B7
Aux2 Relay Operation
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
27C0
Trip Relay Reset Mode
27C1
Alarm Relay Reset Mode
27C2
Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode
27C3
Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode
27C4
Trip Relay Operation
27C5
Alarm Relay Operation
27C6
Aux1 Relay Operation
27C7
Aux2 Relay Operation
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – OUTPUT RELAY SETUP
27D0
Trip Relay Reset Mode
27D1
Alarm Relay Reset Mode
27D2
Aux 1 Relay Reset Mode
27D3
Aux 2 Relay Reset Mode
9-76
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
7
200
2
7
200
1
2
13
7
200
3
127
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
°C
°C
°C
-
FORMAT
CODE
F113
F1
F115
F113
F1
F103
F115
F122
F111
F1
F120
F1
FACTORY
DEFAULT
2
130
0
1
130
0
0
1
1
130
0
’R’
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
32
127
1
-
F1
""
0
0
0
2
7
1
1
1
1
-
F115
F113
F103
0
1
0
0
0
0
-
2
7
1
-
1
1
1
-
-
F115
F113
F103
-
0
1
0
-
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F117
F117
F117
F117
F161
F161
F161
F161
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F117
F117
F117
F117
F161
F161
F161
F161
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F117
F117
F117
F117
F161
F161
F161
F161
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
-
F117
F117
F117
F117
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 43 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
27D4
Trip Relay Operation
27D5
Alarm Relay Operation
27D6
Aux1 Relay Operation
27D7
Aux2 Relay Operation
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – ANALOG OUTPUTS
27E0
Enable Analog Output 1
27E1
Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range
27E2
Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter
27E3
Analog Output 1 Minimum
27E4
Analog Output 1 Maximum
27E5
Enable Analog Output 2
27E6
Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range
27E7
Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter
27E8
Analog Output 2 Minimum
27E9
Analog Output 2 Maximum
27EA
Enable Analog Output 3
27EB
Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range
27EC
Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter
27ED
Analog Output 3 Minimum
27EE
Analog Output 3 Maximum
27EF
Enable Analog Output 4
27F0
Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range
27F1
Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter
27F2
Analog Output 4 Minimum
27F3
Analog Output 4 Maximum
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – ANALOG OUTPUTS
2800
Enable Analog Output 1
2801
Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range
2802
Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter
2803
Analog Output 1 Minimum
2804
Analog Output 1 Maximum
2805
Enable Analog Output 2
2806
Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range
2807
Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter
2808
Analog Output 2 Minimum
2809
Analog Output 2 Maximum
280A
Enable Analog Output 3
280B
Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range
280C
Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter
280D
Analog Output 3 Minimum
280E
Analog Output 3 Maximum
280F
Enable Analog Output 4
2810
Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range
2811
Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter
2812
Analog Output 4 Minimum
2813
Analog Output 4 Maximum
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – ANALOG OUTPUTS
2820
Enable Analog Output 1
2821
Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range
2822
Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter
2823
Analog Output 1 Minimum
2824
Analog Output 1 Maximum
2825
Enable Analog Output 2
2826
Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range
2827
Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter
2828
Analog Output 2 Minimum
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
1
1
1
1
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F161
F161
F161
F161
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-77
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 44 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2829
Analog Output 2 Maximum
282A
Enable Analog Output 3
282B
Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range
282C
Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter
282D
Analog Output 3 Minimum
282E
Analog Output 3 Maximum
282F
Enable Analog Output 4
2830
Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range
2831
Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter
2832
Analog Output 4 Minimum
2833
Analog Output 4 Maximum
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – ANALOG OUTPUTS
2840
Enable Analog Output 1
2841
Assign Analog Output 1 Output Range
2842
Assign Analog Output 1 Parameter
2843
Analog Output 1 Minimum
2844
Analog Output 1 Maximum
2845
Enable Analog Output 2
2846
Assign Analog Output 2 Output Range
2847
Assign Analog Output 2 Parameter
2848
Analog Output 2 Minimum
2849
Analog Output 2 Maximum
284A
Enable Analog Output 3
284B
Assign Analog Output 3 Output Range
284C
Assign Analog Output 3 Parameter
284D
Analog Output 3 Minimum
284E
Analog Output 3 Maximum
284F
Enable Analog Output 4
2850
Assign Analog Output 4 Output Range
2851
Assign Analog Output 4 Parameter
2852
Analog Output 4 Minimum
2853
Analog Output 4 Maximum
2854
Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 2
2860
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name
↓
↓
2865
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name
2870
Digital Input 2 Type
2871
Reserved
2872
Digital Input 2 Alarm
2873
Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays
2874
Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay
2875
Digital Input 2 Alarm Events
2876
Digital Input 2 Trip
2877
Digital Input 2 Trip Relays
2878
Digital Input 2 Trip Delay
2879
Digital Input 2 Assignable Function
--Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 5
2880
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name
↓
↓
2885
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name
2890
Digital Input 5 Type
2891
Reserved
2892
Digital Input 5 Alarm
2893
Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays
2894
Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay
2895
Digital Input 5 Alarm Events
9-78
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
FACTORY
DEFAULT
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
0
0
12
-40
-40
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
2
24
200
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
F103
F26
F127
F4
F4
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
0
0
13
-40
200
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
0
0
50
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 45 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2896
Digital Input 5 Trip
2897
Digital Input 5 Trip Relays
2898
Digital Input 5 Trip Delay
2899
Digital Input 5 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 4
28A0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name
↓
↓
28A5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name
28B0
Digital Input 4 Type
28B1
Reserved
28B2
Digital Input 4 Alarm
28B3
Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays
28B4
Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay
28B5
Digital Input 4 Alarm Events
28B6
Digital Input 4 Trip
28B7
Digital Input 4 Trip Relays
28B8
Digital Input 4 Trip Delay
28B9
Digital Input 4 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 1
28C0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name
↓
↓
28C5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name
28D0
Digital Input 1 Type
28D1
Reserved
28D2
Digital Input 1 Alarm
28D3
Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays
28D4
Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay
28D5
Digital Input 1 Alarm Events
28D6
Digital Input 1 Trip
28D7
Digital Input 1 Trip Relays
28D8
Digital Input 1 Trip Delay
28D9
Digital Input 1 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 6
28E0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 6 Name
↓
↓
28E5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name
28F0
Digital Input 6 Type
28F1
Reserved
28F2
Digital Input 6 Alarm
28F3
Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays
28F4
Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay
28F5
Digital Input 6 Alarm Events
28F6
Digital Input 6 Trip
28F7
Digital Input 6 Trip Relays
28F8
Digital Input 6 Trip Delay
28F9
Digital Input 6 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL INPUT 3
2900
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 3 Name
↓
↓
2905
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name
2910
Digital Input 3 Type
2911
Reserved
2912
Digital Input 3 Alarm
2913
Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays
2914
Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
2
6
50000
3
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
100ms
-
FORMAT
CODE
F115
F111
F2
F163
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
50
0
0
0
1
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
2
6
50000
1
1
1
100ms
F115
F113
F2
0
0
50
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-79
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 46 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2915
Digital Input 3 Alarm Events
2916
Digital Input 3 Trip
2917
Digital Input 3 Trip Relays
2918
Digital Input 3 Trip Delay
2919
Digital Input 3 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL INPUT 2
2920
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name
↓
↓
2925
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name
2930
Digital Input 2 Type
2931
Reserved
2932
Digital Input 2 Alarm
2933
Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays
2934
Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay
2935
Digital Input 2 Alarm Events
2936
Digital Input 2 Trip
2937
Digital Input 2 Trip Relays
2938
Digital Input 2 Trip Delay
2939
Digital Input 2 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL INPUT 5
2940
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name
↓
↓
2945
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name
2950
Digital Input 5 Type
2951
Reserved
2952
Digital Input 5 Alarm
2953
Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays
2954
Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay
2955
Digital Input 5 Alarm Events
2956
Digital Input 5 Trip
2957
Digital Input 5 Trip Relays
2958
Digital Input 5 Trip Delay
2959
Digital Input 5 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL INPUT 4
2960
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name
↓
↓
2965
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name
2970
Digital Input 4 Type
2971
Reserved
2972
Digital Input 4 Alarm
2973
Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays
2974
Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay
2975
Digital Input 4 Alarm Events
2976
Digital Input 4 Trip
2977
Digital Input 4 Trip Relays
2978
Digital Input 4 Trip Delay
2979
Digital Input 4 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL INPUT 1
2980
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name
↓
↓
2985
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name
2990
Digital Input 1 Type
2991
Reserved
2992
Digital Input 1 Alarm
2993
Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays
9-80
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
1
2
6
50000
3
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
-
FORMAT
CODE
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
50
0
0
0
0
1
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
2
6
1
1
-
F115
F113
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 47 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2994
Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay
2995
Digital Input 1 Alarm Events
2996
Digital Input 1 Trip
2997
Digital Input 1 Trip Relays
2998
Digital Input 1 Trip Delay
2999
Digital Input 1 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL INPUT 6
29A0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 6 Name
↓
↓
29A5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name
29B0
Digital Input 6 Type
29B1
Reserved
29B2
Digital Input 6 Alarm
29B3
Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays
29B4
Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay
29B5
Digital Input 6 Alarm Events
29B6
Digital Input 6 Trip
29B7
Digital Input 6 Trip Relays
29B8
Digital Input 6 Trip Delay
29B9
Digital Input 6 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL INPUT 3
29C0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 3 Name
↓
↓
29C5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name
29D0
Digital Input 3 Type
29D1
Reserved
29D2
Digital Input 3 Alarm
29D3
Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays
29D4
Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay
29D5
Digital Input 3 Alarm Events
29D6
Digital Input 3 Trip
29D7
Digital Input 3 Trip Relays
29D8
Digital Input 3 Trip Delay
29D9
Digital Input 3 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – DIGITAL INPUT 2
29E0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name
↓
↓
29E5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name
29F0
Digital Input 2 Type
29F1
Reserved
29F2
Digital Input 2 Alarm
29F3
Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays
29F4
Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay
29F5
Digital Input 2 Alarm Events
29F6
Digital Input 2 Trip
29F7
Digital Input 2 Trip Relays
29F8
Digital Input 2 Trip Delay
29F9
Digital Input 2 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – DIGITAL INPUT 5
2A00
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name
↓
↓
2A05
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name
2A10
Digital Input 5 Type
2A11
Reserved
2A12
Digital Input 5 Alarm
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
FORMAT
CODE
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
FACTORY
DEFAULT
50
0
0
0
50
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
2
1
-
F115
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-81
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 48 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2A13
Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays
2A14
Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay
2A15
Digital Input 5 Alarm Events
2A16
Digital Input 5 Trip
2A17
Digital Input 5 Trip Relays
2A18
Digital Input 5 Trip Delay
2A19
Digital Input 5 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – DIGITAL INPUT 4
2A20
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name
↓
↓
2A25
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name
2A30
Digital Input 4 Type
2A31
Reserved
2A32
Digital Input 4 Alarm
2A33
Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays
2A34
Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay
2A35
Digital Input 4 Alarm Events
2A36
Digital Input 4 Trip
2A37
Digital Input 4 Trip Relays
2A38
Digital Input 4 Trip Delay
2A39
Digital Input 4 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – DIGITAL INPUT 1
2A40
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name
↓
↓
2A45
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name
2A50
Digital Input 1 Type
2A51
Reserved
2A52
Digital Input 1 Alarm
2A53
Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays
2A54
Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay
2A55
Digital Input 1 Alarm Events
2A56
Digital Input 1 Trip
2A57
Digital Input 1 Trip Relays
2A58
Digital Input 1 Trip Delay
2A59
Digital Input 1 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – DIGITAL INPUT 6
2A60
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 6 Name
↓
↓
2A65
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name
2A70
Digital Input 6 Type
2A71
Reserved
2A72
Digital Input 6 Alarm
2A73
Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays
2A74
Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay
2A75
Digital Input 6 Alarm Events
2A76
Digital Input 6 Trip
2A77
Digital Input 6 Trip Relays
2A78
Digital Input 6 Trip Delay
2A79
Digital Input 6 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – DIGITAL INPUT 3
2A80
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 3 Name
↓
↓
2A85
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name
2A90
Digital Input 3 Type
2A91
Reserved
9-82
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
FORMAT
CODE
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 49 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2A92
Digital Input 3 Alarm
2A93
Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays
2A94
Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay
2A95
Digital Input 3 Alarm Events
2A96
Digital Input 3 Trip
2A97
Digital Input 3 Trip Relays
2A98
Digital Input 3 Trip Delay
2A99
Digital Input 3 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 2
2AA0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 2 Name
↓
↓
2AA5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 2 Name
2AB0
Digital Input 2 Type
2AB1
Reserved
2AB2
Digital Input 2 Alarm
2AB3
Digital Input 2 Alarm Relays
2AB4
Digital Input 2 Alarm Delay
2AB5
Digital Input 2 Alarm Events
2AB6
Digital Input 2 Trip
2AB7
Digital Input 2 Trip Relays
2AB8
Digital Input 2 Trip Delay
2AB9
Digital Input 2 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 5
2AC0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 5 Name
↓
↓
2AC5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 5 Name
2AD0
Digital Input 5 Type
2AD1
Reserved
2AD2
Digital Input 5 Alarm
2AD3
Digital Input 5 Alarm Relays
2AD4
Digital Input 5 Alarm Delay
2AD5
Digital Input 5 Alarm Events
2AD6
Digital Input 5 Trip
2AD7
Digital Input 5 Trip Relays
2AD8
Digital Input 5 Trip Delay
2AD9
Digital Input 5 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 4
2AE0
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 4 Name
↓
↓
2AE5
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 4 Name
2AF0
Digital Input 4 Type
2AF1
Reserved
2AF2
Digital Input 4 Alarm
2AF3
Digital Input 4 Alarm Relays
2AF4
Digital Input 4 Alarm Delay
2AF5
Digital Input 4 Alarm Events
2AF6
Digital Input 4 Trip
2AF7
Digital Input 4 Trip Relays
2AF8
Digital Input 4 Trip Delay
2AF9
Digital Input 4 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 1
2B00
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 1 Name
↓
↓
2B05
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 1 Name
2B10
Digital Input 1 Type
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
STEP
VALUE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
FORMAT
CODE
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-83
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 50 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
2B11
Reserved
2B12
Digital Input 1 Alarm
2B13
Digital Input 1 Alarm Relays
2B14
Digital Input 1 Alarm Delay
2B15
Digital Input 1 Alarm Events
2B16
Digital Input 1 Trip
2B17
Digital Input 1 Trip Relays
2B18
Digital Input 1 Trip Delay
2B19
Digital Input 1 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 6
2B20
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 6 Name
↓
↓
2B25
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 6 Name
2B30
Digital Input 6 Type
2B31
Reserved
2B32
Digital Input 6 Alarm
2B33
Digital Input 6 Alarm Relays
2B34
Digital Input 6 Alarm Delay
2B35
Digital Input 6 Alarm Events
2B36
Digital Input 6 Trip
2B37
Digital Input 6 Trip Relays
2B38
Digital Input 6 Trip Delay
2B39
Digital Input 6 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – DIGITAL INPUT 3
2B40
1st & 2nd Character of Digital Input 3 Name
↓
↓
2B45
11th & 12th Character of Digital Input 3 Name
2B50
Digital Input 3 Type
2B51
Reserved
2B52
Digital Input 3 Alarm
2B53
Digital Input 3 Alarm Relays
2B54
Digital Input 3 Alarm Delay
2B55
Digital Input 3 Alarm Events
2B56
Digital Input 3 Trip
2B57
Digital Input 3 Trip Relays
2B58
Digital Input 3 Trip Delay
2B59
Digital Input 3 Assignable Function
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – TEST OUPUT RELAYS
2B60
Force Trip Relay
2B61
Force Trip Relay Duration
2B62
Force AUX1 Relay
2B63
Force AUX1 Relay Duration
2B64
Force AUX2 Relay
2B65
Force AUX2 Relay Duration
2B66
Force Alarm Relay
2B67
Force Alarm Relay Range
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – TEST OUPUT RELAYS
2B70
Force Trip Relay
2B71
Force Trip Relay Duration
2B72
Force AUX1 Relay
2B73
Force AUX1 Relay Duration
2B74
Force AUX2 Relay
2B75
Force AUX2 Relay Duration
2B76
Force Alarm Relay
2B77
Force Alarm Relay Range
9-84
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
32
127
1
-
F22
’GE’
32
0
127
1
1
1
-
F22
F116
’GE’
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
2
6
50000
1
2
6
50000
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
100ms
100ms
-
F115
F113
F2
F103
F115
F111
F2
F163
0
0
50
0
0
0
50
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
01
2
300
2
300
2
300
2
300
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
s
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
300
2
300
2
300
2
300
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
s
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 51 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – TEST OUPUT RELAYS
2B80
Force Trip Relay
2B81
Force Trip Relay Duration
2B82
Force AUX1 Relay
2B83
Force AUX1 Relay Duration
2B84
Force AUX2 Relay
2B85
Force AUX2 Relay Duration
2B86
Force Alarm Relay
2B87
Force Alarm Relay Range
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – TEST OUPUT RELAYS
2B90
Force Trip Relay
2B91
Force Trip Relay Duration
2B92
Force AUX1 Relay
2B93
Force AUX1 Relay Duration
2B94
Force AUX2 Relay
2B95
Force AUX2 Relay Duration
2B96
Force Alarm Relay
2B97
Force Alarm Relay Range
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
2BA0
Force Analog Outputs
2BA1
Analog Output 1 Forced Value
2BA2
Analog Output 2 Forced Value
2BA3
Analog Output 3 Forced Value
2BA4
Analog Output 4 Forced Value
...
Reserved
RRTD 2 – TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
2BB0
Force Analog Outputs
2BB1
Analog Output 1 Forced Value
2BB2
Analog Output 2 Forced Value
2BB3
Analog Output 3 Forced Value
2BB4
Analog Output 4 Forced Value
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
2BC0
Force Analog Outputs
2BC1
Analog Output 1 Forced Value
2BC2
Analog Output 2 Forced Value
2BC3
Analog Output 3 Forced Value
2BC4
Analog Output 4 Forced Value
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – TEST ANALOG OUTPUTS
2BD0
Force Analog Outputs
2BD1
Analog Output 1 Forced Value
2BD2
Analog Output 2 Forced Value
2BD3
Analog Output 3 Forced Value
2BD4
Analog Output 4 Forced Value
...
Reserved
RRTD 1 – DIGITAL COUNTER
2BE0
First Character of Counter Name
2BEC
First Character of Counter Unit Name
2BF2
Counter Type
2BF3
Digital Counter Alarm
2BF4
Assign Alarm Relays
2BF5
Counter Alarm Level
2BF7
Reserved
2BF8
Record Alarms as Events
...
Reserved
GE Multilin
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
300
2
300
2
300
2
300
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
s
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
300
2
300
2
300
2
300
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
s
s
s
s
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
F150
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
% range
% range
% range
% range
F126
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
% range
% range
% range
% range
F126
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
% range
% range
% range
% range
F126
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
100
100
100
100
1
1
1
1
1
% range
% range
% range
% range
F126
F1
F1
F1
F1
0
0
0
0
0
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
127
127
1
2
6
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F114
F115
F113
F1
F103
“G”
‘U’
0
0
0
100
0
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-85
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 52 of 53)
9
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
RRTD 2 – DIGITAL COUNTER
2C00
First Character of Counter Name
2C0C
First Character of Counter Unit Name
2C12
Counter Type
2C13
Digital Counter Alarm
2C14
Assign Alarm Relays
2C15
Counter Alarm Level
2C17
Reserved
2C18
Record Alarms as Events
...
Reserved
RRTD 3 – DIGITAL COUNTER
2C20
First Character of Counter Name
2C2C
First Character of Counter Unit Name
2C32
Counter Type
2C33
Digital Counter Alarm
2C34
Assign Alarm Relays
2C35
Counter Alarm Level
2C37
Reserved
2C38
Record Alarms as Events
...
Reserved
RRTD 4 – DIGITAL COUNTER
2C40
First Character of Counter Name
2C4C
First Character of Counter Unit Name
2C52
Counter Type
2C53
Digital Counter Alarm
2C54
Assign Alarm Relays
2C55
Counter Alarm Level
2C57
Reserved
2C58
Record Alarms as Events
...
Reserved
EVENT RECORDER / TRACE MEMORY (ADDRESSES 3000 TO 3FFF)
EVENT RECORDER
3000
Event Recorder Last Reset (2 words)
3002
Total Number of Events Since Last Clear
3003
Event Record Selector (1=oldest, 250=newest)
3004
Cause of Event
3005
Time of Event (2 words)
3007
Date of Event (2 words)
...
Reserved
300B
Event Phase A Current
300C
Event Phase B Current
300D
Event Phase C Current
300E
Event Motor Load
300F
Event Current Unbalance
3010
Event Ground Current
3011
Reserved
3012
Event Hottest Stator RTD
3013
Event Temperature of Hottest Stator RTD
...
Reserved
301A
Event Voltage Vab
301B
Event Voltage Vbc
301C
Event Voltage Vca
301D
Event Voltage Van
301E
Event Voltage Vbn
301F
Event Voltage Vcn
3020
Event System Frequency
3021
Event Real Power
3022
Event Reactive Power
3023
Event Apparent Power
9-86
MIN.
MAX.
STEP
VALUE
UNITS
FORMAT
CODE
FACTORY
DEFAULT
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
127
127
1
2
6
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F114
F115
F113
F1
F103
“G”
‘U’
0
0
0
100
0
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
127
127
1
2
6
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F114
F115
F113
F1
F103
“G”
‘U’
0
0
0
100
0
32
32
0
0
0
0
0
127
127
1
2
6
65535
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
-
F1
F1
F114
F115
F113
F1
F103
“G”
‘U’
0
0
0
100
0
N/A
0
1
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
65535
250
281
N/A
N/A
N/A
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
F18
F1
F1
F134
F19
F18
N/A
0
1
0
N/A
N/A
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-40
65535
65535
65535
2000
100
50000
12
200
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A
A
A
FLA
%
A
oC
F1
F1
F1
F3
F1
F23
F1
F4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-32000
-32000
0
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
20000
12000
32000
32000
50000
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
V
V
V
V
V
V
Hz
kW
kvar
kVA
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F1
F3
F4
F4
F1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–8: MEMORY MAP (Sheet 53 of 53)
ADDR
DESCRIPTION
(hex)
3024
Event Power Factor
...
Reserved
WAVEFORM CAPTURE
30F0
Trace Memory Clear Date
30F2
Trace Memory Clear Time
30F4
Trace Memory Triggers Since Last Clear
30F5
Trace Memory Buffer Selector
30F6
Trace Memory Channel Selector
30F7
Trace Memory Trigger Date
30F9
Trace Memory Trigger Time
30FB
Trace Memory Trigger Cause
30FC
Trace Memory Trigger Index
...
Reserved
3100
First Trace Memory Sample
↓
↓
31FF
Last Trace Memory Sample
3200
Reserved
...
Reserved
3FFF
Reserved
MIN.
MAX.
UNITS
100
STEP
VALUE
1
-
FORMAT
CODE
F21
FACTORY
DEFAULT
0
-99
N/A
N/A
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
0
0
N/A
N/A
65535
3
6
N/A
N/A
2
100
N/A
N/A
1
1
1
N/A
N/A
1
1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
%
F18
F19
F1
F1
F1
F18
F19
F85
F1
N/A
N/A
0
0
0
N/A
N/A
N/A
NA
-32767
32767
1
-
F4
N/A
-32767
32767
1
-
F4
N/A
9.6.6 FORMAT CODES
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 1 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
F1
16 bits
UNSIGNED VALUE
Example: 1234 stored as 1234
F2
16 bits
UNSIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACE
Example: 123.4 stored as 1234
F3
16 bits
UNSIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES
Example: 12.34 stored as 1234
F4
16 bits
2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE
Example: -1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F5
16 bits
2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 1 DECIMAL PLACES
Example: -123.4 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F6
16 bits
2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES
Example: -12.34 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F7
16 bits
2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 3 DECIMAL PLACES
Example: -1.234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F8
16 bits
2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 4 DECIMAL PLACES
Example: -0.1234 stored as -1234 (i.e. 64302)
F13
16 bits
INSTALLED OPTIONS
F15
xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx1
Profibus-DP (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx xxxx xxxx xx1x
Fiber Optic (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx xxxx xxxx x1xx
Metering (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx xxxx xxxx 1xxx
Backspin (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx xxxx xxx1 xxxx
Local RTD (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx xxxx xx1x xxxx
Power Supply Type (0 = LO, 1 = HI)
xxxx xxxx 1xxx xxxx
Modbus/TCP (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx xxx1 xxxx xxxx
DeviceNet (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx xx1x xxxx xxxx
Harsh Environment (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
xxxx x1xx xxxx xxxx
Profibus-DPV1 (0 = Not Installed, 1 = Installed)
16 bits
HARDWARE REVISION
0000 0000 0000 0001
1=A
0000 0000 0000 0010
2=B
--0000 0000 0001 1010
GE Multilin
9
...
26 = Z
369 Motor Management Relay
9-87
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 2 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F16
16 bits
SOFTWARE REVISION
1111 1111 xxxx xxxx
Major Revision Number, 0 to 9 in steps of 1
xxxx xxxx 1111 1111
Minor Revision Number (two BCD digits), 00 to 99 in steps of 1
Example: Revision 2.30 stored as 0230 hex
32 bits
DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
Example: Feb. 20, 1995 stored as 34867142 (i.e. 1st word: 0214, 2nd word 07C6)
1st byte
Month (1 to 12)
F18
F19
DEFINITION
2nd byte
Day (1 to 31)
3rd and 4th byte
Year (1998 to 2097)
32 bits
TIME (HH:MM:SS:hh)
Example: 2:05pm stored as 235208704 (i.e. 1st word: 0E05, 2nd word 0000)
1st byte
Hours (0 to 23)
2nd byte
Minutes (0 to 59)
3rd byte
Seconds (0 to 59)
4th byte
Hundreds of seconds (0 to 99) - Not used by 369
F20
16 bits
2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED LONG VALUE
Example: 1234 stored as 1234. Note: -1 means “Never”
F21
16 bits
2’s COMPLEMENT SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES (Power Factor)
Example: Power Factor of 0.87 lag is used as 87 (i.e. 0057)
<0
Leading Power Factor - Negative
F22
>0
Lagging Power Factor - Positive
16 bits
TWO 8-BIT CHARACTERS PACKED INTO 16-BIT UNSIGNED
Example: String "AB" stored as 4142 hex.
MSB
First Character
LSB
Second Character
F23
16 Bits
UNSIGNED VALUE (For 1A/5 A CT, 1Decimal Place) (For 50: 0.025 A CT, 2 Decimal Places)
Example: For 1A/5A CT, G/F current = 1000.0 A
Example: For 50: 0.025 A CT, G/F current = 25.00
F26
16 Bits
ANALOG OUTPUT SELECTION
0
0 - 1mA
1
0 - 20 mA
2
4 - 20 mA
F27
F30
16 Bits
BACKSPIN DETECTION STATE
0
Motor Running
1
No Backspin
2
Slowdown
3
Acceleration
4
---
5
Backspinning
6
Prediction
7
Soon to Restart
16 Bits
DISABLE/ENABLE SELECTION
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
9
9-88
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 3 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F31
16 Bits
COMMAND FUNCTION CODES
0
Not in use
1
Reset 369
2
Motor Start
3
Motor Stop
4
Waveform Trigger
F85
F100
F101
F102
F103
F104
F105
F106
F107
DEFINITION
5
Reserved
6
Clear Trip Counters
7
Clear Last Trip Data
8
Reserved
9
Reserved
10
Clear RTD Maximums
11
Reset Motor Info
12
Clear/Reset all Data
20
Block/Unblock Protection Functions
21
Force Output Relays
Unsigned 16 bit integer
WAVEFORM CAPTURE TRIGGER CAUSE
0
None
1
Manual
2
Automatic
Unsigned 16 bit integer
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY UNITS
0
Celsius
1
Fahrenheit
Unsigned 16 bit integer
BAUD RATE
0
1200 baud
1
2400 baud
2
4800 baud
3
9600 baud
4
19200 baud
Unsigned 16 bit integer
PARITY
0
None
1
Odd
2
Even
Unsigned 16 bit integer
OFF/ON OR NO/YES SELECTION
0
Off / No
1
On / Yes
Unsigned 16 bit integer
GROUND CT TYPE
0
None
1
1 A Secondary
2
5 A Secondary
3
Multilin CT 50/0.025
Unsigned 16 bit integer
CT TYPE
0
None
1
1 A Secondary
2
5 A Secondary
Unsigned 16 bit integer
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER CONNECTION TYPE
0
None
1
Open Delta
2
Wye
Unsigned 16 bit integer
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
0
60 Hz
1
50 Hz
2
Variable
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-89
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 4 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F108
Unsigned 16 bit integer
REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTING TRANSITION ON
0
Current Only
1
Current or Timer
2
Current and Timer
F109
F110
F111
F112
DEFINITION
Unsigned 16 bit integer
STARTER STATUS SWITCH
0
Starter Aux a (52a)
1
Starter Aux b (52b)
Unsigned 16 bit integer
EMERGENCY RESTART SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0
Off
1
Emergency Switch
2
General Switch
3
Digital Counter
4
Waveform Capture
5
DeviceNet Control
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Unsigned 16 bit integer
TRIP RELAYS
0
none
1
Trip
2
Aux1
3
Aux2
4
Trip & Aux1
5
Trip & Aux2
6
Aux1 & Aux2
7
Trip & Aux1 & Aux2
Unsigned 16 bit integer
NOT DEFINED
0
1
F113
F114
F115
F116
9
F117
9-90
Unsigned 16 bit integer
ALARM RELAYS
0
None
1
Alarm
2
Aux1
3
Aux2
4
Alarm & Aux1
5
Alarm & Aux2
6
Aux1 & Aux2
7
Alarm & Aux1 & Aux2
Unsigned 16 bit integer
COUNTER TYPE
0
Increment
1
Decrement
Unsigned 16 bit integer
ALARM/TRIP TYPE SELECTION
0
Off
1
Latched
2
Unlatched
Unsigned 16 bit integer
SWITCH TYPE
0
Normally Open
1
Normally Closed
Unsigned 16 bit integer
RESET MODE
0
All Resets
1
Remote Reset Only
2
Local Reset Only
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 5 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F119
Unsigned 16 bit integer
BACKUP RELAYS
0
None
1
Aux 1
F120
F121
F122
F123
F124
F125
DEFINITION
2
Aux1 & Aux2
3
Aux2
Unsigned 16 bit integer
RTD TYPE
0
100 Ohm Platinum
1
120 Ohm Nickel
2
100 Ohm Nickel
3
10 Ohm Copper
Unsigned 16 bit integer
RTD APPLICATION
0
None
1
Stator
2
Bearing
3
Ambient
4
Other
Unsigned 16 bit integer
LOCAL/REMOTE RTD VOTING SELECTION
0
Off
1
RTD #1
2
RTD #2
3
RTD #3
4
RTD #4
5
RTD #5
6
RTD #6
7
RTD #7
8
RTD #8
9
RTD #9
10
RTD #10
11
RTD #11
12
RTD #12
13
All Stator
Unsigned 16 bit integer
ALARM STATUS
0
Off
1
Not Active
2
Timing Out
3
Active
4
Latched
Unsigned 16 bit integer
PHASE ROTATION AT MOTOR TERMINALS
0
ABC
1
ACB
Unsigned 16 bit integer
STARTER TYPE
0
Breaker
1
Contactor
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-91
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 6 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F127
Unsigned 16 bit integer
ANALOG OUTPUT PARAMETER SELECTION
0
Phase A Current
1
Phase B Current
2
Phase C Current
3
Average Phase Current
4
AB Line Voltage
5
BC Line Voltage
6
CA Line Voltage
7
Average Line Voltage
8
Phase AN Voltage
F127
ctd.
F128
F130
F131
9
F133
9-92
DEFINITION
9
Phase BN Voltage
10
Phase CN Voltage
11
Average Phase Voltage
12
Hottest Stator RTD
13
Local RTD #1
14
Local RTD #2
15
Local RTD #3
16
Local RTD #4
17
Local RTD #5
18
Local RTD #6
19
Local RTD #7
20
Local RTD #8
21
Local RTD #9
22
Local RTD #10
23
Local RTD #11
24
Local RTD #12
25
Power Factor
26
Reactive Power (kvar)
27
Real Power (kW)
28
Apparent Power (KVA)
29
Thermal Capacity Used
30
Relay Lockout Time
31
Reserved
32
Reserved
33
Reserved
34
Reserved
35
Motor Load
36
MWhrs
Unsigned 16 bit integer
CURVE STYLE
0
Standard
1
Custom
Unsigned 16 bit integer
DIGITAL INPUT PICKUP TYPE
0
Over
1
Under
Unsigned 16 bit integer
INPUT SWITCH STATUS
0
Open
1
Closed
Unsigned 16 bit integer
MOTOR STATUS
0
Stopped
1
Starting
2
Running
3
Overloaded
4
Tripped
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 7 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F134
Unsigned 16 bit integer
DEFINITION
CAUSE OF EVENT
0
No Event
1
Forced Setpoints Dump
2
Speed Switch Trip
3
Differential Switch Trip
4
Reserved
5
Spare Switch Trip
6
Emergency Switch Trip
7
Unexpected Reset
8
EEPROM Memory
9
Reset Switch Trip
10
Upgrade Default Dump
11
Overload Trip
12
Short Circuit Trip
13
Short Circuit Backup Trip
14
Mechanical Jam Trip
15
Undercurrent Trip
16
Current Unbalance Trip
17
Single Phasing Trip
18
Ground Fault Trip
19
Ground Fault Backup Trip
20
Overload Block
21
Acceleration Timer Trip
22
Start Inhibit Block
23
Starts Hour Block
24
Time Between Starts Block
25
Restart Block
26
Backspin Block
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-93
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 8 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
F134
con’t
27
Single Shot Restart
28
Undervoltage Trip
29
Overvoltage Trip
30
Voltage Phase Reversal Trip
31
Underfrequency Trip
32
Overfrequency Trip
33
Lead Power Factor Trip
34
Lag Power Factor Trip
9
9-94
35
Positive Kvar Trip
36
Negative Kvar Trip
37
Underpower Trip
38
Reverse Power Trip
39
RTD1 Trip
40
RTD2 Trip
41
RTD3 Trip
42
RTD4 Trip
43
RTD5 Trip
44
RTD6 Trip
45
RTD7 Trip
46
RTD8 Trip
47
RTD9 Trip
48
RTD10 Trip
49
RTD11 Trip
50
RTD12 Trip
51
Reserved
52
Reserved
53
Spare Switch Alarm
54
Emergency Switch Alarm
55
Diff Switch Alarm
56
Speed Switch Alarm
57
Reset Switch Alarm
58
Reserved
59
Thermal Capacity Alarm
60
Overload Alarm
61
Mechanical Jam Alarm
62
Undercurrent Alarm
63
Current Unbalance Alarm
64
Ground Fault Alarm
65
Undervoltage Alarm
66
Overvoltage Alarm
67
Overfrequency Alarm
68
Underfrequency Alarm
69
Lead Power Factor Alarm
70
Lag Power Factor Alarm
71
Positive Kvar Alarm
72
Negative Kvar Alarm
73
Underpower Alarm
74
Reverse Power Alarm
75
RTD1 Alarm
76
RTD2 Alarm
77
RTD3 Alarm
78
RTD4 Alarm
79
RTD5 Alarm
80
RTD6 Alarm
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 9 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
F134
con’t
81
RTD7 Alarm
82
RTD8 Alarm
83
RTD9 Alarm
84
RTD10 Alarm
85
RTD11 Alarm
86
RTD12 Alarm
87
RTD1 Hi Alarm
88
RTD2 Hi Alarm
89
RTD3 Hi Alarm
90
RTD4 Hi Alarm
91
RTD5 Hi Alarm
92
RTD6 Hi Alarm
93
RTD7 Hi Alarm
94
RTD8 Hi Alarm
95
RTD9 Hi Alarm
96
RTD10 Hi Alarm
97
RTD11 Hi Alarm
98
RTD12 Hi Alarm
99
Open RTD Alarm
100
Lost RTD Comm Alarm
101
Low RTD Alarm
102
Trip Counter Alarm
103
Current Demand Alarm
104
Kw Demand Alarm
105
Kvar Demand Alarm
106
Kva Demand Alarm
107
Digital Counter Alarm
108
Service Alarm
109
Control Power Lost
110
Control Power App
111
Emergency Restart Closed
112
Emergency Restart Open
113
Start While Blocked
114
Reserved
115
Breaker Failure
116
Welded Contactor
117
Incomplete Sequence Trip
118
Reserved
119
Reserved
120
Reserved
121
RRTD1 RTD1 Trip
122
RRTD1 RTD2 Trip
123
RRTD1 RTD3 Trip
124
RRTD1 RTD4 Trip
125
RRTD1 RTD5 Trip
126
RRTD1 RTD6 Trip
127
RRTD1 RTD7 Trip
128
RRTD1 RTD8 Trip
129
RRTD1 RTD9 Trip
130
RRTD1 RTD10 Trip
131
RRTD1 RTD11 Trip
132
RRTD1 RTD12 Trip
133
RRTD2 RTD1 Trip
134
RRTD2 RTD2 Trip
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-95
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 10 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
F134
con’t
135
RRTD2 RTD3 Trip
136
RRTD2 RTD4 Trip
137
RRTD2 RTD5 Trip
138
RRTD2 RTD6 Trip
139
RRTD2 RTD7 Trip
140
RRTD2 RTD8 Trip
9
9-96
141
RRTD2 RTD9 Trip
142
RRTD2 RTD10 Trip
143
RRTD2 RTD11 Trip
144
RRTD2 RTD12 Trip
145
RRTD3 RTD1 Trip
146
RRTD3 RTD2 Trip
147
RRTD3 RTD3 Trip
148
RRTD3 RTD4 Trip
149
RRTD3 RTD5 Trip
150
RRTD3 RTD6 Trip
151
RRTD3 RTD7 Trip
152
RRTD3 RTD8 Trip
153
RRTD3 RTD9 Trip
154
RRTD3 RTD10 Trip
155
RRTD3 RTD11 Trip
156
RRTD3 RTD12 Trip
157
RRTD4 RTD1 Trip
158
RRTD4 RTD2 Trip
159
RRTD4 RTD3 Trip
160
RRTD4 RTD4 Trip
161
RRTD4 RTD5 Trip
162
RRTD4 RTD6 Trip
163
RRTD4 RTD7 Trip
164
RRTD4 RTD8 Trip
165
RRTD4 RTD9 Trip
166
RRTD4 RTD10 Trip
167
RRTD4 RTD11 Trip
168
RRTD4 RTD12 Trip
169
RRTD1 RTD1 Alarm
170
RRTD1 RTD2 Alarm
171
RRTD1 RTD3 Alarm
172
RRTD1 RTD4 Alarm
173
RRTD1 RTD5 Alarm
174
RRTD1 RTD6 Alarm
175
RRTD1 RTD7 Alarm
176
RRTD1 RTD8 Alarm
177
RRTD1 RTD9 Alarm
178
RRTD1 RTD10 Alarm
179
RRTD1 RTD11 Alarm
180
RRTD1 RTD12 Alarm
181
RRTD1 RTD1 Hi Alarm
182
RRTD1 RTD2 Hi Alarm
183
RRTD1 RTD3 Hi Alarm
184
RRTD1 RTD4 Hi Alarm
185
RRTD1 RTD5 Hi Alarm
186
RRTD1 RTD6 Hi Alarm
187
RRTD1 RTD7 Hi Alarm
188
RRTD1 RTD8 Hi Alarm
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 11 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
F134
con’t
189
RRTD1 RTD9 Hi Alarm
190
RRTD1 RTD10 Hi Alarm
191
RRTD1 RTD11 Hi Alarm
192
RRTD1 RTD12 Hi Alarm
193
RRTD1 Open RTD Alarm
194
RRTD1 Low RTD Alarm
195
RRTD2 RTD1 Alarm
196
RRTD2 RTD2 Alarm
197
RRTD2 RTD3 Alarm
198
RRTD2 RTD4 Alarm
199
RRTD2 RTD5 Alarm
200
RRTD2 RTD6 Alarm
201
RRTD2 RTD7 Alarm
202
RRTD2 RTD8 Alarm
203
RRTD2 RTD9 Alarm
204
RRTD2 RTD10 Alarm
205
RRTD2 RTD11 Alarm
206
RRTD2 RTD12 Alarm
207
RRTD2 RTD1 Hi Alarm
208
RRTD2 RTD2 Hi Alarm
209
RRTD2 RTD3 Hi Alarm
210
RRTD2 RTD4 Hi Alarm
211
RRTD2 RTD5 Hi Alarm
212
RRTD2 RTD6 Hi Alarm
213
RRTD2 RTD7 Hi Alarm
214
RRTD2 RTD8 Hi Alarm
215
RRTD2 RTD9 Hi Alarm
216
RRTD2 RTD10 Hi Alarm
217
RRTD2 RTD11 Hi Alarm
218
RRTD2 RTD12 Hi Alarm
219
RRTD2 Open RTD Alarm
220
RRTD2 Low RTD Alarm
221
RRTD3 RTD1 Alarm
222
RRTD3 RTD2 Alarm
223
RRTD3 RTD3 Alarm
224
RRTD3 RTD4 Alarm
225
RRTD3 RTD5 Alarm
226
RRTD3 RTD6 Alarm
227
RRTD3 RTD7 Alarm
228
RRTD3 RTD8 Alarm
229
RRTD3 RTD9 Alarm
230
RRTD3 RTD10 Alarm
231
RRTD3 RTD11 Alarm
232
RRTD3 RTD12 Alarm
233
RRTD3 RTD1 Hi Alarm
234
RRTD3 RTD2 Hi Alarm
235
RRTD3 RTD3 Hi Alarm
236
RRTD3 RTD4 Hi Alarm
237
RRTD3 RTD5 Hi Alarm
238
RRTD3 RTD6 Hi Alarm
239
RRTD3 RTD7 Hi Alarm
240
RRTD3 RTD8 Hi Alarm
241
RRTD3 RTD9 Hi Alarm
242
RRTD3 RTD10 Hi Alarm
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-97
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 12 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
F134
con’t
243
RRTD3 RTD11 Hi Alarm
9
9-98
244
RRTD3 RTD12 Hi Alarm
245
RRTD3 Open RTD Alarm
246
RRTD3 Low RTD Alarm
247
RRTD4 RTD1 Alarm
248
RRTD4 RTD2 Alarm
249
RRTD4 RTD3 Alarm
250
RRTD4 RTD4 Alarm
251
RRTD4 RTD5 Alarm
252
RRTD4 RTD6 Alarm
253
RRTD4 RTD7 Alarm
254
RRTD4 RTD8 Alarm
255
RRTD4 RTD9 Alarm
256
RRTD4 RTD10 Alarm
257
RRTD4 RTD11 Alarm
258
RRTD4 RTD12 Alarm
259
RRTD4 RTD1 Hi Alarm
260
RRTD4 RTD2 Hi Alarm
261
RRTD4 RTD3 Hi Alarm
262
RRTD4 RTD4 Hi Alarm
263
RRTD4 RTD5 Hi Alarm
264
RRTD4 RTD6 Hi Alarm
265
RRTD4 RTD7 Hi Alarm
266
RRTD4 RTD8 Hi Alarm
267
RRTD4 RTD9 Hi Alarm
268
RRTD4 RTD10 Hi Alarm
269
RRTD4 RTD11 Hi Alarm
270
RRTD4 RTD12 Hi Alarm
271
RRTD4 Open RTD Alarm
272
RRTD4 Low RTD Alarm
273
Power Failure
274
Software Reset
275
Clock Failure
276
A/D Failure
277
Autorestart Attempt
278
Autorestart Success
279
Autorestart Aborted 1
280
Autorestart Aborted 2
281
Autorestart Aborted 3
282
Autorestart Aborted 4
283
Autorestart Aborted 5
284
Motor Running
285
Motor Stopped
286
Anybus Comms Reset
287
RTD 1 Open Alarm
288
RTD 2 Open Alarm
289
RTD 3 Open Alarm
290
RTD 4 Open Alarm
291
RTD 5 Open Alarm
292
RTD 6 Open Alarm
293
RTD 7 Open Alarm
294
RTD 8 Open Alarm
295
RTD 9 Open Alarm
296
RTD 10 Open Alarm
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 13 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
DEFINITION
F134
con’t
297
RTD 11 Open Alarm
298
RTD 12 Open Alarm
F135
299
Starter Operation Monitor Alarm
300
Starter Operation Monitor Trip
301
Block Undercurrent/Underpower (37)
302
Unblock Undercurrent/Underpower (37)
303
Block Current Unbalance (46)
304
Unblock Current Unbalance (46)
305
Block Incomplete Sequence (48)
306
Unblock Incomplete Sequence (48)
307
Block Thermal Model (49)
308
Unblock Thermal Model (49)
309
Block Short Circuit and Backup (50)
310
Unblock Short Circuit and Backup (50)
311
Block Overload Alarm (51)
312
Unblock Overload Alarm (51)
313
Block Ground Fault (51G)
314
Unblock Ground Fault (51G)
315
Block Starts Per Hour and Time Between Starts (66)
316
Unblock Starts Per Hour and Time Between Starts (66)
Unsigned 16 bit integer
MOTOR SPEED
0
Low Speed (Speed 1)
1
High Speed (Speed 2)
F138
Reserved
Reserved
F139
Reserved
Reserved
F141
Unsigned 16 bit integer
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
bit 0
Trip
F149
F150
F151
F152
F156
bit 1
Alarm
bit 2
Auxiliary 1
bit 3
Auxiliary 2
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
CHANNEL 3 APPLICATION
0
MODBUS
1
Remote RTD
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
OUTPUT RELAY STATUS
0
De - Energized
1
Energized
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
CHANNEL TYPE
0
RS 485
1
Fiber Optic
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
NUMBER OF RECORDS
0
1 × 64 cycles
1
2 × 32 cycles
2
4 × 16 cycles
3
8 × 8 cycles
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
REMOTE RTD COMMUNICATION STATUS
0
Remote RTD Module Communication Lost
1
Remote RTD Communication on Line
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9
9-99
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 14 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F157
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0
OFF
1
Differential Switch
2
General Switch
3
Digital Counter
4
Waveform Capture
5
DeviceNet Control
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
F158
F159
F160
F161
F162
F163
9
F164
9-100
DEFINITION
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
SPEED SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0
OFF
1
Speed Switch
2
General Switch
3
Digital Counter
4
Waveform Capture
5
DeviceNet Control
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
SPARE SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0
OFF
1
Starter Status Switch
2
General Switch
3
Digital Counter
4
Waveform Capture
5
DeviceNet Control
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
RESET SWITCH INPUT FUNCTION
0
OFF
1
Reset Switch
2
General Switch
3
Digital Counter
4
Waveform Capture
5
DeviceNet Control
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
OUTPUT RELAY FAILSAFE CODE
0
Failsafe
1
Non Failsafe
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
ACCESS LEVEL
0
Read Only
1
Read / Write
2
Factory Service
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
RRTD DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTION
0
Off
1
undefined
2
General Switch
3
Digital Counter
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
COMMUNICATIONS MODULE STATUS
0x0001
Ethernet Connection OK
0x0002
IP Configuration OK
0x0004
IP Address Error
0x0008
Communications Module Error
0x0010
Network Activity Present
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9.6 MEMORY MAP
Table 9–9: MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS (Sheet 15 of 15)
CODE
TYPE
F165
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
OVERALL HOTTEST STATOR RTD OWNER
0
No RTDs programmed or available
1
Remote RTD #1
2
Remote RTD #2
3
Remote RTD #3
4
Remote RTD #4
5
Local 369
F166
F169
F180
F181
F182
DEFINITION
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
ENERGY UNIT DISPLAY
0
Mega
1
Kilo
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
TRIP AND ALARM RELAYS
0
None
1
Trip
2
Alarm
3
Aux1
4
Aux2
5
Trip and Alarm
6
Trip and Aux1
7
Trip and Aux2
8
Alarm and Aux1
9
Alarm and Aux2
10
Aux1 and Aux2
11
Trip and Alarm and Aux1
12
Trip and Alarm and Aux2
13
Trip and Aux1 and Aux2
14
Alarm and Aux1 and Aux2
15
All Relays
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
ANSI/IEEE DEVICE
0
37 - Undercurrent/Underpower
1
46 - Current Unbalance
2
48 - Incomplete Sequence
3
49 - Thermal Model
4
50 - Short Circuit and Backup
5
51 - Overload Alarm
6
51G - Ground Fault
7
66 - Starts Per Hour / Time Between Starts
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
OUTPUT RELAY TYPE
0
Latched
1
Pulsed
Unsigned 16 Bit Integer
PROTECTION FUNCTION BLOCKING STATUS
0
Not Blocked
1
Blocked
9
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
9-101
9.6 MEMORY MAP
9 COMMUNICATIONS
9
9-102
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX A REVISIONSA.1 CHANGE NOTES
A.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
A
Table A–1: REVISION HISTORY
MANUAL P/N
369 REVISION
RELEASE DATE
ECO
1601-0077-B1
53CMB105.000
07 May 1999
---
1601-0077-B2
53CMB110.000
08 June 1999
369-082
1601-0077-B3
53CMB110.000
15 June 1999
369-085
1601-0077-B4
53CMB110.000
04 August 1999
369-094
1601-0077-B5
53CMB120.000
15 October 1999
369-116
1601-0077-B6
53CMB130.000
03 January 2000
369-123
1601-0077-B7
53CMB142.000
03 April 2000
369-130
1601-0777-B8
53CMB145.000
14 June 2000
369-146
1601-0777-B9
53CMB160.000
12 October 2000
369-158
1601-0777-BA
53CMB161.000
19 October 2000
369-161
1601-0077-BB
53CMB17x.000
09 February 2001
369-170
1601-0077-BC
53CMB18x.000
15 June 2001
369-176
1601-0077-BD
53CMB19x.000
01 August 2002
369-181
1601-0077-BE
53CMB20x.000
01 March 2004
369-221
1601-0077-BF
53CMB21x.000
05 November 2004
369-228
1601-0077-BG
53CMB22x.000
11 April 2005
369-240
1601-0077-BH
53CMB23x.000
19 September 2005
369-252
1601-0077-BJ
53CMB24x.000
21 November 2005
369-261
1601-0077-BK
53CMB25x.000
May 15, 2006
369-271
A.1.2 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BK
CHANGES
Added new START CONTROL RELAY TIMER setpoint under the Reduced Voltage Starting menu
Added new Modbus register for “Starts Per Hour Lockout Time” at address 0x02CA
Section 5.10.5: SPEED SWITCH modified to reflect the correct front panel display order
Table in section 8.2.3 updated to reflect correct ground fault CT range
Broadcast date and time in Modbus address corrected (0x00F0 and 0x00F2)
DeviceNet Assembly object, class code 04h, instance 68h, attribute 03 access type corrected to “GET”
Added ODVA DeviceNet CONFORMANCE TESTED™ certification to technical specifications
Updated section 2.2.10: TYPE TEST STANDARDS to reflect updates to IEC and EN test numbers
A.1.3 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BJ
CHANGES
Updated custom curve ranges from “0 to 32767 s” to “0 to 65534 s”
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
A-1
A.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX A
A.1.4 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BH
A
CHANGES
Updated manual for the Profibus-DPV1 option
Added BLOCK PROTECTION FUNCTIONS and FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS sections
Added communications sections of Chapter 9
A.1.5 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BG
CHANGES
Updated the 369 order code for the Harsh Environment option
Added setpoints for DeviceNet communications and Starter Operation Monitor
Added DeviceNet communications section to Chapter 9
A.1.6 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BF
CHANGES
Changes made to Modbus/TCP interface
Additions for variable frequency functionality
A.1.7 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BE
CHANGES
Added MOTOR LOAD AVERAGING INTERVAL setpoint to the Thermal Model feature.
Added starter failure and energy metering to analog output parameters
A.1.8 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BD
CHANGES
Added DEFAULT TO HOTTEST STATOR RTD TEMP setpoint to default messages.
Updated Section 5.3.7: AUTORESTART and Figure 5–5: AUTORESTART LOGIC.
Updated EVENT RECORDER section to reflect 250 events
Added EVENT RECORDS setpoints to S1 369 SETUP section.
Added Filter/Safety Ground question to Section 7.2.1: FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS.
Updated MEMORY MAP and MEMORY MAP FORMATS tables.
A.1.9 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BC
CHANGES
Updated ORDERING TABLE to reflect Modbus/TCP option
Updated Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW to 840702BF
Updated Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING
Added new Modbus/TCP setpoints and description in Section 5.2.4: COMMUNICATIONS
Updated Figures 5–3 and 5–4, REDUCED VOLTAGE STARTER AUXILIARY INPUTS
A-2
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 CHANGE NOTES
CHANGES
A
Updated Section 7.2.4: CT SELECTION to fix errors in the application example
Updated Figure 8–1: SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP
Updated Table 9–1: SETPOINTS TABLE to include new Modbus/TCP setpoints
Updated MEMORY MAP and MEMORY MAP FORMATS to include new Modbus/TCP setpoints
A.1.10 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BB
CHANGES
Updated Figure 1–1: FRONT AND REAR VIEW
Corrected errors in Table 3–1: TERMINAL LIST
Updated Figure 3–4: TYPICAL WIRING
Removed SINGLE VT WYE/DELTA connection diagram in Chapter 3 (feature no longer supported)
Removed ENABLE SINGLE VT OPERATION setpoint from Section 5.3.2: CT/VT SETUP (feature no longer supported)
Added new Section 5.3.7: AUTORESTART
A.1.11 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-BA
There were no changes to the content of the manual for this release.
A.1.12 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B9
CHANGES
Updated Figure 3-4: TYPICAL WIRING
Updated Figure 3-15: REMOTE RTD MODULE
Added menu item PROFIBUS ADDRESS to the 369 Setup Communications menu
Added menu item CLEAR ENERGY DATA to the 369 Setup Clear/Preset Data menu
Added Section 10.2: PROFIBUS PROTOCOL to Communications chapter
A.1.13 MAJOR UPDATES FOR 369-B8
Firmware version 53CMB145.000 contains only minor software changes that do not affect the functionality
of the 369 or the 1601-0777-B8 manual contents.
NOTE
GE Multilin
369 Motor Management Relay
A-3
A.2 WARRANTY
A
APPENDIX A
A.2 WARRANTY
A.2.1 WARRANTY INFORMATION
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY
General Electric Multilin (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures
to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use
and service for a period of 24 months from date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to
repair or replace the relay providing the warrantor determined that it is
defective and it is returned with all transportation charges prepaid to an
authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under
warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse,
negligence, accident, incorrect installation or use not in accordance with
instructions nor any unit that has been altered outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or
for loss of profit or for expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer
to GE Multilin Standard Conditions of Sale.
A-4
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
INDEX
INDEX
Numerics
2 PHASE CT CONFIGURATION ....................................... 7-20
269-369 CONVERSION TERMINAL LIST ............................ 3-3
369
pc interface ..................................................................... 4-3
5A
ground CT installation .................................................... 3-17
input ............................................................................... 8-3
86 LOCKOUT SWITCH ....................................................... 7-6
A
A1 STATUS ....................................................................... 6-3
A2 METERING DATA ......................................................... 6-7
A3 LEARNED DATA ......................................................... 6-12
A4 STATISTICAL DATA ................................................... 6-14
A5 EVENT RECORD ........................................................ 6-16
A6 RELAY INFORMATION ............................................... 6-17
ACCELERATION TRIP .............................................5-41, 7-12
ACCESS SECURITY .......................................................... 5-4
ACCESS SWITCH ............................................................ 5-60
ACCESSORIES ................................................................. 1-2
ACTUAL VALUES .............................................................. 6-1
main menu ...................................................................... 6-1
overview ......................................................................... 6-1
page 6 menu ................................................................. 6-17
ADDITIONAL FEATURES ................................................... 2-3
ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONAL TING ...................................... 8-7
ALARM RELAY
setpoints ....................................................................... 5-17
ALARM STATUS ................................................................ 6-4
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE ................................................. 2-9
ANALOG
inputs and outputs ........................................................... 8-5
outputs ......................................................... 3-10, 3-11, 5-62
outputs (Option M) ........................................................... 2-5
APPROVALS / CERTIFICATION ......................................... 2-9
AUTO TRANSFORMER STARTER WIRING ...................... 7-24
AUTORESTART .......................................................5-20, 5-22
AUX 1 RELAY
see AUXILIARY RELAYS
AUX 2 RELAY
see AUXILIARY RELAYS
AUXILIARY RELAYS
setpoints ....................................................................... 5-17
B
BACK PORTS (3) ............................................................... 2-6
BACKSPIN
detection ....................................................................... 5-43
voltage inputs .................................................................. 3-9
BEARING RTDS .............................................................. 7-12
BSD INPUTS (OPTION B) .................................................. 2-5
C
CLEAR/PRESET DATA ...................................................... 5-9
COMMUNICATIONS ................................................... 2-6, 9-1
control .......................................................................... 5-18
Modbus/TCP ................................................................... 5-5
RS232 ...................................................................... 4-5, 4-6
RS485 ...................................................................... 4-5, 4-6
CONTRAST ....................................................................... 5-4
GE Multilin
CONTROL
functions........................................................................ 5-18
power ..................................................................... 3-7, 3-12
COOL TIME CONSTANTS ................................................ 7-14
CORE BALANCE CONNECTION ......................................... 7-2
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ....................................................... 9-31
CT
burden ............................................................................. 7-8
circuit ..............................................................................7-8
ground CT primary ......................................................... 5-11
phase CT primary .......................................................... 5-11
secondary resistance ....................................................... 7-8
selection .......................................................................... 7-7
setpoints........................................................................ 5-11
size and saturation ........................................................... 7-7
withstand ......................................................................... 7-7
CT AND VT
polarity ............................................................................ 7-5
CT/VT SETUP .................................................................. 5-11
CURRENT
metering .......................................................................... 6-7
unbalance ...................................................................... 5-38
CURRENT DEMAND ........................................................ 5-14
CURRENT TRANSFORMER
see CT
CUSTOM OVERLOAD CURVE .......................................... 5-30
D
DATA
frame format and data rate ............................................. 9-30
packet format ................................................................. 9-30
DATE ................................................................................. 5-7
DEFAULT MESSAGES
cycle time ........................................................................ 5-4
setpoints.......................................................................... 5-9
timeout ............................................................................ 5-4
DEMAND
calculation ..................................................................... 5-14
metering ........................................................................ 6-10
setpoints........................................................................ 5-14
DEVICENET
communications ............................................................. 9-15
object classes ................................................................ 9-15
settings ........................................................................... 5-6
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES .................................................. 6-4
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................. 2-10
DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH .................................................. 5-61
DIGITAL COUNTER ......................................................... 5-59
DIGITAL INPUT .................................................................. 7-6
status ..............................................................................6-5
trip coil supervision .......................................................... 8-5
DIGITAL INPUT FUNCTION
digital counter ................................................................ 5-59
general switch ............................................................... 5-58
waveform capture .......................................................... 5-59
DISPLAY ............................................................................ 4-1
preferences ..................................................................... 5-4
DO’S AND DON’TS ............................................................ 7-5
DUST/MOISTURE ..................................................... 2-9, 2-10
E
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ............................................. 3-6
ELECTRICAL INTERFACE .................................................. 9-1
369 Motor Management Relay
i
INDEX
EMERGENCY RESTART .................................................. 5-60
EMI ................................................................................. 2-10
ENABLE
start inhibit .................................................................... 7-12
ENERVISTA VIEWPOINT WITH THE 369 .......................... 4-23
ENVIRONMENATAL SPECIFICATIONS .............................. 2-9
ENVIRONMENT ............................................................... 2-10
ERROR
checking ........................................................................ 9-30
responses ..................................................................... 9-32
ETHERNET
specifications................................................................... 2-6
EVENT RECORDER ......................................................... 9-34
I
IED SETUP ....................................................................... 4-3
IMPULSE TEST ................................................................2-10
INPUTS ............................................................................. 2-4
INSTALLATION ................................................................. 3-1
electrical ......................................................................... 3-6
mechanical ..................................................................... 3-1
upgrade .......................................................................... 4-3
INSULATION RESISTANCE ..............................................2-10
INTRODUCTION AND ORDERING ..................................... 1-1
IP ADDRESS ..................................................................... 5-5
F
K
FACEPLATE
interface .......................................................................... 4-1
FACTORY DATA .............................................................. 5-10
FAQ ................................................................................... 7-2
FAST TRANSIENTS ......................................................... 2-10
FIBER OPTIC PORT (OPTION F) ........................................ 2-6
FIRMWARE
history ............................................................................. 1-2
upgrading via EnerVista 369 setup software .................... 4-15
version .......................................................................... 6-17
FLA ................................................................................. 5-11
FLASH MESSAGES
duration ........................................................................... 5-4
FORCE OUTPUT RELAYS
Modbus registers ........................................................... 9-50
settings ......................................................................... 5-23
FREQUENCY ................................................................... 5-12
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ................................... 7-2
FRONT PORT .................................................................... 2-6
communicating ................................................................ 7-2
FULL LOAD AMPS ........................................................... 5-11
KEYPAD ............................................................................ 4-2
G
GATEWAY ADDRESS ........................................................ 5-6
GENERAL SWITCH .......................................................... 5-58
GROUND
(1A/5A) ACCURACY TEST ............................................... 8-3
accuracy test ................................................................... 8-3
bus .................................................................................. 7-5
CT ........................................................................ 5-11, 7-10
current input .................................................................... 3-8
fault ..................................................................... 5-39, 7-12
fault detection
ungrounded systems ............................................ 7-21
filter ................................................................................ 7-5
safety .............................................................................. 7-5
GUIDEFORM SPECIFICATIONS ......................................... 2-1
H
HARDWARE FUNCTIONAL TESTING ................................. 8-2
HGF GROUND CT INSTALLATION
3” and 5” window ........................................................... 3-18
8” window ...................................................................... 3-18
HOT/COLD CURVE RATIO ...................................... 5-32, 7-10
HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO ....................................... 5-25
HUMIDITY ................................................................ 2-9, 2-10
L
LAG POWER FACTOR ......................................................5-54
LAST TRIP DATA .............................................................. 6-3
LEAD POWER FACTOR ....................................................5-54
LEARNED START CAPACITY ...........................................7-19
LOCAL / REMOTE RTD OPERATION ................................5-46
LOCAL RTD ...................................................................... 6-9
maximums .....................................................................6-13
protection ......................................................................5-44
M
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION ........................................... 3-1
MECHANICAL JAM .................................................. 5-36, 7-11
MEMORY MAP .................................................................9-34
information .....................................................................9-34
MESSAGE SCRATCHPAD ................................................. 5-8
METERED QUANTITIES .................................................... 2-1
METERING ........................................................................ 2-6
MODBUS
serial communications control .........................................5-18
setpoints .................................................................. 5-5, 5-6
MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS ........................................... 9-2
MODBUS/TCP COMMUNICATIONS ................................... 5-5
MODEL INFORMATION ....................................................6-17
MODIFY OPTIONS ...........................................................5-10
MONITORING SETUP .......................................................5-12
MOTOR
cooling ...........................................................................5-32
data ...............................................................................6-12
FLA ...............................................................................5-11
FLC ...............................................................................7-10
rated voltage ..................................................................5-11
statistics ........................................................................6-15
status ...................................................................... 6-3, 6-4
status detection ..............................................................7-13
thermal limits .................................................................. 7-9
MOTOR FLA .....................................................................5-11
MPM-369
conversion terminal list .................................................... 3-4
MTM-369
conversion terminal list .................................................... 3-4
N
NEGATIVE REACTIVE POWER ........................................5-56
NOMINAL FREQUENCY ...................................................5-12
ii
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
INDEX
O
OPEN RTD ALARM .......................................................... 5-48
OPERATION .................................................................... 5-17
OPTIONS, MODIFYING .................................................... 5-10
ORDERING ....................................................................... 1-1
OUTPUT RELAYS ...............................................2-5, 3-12, 8-6
forcing .......................................................................... 5-23
setpoints ...............................................................5-16, 5-17
OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 2-5
OVERFREQUENCY ......................................................... 5-52
OVERLOAD
alarm ............................................................................ 5-34
curve ............................................................................ 7-11
curve test ........................................................................ 8-7
pickup ........................................................................... 7-10
OVERLOAD CURVES
custom .......................................................................... 5-30
setpoints ...............................................................5-26, 5-27
standard ....................................................... 5-27, 5-28, 5-29
OVERLOAD/STALL/THERMAL MODEL ............................... 2-7
OVERVOLTAGE .............................................................. 5-50
P
PARITY ............................................................................. 5-5
PASSWORDS
comm password .............................................................. 5-4
PC PROGRAM
software history ............................................................... 1-3
PC SOFTWARE
obtaining ......................................................................... 7-2
PHASE
CT ........................................................................5-11, 7-10
CT installation ............................................................... 3-16
current (CT) inputs .......................................................... 3-7
current accuracy test ....................................................... 8-2
line voltage input, VT (Option M) ...................................... 2-4
reversal ......................................................................... 5-50
voltage (VT/PT) inputs ..................................................... 3-9
VT ................................................................................ 5-11
PHASE SEQUENCY ......................................................... 5-12
PHASORS ....................................................................... 6-10
POLARITY
CT and VT ...................................................................... 7-5
POSITIVE REACTIVE POWER ......................................... 5-55
POWER
measurement test ............................................................ 8-7
metering .......................................................................... 6-8
metering (option m) ......................................................... 2-6
POWER DEMAND ............................................................ 5-14
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ................................................. 2-1
PRODUCTION TESTS ..................................................... 2-10
PROFIBUS
setpoints ......................................................................... 5-6
PROFIBUS ADDRESS ....................................................... 5-5
PROFIBUS COMMUNICATIONS ......................................... 9-4
PROFIBUS PORT (OPTION P) ........................................... 2-6
PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE ............................................... 7-9
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 2-7
PROTOCOL ..................................................................... 9-30
R
REAL TIME CLOCK ........................................................... 6-5
setpoints ......................................................................... 5-7
GE Multilin
REDUCED RTD LEAD NUMBER ....................................... 7-23
REDUCED VOLTAGE START .................................. 5-18, 5-19
RELAY LABEL DEFINITION ................................................ 1-6
REMOTE RESET .............................................................. 5-61
REMOTE RTD .................................................................... 6-9
address ........................................................................... 5-5
maximums ..................................................................... 6-13
module electrical installation .......................................... 3-15
module mechanical installation ....................................... 3-14
protection ...................................................................... 5-45
RESET ............................................................................. 5-17
RESIDUAL GROUND FAULT CONNECTION .......................7-2
REVERSE POWER ........................................................... 5-57
REVISION HISTORY ......................................................... A-1
RFI .................................................................................. 2-10
ROLLING DEMAND WINDOW ........................................... 5-14
RRTD ADDRESS ................................................................ 5-5
RS232
communicating ................................................................. 7-2
program port .................................................................... 4-1
setpoints.......................................................................... 5-5
RS232 COMMUNICATIONS
configuring with EnerVista 369 Setup ................................ 4-5
configuring with EnerVista 369 setup ................................ 4-6
RS485
4 wire ..............................................................................7-2
cable ............................................................................... 7-6
communication difficulties ................................................ 7-2
communications ............................................................. 3-13
communications port ........................................................ 7-5
converter ......................................................................... 7-5
distances ......................................................................... 7-6
full duplex ........................................................................ 7-2
interfacing master device ................................................. 7-6
repeater........................................................................... 7-6
setpoints.......................................................................... 5-5
RS485 COMMUNICATIONS
configuring with EnerVista 369 setup ......................... 4-5, 4-6
RTD .......................................................................... 3-10, 7-5
2 wire lead compensation ............................................... 7-24
accuracy test ................................................................... 8-4
bias ............................................................. 5-25, 5-33, 5-34
bias maximum ................................................................ 7-11
bias mid point ................................................................ 7-11
bias minimum ................................................................ 7-11
circuitry ......................................................................... 7-22
grounding ........................................................................ 7-6
inputs ............................................................................ 3-10
inputs (Option r) ............................................................... 2-5
stator ............................................................................. 7-12
RUNNING COOL TIME ..................................................... 7-10
S
S10 ANALOG OUTPUTS .................................................. 5-62
S11 369 TESTING ............................................................ 5-63
S2 SYSTEM SETUP ......................................................... 5-11
S3 OVERLOAD PROTECTION .......................................... 5-24
S4 CURRENT ELEMENTS ................................................ 5-35
S5 MOTOR START / INHIBITS .......................................... 5-41
S6 RTD TEMPERATURE .................................................. 5-44
S7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ................................................ 5-49
S8 POWER ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-53
S9 DIGITAL INPUTS ........................................................ 5-58
SECONDARY INJECTION TEST SETUP ............................. 8-1
SECURITY ......................................................................... 5-4
SELF-TEST MODE ........................................................... 5-15
369 Motor Management Relay
iii
INDEX
SELF-TEST RELAY .......................................................... 5-15
SERIAL COMMUNICATION CONTROL ............................. 5-18
SETPOINTS ....................................................................... 5-1
access ............................................................................. 5-4
entering with EnerVista 369 Setup software ...................... 4-9
entry ............................................................................... 4-2
loading from a file .......................................................... 4-14
main menu ...................................................................... 5-1
page 1 menu ................................................................... 5-4
saving to a file ............................................................... 4-15
SHORT CIRCUIT .............................................................. 5-35
test ................................................................................. 8-8
trip ................................................................................ 7-11
SHORT/LOW TEMP RTD ALARM ..................................... 5-48
SOFTWARE
entering setpoints ............................................................ 4-9
installation ....................................................................... 4-3
loading setpoints ........................................................... 4-14
saving setpoints ............................................................. 4-15
serial communications ............................................... 4-5, 4-6
SPARE SWITCH .............................................................. 5-60
SPEED SWITCH .............................................................. 5-61
START INHIBIT ...............................................5-41, 7-14, 7-18
enabled ......................................................................... 7-19
starter
status switch.................................................................. 5-19
STARTER FAILURE ......................................................... 5-13
STARTS/HOUR ................................................................ 7-12
STATOR RTDS ................................................................ 7-12
STOPPED COOL TIME ..................................................... 7-11
STOPPED COOL TIME CONSTANT .................................. 7-14
SUBNET MASK .................................................................. 5-6
SUPPORTED MODBUS FUNCTIONS ................................ 9-31
SYSTEM .......................................................................... 5-12
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .................................................... 5-12
T
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................... 2-4
TEMPERATURE ............................................................... 2-10
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY .................................................. 5-4
TERMINAL
identification .................................................................... 3-2
layout .............................................................................. 3-5
list ................................................................................... 3-2
TEST
burn in ........................................................................... 2-10
calibration and functionality ............................................ 2-10
dielectric strength .......................................................... 2-10
ground accuracy .............................................................. 8-3
hardware functional ......................................................... 8-2
input accuracy ................................................................. 8-2
overload curve ................................................................. 8-7
phase current accuracy .................................................... 8-2
power measurement ......................................................... 8-7
production ..................................................................... 2-10
RTD accuracy .................................................................. 8-4
secondary injection .......................................................... 8-1
setup ............................................................................... 8-1
short circuit ..................................................................... 8-8
type test standards ........................................................ 2-10
unbalance ....................................................................... 8-8
voltage
metering ............................................................... 6-7
phase reversal ....................................................... 8-8
TESTING
analog outputs ............................................................... 5-63
iv
output relays ..................................................................5-63
setpoints ........................................................................5-63
THERMAL
capacity calculation ........................................................7-17
capacity used .................................................................7-17
limit ...............................................................................7-14
limit curves ....................................................................7-18
THERMAL CAPACITY USED .............................................5-25
THERMAL MODEL
cooling ...........................................................................5-33
description .....................................................................5-25
limit curves ....................................................................5-24
setpoints ........................................................................5-25
TIME ................................................................................. 5-7
TIME BETWEEN STARTS .................................................7-12
TIMING ............................................................................9-31
TRENDING .......................................................................4-17
TRIP COUNTER ............................................... 5-13, 6-9, 6-14
TRIP RELAY .....................................................................3-12
setpoints ........................................................................5-17
TWO PHASE WIRING .......................................................7-20
TWO WIRE RTD LEAD COMPENSATION ..........................7-24
TYPE TEST STANDARDS .................................................2-10
U
UNBALANCE
alarm and trip .................................................................7-12
bias ...............................................................................5-31
bias k factor ...................................................................7-10
bias of thermal capacity ..................................................7-10
setpoints ........................................................................5-25
test ................................................................................. 8-8
UNDERCURRENT ................................................... 5-37, 7-11
UNDERFREQUENCY ........................................................5-51
UNDERPOWER ................................................................5-56
UNDERVOLTAGE .............................................................5-49
UPGRADING FIRMWARE .................................................4-15
USER DEFINABLE MEMORY MAP AREA ..........................9-34
V
VIBRATION ....................................................................... 2-9
VOLTAGE
input accuracy test .......................................................... 8-2
metering ......................................................................... 6-7
phase reversal test .......................................................... 8-8
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
see VT
VT
connection type ..............................................................5-11
ratio ...............................................................................5-11
VT RATIO .........................................................................5-11
VT SETTINGS ..................................................................7-10
W
WARRANTY ...................................................................... A-4
WAVEFORM CAPTURE ............................. 2-6, 5-7, 5-59, 9-34
setpoints .................................................................. 5-7, 5-8
WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................ 3-6
Z
ZERO SEQUENCE
ground CT placement ...................................................... 3-8
369 Motor Management Relay
GE Multilin
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising